OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
V100R003C03
IDU Hardware Description
Issue
01
Date
2011-10-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address:
Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
support@huawei.com
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
About This Document
About This Document
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name
Version
OptiX RTN 950
V100R003C03
iManager U2000
V100R006C00
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l
Network planning engineer
l
Hardware installation engineer
l
Installation and commissioning engineer
l
Field maintenance engineer
l
Data configuration engineer
l
System maintenance engineer
Before reading this document, you need to be familiar with the following:
l
Basics of digital microwave communication
l
Basics of the OptiX RTN 950
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol
Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,
which if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ii
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
About This Document
Symbol
Description
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level
of risk, which if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,
which if not avoided, could result in
equipment damage, data loss, performance
degradation, or unexpected results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a
problem or save time.
Provides additional information to emphasize
or supplement important points of the main
text.
General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Times New Roman
Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface
Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in
boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic
Book titles are in italics.
Courier New
Examples of information displayed on the screen are in
Courier New.
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Convention
Description
Boldface
The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic
Command arguments are in italics.
[]
Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... }
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. One item is selected.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
About This Document
Convention
Description
[ x | y | ... ]
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by
vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }*
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]*
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by
vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles
are in boldface. For example, click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"
signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Update History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Thus, the latest document issue contains all
updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C03
This document is the first issue for the V100R003C03 product version.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iv
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................1
1.1 Network Application..........................................................................................................................................2
1.2 Components........................................................................................................................................................3
1.3 Radio Link Types...............................................................................................................................................7
2 Chassis.............................................................................................................................................8
2.1 Chassis Structure................................................................................................................................................9
2.2 Installation Mode................................................................................................................................................9
2.3 Air Flow..............................................................................................................................................................9
2.4 IDU Labels.......................................................................................................................................................10
3 Boards............................................................................................................................................13
3.1 Board Appearance............................................................................................................................................15
3.2 Board List.........................................................................................................................................................16
3.3 CST...................................................................................................................................................................19
3.3.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................19
3.3.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................19
3.3.3 Working Principle....................................................................................................................................21
3.3.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................23
3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card......................................................................................................................29
3.3.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................30
3.3.7 Board Parameter Settings........................................................................................................................31
3.3.8 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................32
3.4 CSH..................................................................................................................................................................33
3.4.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................33
3.4.2 Working Principle....................................................................................................................................33
3.4.3 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................36
3.4.4 DIP Switches and CF Card......................................................................................................................42
3.4.5 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................44
3.4.6 Board Parameter Settings........................................................................................................................45
3.4.7 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................45
3.5 IF1.....................................................................................................................................................................46
3.5.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................47
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Contents
3.5.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................47
3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................48
3.5.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................53
3.5.5 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................55
3.5.6 Board Parameter Settings........................................................................................................................56
3.5.7 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................56
3.6 IFU2..................................................................................................................................................................58
3.6.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................58
3.6.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................58
3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................60
3.6.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................64
3.6.5 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................66
3.6.6 Board Parameter Settings........................................................................................................................67
3.6.7 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................67
3.7 IFX2..................................................................................................................................................................69
3.7.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................69
3.7.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................70
3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................72
3.7.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................76
3.7.5 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................78
3.7.6 Board Parameter Settings........................................................................................................................79
3.7.7 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................80
3.8 ISU2..................................................................................................................................................................82
3.8.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................82
3.8.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................82
3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................85
3.8.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................89
3.8.5 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................91
3.8.6 Board Parameter Settings........................................................................................................................92
3.8.7 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................92
3.9 ISX2..................................................................................................................................................................96
3.9.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................96
3.9.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................96
3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................99
3.9.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................103
3.9.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................106
3.9.6 Board Parameter Settings......................................................................................................................107
3.9.7 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................107
3.10 EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA....................................................................................................................112
3.10.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................112
3.10.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................112
3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................116
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vi
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Contents
3.10.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................119
3.10.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................125
3.10.6 Types of SFP Modules........................................................................................................................126
3.10.7 Board Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................128
3.10.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................128
3.11 EMS6............................................................................................................................................................134
3.11.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................134
3.11.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................134
3.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................138
3.11.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................141
3.11.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................145
3.11.6 Types of SFP Modules........................................................................................................................146
3.11.7 Board Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................147
3.11.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................147
3.12 EFP8.............................................................................................................................................................150
3.12.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................150
3.12.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................150
3.12.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................153
3.12.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................156
3.12.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................159
3.12.6 Board Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................159
3.12.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................160
3.13 SL1D/SL1DA...............................................................................................................................................160
3.13.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................161
3.13.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................161
3.13.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................162
3.13.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................165
3.13.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................167
3.13.6 Board Feature Code.............................................................................................................................168
3.13.7 Board Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................168
3.13.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................168
3.14 ML1/MD1.....................................................................................................................................................170
3.14.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................170
3.14.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................170
3.14.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................172
3.14.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................175
3.14.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................178
3.14.6 Board Feature Code.............................................................................................................................179
3.14.7 Board Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................179
3.14.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................180
3.15 SP3S/SP3D...................................................................................................................................................180
3.15.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................180
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Contents
3.15.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................181
3.15.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................181
3.15.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................184
3.15.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................188
3.15.6 Board Feature Code.............................................................................................................................189
3.15.7 Board Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................189
3.15.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................190
3.16 AUX..............................................................................................................................................................190
3.16.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................191
3.16.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................191
3.16.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................191
3.16.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................192
3.16.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................195
3.16.6 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................196
3.17 PIU................................................................................................................................................................197
3.17.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................197
3.17.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................197
3.17.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................198
3.17.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................199
3.17.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................200
3.17.6 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................201
3.18 FAN..............................................................................................................................................................201
3.18.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................201
3.18.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................201
3.18.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................202
3.18.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................203
3.18.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................205
3.18.6 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................205
3.19 TCU6............................................................................................................................................................205
3.19.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................206
3.19.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................206
3.19.3 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................206
3.19.4 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................209
3.19.5 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................209
4 Accessories..................................................................................................................................210
4.1 E1 Panel..........................................................................................................................................................211
4.2 PDU................................................................................................................................................................213
4.2.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................213
4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle..........................................................................................................214
4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode......................................................................................................................215
5 Cables...........................................................................................................................................217
5.1 Power Cable....................................................................................................................................................219
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
viii
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Contents
5.2 PGND Cable...................................................................................................................................................219
5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable..................................................................................................................................219
5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable...........................................................................................................................220
5.3 IF Jumper........................................................................................................................................................221
5.4 XPIC Cable.....................................................................................................................................................222
5.5 Fiber Jumper...................................................................................................................................................223
5.6 STM-1 Cable..................................................................................................................................................225
5.7 E1 Cables........................................................................................................................................................226
5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment...................................................................................226
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel.....................................................................................................230
5.7.3 E1 Transit Cable Terminated with an Anea 96 Connector and a DB44 Connector..............................232
5.8 Orderwire Cable.............................................................................................................................................234
5.9 Network Cable................................................................................................................................................234
A Parameters Description...........................................................................................................238
A.1 Parameters for Network Management...........................................................................................................239
A.1.1 Parameters for NE Management...........................................................................................................239
A.1.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching.........................................................................................239
A.1.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation...........................................................................................244
A.1.1.3 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs..................................................................246
A.1.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization.....................................................................247
A.1.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time............................................250
A.1.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management...........................................................251
A.1.1.7 Parameter Description: License Management.............................................................................252
A.1.1.8 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs.......................................253
A.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management.....................................................................................254
A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting..................................................254
A.1.2.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration.......................................255
A.1.2.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management.......257
A.1.2.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC..................................259
A.1.2.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management...................................................................260
A.1.2.6 Parameter Description: ECC Link Management_Availability Test............................................261
A.1.2.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management........................263
A.1.2.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation.........264
A.1.2.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_Availability Test.................................265
A.1.2.10 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings.................266
A.1.2.11 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP.............................................................271
A.1.2.12 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas.................................................272
A.1.2.13 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding OSPF Areas..............273
A.1.2.14 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding Routes to Be Manually
Aggregated................................................................................................................................................274
A.1.2.15 Parameter Description: Port OSPF Setting................................................................................275
A.1.2.16 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter......................................275
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Contents
A.1.2.17 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table........................................................276
A.1.2.18 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel............................................................277
A.1.2.19 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Port Parameters..............................................281
A.1.2.20 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management......................................282
A.1.2.21 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting..........................................................283
A.1.2.22 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access Control.....................................................283
A.1.2.23 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Packet Control.....................................................284
A.1.2.24 Parameter Description: L2 DCN Management..........................................................................285
A.1.2.25 Parameter Description: Access Control.....................................................................................286
A.1.3 Parameters for Network Security Management....................................................................................287
A.1.3.1 Parameter Description: NE User Management............................................................................287
A.1.3.2 Parameter Description: NE User Management_Creation............................................................287
A.1.3.3 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control..............................................................................290
A.1.3.4 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_Creation.........................................................291
A.1.3.5 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_RADIUS Server.............................................292
A.1.3.6 Parameter Description: Enabling/Disabling the RADIUS Function...........................................293
A.2 Radio Link Parameters..................................................................................................................................294
A.2.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation...........................................294
A.2.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC..............................................................................299
A.2.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create...................................................................................306
A.2.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection................................................................................................307
A.2.5 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_Create................................................................................309
A.2.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection............................................................................................312
A.2.7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_Creating a PLA Group...................................................316
A.2.8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_PLA................................................................................316
A.2.9 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration......................................................................317
A.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters......................................................................................................327
A.3.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation.....................................................................................327
A.3.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP.....................................................................................................331
A.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters......................................................................................................................335
A.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation............................................................335
A.4.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation....................................337
A.4.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services
........................................................................................................................................................................341
A.4.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration............................................................................345
A.4.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control....................................................................................347
A.4.6 Parameter Description: TU_AIS Insertion...........................................................................................350
A.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces....................................................................................................................351
A.5.1 PDH Port Parameters............................................................................................................................351
A.5.1.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes..................................................................351
A.5.1.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes...........................................................352
A.5.2 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards........................................................................................356
A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes.......................................................356
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
x
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Contents
A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control...........................................................360
A.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes...................................................362
A.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes...........................................................365
A.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes...............................................366
A.5.3 Serial Port Parameters...........................................................................................................................369
A.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Basic Attributes..................................................................369
A.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Creation of Serial Ports.......................................................370
A.5.4 Microwave Interface Parameters..........................................................................................................371
A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes..................................................371
A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes...............................................372
A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes...............................................374
A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes...........................................376
A.5.5 IF Board Parameters.............................................................................................................................379
A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute........................................................................379
A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute.................................................................387
A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes.................................389
A.5.5.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records...................................................................390
A.5.5.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test..............................................................................................391
A.5.6 ODU Parameters...................................................................................................................................392
A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute...........................................392
A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes..........................................................393
A.5.6.3 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information................................................397
A.5.6.4 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes....................................................398
A.5.7 Parameters for SDH Interface Boards..................................................................................................399
A.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces.......................................................................................400
A.5.7.2 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown...................................................................401
A.5.8 Parameters for PDH Interface Boards..................................................................................................402
A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports..............................................................................................402
A.5.8.2 Parameter Description: PRBS Test..............................................................................................405
A.5.9 Parameters for Overhead......................................................................................................................406
A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead..............................................................406
A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs............................................................................................407
A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs..........................................................................................409
A.5.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Virtual Interfaces............................................................................410
A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the Packet Plane...............................................413
A.6.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services..........................................................................................................413
A.6.1.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation........................................................................413
A.6.1.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service.......................................................................................434
A.6.1.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Items for E-Line Services_Creation.............445
A.6.1.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation.......................................................................446
A.6.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service......................................................................................452
A.6.1.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation..............................................................................463
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xi
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Contents
A.6.1.7 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Services_Creation..................................................................463
A.6.1.8 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Services..................................................................................471
A.6.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols........................................................................................................476
A.6.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation................................................................476
A.6.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management................................................................................479
A.6.2.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation...........................................485
A.6.2.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration..................................487
A.6.2.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters.............................................487
A.6.2.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters................................................493
A.6.2.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST...............495
A.6.2.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation.....................503
A.6.2.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation......................................511
A.6.2.10 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Point LPT................................................512
A.6.2.11 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Point LPT.................................514
A.6.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Multipoint LPT.......................................514
A.6.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Multipoint LPT........................517
A.6.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM........................................................................................................521
A.6.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain Creation
..................................................................................................................................................................521
A.6.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association Creation
..................................................................................................................................................................522
A.6.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation............................523
A.6.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation..............524
A.6.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation.............................525
A.6.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling..............................526
A.6.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling..............................527
A.6.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling Service Loopback Detection............529
A.6.3.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter.............................530
A.6.3.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring
..................................................................................................................................................................532
A.6.4 QoS Parameters....................................................................................................................................533
A.6.4.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management..............................................................533
A.6.4.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create.................................................539
A.6.4.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification.......................................546
A.6.4.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management...............................................................................548
A.6.4.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy.............................................................................................554
A.6.4.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration..................................561
A.6.4.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation.....................................................572
A.7 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the EoS/EoPDH Plane.....................................574
A.7.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services..........................................................................................................574
A.7.1.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creation.............................................................574
A.7.1.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creating QinQ-Based Ethernet Line Services
..................................................................................................................................................................578
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xii
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Contents
A.7.1.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service.............................................................................582
A.7.1.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creation of Ethernet LAN Services Based on IEEE
802.1d/802.1q Bridge...............................................................................................................................584
A.7.1.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creating IEEE 802.1ad Bridge-Based Ethernet LAN
Service......................................................................................................................................................588
A.7.1.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service............................................................................593
A.7.1.7 Parameter Description: VLAN Filtering Table_Creation............................................................599
A.7.1.8 Parameter Description: Aging Time of MAC Address Table Entries.........................................600
A.7.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols........................................................................................................601
A.7.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation................................................................601
A.7.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management................................................................................604
A.7.2.3 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Protocol Enabling.........................................................610
A.7.2.4 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Parameters........................................................611
A.7.2.5 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Parameters.............................................................612
A.7.2.6 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Running Information........................................614
A.7.2.7 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Running Information............................................615
A.7.2.8 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Point-to-Point Attribute................................................616
A.7.2.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Enabling......................................................617
A.7.2.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Creation of Static Multicast Table Entries
..................................................................................................................................................................618
A.7.2.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Aging Time of Multicast Table Entries
..................................................................................................................................................................619
A.7.2.12 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Creation of LAGs...................................620
A.7.2.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation....................................622
A.7.2.14 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Point Service LPT................623
A.7.2.15 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Multipoint Service LPT.......624
A.7.2.16 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation......................................................................625
A.7.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM........................................................................................................626
A.7.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MDs.............................................626
A.7.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MAs.............................................627
A.7.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MPs..............................................628
A.7.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LB....................................................630
A.7.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LT....................................................631
A.7.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Parameter...................................................632
A.7.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Error Frame Monitoring.............................633
A.7.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_Remote OAM Parameter......................................634
A.7.4 QoS Parameters....................................................................................................................................635
A.7.4.1 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of Flows....................................................635
A.7.4.2 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR.....................................................637
A.7.4.3 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CoS......................................................639
A.7.4.4 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR/CoS.............................................641
A.7.4.5 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Shaping Management of Egress Queues................641
A.7.4.6 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Port Shaping............................................................643
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xiii
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Contents
A.7.5 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards........................................................................................644
A.7.5.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_External Port...................................................................644
A.7.5.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Internal Port....................................................................651
A.7.5.3 Parameter Description: Type Field of QinQ Frames...................................................................657
A.8 RMON Parameters.........................................................................................................................................658
A.8.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group...........................................................658
A.8.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group..............................................................659
A.8.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group.................................................660
A.8.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting.............................................................661
A.9 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services..........................................................................................................662
A.9.1 MPLS Tunnel Parameters.....................................................................................................................663
A.9.1.1 Parameter Description: Basic Configurations of MPLS Tunnels................................................663
A.9.1.2 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Static Tunnel..........................................664
A.9.1.3 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Unidirectional Tunnels.......668
A.9.1.4 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Bidirectional Tunnels.........672
A.9.1.5 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_OAM Parameters...................................676
A.9.1.6 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_FDI.........................................................681
A.9.1.7 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Ping................................................682
A.9.1.8 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Traceroute......................................685
A.9.1.9 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Management......................................................688
A.9.1.10 Parameter Description: PW Management_MS-PW Creation....................................................693
A.9.1.11 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW OAM...............................................................704
A.9.1.12 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Ping.................................................................708
A.9.1.13 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Traceroute.......................................................711
A.9.1.14 Parameter Description: MPLS APS Protection Management...................................................713
A.9.1.15 Parameter Description: Tunnel Protection Group_Creation......................................................716
A.9.1.16 Parameter Description: PW APS Protection Group_Creation...................................................721
A.9.1.17 Parameter Description: Slave Protection Pair of a PW APS Protection Group_Creation.........732
A.9.2 CES Parameters....................................................................................................................................738
A.9.2.1 Parameter Description: CES Service Management.....................................................................738
A.9.2.2 Parameter Description: CES Service Management_Creation.....................................................747
A.9.3 ATM Parameters...................................................................................................................................760
A.9.3.1 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Management.............................760
A.9.3.2 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_Bound Path Configuration............................765
A.9.3.3 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Status........................................767
A.9.3.4 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Link Status...........................................768
A.9.3.5 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_ATM Interface Management........................768
A.9.3.6 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table...........................770
A.9.3.7 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table_Creation...........772
A.9.3.8 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management.....................................................................774
A.9.3.9 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management_Creation......................................................778
A.9.3.10 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management..................................................................783
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xiv
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Contents
A.9.3.11 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management_Creation..................................................792
A.9.3.12 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Segment and End Attributes.....................804
A.9.3.13 Parameter Description: ATM OMA Management_CC Activation Status................................808
A.9.3.14 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Remote End Loopback Status...................811
A.9.3.15 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_LLID.........................................................814
A.10 Clock Parameters.........................................................................................................................................815
A.10.1 Physical Clock Parameters.................................................................................................................815
A.10.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table................................................................815
A.10.1.2 Parameter Description: Priority Table for the PLL Clock Source of the External Clock Port
..................................................................................................................................................................817
A.10.1.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet....................................................819
A.10.1.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality...................................................822
A.10.1.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control........................................825
A.10.1.6 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status.................................826
A.10.1.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters.........827
A.10.1.8 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching..............................829
A.10.1.9 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching Conditions...........830
A.10.1.10 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source.............831
A.10.1.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status............................................................834
A.10.2 CES ACR Clock Parameters..............................................................................................................835
A.10.2.1 Parameter Description: ACR Clock Source..............................................................................836
A.10.2.2 Parameter Description: Clock Domain......................................................................................836
A.10.2.3 Parameter Description: Clock Domain_Creation......................................................................837
A.10.3 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports..............................................................................................838
A.11 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces...............................................................................838
A.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General.......................................................................................838
A.11.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced....................................................................................840
A.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port................................................................................841
A.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port....................................................................841
A.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface...............................................................842
B Board Loopback Types............................................................................................................846
C Indicators of Boards.................................................................................................................848
D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board................................................................865
E Glossary......................................................................................................................................867
E.1 0-9..................................................................................................................................................................868
E.2 A-E.................................................................................................................................................................868
E.3 F-J...................................................................................................................................................................877
E.4 K-O.................................................................................................................................................................882
E.5 P-T..................................................................................................................................................................888
E.6 U-Z.................................................................................................................................................................897
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xv
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
1 Introduction
1
Introduction
About This Chapter
The OptiX RTN 950 is a product in the OptiX RTN 900 radio transmission system series.
1.1 Network Application
The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation TDM/Hybrid/Packet integrated microwave
transmission system developed by Huawei. It provides a seamless microwave transmission
solution for mobile communication network or private networks.
1.2 Components
The OptiX RTN 950 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 950 and the ODU.
Each ODU is connected to the IDU through an IF cable.
1.3 Radio Link Types
The OptiX RTN 950 provides the radio links of various types in which different IF boards and
ODUs are configured for diverse microwave application scenarios.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
1 Introduction
1.1 Network Application
The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation TDM/Hybrid/Packet integrated microwave
transmission system developed by Huawei. It provides a seamless microwave transmission
solution for mobile communication network or private networks.
OptiX RTN 900 Product Family
There are three types of OptiX RTN 900 products: OptiX RTN 910, OptiX RTN 950, and OptiX
RTN 980. Users can choose the product best suited for their site.
l
The IDU of the OptiX RTN 910 is 1U high and supports one or two IF boards.
l
The IDU of the OptiX RTN 950 is 2U high and supports one to six IF boards.
l
The IDU of the OptiX RTN 980 is 5U high and supports one to fourteen IF boards.
NOTE
All the products in the OptiX RTN 900 series use the same types of IF and service interface boards.
The OptiX RTN 900 series provide a variety of service interfaces and can be installed easily and
configured flexibly. The OptiX RTN 900 series provide a solution that can integrate TDM
microwave, Hybrid microwave, and Packet microwave technologies according to the
networking scheme for the sites, achieving smooth upgrade from TDM microwave to Hybrid
microwave, and from Hybrid microwave to Packet microwave. This solution is able to adapt to
changing service scenarios brought about by evolutions in radio mobile networks. Therefore,
this solution meets the transmission requirements of 2G and 3G networks while also allowing
for integration with future LTE and 4G networks.
OptiX RTN 950
The OptiX RTN 950 is deployed at the access and convergence layers. Figure 1-1 shows the
microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 950.
Figure 1-1 Microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 950
FE
E1/
STM-1
E1
E1
FE
E1/
STM-1
E1
Regional TDM
Network
FE/GE
E1
FE/GE
Regional Packet
Network
FE/GE
E1
FE
FE
OptiX RTN 950
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
E1
MSTP
NodeB
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BTS
RNC
BSC
2
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
1 Introduction
NOTE
l In this solution, the OptiX RTN 950 is connected to an RNC and BSC directly or through a regional backhaul
network.
l The OptiX RTN 950 provides a wide range of interfaces and service bearer technologies to adapt to the
regional backhaul network. The regional backhaul network can be a time-division multiplexing (TDM)
network or packet switching network (PSN).
l The OptiX RTN 950 supports the Ethernet over SDH (EoSDH) function and Ethernet over PDH
(EoPDH) function. Therefore, packet services can be backhauled through a TDM network.
l The OptiX RTN 950 supports the pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) technology. Therefore,
TDM, ATM, and Ethernet services can be backhauled through a PSN.
l The OptiX RTN 950 supports the VLAN sub-interface function. Therefore, MPLS packet services can
be backhauled through a Layer 2 network.
1.2 Components
The OptiX RTN 950 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 950 and the ODU.
Each ODU is connected to the IDU through an IF cable.
IDU 950
The IDU 950 is the indoor unit for an OptiX RTN 950 system. It receives and multiplexes
services, performs service processing and IF processing, and provides the system control and
communications function.
Table 1-1 lists the basic features of the IDU 950.
Table 1-1 Features of the IDU 950
Item
Description
Chassis height
2U
Pluggable
Supported
Number of microwave
directions
1 to 6
RF configuration mode
1+0 non-protection configuration
N+0 non-protection configuration (N ≤ 5)
1+1 protection configuration
N+1 protection configuration (N ≤ 4)
XPIC configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
1 Introduction
Figure 1-2 Appearance of the IDU 950
ODU
The ODU is the outdoor unit for the OptiX RTN 900. It converts frequencies and amplifies
signals.
The OptiX RTN 900 product series can use the RTN 600 ODU and RTN XMC ODU, covering
the entire frequency band from 6 GHz to 38 GHz.
NOTE
Unlike the other frequency bands that use 14 MHz, 28 MHz, or 56 MHz channel spacing, the 18 GHz
frequency band uses 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, or 55 MHz channel spacing.
Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs that the OptiX RTN 950 supports
Item
Description
Standard Power
ODU
High-Power ODU
Low Capacity for
PDH ODU
ODU type
SP, SPA
HP, HPA
LP
Frequency band
7/8/11/13/15/18/23/
26/38 GHz (SP
ODU)
6/7/8/10/10.5/11/13/
15/18/23/26/28/32/3
8 GHz (HP ODU)
7/8/11/13/15/18/23
GHz (LP ODU)
6/7/8/11/13/15/18/2
3 GHz (SPA ODU)
7/8/11/13/15/18/23
GHz (HPA ODU)
QPSK/16QAM/
32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM/256QAM
QPSK/16QAM/
32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM/256QAM
Microwave
modulation scheme
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
QPSK/16QAM
4
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Item
1 Introduction
Description
Channel spacing
Standard Power
ODU
High-Power ODU
Low Capacity for
PDH ODU
3.5/7/14/28 MHz
7/14/28/40/56 MHz
(6/7/8/10/11/13/15/1
8/23/26/28/32/38
GHz)
3.5/7/14/28 MHz
7/14/28 MHz (10.5
GHz)
Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs that the OptiX RTN 950 supports
Item
Description
High-Power ODU
Low Capacity for PDH
ODU
ODU type
XMC-2
XMC-1
Frequency band
7/8/11/13/15/18/23/26/38
GHz
7/8/11/13/15/18/23 GHz
Microwave modulation
scheme
QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/
64QAM/128QAM/256QAM
QPSK/16QAM
Channel spacing
7/14/28/40/56 MHz
3.5/7/14/28 MHz
There are two methods for mounting the ODU and the antenna: direct mounting and separate
mounting.
l
The direct mounting method is generally adopted when a small- or medium-diameter and
single-polarized antenna is used. In this situation, if one ODU is configured for one antenna,
the ODU is directly mounted at the back of the antenna. If two ODUs are configured for
one antenna, an RF signal combiner/splitter (hence referred to as a hybrid coupler) must
be mounted to connect the ODUs to the antenna. Figure 1-3 illustrates the direct mounting
method.
The direct mounting method can also be adopted when a small- or medium-diameter and
dual-polarized antenna is used. Two ODUs are mounted onto an antenna using an
orthomode transducer (OMT). The method for installing an OMT is similar to that for
installing a hybrid coupler.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
1 Introduction
Figure 1-3 Direct mounting
l
The separate mounting method is adopted when a large- or medium-diameter and singleor dual-polarized antenna is used. Figure 1-4 shows the separate mounting method. In this
situation, a hybrid coupler can be mounted (two ODUs share one feed boom).
Figure 1-4 Separate mounting
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 provides an antenna solution that covers the entire frequency band, and supports
single-polarized antennas and dual-polarized antennas with diameters of 0.3 m to 3.7 m along with the
corresponding feeder system.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
1 Introduction
1.3 Radio Link Types
The OptiX RTN 950 provides the radio links of various types in which different IF boards and
ODUs are configured for diverse microwave application scenarios.
Table 1-4 Radio link types that the OptiX RTN 950 supports
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Radio Link Type
System Control,
Switching, and
Timing Board
IF Board
ODU
Low-capacity PDH
microwave
CST
IF1
Low capacity for
PDH ODU
SDH/PDH
microwave
CST
IF1
Standard power
ODU or high power
ODU
High-capacity SDH
microwave
CST
ISU2
Standard power
ODU or high power
ODU
High-capacity SDH
microwave
supporting XPIC
CST
ISX2
Standard power
ODU or high power
ODU
Integrated IP
microwave
CSH
IFU2
Standard power
ODU or high power
ODU
Integrated IP
microwave
supporting XPIC
CSH
CSH
CSH
CSH
CSH
ISU2
IFX2
ISX2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Standard power
ODU or high power
ODU
7
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
2 Chassis
2
Chassis
About This Chapter
The IDU of the OptiX RTN 950 is a 2U chassis. It can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and
on several different types of racks, cabinets, and surfaces.
2.1 Chassis Structure
The dimensions (H x W x D) of the IDU 950 chassis are 88 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm. The IDU
950 chassis has a four-layered structure that is air cooled.
2.2 Installation Mode
The IDU 950 can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of racks,
cabinets, and surfaces.
2.3 Air Flow
An IDU 950 chassis is air-cooled with air in on the left side and air out on the right side.
2.4 IDU Labels
Product nameplate labels, qualification card labels, ESD protection labels, grounding labels,
laser safety class labels, high temperature warning labels, and operation warning labels, and
other types of labels are affixed in their respective positions on the IDU chassis or boards. Adhere
to the warnings and instructions on the labels when performing various types of tasks in order
to avoid bodily injury or damage to the equipment.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
2 Chassis
2.1 Chassis Structure
The dimensions (H x W x D) of the IDU 950 chassis are 88 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm. The IDU
950 chassis has a four-layered structure that is air cooled.
Figure 2-1 shows the chassis structure of the IDU 950.
Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 950
H
D
W
2.2 Installation Mode
The IDU 950 can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of racks,
cabinets, and surfaces.
The IDU 950 can be installed:
l
In a 300 mm European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) cabinet
l
In a 600 mm ETSI cabinet
l
In a 450 mm 19-inch cabinet
l
In a 600 mm 19-inch cabinet
l
In a 19-inch open rack
l
In an outdoor cabinet for wireless equipment
l
On a wall
l
On a table
2.3 Air Flow
An IDU 950 chassis is air-cooled with air in on the left side and air out on the right side.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
2 Chassis
Figure 2-2 shows the air flow in an IDU 950 chassis.
Figure 2-2 Air flow in an IDU 950 chassis
2.4 IDU Labels
Product nameplate labels, qualification card labels, ESD protection labels, grounding labels,
laser safety class labels, high temperature warning labels, and operation warning labels, and
other types of labels are affixed in their respective positions on the IDU chassis or boards. Adhere
to the warnings and instructions on the labels when performing various types of tasks in order
to avoid bodily injury or damage to the equipment.
Label Description
Table 2-1 provides the description of the labels on the IDU chassis and boards. Actual labels
may vary depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards.
Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels
Label
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Label Name
Description
ESD protection
label
Indicates that the
equipment is
sensitive to static
electricity.
Grounding label
Indicates the
grounding position
of the IDU chassis.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
2 Chassis
Label
Label Name
Description
Fan warning label
Warns you not to
touch fan leaves
when the fan is
rotating.
High temperature
warning label
Indicates that the
board surface
temperature may
exceed 70°C when
the ambient
temperature is
higher than 55°C.
Wear protective
gloves to handle
the board.
Power caution label
Instructs you to
read related
instructions before
performing any
power-related
tasks.
For details, see
Labels in 3.17.4
Front Panel.
合 格证/ QUALIFICATION CARD
Qualification card
label
Indicates that the
equipment has
been quality
checked.
RoHS label
Indicates that the
equipment
complies with the
related
requirements
specified in the
RoHS directive.
HUAWEI
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
华为技术有限公司
中国制造
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.
MADE IN CHINA
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
2 Chassis
Label
Label Name
Description
Product nameplate
label
Indicates the
product name and
certification.
Operation guidance
label
Instructs you to
slightly pull the
switch lever
outwards before
setting the switch
to the "I" or "O"
position.
PULL
Label Position
Figure 2-3 shows the positions of the labels on the chassis of the IDU 950.
Figure 2-3 Positions of the IDU 950 labels
合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD
50
HUAWEI
华为技术有限公司
中国制作
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.
MADE IN CHINA
!
! WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
3
Boards
About This Chapter
The IDU 950 supports the following types of boards: system control, switching, and timing
boards, IF boards, Ethernet boards, SDH boards, PDH boards, power supply boards, and fan
boards.
3.1 Board Appearance
The dimensions (H x W x D) of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 950 chassis are 19.82
mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm. The dimensions (H x W x D) of the system control, switching,
and timing board in the IDU 950 chassis are 22.36 mm x 193.80 mm x 269.73 mm.
3.2 Board List
The IDU 950 provides various functions with different boards inserted.
3.3 CST
The CST is the integrated TDM system control, switching, and timing board.
3.4 CSH
The CSH is the integrated Hybrid system control, switching, and timing board.
3.5 IF1
The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board. The IF1 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.6 IFU2
The IFU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode. The IFU2 uses the
DC-I power distribution mode.
3.7 IFX2
The IFX2 is a universal IF board that supports the XPIC function in Integrated IP radio mode.
The IFX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.8 ISU2
The ISU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode
at the same time. The ISU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.9 ISX2
The ISX2 is a universal XPIC IF board and provides the XPIC function for signals transmitted/
received in Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode. The ISX2 uses the DC-I power
distribution mode.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
3.10 EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA
The EM6T/EM6F/EM6TA/EM6FA is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE
electrical ports and two GE ports. The EM6T/EM6TA has similar functions to the EM6F/
EM6FA. The only difference is as follows: The GE ports on the EM6T/EM6TA use fixed
electrical ports whereas the GE ports on the EM6F/EM6FA use the SFP modules and therefore
can function as two FE/GE optical or GE electrical ports. The GE electrical ports on the
EM6F/EM6FA and the EM6T/EM6TA are compatible with the FE electrical ports.
3.11 EMS6
The EMS6 is an FE/GE EoSDH processing board providing the L2 switching function. It
provides four FE electrical ports and two GE ports using small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
optical/electrical modules.
3.12 EFP8
The EFP8 is an 8-port FE EoPDH processing board. The EFP board is connected to the packet
plane through its bridging GE port.
3.13 SL1D/SL1DA
The SL1D/SL1DA is a 2xSTM-1 optical interface board. The SL1D/SL1DA can also provide
STM-1 electrical ports by using SFP electrical modules. Besides all the functions provided by
the SL1D, the SL1DA supports the K byte pass-through function.
3.14 ML1/MD1
The ML1 is a 16xSmart E1 service processing board. The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service
processing board.
3.15 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm
tributary board.
3.16 AUX
The AUX is an auxiliary management interface board of the OptiX RTN 950. One NE can house
only one AUX.
3.17 PIU
The PIU is the power interface board. The OptiX RTN 950 supports two PIUs, each of which
accesses one -48 V/-60 V DC power supply.
3.18 FAN
The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat generated in the chassis through air cooling.
3.19 TCU6
The TDM connecting unit (TCU6) is a 6xE1 port conversion board. The TCU6 implements
conversion between DB44 ports and RJ45 ports.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
3.1 Board Appearance
The dimensions (H x W x D) of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 950 chassis are 19.82
mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm. The dimensions (H x W x D) of the system control, switching,
and timing board in the IDU 950 chassis are 22.36 mm x 193.80 mm x 269.73 mm.
NOTE
The depth of the board refers to the distance between the front panel and the end of the PCB.
Board Appearance
Figure 3-1 shows the appearance of an ISU2 board in an IDU 950 chassis.
Figure 3-1 Appearance of an ISU2 board
H
D
W
Bar Code
The front panel of a board has two ejector levers and two captive screws. The ejector levers help
you remove or insert a board. The captive screws fasten a board to the chassis. A board bar code
(as shown in Figure 3-2) is attached to one of the ejector levers.
Figure 3-2 Bar code
Bar code
0514721055000015-SL91EM6F01
①
①
②
③
④
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
②
③ ④
Internal code
Board version
Board name
Board feature code
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
NOTE
Only the bar codes of some boards contain board feature codes, which further classify boards. For example,
the feature codes of some boards using SFP modules (such as EM6F) indicate the type of SFP module
being used, and the feature codes of some other boards providing E1 ports (such as SP3S) indicate the
impedance of E1 ports.
3.2 Board List
The IDU 950 provides various functions with different boards inserted.
Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout
Slot
10
(PIU)
Slot
9
(PIU)
Slot
11
(FAN)
Slot 7 (CST/CSH)
Slot 8 (CST/CSH)
Slot 5 (EXT)
Slot 6 (EXT)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 1 (EXT)
Slot 2 (EXT)
NOTE
"EXT" represents an extended slot, which can house any type of IF board or interface board.
Table 3-1 List of IDU boards
Board
Acronym
Board Name
CST
TDM control,
switching, and
timing board
Valid Slot
Description
Slot 7 or slot 8
l Provides full time division cross-connections for
VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent to 32x32
VC-4s.
l Performs system communication and control.
l Provides the clock processing function and supports
one external clock input/output function.
l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one NM serial
interface, and one NE cascading interface.
l Provides one outdoor monitoring interface.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Board
Acronym
Board Name
CSH
Hybrid control,
switching, and
timing board
3 Boards
Valid Slot
Description
Slot 7 or slot 8
l Provides full time division cross-connections for
VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent to 32x32
VC-4s.
l Provides the 10 Gbit/s packet switching capability.
l Performs system communication and control.
l Provides the clock processing function and supports
one external clock input/output function.
l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one NM serial
interface, and one NE cascading interface.
l Provides one outdoor monitoring interface.
ISU2
Universal IF
board
Slot 1 to slot 6
l Provides one IF interface.
l Supports integrated IP microwave and SDH
microwave. The supported service modes are Native
E1+Ethernet, Native STM-1+Ethernet or SDH
(1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1).
l Supports the AM function.
l Supports Ethernet frame header compression.
l Supports the physical link aggregation (PLA)
function.
ISX2
Universal XPIC
IF board
Slot 1 to slot 6
l Provides one IF interface.
l Supports integrated IP microwave and SDH
microwave. The supported service modes are Native
E1+Ethernet, Native STM-1+Ethernet or SDH
(1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1).
l Supports the XPIC function.
l Supports the AM function.
l Supports Ethernet frame header compression.
l Supports the physical link aggregation (PLA)
function.
IF1
SDH IF board
Slot 1 to slot 6
l Provides one IF interface.
l Supports the TU-based PDH microwave solution
and the STM-1-based SDH microwave solution.
IFU2
Universal IF
board
Slot 1 to slot 6
l Provides one IF interface.
l Supports integrated IP microwave.
l Supports the AM function.
IFX2
Universal XPIC
IF board
Slot 1 to slot 6
l Provides one IF interface.
l Supports integrated IP microwave.
l Supports the XPIC function.
l Supports the AM function.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Board
Acronym
Board Name
SL1D
3 Boards
Valid Slot
Description
2xSTM-1
interface board
Slot 1 to slot 6
Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1 optical/
electrical interfaces.
SL1DA
2xSTM-1
interface board
Slot 1 to slot 6
Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1 optical/
electrical interfaces.
EM6T/EM6TA
6-port RJ45
Ethernet/
Gigabit Ethernet
interface board
Slot 1 to slot 6
l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.
4-port RJ45 + 2port SFP Fast
Ethernet/
Gigabit Ethernet
interface board
Slot 1 to slot 6
8-port RJ45 FE
EoPDH
processing
board with the
switching
function
Slot 1 to slot 6
4-port RJ45 and
2-port SFP FE/
GE EoSDH
processing
board with the
switching
function
Slot 1 to slot 6
16xE1 (Smart)
tributary board
Slot 1 to slot 6
EM6F/EM6FA
EFP8
EMS6
ML1
l Provides two GE electrical interfaces that are
compatible with the FE electrical interface.
l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.
l Uses the SFP module to provide two GE/FE optical
interfaces or GE electrical interfaces. The GE
electrical interfaces are compatible with the FE
electrical interfaces.
l Provides eight FE electrical interfaces.
l Bridges to the packet plane through one internal GE
interface.
l Supports the processing of EoPDH services.
l Supports Ethernet transparent transmission services
and Layer 2 switching services.
l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.
l Uses the SFP module to provide two GE optical or
electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces are
compatible with the FE electrical interfaces.
l Supports the processing of EoSDH services.
l Supports Ethernet transparent transmission services
and Layer 2 switching services.
l Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm Smart E1
interfaces.
l Supports CES E1, ATM/IMA E1, and Fractional E1.
MD1
32xE1 (Smart)
tributary board
Slot 1 to slot 6
l Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm Smart E1
interfaces.
l Supports CES E1, ATM/IMA E1, and Fractional E1.
SP3S
16xE1 tributary
board
Slot 1 to slot 6
Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM E1
interfaces.
SP3D
32xE1 tributary
board
Slot 1 to slot 6
Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or TDM 120-ohm E1
interfaces.
AUX
Auxiliary
interface board
Slot 1 to slot 6
Provides one orderwire interface, one asynchronous
data interface, one synchronous data interface, and fourinput and two-output external alarm interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Board
Acronym
Board Name
TCU6
3 Boards
Valid Slot
Description
6xE1 connector
conversion
board
Slot 1 to slot 6
Provides one DB44 connector and six RJ45 connectors.
When being used with an E1 tributary board and an
Anea 96 to DB44 transit cable, it converts E1 interfaces
1 to 6 on the Anea 96 connector into RJ45 connectors.
PIU
Power board
Slot 9 or slot 10
Provides one -48 V/-60 V DC power input.
FAN
Fan board
Slot 11
Cools and ventilates the IDU.
3.3 CST
The CST is the integrated TDM system control, switching, and timing board.
3.3.1 Version Description
The functional version of the CST is SL91.
3.3.2 Functions and Features
The CST provides full time division cross-connection, system control and communication, and
clock processing functions. The CST provides auxiliary ports and management ports.
Table 3-2 lists the functions and features that the CST supports.
Table 3-2 Functions and features that the CST supports
Function and Feature
Description
Basic functions
Cross-connect
capacity
Supports full time division cross-connections
(equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s) at the VC-12, VC-3, or
VC-4 level.
System control
and
communication
Manages, monitors, and controls the running status of
the IDU, and works as a communication service unit
between the NMS and boards to help the NMS to
control and manage the NE.
Clock source
Provides the system clock and frame headers for
service signals and overhead signals for the other
boards when tracing an appropriate clock source.
Clock
The traced clock source can be any of the following:
l External clock
l SDH line clock
l PDH tributary clock
l Radio link clock
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
19
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Function and Feature
Clock
protection
3 Boards
Description
Supports the following clock protection schemes:
l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
External clock
port
1
DCN
Outband DCN
Supports a maximum of 13 DCCs.
Protection
1+1 hot standby
Supported
Auxiliary ports
and
management
ports
Ethernet NM
port
1
NM serial port
1
NE cascading
port
1
Port for
monitoring an
outdoor cabinet
1
Warm reset and
cold reset
Supported
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board power
consumption
information
query
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
Board voltage
detection
Supported
Detection of
indicators on the
other boards
Supported
Hot swapping
function
Supported
OM
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
The specifications of port comply with RS-485.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
20
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Function and Feature
Description
Pluggable CF
card
Supported
3.3.3 Working Principle
The CST consists of the system control and communication unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit,
and power supply unit.
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CST
Backplane
Cross-connect unit
TDM service
Service board
Control bus
FE signal
Ethernet NM port
NM serial port
NE cascading port
System control and
communication unit
of the paired board
System control and
communication unit
Clock signal required by
other boards
Monitoring
signal
Clock unit
Port for monitoring an
outdoor cabinet
/Time port 2
Time port 1
Clock port
External clock signal
Power supplied to the other
units on the board
Power
supply
unit
Clock signal
provided to the
other units on the
board
Clock unit of the
paired board
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V power supplied
to other boards
+12 V power supplied
to fans
System Control and Communication Unit
The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit. The
system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
l
The CPU unit controls and manages the other units on the board and collects alarms and
performance events using the control bus.
l
The CPU unit controls and manages the other boards in the IDU and collects alarms and
performance events using the control bus.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
21
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
l
The CPU unit controls and manages the ODU by transmitting the ODU control signal to
the SMODEM unit in the IF board over the control bus in the backplane.
l
The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control
unit.
l
The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port and NE cascading
port.
l
The CPU unit implements software loading by reading information from the CF card with
the bus.
l
The CPU unit monitors and manages an outdoor cabinet by reading the outdoor cabinet
monitoring signal with the bus.
l
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and enables
FPGA loading.
l
The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit,
the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes:
– Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit
– Adding or dropping orderwire and asynchronous data services
– Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines
l
The system control and communication unit on a CST board communicates with the system
control and communication unit on the paired CST board by carrying FE signals over the
communication bus in the backplane. In this manner, 1+1 hot backup between paired boards
is achieved.
Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order crossconnect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-5 shows the functional
block diagram of the cross-connect unit.
Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM
service unit
Higher order
cross-connect
module
HOXC
SinkTDM
service unit
Lower order
cross-connect
module
LOXC
The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect module
over VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect
module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
22
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect module
grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect module. The lower order
cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services
back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order cross-connect module processes
the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.
Clock Unit
l
The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from external clock sources or service
clock sources at service ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means
of the phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides the system clock.
l
The clock units on the main and standby boards transmit clock signals to each other.
Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by
the chips of the other units on the local board.
l
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power supply
required by the other boards in the IDU.
l
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power supply
required by the fan.
3.3.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, buttons, management ports, clock ports, and latches on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
CST
STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV
ACT
Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CST
CF RCV RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD1
TOD2
Indicators
Table 3-3 Status explanation for indicators on the CST
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
23
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Indicator
3 Boards
State
Meaning
Off
l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the
board.
PROG
Blinks on (green) and off at
100 ms intervals
Software is being loaded to the board
during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.
Blinks on (green) and off at
300 ms intervals
The board software is in BIOS boot state
during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.
On (green)
l When the board is being powered on
or being reset, the upper layer
software is being initialized.
l When the board is running, the
software is running normally.
Blinks on (red) and off at
100 ms intervals
The BOOTROM self-check fails during
the power-on or resetting process of the
board.
On (red)
l The memory self-check fails or
loading upper layer software fails
during the power-on or resetting
process of the board.
l The logic file or upper layer software
is lost during the running process of
the board.
l The pluggable storage card is faulty.
SYNC
SRV
On (green)
The clock is working properly.
On (red)
The clock source is lost or a clock
switchover occurs.
On (green)
The system is working properly.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the
system.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the
system.
Off
In an unprotected system, there is no
power supplied to the system.
In a 1+1 protected system, the board
works as the standby one.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
24
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
ACT
On (green)
In a 1+1 protected system, the board
works as the active one.
In an unprotected system, the board has
been activated.
Off
In a 1+1 protected system, the board
works as the standby one.
In an unprotected system, the board is not
activated.
Clock Ports and Management Ports
Table 3-4 Description of the clock ports and management ports
Port
Description
NMS/COM
Ethernet NM port/NM serial port
EXT
NE cascade port
CLK/TOD1
External clock port (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz),
or wayside E1 port
TOD2
Port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet
Connector Type
RJ45
NOTE
l The external clock port and wayside E1 port share one port physically. This port can also transparently
transmit DCC bytes, orderwire overhead bytes, and synchronous/asynchronous data overhead bytes.
This port, however, can implement only one of the preceding functions at one time.
l The TOD2 and the outdoor cabinet monitoring port share one port physically. On the OptiX RTN 900
V100R003, the physical port can be used as the outdoor cabinet monitoring port only.
l Time ports TOD1 and TOD2 are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol (IEEE 1588
protocol) and are not used in this product version.
Auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the ports,
however, are different. Figure 3-7 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector.
Figure 3-7 Front view of the RJ45 connector
87654321
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
25
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-5 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port
Port
NMS/COM
Pin
Signal
1
Transmitting data (+)
2
Transmitting data (-)
3
Receiving data (+)
4
Grounding end of the NM serial port
5
Receive end of the NM serial port
6
Receiving data (-)
7
Not defined
8
Transmit end of the NM serial port
Table 3-6 Pin assignments for the EXT port
Port
EXT
Pin
Signal
1
Transmitting data (+)
2
Transmitting data (-)
3
Receiving data (+)
6
Receiving data (-)
4, 5, 7, 8
Not defined
NOTE
The EXT port supports the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes; that is, the EXT port can transmit
data through pins 3 and 6 and receive data through pins 1 and 2.
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. Table 3-7 provides status explanation for these
indicators.
Table 3-7 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector
Indicator
State
Meaning
LINK (green)
On
The link is working properly.
Off
The link is interrupted.
On or blinking
The port is transmitting or receiving
data.
Off
The port is not transmitting or
receiving data.
ACT (yellow)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
26
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
NOTE
The NMS/COM port and the EXT port are equivalent to two ports on a hub. This means that no external
Ethernet link should be configured between the two ports during the networking process; otherwise, an
Ethernet loop will be formed. As a result, a broadcast storm is generated on the network, leading to repeated
resetting of NEs.
Figure 3-8 shows the two common incorrect connections.
CST
STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV
ACT
Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port
CF RCV
RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD1 TOD2
CST
STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV
ACT
LAN
CF RCV
RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD1 TOD2
NOTE
When the OptiX RTN 950 is configured with two CST boards, their Ethernet NM ports and NE cascading
ports are equivalent to four ports on a hub. To avoid network storms, use only the Ethernet NM port and
NE cascading port of the working CST board, if possible.
Table 3-8 provides details about the pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port.
Table 3-8 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port
Pin
Working Mode
External Clock
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
1
Signal input (-)
2
Signal input (+)
3
Not defined
4
Signal output (-)
5
signal output (+)
6
Not defined
7
Not defined
8
Not defined
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
27
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
NOTE
The pin assignment when the CLK/TOD1 port functions as a wayside E1 service port is the same as that
when the CLK/TOD1 port functions as a clock port.
Table 3-9 provides details about the pin assignments for the TOD2 port.
Table 3-9 Pin assignments for the TOD2 port
Pin
Working Mode
Port for Monitoring an Outdoor Cabinet
1
Not defined
2
Not defined
3
Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal input (-)
(RS-422 level)
4
Grounding end
5
Grounding end
6
Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal input (+)
(RS-422 level)
7
Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal output (-)
(RS-422 level)
8
Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal output (+)
(RS-422 level)
Buttons
Table 3-10 Buttons
Button
Name
Description
CF RCV
CF configuration restoration
button
After this button is pressed and held for
eight seconds, the board automatically
restores the NE database from the CF
card.
RST
Warm reset button
After this button is pressed, a warm
reset is performed on the board.
Latches
There is a latch near each ejector lever on the front panel of the board. When removing a board,
you can rotate the ejector levers only after pushing the latches to the middle positions. In addition,
rotating the ejector levers triggers the tact switch on the board and then triggers working/
protection switching.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
28
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card
This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF (compact flash) card.
NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask), software
packages, and NE logs are stored on the CF card. After you press the CRV button on the system
control, switching, and timing board and hold it for eight seconds, the data stored on the CF card
will be loaded to the board. To synchronize the NE databases, system parameters, and NE logs
on the system control, switching, and timing board to the CF card, enable the regular backup
function.
NOTE
The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the system control, switching, and timing
board during package diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations are not needed
to synchronize software packages on the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card. If the
system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card have different software packages or data, the
SWDL_PKGVER_MM alarm will be reported.
Figure 3-9 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card
ON DIP
1 2 3 4
2
1
1. DIP switches
2. CF card
Table 3-11 Setting DIP switches
Meaning
Setting of DIP Switchesa
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
1
2
3
4
0
0
0
0
Indicates that the board works with the
watchdog enabled.
0
0
0
1
The value is reserved.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
29
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Meaning
Setting of DIP Switchesa
1
2
3
4
0
0
1
0
Indicates that a memory self-check is
running.
0
0
1
1
Indicates that the board is being debugged.
0
1
0
0
Indicates that the board works with the
watchdog disabled and a full memory check
is running.
0
1
0
1
Indicates the BIOS holdover state.
0
1
1
0
Indicates the BIOS exhibition state.
0
1
1
1
The value is reserved. (By default, this value
indicates that the board works with the
watchdog enabled.)
1
0
0
0
The value is reserved. (By default, this value
indicates that the board works with the
watchdog enabled.)
1
0
0
1
Restores the data of the CF card.
1
0
1
0
Erases data in the system parameter area.
1
0
1
1
Erases databases.
1
1
0
0
Erases NE software, including patches.
1
1
0
1
Erases databases and NE software, including
patches.
1
1
1
0
Erases all data in the file system.
1
1
1
1
Erases all the data except for the board
manufacturing information.
NOTE
a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a
DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.
3.3.6 Valid Slots
The CST can be inserted in slot 7 or slot 8 of the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the CST on
the NMS is the same as its physical slot.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
30
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Figure 3-10 Slot for the CST in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7 (CST)
Slot 8 (CST)
Slot 5 (EXT)
Slot 6 (EXT)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 1 (EXT)
Slot 2 (EXT)
Figure 3-11 Logical slot of the CST on the NMS
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7 (CST)
Slot 8 (CST)
Slot 5 (EXT)
Slot 6 (EXT)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 1 (EXT)
Slot 2 (EXT)
Table 3-12 Slot allocation
Item
Description
Slot allocation priority
Slot 7 > Slot 8
3.3.7 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CST.
Related References
A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting
A.10.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table
A.10.1.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status
A.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General
A.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port
A.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port
A.10.3 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports
A.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
31
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
3.3.8 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including the cross-connection capability, clock
performance, wayside service port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power
consumption.
Cross-Connection Capability
The CST supports full time division cross-connections (equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s) at the
VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level.
Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance
Clock timing and synchronization performance meets related ITU-T Recommendations.
Table 3-13 Clock timing and synchronization performance
Item
Performance
External synchronization
source
2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §9), or 2048 kHz
(compliant with ITU-T G.703 §13)
Frequency accuracy
Compliant with ITU-T G.813
Pull-in and pull-out ranges
Noise generation
Noise tolerance
Noise transfer
Transient response and
holdover performance
Wayside Service Interface Performance
Table 3-14 Wayside service interface performance
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Item
Performance
Transmission path
Uses the Huawei-defined bytes in the overhead of the
microwave frame.
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)
2048
Impedance (ohm)
120
Interface characteristics
Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
32
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-15 Mechanical behavior
Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D)
22.36 mm x 193.80 mm x 269.73 mm
Weight
0.72 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 20.7 W
3.4 CSH
The CSH is the integrated Hybrid system control, switching, and timing board.
3.4.1 Version Description
The functional version of the CSH is SL91.
3.4.2 Working Principle
The CSH consists of the system control and communication unit, packet switching unit, crossconnect unit, clock unit, and power supply unit.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
33
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-12 Functional block diagram of the CSH
Backplane
GE bus
Packet
switching unit
Service board
TDM service
Cross-connect unit
Service board
Control bus
Ethernet NM port
NM serial port
FE signal
System control and
communication unit
NE cascading port
Port for monitoring an
outdoor cabinet
/Time port 2
Time port 1
Clock port
System control and
communication unit
of the paired board
Monitoring
signal
Clock unit
Clock signal required by
other boards
Clock unit of the
paired board
External clock signal
Clock signal
provided to
the other units
on the board
Power supplied to the other
units on the board
Power supply
unit
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V power supplied
to other boards
+12 V power supplied
to fans
System Control and Communication Unit
The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit. The
system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
l
The CPU unit controls and manages the other units on the board and collects alarms and
performance events using the control bus.
l
The CPU unit controls and manages the other boards in the IDU and collects alarms and
performance events using the control bus.
l
The CPU unit controls and manages the ODU by transmitting the ODU control signal to
the SMODEM unit in the IF board over the control bus in the backplane.
l
The CPU unit enables the packet switching unit using the control bus to groom Ethernet
service packets.
l
The CPU unit processes Ethernet protocol packets from the packet switching unit using the
control bus.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
34
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
l
The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control
unit.
l
The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port and NE cascading
port.
l
The CPU unit implements software loading by reading information from the CF card with
the bus.
l
The CPU unit monitors and manages an outdoor cabinet by reading the outdoor cabinet
monitoring signal with the bus.
l
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and enables
FPGA loading.
l
The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit,
the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes:
– Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit
– Adding or dropping orderwire and synchronous/asynchronous data services
– Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines
l
The system control and communication unit on a CSH board communicates with the system
control and communication unit on the paired CSH board by carrying FE signals over the
communication bus in the backplane. In this manner, 1+1 hot backup between paired boards
is achieved.
Packet Switching Unit
The packet switching unit grooms services and processes protocols for Ethernet services
(including Native Ethernet services and MPLS/PWE3 packets carried over Ethernet).
l
After receiving Ethernet services from an Ethernet board, the packet switching unit grooms
the Ethernet services based on the configurations that are delivered by the system control
and communication unit.
l
After receiving protocol packets from an Ethernet board, the packet switching unit transmits
the protocol packets to the system control and communication unit for processing. After
processing, the system control and communication unit sends the protocol packets back to
the packet switching unit. The packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the
Ethernet board.
Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order crossconnect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-13 shows the functional
block diagram of the cross-connect unit.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
35
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Figure 3-13 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM
service unit
Higher order
cross-connect
module
HOXC
SinkTDM
service unit
Lower order
cross-connect
module
LOXC
The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect module
over VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect
module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit.
If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect module
grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect module. The lower order
cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services
back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order cross-connect module processes
the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.
Clock Unit
l
The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from external clock sources or service
clock sources at service ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means
of the phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides the system clock.
l
The clock units on the main and standby boards transmit clock signals to each other.
Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by
the chips of the other units on the local board.
l
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power supply
required by the other boards in the IDU.
l
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power supply
required by the fan.
3.4.3 Front Panel
There are indicators, buttons, management ports, clock/time ports, and latches on the front panel.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
36
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Front Panel Diagram
CSH
STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV
ACT
Figure 3-14 Front panel of the CSH
CF RCV
RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD1 TOD2
Indicators
Table 3-16 Status explanation for indicators on the CSH
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the
board.
PROG
Blinks on (green) and off at
100 ms intervals
Software is being loaded to the board
during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.
Blinks on (green) and off at
300 ms intervals
The board software is in BIOS boot state
during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.
On (green)
l When the board is being powered on
or being reset, the upper layer
software is being initialized.
l When the board is running, the
software is running normally.
Blinks on (red) and off at
100 ms intervals
The BOOTROM self-check fails during
the power-on or resetting process of the
board.
On (red)
l The memory self-check fails or
loading upper layer software fails
during the power-on or resetting
process of the board.
l The logic file or upper layer software
is lost during the running process of
the board.
l The pluggable storage card is faulty.
SYNC
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
On (green)
The clock is working properly.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
37
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Indicator
SRV
3 Boards
State
Meaning
On (red)
The clock source is lost or a clock
switchover occurs.
On (green)
The system is working properly.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the
system.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the
system.
Off
In an unprotected system, there is no
power supplied to the system.
In a 1+1 protected system, the board
works as the standby one.
ACT
On (green)
In a 1+1 protected system, the board
works as the active one.
In an unprotected system, the board has
been activated.
Off
In a 1+1 protected system, the board
works as the standby one.
In an unprotected system, the board is not
activated.
Clock Ports and Management Ports
Table 3-17 Description of the clock ports and management ports
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Port
Description
NMS/COM
Ethernet NM port/NM serial port
EXT
NE cascade port
CLK/TOD1
External clock port (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz),
or wayside E1 port
TOD2
Port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Connector Type
RJ45
38
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
NOTE
l The external clock port and wayside E1 port share one port physically. This port can also transparently
transmit DCC bytes, orderwire overhead bytes, and synchronous/asynchronous data overhead bytes.
This port, however, can implement only one of the preceding functions at one time.
l The TOD2 and the outdoor cabinet monitoring port share one port physically. On the OptiX RTN 900
V100R003, the physical port can be used as the outdoor cabinet monitoring port only.
l Time ports TOD1 and TOD2 are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol (IEEE 1588
protocol) and are not used in this product version.
Auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the ports,
however, are different. Figure 3-15 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector.
Figure 3-15 Front view of the RJ45 connector
87654321
Table 3-18 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port
Port
NMS/COM
Pin
Signal
1
Transmitting data (+)
2
Transmitting data (-)
3
Receiving data (+)
4
Grounding end of the NM serial port
5
Receive end of the NM serial port
6
Receiving data (-)
7
Not defined
8
Transmit end of the NM serial port
Table 3-19 Pin assignments for the EXT port
Port
EXT
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Pin
Signal
1
Transmitting data (+)
2
Transmitting data (-)
3
Receiving data (+)
6
Receiving data (-)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
39
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Port
3 Boards
Pin
Signal
4, 5, 7, 8
Not defined
NOTE
The EXT port supports the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes; that is, the EXT port can transmit
data through pins 3 and 6 and receive data through pins 1 and 2.
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. Table 3-20 provides status explanation for these
indicators.
Table 3-20 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector
Indicator
State
Meaning
LINK (green)
On
The link is working properly.
Off
The link is interrupted.
On or blinking
The port is transmitting or receiving
data.
Off
The port is not transmitting or
receiving data.
ACT (yellow)
NOTE
The NMS/COM port and the EXT port are equivalent to two ports on a hub. This means that no external
Ethernet link should be configured between the two ports during the networking process; otherwise, an
Ethernet loop will be formed. As a result, a broadcast storm is generated on the network, leading to repeated
resetting of NEs.
Figure 3-16 shows the two common incorrect connections.
CSH
STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV
ACT
Figure 3-16 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port
CF RCV
RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD1 TOD2
CSH
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV
ACT
LAN
CF RCV
RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD1 TOD2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
40
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
NOTE
When the OptiX RTN 950 is configured with two CSH boards, their Ethernet NM ports and NE cascading
ports are equivalent to four ports on a hub. To avoid network storms, use only the Ethernet NM port and
NE cascading port of the working CSH board, if possible.
Table 3-21 provides details about the pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port.
Table 3-21 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port
Pin
Working Mode
External Clock
1
Signal input (-)
2
Signal input (+)
3
Not defined
4
Signal output (-)
5
signal output (+)
6
Not defined
7
Not defined
8
Not defined
NOTE
The pin assignment when the CLK/TOD1 port functions as a wayside E1 service port is the same as that
when the CLK/TOD1 port functions as a clock port.
Table 3-22 provides details about the pin assignments for the TOD2 port.
Table 3-22 Pin assignments for the TOD2 port
Pin
Working Mode
Port for Monitoring an Outdoor Cabinet
1
Not defined
2
Not defined
3
Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal input (-)
(RS-422 level)
4
Grounding end
5
Grounding end
6
Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal input (+)
(RS-422 level)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
41
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Pin
3 Boards
Working Mode
Port for Monitoring an Outdoor Cabinet
7
Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal output (-)
(RS-422 level)
8
Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal output (+)
(RS-422 level)
Buttons
Table 3-23 Buttons
Button
Name
Description
CF RCV
CF configuration restoration
button
After this button is pressed and held for
eight seconds, the board automatically
restores the NE database from the CF
card.
RST
Warm reset button
After this button is pressed, a warm
reset is performed on the board.
Latches
There is a latch near each ejector lever on the front panel of the board. When removing a board,
you can rotate the ejector levers only after pushing the latches to the middle positions. In addition,
rotating the ejector levers triggers the tact switch on the board and then triggers working/
protection switching.
3.4.4 DIP Switches and CF Card
This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF (compact flash) card.
NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask), software
packages, and NE logs are stored on the CF card. After you press the CRV button on the system
control, switching, and timing board and hold it for eight seconds, the data stored on the CF card
will be loaded to the board. To synchronize the NE databases, system parameters, and NE logs
on the system control, switching, and timing board to the CF card, enable the regular backup
function.
NOTE
The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the system control, switching, and timing
board during package diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations are not needed
to synchronize software packages on the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card. If the
system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card have different software packages or data, the
SWDL_PKGVER_MM alarm will be reported.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
42
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Figure 3-17 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card
ON DIP
1 2 3 4
2
1
1. DIP switches
2. CF card
Table 3-24 Setting DIP switches
Meaning
Setting of DIP Switchesa
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
1
2
3
4
0
0
0
0
Indicates that the board works with the
watchdog enabled.
0
0
0
1
The value is reserved.
0
0
1
0
Indicates that a memory self-check is
running.
0
0
1
1
Indicates that the board is being debugged.
0
1
0
0
Indicates that the board works with the
watchdog disabled and a full memory check
is running.
0
1
0
1
Indicates the BIOS holdover state.
0
1
1
0
Indicates the BIOS exhibition state.
0
1
1
1
The value is reserved. (By default, this value
indicates that the board works with the
watchdog enabled.)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
43
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Meaning
Setting of DIP Switchesa
1
2
3
4
1
0
0
0
The value is reserved. (By default, this value
indicates that the board works with the
watchdog enabled.)
1
0
0
1
Restores the data of the CF card.
1
0
1
0
Erases data in the system parameter area.
1
0
1
1
Erases databases.
1
1
0
0
Erases NE software, including patches.
1
1
0
1
Erases databases and NE software, including
patches.
1
1
1
0
Erases all data in the file system.
1
1
1
1
Erases all the data except for the board
manufacturing information.
NOTE
a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a
DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.
3.4.5 Valid Slots
The CSH can be inserted in slot 7 or slot 8 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the CSH on
the NMS is the same as its physical slot.
Figure 3-18 Slot for the CSH in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7 (CSH)
Slot 8 (CSH)
Slot 5 (EXT)
Slot 6 (EXT)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 1 (EXT)
Slot 2 (EXT)
Figure 3-19 Logical slot of the CSH on the NMS
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7 (CSH)
Slot 8 (CSH)
Slot 5 (EXT)
Slot 6 (EXT)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 1 (EXT)
Slot 2 (EXT)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
44
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-25 Slot allocation
Item
Description
Slot allocation priority
Slot 7 > Slot 8
3.4.6 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSH.
Related References
A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting
A.10.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table
A.10.1.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status
A.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General
A.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port
A.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port
A.10.3 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports
A.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface
3.4.7 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including the packet switching capacity, crossconnection capability, clock performance, wayside service port performance, board mechanical
behavior, and board power consumption.
Packet Switching Capacity
The CSH supports a 10 Gbit/s packet switching capacity.
Cross-Connection Capability
The CSH supports full time division cross-connections (equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s) at the
VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level.
Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance
Clock timing and synchronization performance meets related ITU-T Recommendations.
Table 3-26 Clock timing and synchronization performance
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Item
Performance
External synchronization
source
2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §9), or 2048 kHz
(compliant with ITU-T G.703 §13)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
45
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Item
Performance
Frequency accuracy
Compliant with ITU-T G.813
Pull-in and pull-out ranges
Noise generation
Noise tolerance
Noise transfer
Transient response and
holdover performance
Wayside Service Interface Performance
Table 3-27 Wayside service interface performance
Item
Performance
Transmission path
Uses the Huawei-defined bytes in the overhead of the
microwave frame.
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)
2048
Impedance (ohm)
120
Interface characteristics
Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-28 Mechanical behavior
Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D)
22.36 mm x 193.80 mm x 269.73 mm
Weight
0.74 kg
Power Consumption
Power Consumption: < 25.3 W
3.5 IF1
The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board. The IF1 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
46
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
3.5.1 Version Description
The functional version of the IF1 is SL91.
3.5.2 Functions and Features
The IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
Table 3-29 lists the functions and features that the IF1 supports.
Table 3-29 Functions and features that the IF1 supports
Function and Feature
Description
Basic functions
l Receives and transmits one IF signal.
l Provides management channels to the ODU.
l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
Radio type
TU/STM-1-based radio
Radio work mode
See Technical Specifications of the IF1.
Protection
1+1 HSB/FD/
SD protection
Supported
N+1 protection
Supported
SNCP
Supported
License
Supports control on the air interface capacity by using
the license file.
K byte pass-through
Supported
Clock
Clock source
Clock at the air interface
Clock
protection
Supports the following clock protection schemes:
l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol (supported
only in SDH radio mode)
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
(supported only in SDH radio mode)
DCN
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Inband DCN
Not supported
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
47
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Function and Feature
Outband DCN
3 Boards
Description
l The PDH radio mode supports one DCC that is
composed of one DCC byte if the capacity is less
than 16xE1.
l The PDH radio mode supports one DCC that is
composed of three DCC bytes if the capacity is
equal to or more than 16xE1.
l The SDH radio mode supports one DCC that is
composed of three DCC bytes, nine DCC bytes, or
twelve DCC bytes.
OM
Loopback
Supports the following loopback types:
l Inloops at IF ports
l Outloops at IF ports
l Inloops at composite ports
l Outloops at composite ports
Warm reset and
cold reset
Supported
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board power
consumption
information
query
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
Board power
detection
Supported
3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one IF signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the IF1.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
48
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-20 Functional block diagram of the IF1
Backplane
SMODEM
unit
HSM signal bus
Paired board
ODU control signal
Service bus
Overhead bus
Logic processing unit
Microwave MODEM
unit
frame signal
MUX/DEMUX unit
IF processing
unit
Combiner
Interface
unit
IF
Control bus
Cross-connect unit
System control and
communication unit
System control and
communication unit
Logic
control unit
-48 V power supplied to the ODU
+3.3 V power supplied to the other
units on the board
Power
supply
unit
Clock signal provided to the
other units on the board
Clock
unit
-48 V
+3.3 V
System clock signal
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction
Table 3-30 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IF1
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Combiner interface
unit
Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals
and microwave service signals.
2
SMODEM unit
l Demodulates ODU control signals.
l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system
control and communication unit.
3
IF processing unit
l Controls the level of service signals through the
automatic gain control (AGC) circuit.
l Filters signals.
l Performs A/D conversion.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
49
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
4
MODEM unit
l Performs digital demodulation.
l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.
l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific
alarms.
5
MUX/DEMUX unit
(for SDH microwave
signal processing)
l Synchronizes frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF
alarms.
l Performs descrambling.
l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific alarms
and performance events.
l Checks link IDs and generates specific alarms.
l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and
generates specific alarms and performance events.
l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and
reports the SSM status to the system control and
communication unit.
l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned
microwave messages and reports the changes to the
system control and communication unit over the
control bus.
l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K
bytes, and transmits the overhead signal to the logic
processing unit.
l Extracts wayside service bytes to form another 2 Mbit/
s overhead signal and transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead
signal to the logic processing unit.
l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific
performance events.
l Checks higher order path overheads and generates
specific alarms and performance events.
l Transmits pointer indication signals and VC-4 signals
to the logic processing unit.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Step
3 Boards
Function Unit
Processing Flow
MUX/DEMUX unit
(for PDH microwave
signal processing)
l Detects microwave frame headers in PDH radio mode
and generates specific alarms and performance events.
l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in PDH radio
mode and generates specific alarms and performance
events.
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in PDH radio
mode and generates specific alarms and performance
events.
l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned
microwave messages in PDH radio mode and reports
the changes to the system control and communication
unit over the control bus.
l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in
microwave frames in PDH radio mode and transmits
the overhead signals to the logic processing unit.
l Adjusts TU pointers.
l Maps TU-12s in microwave frames in PDH radio
mode to the specific positions in VC-4s.
Logic processing
unit
6
l Processes clock signals.
l Transmits overhead signals to the system control and
communication unit.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the main and standby cross-connect units.
NOTE
In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX
unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent
processing.
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-31 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IF1
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Logic processing
unit
l Processes clock signals.
l Demultiplexes 2 Mbit/s overhead signals from 8 Mbit/
s overhead signals.
l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
51
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
2
MUX/DEMUX unit
(for SDH microwave
signal processing)
l Sets higher order path overheads.
l Sets AU pointers.
l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes.
l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes.
l Performs scrambling.
3
MUX/DEMUX unit
(for PDH microwave
signal processing)
l Demaps TU-12s from the VC-4 signals.
MODEM unit
l Performs FEC coding.
l Sets the microwave frame overheads in PDH radio
mode.
l Performs digital modulation.
4
IF processing unit
l Performs D/A conversion.
l Performs analog modulation.
5
SMODEM unit
Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the
system control and communication unit.
6
Combiner interface
unit
Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service
signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the
combined signals to the IF cable.
Control Signal Processing
The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the
control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the
CPU unit over the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l
Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion.
l
Receives the +3.3 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies the
+3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
52
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
3.5.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-21 Front panel of the IF1
I
O
PULL
IF1
WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
STAT
SRV
LINK
ODU
RMT
ACT
IF1
ODU-PWR
IF
Indicators
Table 3-32 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working
properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.
SRV
LINK
ODU
On (green)
The services are normal.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm
occurs in the services.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm
occurs in the services.
On (green)
The radio link is normal.
On (red)
The radio link is faulty.
On (green)
The ODU is working
properly.
On (red)
l The ODU is reporting
critical or major alarms.
l There is no power
supplied to the ODU.
On (yellow)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
The ODU is reporting minor
alarms.
53
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Indicator
RMT
ACT
State
Meaning
Blinks on (yellow) and off at
300 ms intervals
The antennas are not aligned.
On (yellow)
The remote equipment is
reporting defects.
Off
The remote equipment is free
of defects.
On (green)
l In a 1+1 protected system,
the board works as the
active one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board has been
activated.
l In a 1+1 protected system,
the board works as the
standby one.
Off
l In an unprotected system,
the board is not activated.
Ports
Table 3-33 Description of the Ports
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
IF
IF port
TNC
IF jumperb
ODU-PWRa
ODU power switch
-
-
NOTE
a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to
first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is
open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.
b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.
The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed
70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. If surface temperature reaches this
level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
54
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the
IF cable is removed.
The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before
the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.
3.5.5 Valid Slots
The IF1 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS are the same as the
physical slots.
Figure 3-22 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (IF1)
Slot 6 (IF1)
Slot 3 (IF1)
Slot 4 (IF1)
Slot 1 (IF1)
Slot 2 (IF1)
An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot
number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the
ODU plus 20.
Figure 3-23 Logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 25 (ODU)
Slot 26 (ODU)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 21 (ODU)
Slot 22 (ODU)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (IF1)
Slot 6 (IF1)
Slot 3 (IF1)
Slot 4 (IF1)
Slot 1 (IF1)
Slot 2 (IF1)
Table 3-34 Slot allocation
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Item
Description
Slot allocation priority
Slots 3 and 5 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and 2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
55
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
NOTE
Use two IF boards in paired slots to configure a 1+1 FD/SD IF protection group. Specifically, slots 1 and
2, slots 3 and 5, and slots 4 and 6 are paired slots respectively.
3.5.6 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1.
Related References
A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute
A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
3.5.7 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance,
modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Radio Work Modes
Table 3-35 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (IF1 board)
Service Capacity
Modulation Scheme
Channel Spacing (MHz)
4xE1
QPSK
7
4xE1
16QAM
3.5
8xE1
QPSK
14 (13.75)
8xE1
16QAM
7
16xE1
QPSK
28 (27.5)
16xE1
16QAM
14 (13.75)
22xE1
32QAM
14 (13.75)
26xE1
64QAM
14 (13.75)
35xE1
16QAM
28 (27.5)
44xE1
32QAM
28 (27.5)
53xE1
64QAM
28 (27.5)
STM-1
128QAM
28 (27.5)
NOTE
The channel spacings supported by the OptiX RTN 950 comply with ETSI standards. Channel spacings
3.5/7/14/28/40/56 MHz apply to most frequency bands; but channel spacings 3.5/7/13.75/27.5/40/55 MHz apply
to the 18 GHz frequency band.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
56
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
IF Performance
Table 3-36 IF performance
Item
Performance
IF signal
ODU O&M signal
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)
350
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)
140
Modulation scheme
ASK
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)
5.5
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)
10
Interface impedance (ohm)
50
Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem
Table 3-37 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem
Item
Performance
Encoding mode
l Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH microwave signals
l Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding for
SDH microwave signals
Adaptive timedomain equalizer for
baseband signals
Supported
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-38 Mechanical behavior
Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.72 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 12 W
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
57
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
3.6 IFU2
The IFU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode. The IFU2 uses the
DC-I power distribution mode.
3.6.1 Version Description
The functional version of the IFU2 is SL91.
3.6.2 Functions and Features
The IFU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
Table 3-39 lists the functions and features that the IFU2 supports. The IFU2 needs to work with
the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions.
Table 3-39 Functions and features that the IFU2 supports
Function and Feature
Description
Basic functions
l Receives and transmits one IF signal.
l Provides management channels to the ODU.
l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
Radio type
Integrated IP radio
NOTE
The Integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio
and the Packet radio.
Service categories
Native E1 + Ethernet
NOTE
Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet
services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.
AM
Supported
E1 priority
Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode with native
TDM services being E1 services
Radio work mode
See Technical Specifications of the IFU2.
Protection
License
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
1+1 HSB/FD/
SD protection
Supported
N+1 protection
Supported
SNCP for TDM
services
Supported
Air interface
capacity license
Supported
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
58
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Function and Feature
Clock at the
physical layer
3 Boards
Description
AM license
Supported
Clock source
Clock at the air interface
Clock
protection
Supports the following clock protection schemes:
l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
DCN
Inband DCN
Supported.
The DCN bandwidth is configurable.
Outband DCN
Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC
bytes.
Ethernet service functions
See Table 3-40.
MPLS functions
See the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions provided
in the section for the system control, switching, and
timing board.
PWE3 functions
OM
Loopback
Supports the following loopback types:
l Inloops and outloops at IF ports
l Inloops and outloops at composite ports
l Inloops at the MAC layer of IF_ETH ports
NOTE
An IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port on the IF board
operating in Integrated IP radio mode and is used to receive
or transmit Ethernet services transmitted in Integrated IP
radio mode.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Cold reset and
warm reset
Supported
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
PRBS BER test
at IF ports
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board power
consumption
information
query
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
59
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Function and Feature
Board power
detection
3 Boards
Description
Supported
Table 3-40 Ethernet service functions that the IFU2 supports
Function and Feature
Description
Ethernet
services
Supports the following types of E-Line services:
E-Line services
l E-Line services based on ports
l E-Line services based on port+VLAN
l E-Line services carried by QinQ links
l E-Line services carried by PWs
E-LAN services
Supports the following types of E-LAN services:
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
ERPS
Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T
G.8032/Y.1344.
OAM
l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
l Supports the packet loss, delay, and delay variation
monitoring function that complies with ITU-T Y.
1731.
LAG
Supported
Spanning tree protocol
Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the
CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions
equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.
QoS
See the description of QoS functions provided in the
section for the system control, switching, and timing
board.
RMON
Supported
3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves
as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
60
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-24 Functional block diagram of the IFU2
Backplane
SMODEM
unit
HSM signal bus
Paired board
ODU control signal
MODEM
unit
Overhead bus
Logic
processing
unit
Microwave frame
signal
MUX/DEMUX unit
IF processing
unit
Combiner
interface unit
IF
Service bus
Ethernet
processing
unit
Cross-connect unit
System control and
communication unit
GE bus
Control bus
Packet switching unit
System control and
communication unit
Logic
control unit
-48 V power supplied to the ODU
+3.3 V power supplied to the other
units on the board
Power
supply
unit
+3.3 V power supplied to the
monitoring circuit
Clock signal provided to the
other units on the board
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V
Clock
unit
System clock signal
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction
Table 3-41 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFU2
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Combiner interface
unit
Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals
and microwave service signals.
2
SMODEM unit
l Demodulates ODU control signals.
l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system
control and communication unit.
3
IF processing unit
l Filters signals.
l Performs A/D conversion.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
61
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
4
MODEM unit
l Performs digital demodulation.
l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.
l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific
alarms.
5
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Detects microwave frame headers in Integrated IP
radio mode and generates specific alarms and
performance events.
l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in Integrated
IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and
performance events.
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in Integrated IP
radio mode and generates specific alarms and
performance events.
l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned
microwave messages in Integrated IP radio mode and
reports the changes to the system control and
communication unit over the control bus.
l Extracts auxiliary channel bytes including orderwire
bytes, F1 and SERIAL bytes, SSM bytes, and DCC
bytes in microwave frames and transmits the overhead
signals to the logic processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals in Integrated IP radio mode
to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits
the VC-4s to the logic processing unit.
l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave
frams and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.
6
Ethernet processing
unit
l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/
DEMUX unit.
l Sends the processed signals to the main and standby
packet switching units.
7
Logic processing
unit
l Processes clock signals.
l Transmits the overhead signals to the system control
and communication unit.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the main and standby cross-connect units.
NOTE
In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX
unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent
processing.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
62
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-42 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFU2
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Logic processing
unit
l Processes clock signals.
l Processes overhead signals.
l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.
2
3
Ethernet processing
unit
l Receives GE signal from the packet switching unit.
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals.
l Processes GE signals.
l Sets the microwave frame overheads in Integrated IP
radio mode.
l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, and
microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.
4
MODEM unit
l Performs FEC coding.
l Performs digital modulation.
5
IF processing unit
l Performs D/A conversion.
l Performs analog modulation.
l Filters signals.
l Amplifies signals.
6
SMODEM unit
Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the
system control and communication unit.
7
Combiner interface
unit
Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service
signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the
combined signals to the IF cable.
Control Signal Processing
The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the
control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the
CPU unit over the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit performs the following functions:
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
63
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
l
Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion.
l
Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the IFU2 after
performing DC-DC conversion.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
3.6.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
I
O
PULL
IFU2
ODU-PWR
IF
STAT
SRV
LINK
ODU
RMT
ACT
IFU2
Figure 3-25 Front panel of the IFU2
Indicators
Table 3-43 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV
LINK
ODU
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
On (green)
The services are normal.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the
services.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the
services.
On (green)
The radio link is normal.
On (red)
The radio link is faulty.
On (green)
The ODU is working properly.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
64
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Indicator
3 Boards
State
Meaning
On (red)
l The ODU is reporting critical or major
alarms.
l There is no power supplied to the ODU.
RMT
ACT
On (yellow)
The ODU is reporting minor alarms.
Blinks on (yellow)
and off at 300 ms
intervals
The antennas are not aligned.
On (yellow)
The remote equipment is reporting defects.
Off
The remote equipment is free of defects.
On (green)
l In a 1+1 protected system, the board
works as the active one.
l In an unprotected system, the board has
been activated.
Off
l In a 1+1 protected system, the board
works as the standby one.
l In an unprotected system, the board is not
activated.
Ports
Table 3-44 Description of the Ports
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
IF
IF port
TNC
IF jumperb
ODU-PWRa
ODU power switch
-
-
NOTE
a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to
first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is
open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.
b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
65
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed
70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. If surface temperature reaches this
level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board.
The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the
IF cable is removed.
The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before
the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.
3.6.5 Valid Slots
The IFU2 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS are the same
as the physical slots.
Figure 3-26 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (IFU2)
Slot 6 (IFU2)
Slot 3 (IFU2)
Slot 4 (IFU2)
Slot 1 (IFU2)
Slot 2 (IFU2)
An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot
number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the
ODU plus 20.
Figure 3-27 Logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 25 (ODU)
Slot 26 (ODU)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 21 (ODU)
Slot 22 (ODU)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (IFU2)
Slot 6 (IFU2)
Slot 3 (IFU2)
Slot 4 (IFU2)
Slot 1 (IFU2)
Slot 2 (IFU2)
Table 3-45 Slot allocation
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Item
Description
Slot allocation priority
Slots 3 and 5 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and 2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
66
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
NOTE
Use two IF boards in paired slots to configure a 1+1 FD/SD IF protection group. Specifically, slots 1 and
2, slots 3 and 5, and slots 4 and 6 are paired slots respectively.
3.6.6 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2.
Related References
A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute
A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes
A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs
A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes
A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes
A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes
3.6.7 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance,
modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Radio Work Modes
Table 3-46 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFU2 board)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Channel Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Scheme
Maximum
Number of E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave
Native Ethernet
Throughput
(Mbit/s)
7
QPSK
5
9 to 12
7
16QAM
10
20 to 24
7
32QAM
12
24 to 29
7
64QAM
15
31 to 37
7
128QAM
18
37 to 44
7
256QAM
21
43 to 51
14 (13.75)
QPSK
10
20 to 23
14 (13.75)
16QAM
20
41 to 48
14 (13.75)
32QAM
24
50 to 59
14 (13.75)
64QAM
31
65 to 76
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
67
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Channel Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Scheme
Maximum
Number of E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave
Native Ethernet
Throughput
(Mbit/s)
14 (13.75)
128QAM
37
77 to 90
14 (13.75)
256QAM
43
90 to 104
28 (27.5)
QPSK
20
41 to 48
28 (27.5)
16QAM
40
82 to 97
28 (27.5)
32QAM
52
108 to 125
28 (27.5)
64QAM
64
130 to 150
28 (27.5)
128QAM
75
160 to 180
28 (27.5)
256QAM
75
180 to 210
56 (55)
QPSK
40
82 to 97
56 (55)
16QAM
75
165 to 190
56 (55)
32QAM
75
208 to 240
56 (55)
64QAM
75
260 to 310
56 (55)
128QAM
75
310 to 360
56 (55)
256QAM
75
360 to 420
NOTE
For the integrated IP microwave work mode that the IFU2/IFX2 board supports:
l The throughput specifications listed in the tables are based on untagged Ethernet frames with a length
ranging from 64 bytes to 1518 bytes
l E1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth
remaining after the E1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided
for Ethernet services.
IF Performance
Table 3-47 IF performance
Item
Performance
IF signal
ODU O&M signal
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)
350
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)
140
Modulation scheme
ASK
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)
5.5
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
68
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Item
Performance
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)
Interface impedance (ohm)
10
50
Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem
Table 3-48 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem
Item
Performance
Encoding mode
LDPC encoding
Adaptive timedomain equalizer for
baseband signals
Supported
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-49 Mechanical behavior
Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.79 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 23 W
3.7 IFX2
The IFX2 is a universal IF board that supports the XPIC function in Integrated IP radio mode.
The IFX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.7.1 Version Description
The functional version of the IFX2 is SL91.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
69
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
3.7.2 Functions and Features
The IFX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. The IFX2 supports cross-polarization interference
cancellation (XPIC) processing for IF signals.
Table 3-50 lists the functions and features that the IFX2 supports.
Table 3-50 Functions and features that the IFX2 supports
Function and Feature
Description
Basic functions
l Receives and transmits one IF signal.
l Provides management channels to the ODU.
l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
Radio type
Integrated IP radio
NOTE
Integrated IP radio is compatible with Hybrid radio and Packet
radio.
Service categories
Native E1 + Ethernet
NOTE
Ethernet services can be Native Ethernet services or packet
services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.
AM
Supported
E1 priority
Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode, in which
native TDM services are E1 services
XPIC
Supported
Radio work mode
See Technical Specifications of the IFX2.
Protection
License
Clock at the
physical layer
1+1 HSB/FD/
SD protection
Supported
N+1 protection
Supported
SNCP for TDM
services
Supported
Air interface
capacity license
Supported
AM license
Supported
Clock source
Clock at an air interface
Clock
protection
Supports the following clock protection schemes:
l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
70
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Function and Feature
Description
DCN
Supported.
Inband DCN
The DCN bandwidth is configurable.
Outband DCN
Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC
bytes.
Ethernet service features
See Table 3-51.
MPLS functions
See the description of the MPLS/PWE3 functions that
the system control, switching, and timing board
supports.
PWE3 functions
OM
Loopback
Supports the following loopback types:
l Inloops and outloops at IF ports
l Inloops and outloops at multiplexing ports
l Inloops at the MAC layer of IF_ETH ports
NOTE
An IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port on the IF board
operating in Integrated IP radio mode and is used to receive
or transmit Ethernet services transmitted in Integrated IP
radio mode.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Cold reset and
warm reset
Supported
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
PRBS BER test
at IF ports
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board power
consumption
information
query
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
Board voltage
detection
Supported
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
71
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-51 Ethernet service functions that the IFX2 supports
Function and Feature
Description
Ethernet
services
Supports the following types of E-Line services:
E-Line services
l E-Line services based on ports
l E-Line services based on port+VLAN
l E-Line services carried by QinQ links
l E-Line services carried by PWs
E-LAN services
Supports the following types of E-LAN services:
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
ERPS
Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T
G.8032/Y.1344.
ETH-OAM
l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
l Supports the packet loss, delay, and delay variation
monitoring function that complies with ITU-T Y.
1731.
LAG
Supported
Spanning tree protocol
Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the
CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions
equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.
QoS
See the description of the QoS functions that the system
control, switching, and timing board supports.
RMON
Supported
3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves
as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFX2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
72
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-28 Functional block diagram of the IFX2
Backplane
SMODEM
unit
HSM signal bus
Paired board
Microwave MODEM
unit
frame signal
MUX/DEMUX unit
IF
processing
unit
Paired XPIC
board
Combiner
interface
unit
IF
Service bus
Overhead
bus
Logic
processing
unit
ODU control signal
Ethernet
processing
unit
GE bus
Cross-connect unit
System control and
communication unit
Packet switching unit
XPIC signal
Control bus
System control and
communication unit
Logic
control unit
-48 V power supplied to the ODU
+3.3 V power supplied to the
other units on the board
Power
supply
unit
+3.3 V power supplied to
the monitoring circuit
Clock signal provided to the
other units on the board
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V
Clock
unit
System clock signal
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction
Table 3-52 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFX2
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Combiner interface
unit
Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals
and microwave service signals.
2
SMODEM unit
l Demodulates ODU control signals.
l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system
control and communication unit.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
73
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
3
IF processing unit
l Filters the received signals and splits the signals to two
channels of signals.
– Performs A/D conversion for one channel of
filtered signals and transmits the converted signals
to the MODEM unit.
– Outputs the other channel of filtered signals as the
XPIC signals.
l Performs A/D conversion for XPIC signals
transmitted from the paired IFX2 and transmits the
converted signals to the MODEM unit.
4
MODEM unit
l Performs digital demodulation by using XPIC IF
signals transmitted from the paired IFX2 as reference
signals.
l Performs XPIC operations for IF signals.
l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.
l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific
alarms.
5
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Detects microwave frame headers in Integrated IP
radio mode and generates specific alarms and
performance events.
l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in Integrated
IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and
performance events.
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in Integrated IP
radio mode and generates specific alarms.
l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned
microwave messages in Integrated IP radio mode and
reports the changes to the system control and
communication unit over the control bus.
l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and SSM
bytes in microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode
and transmits the overhead signal to the logic
processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals in Integrated IP radio mode
to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits
the VC-4s to the logic processing unit.
l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave
frames in Integrated IP radio mode and transmits to
the Ethernet processing unit.
6
Ethernet processing
unit
l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/
DEMUX unit.
l Sends the processed signals to the main and standby
packet switching units.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
74
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
7
Logic processing
unit
l Processes clock signals.
l Transmits the overhead signals to the system control
and communication unit.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the main and standby cross-connect units.
NOTE
In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX
unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent
processing.
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-53 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFX2
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Logic processing
unit
l Processes clock signals.
l Processes overhead signals.
l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.
2
3
Ethernet processing
unit
l Receives GE signals from the packet switching unit.
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals.
l Processes GE signals.
l Sets the microwave frame overheads in Integrated IP
radio mode.
l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals and
microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.
4
MODEM unit
l Performs FEC coding.
l Performs digital modulation.
5
IF processing unit
l Performs D/A conversion.
l Performs analog modulation.
l Filters signals.
l Amplifies signals.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
6
SMODEM unit
Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the
system control and communication unit.
7
Combiner interface
unit
Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service
signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the
combined signals to the IF cable.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
75
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Control Signal Processing
The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the
control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the
CPU unit over the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l
Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion.
l
Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the IFX2 after
performing DC-DC conversion.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
3.7.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the
front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
PULL
I
X-IN
X-OUT
O
IFX2
ODU-PWR
IF
XPIC
STAT
SRV
LINK
ODU
RMT
ACT
IFX2
Figure 3-29 Front panel of the IFX2
Indicators
Table 3-54 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Indicator
State
Meaning
XPIC
On (green)
The XPIC input signal is
normal.
On (red)
The XPIC input signal is lost.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
76
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Indicator
STAT
3 Boards
State
Meaning
Off
The XPIC function is
disabled.
On (green)
The board is working
properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.
SRV
LINK
ODU
On (green)
The services are normal.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm
occurs in the services.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm
occurs in the services.
On (green)
The radio link is normal.
On (red)
The radio link is faulty.
On (green)
The ODU is working
properly.
On (red)
l The ODU is reporting
critical or major alarms.
l There is no power
supplied to the ODU.
RMT
ACT
On (yellow)
The ODU is reporting minor
alarms.
Blinks on (yellow) and off at
300 ms intervals
The antennas are not aligned.
On (yellow)
The remote equipment is
reporting defects.
Off
The remote equipment is free
of defects.
On (green)
l In a 1+1 protected system,
the board works as the
active one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board has been
activated.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
77
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
Off
l In a 1+1 protected system,
the board works as the
standby one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board is not activated.
Ports
Table 3-55 Description of the ports
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
IF
IF port
TNC
IF jumperb
ODU-PWRa
ODU power switch
-
-
X-IN
XPIC signal input
port
SMA
XPIC cable
X-OUT
XPIC signal output
port
SMA
NOTE
a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to
first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is
open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.
b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.
The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed
70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. If surface temperature reaches this
level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board.
The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the
IF cable is removed.
The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before
the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.
3.7.5 Valid Slots
The IFX2 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS are the same
as the physical slots.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
78
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Figure 3-30 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (IFX2)
Slot 6 (IFX2)
Slot 3 (IFX2)
Slot 4 (IFX2)
Slot 1 (IFX2)
Slot 2 (IFX2)
An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot
number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the
ODU plus 20.
Figure 3-31 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 25 (ODU)
Slot 26 (ODU)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 21 (ODU)
Slot 22 (ODU)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (IFX2)
Slot 6 (IFX2)
Slot 3 (IFX2)
Slot 4 (IFX2)
Slot 1 (IFX2)
Slot 2 (IFX2)
Table 3-56 Slot allocation
Item
Description
Slot allocation priority
Slots 3 and 5 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and 2
NOTE
Use two IF boards in paired slots to configure a 1+1 FD/SD IF protection group. Specifically, slots 1 and
2, slots 3 and 5, and slots 4 and 6 are paired slots respectively.
NOTE
One IFX2 pair must be installed on the same row or adjacently in the same column.
3.7.6 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFX2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
79
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Related References
A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute
A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes
A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs
A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes
A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes
A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes
3.7.7 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance,
modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Radio Work Modes
Table 3-57 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFX2 board)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Channel Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Scheme
Maximum
Number of E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave
Native Ethernet
Throughput
(Mbit/s)
7
QPSK
4
9 to 11
7
16QAM
9
19 to 23
7
32QAM
11
24 to 29
7
64QAMa
14
31 to 36
14 (13.75)
QPSK
9
20 to 23
14 (13.75)
16QAM
19
40 to 47
14 (13.75)
32QAM
24
50 to 59
14 (13.75)
64QAM
30
63 to 73
14 (13.75)
128QAMa
36
75 to 88
28 (27.5)
QPSK
19
41 to 48
28 (27.5)
16QAM
40
84 to 97
28 (27.5)
32QAM
49
103 to 120
28 (27.5)
64QAM
63
130 to 150
28 (27.5)
128QAM
75
160 to 180
28 (27.5)
256QAM
75
180 to 210
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
80
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Channel Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Scheme
Maximum
Number of E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave
Native Ethernet
Throughput
(Mbit/s)
56 (55)
QPSK
39
83 to 97
56 (55)
16QAM
75
165 to 190
56 (55)
32QAM
75
210 to 245
56 (55)
64QAM
75
260 to 305
56 (55)
128QAM
75
310 to 360
56 (55)
256QAM
75
360 to 410
NOTE
For the IFX2 board, the microwave work modes are the same regardless of whether the XPIC function is
enabled or disabled.
a: When the XPIC function is enabled for the IFX2 board, the 64QAM/7MHz and 128QAM/14MHz
modulation schemes do not apply to ODUs whose frequency band ranges from 26 GHz to 38 GHz.
NOTE
For the integrated IP microwave work mode that the IFU2/IFX2 board supports:
l The throughput specifications listed in the tables are based on untagged Ethernet frames with a length
ranging from 64 bytes to 1518 bytes
l E1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth
remaining after the E1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided
for Ethernet services.
IF Performance
Table 3-58 IF performance
Item
Performance
IF signal
ODU O&M signal
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)
350
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)
140
Modulation scheme
ASK
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)
5.5
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)
10
Interface impedance (ohm)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
81
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem
Table 3-59 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem
Item
Performance
Encoding mode
LDPC encoding
Adaptive timedomain equalizer for
baseband signals
Supported
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-60 Mechanical behavior
Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.80 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 33 W
3.8 ISU2
The ISU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode
at the same time. The ISU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.8.1 Version Description
The functional version of the ISU2 is SL91.
3.8.2 Functions and Features
The ISU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
Table 3-61 lists the functions and features that the ISU2 supports. The ISU2 needs to work with
the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
82
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-61 Functions and features
Function and Feature
Description
Basic functions
l Receives and transmits one IF signal.
l Provides management channels to the ODU.
l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
l Integrated IP radio
Radio type
l SDH radio
NOTE
The Integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio
and the Packet radio.
Service categories in Integrated IP
radio mode
l Native E1 + Ethernet
l Native STM-1 + Ethernet
NOTE
Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet
services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.
Service categories in SDH radio
mode
l STM-1
AM
Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode
Ethernet frame header compression
Supported
E1 priority
Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode with native
TDM services being E1 services
Radio work mode
See Technical Specifications of the ISU2.
Link-level
protection
1+1 HSB/FD/
SD protection
Supported
N+1 protection
Supported
LAG protection
at air interfaces
Supported
TDM service protection
SNCP
K byte pass-through
Supported
PLA
Supported
Ethernet service functions
See Table 3-62.
MPLS functions
See the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions provided
in the section for the system control, switching, and
timing board.
PWE3 functions
License
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
l 2xSTM-1
Air interface
capacity license
Supported
AM license
Supported
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
83
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Function and Feature
Description
Clock at the
physical layer
Clock source
Clock at the air interface
Clock
protection
Supports the following clock protection schemes:
l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
DCN
Inband DCN
Supported
Outband DCN
l Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC
bytes for each channel in Integrated IP radio mode.
l Supports one DCC that is composed of D1-D3
bytes, D4-D12 bytes, or D1-D12 bytes, for each
channel in SDH radio mode.
OM
Loopback
Supports the following loopback types:
l Inloops and outloops at IF ports
l Inloops and outloops at composite ports
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Cold reset and
warm reset
Supported
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
PRBS BER test
at IF ports
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board power
consumption
information
query
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
Board power
detection
Supported
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
84
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-62 Ethernet service functions
Function and Feature
Description
Ethernet
services
Supports the following types of E-Line services:
E-Line services
l E-Line services based on ports
l E-Line services based on port+VLAN
l E-Line services carried by QinQ links
l E-Line services carried by PWs
E-LAN services
Supports the following types of E-LAN services:
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
ERPS
Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T
G.8032/Y.1344.
OAM
l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
l Supports the packet loss, delay, and delay variation
monitoring function that complies with ITU-T Y.
1731.
LAG
Supported
Spanning tree protocol
Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the
CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions
equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.
QoS
See the description of QoS functions provided in the
section for the system control, switching, and timing
board.
RMON
Supported
3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves
as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISU2.
NOTE
The ISU2 adopts the same principle to process signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio mode
and signals transmitted/received in SDH radio mode. The difference is with regard to the microwave frame
structure and processed service categories.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
85
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-32 Functional block diagram of the ISU2
Backplane
SMODEM
unit
HSM signal bus
Microwave
frame signal
Overhead bus
Ethernet
processing
unit
MUX/DEMUX unit
MODEM unit
IF processing
unit
Combiner
interface unit
IF
Service bus
Logic
processing
unit
ODU control signal
GE bus
Control bus
Paired board
Cross-connect unit
System control and
communication unit
Packet switching unit
System control and
communication unit
Logic
control unit
-48 V power supplied to the ODU
+3.3 V power supplied to
the other units on the board
Power
supply
unit
-48 V2
+3.3 V
+3.3 V power supplied to
the monitoring circuit
Clock signal provided to the
other units on the board
-48 V1
Clock
unit
System clock signal
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction
Table 3-63 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISU2
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Combiner interface
unit
Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals
and microwave service signals.
2
SMODEM unit
l Demodulates ODU control signals.
l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system
control and communication unit.
3
IF processing unit
l Filters signals.
l Performs A/D conversion.
4
MODEM unit
l Performs digital demodulation.
l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.
l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific
alarms.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
86
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
5
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Detects microwave frame headers and generates
specific alarms and performance events.
l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames and generates
specific alarms and performance events.
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames and generates
specific alarms and performance events.
l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned
microwave messages and reports the changes to the
system control and communication unit over the
control bus.
l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in
microwave frames and transmits to the logic
processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals to the specific positions in
VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic
processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated
IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and then
transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if
native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are
STM-1 services.
l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave
frams and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.
6
Ethernet processing
unit
l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/
DEMUX unit.
l Sends the processed signals to the main and standby
packet switching units.
7
Logic processing
unit
l Processes clock signals.
l Transmits the overhead signals to the system control
and communication unit.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the main and standby cross-connect units.
NOTE
In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX
unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent
processing.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
87
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-64 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISU2
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Logic processing
unit
l Processes clock signals.
l Processes overhead signals.
l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.
2
3
Ethernet processing
unit
l Receives GE signals from the packet switching unit.
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals that are
from the logic processing unit, if native TDM services
in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Processes GE signals.
l Adds overheads to the VC-4 signals that are from the
logic processing unit to form STM-1 signals, if native
TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1
services.
l Sets microwave frame overheads.
l Combines the E1/STM-1 signals, Ethernet signals,
and microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.
4
MODEM unit
l Performs FEC coding.
l Performs digital modulation.
6
IF processing unit
l Performs D/A conversion.
l Performs analog modulation.
l Filters signals.
l Amplifies signals.
7
SMODEM unit
Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the
system control and communication unit.
8
Combiner interface
unit
Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service
signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the
combined signals to the IF cable.
Control Signal Processing
The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the
control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the
CPU unit over the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
88
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l
Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion.
l
Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the ISU2 after
performing DC-DC conversion.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
3.8.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
PULL
I
O
ISU2
ODU-PWR
IF
STAT
SRV
LINK
ODU
RMT
ACT
ISU2
Figure 3-33 Front panel of the ISU2
Indicators
Table 3-65 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working
properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.
SRV
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
On (green)
The services are normal.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm
occurs in the services.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
89
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Indicator
LINK
ODU
State
Meaning
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm
occurs in the services.
On (green)
The radio link is normal.
On (red)
The radio link is faulty.
On (green)
The ODU is working
properly.
On (red)
l The ODU is reporting
critical or major alarms.
l There is no power
supplied to the ODU.
RMT
ACT
On (yellow)
The ODU is reporting minor
alarms.
Blinks on (yellow) and off at
300 ms intervals
The antennas are not aligned.
On (yellow)
The remote equipment is
reporting defects.
Off
The remote equipment is free
of defects.
On (green)
l In a 1+1 protected system,
the board works as the
active one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board has been
activated.
l In a 1+1 protected system,
the board works as the
standby one.
Off
l In an unprotected system,
the board is not activated.
Ports
Table 3-66 Description of the Ports
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
IF
IF port
TNC
IF jumperb
ODU-PWRa
ODU power switch
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
90
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
NOTE
a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to
first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is
open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.
b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.
The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed
70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. If surface temperature reaches this
level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board.
The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the
IF cable is removed.
The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before
the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.
3.8.5 Valid Slots
The ISU2 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS are the same
as the physical slots.
Figure 3-34 Slots for the ISU2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (ISU2)
Slot 6 (ISU2)
Slot 3 (ISU2)
Slot 4 (ISU2)
Slot 1 (ISU2)
Slot 2 (ISU2)
An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot
number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the
ODU plus 20.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
91
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Figure 3-35 Logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 25 (ODU)
Slot 26 (ODU)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 21 (ODU)
Slot 22 (ODU)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (ISU2)
Slot 6 (ISU2)
Slot 3 (ISU2)
Slot 4 (ISU2)
Slot 1 (ISU2)
Slot 2 (ISU2)
Table 3-67 Slot allocation
Item
Description
Slot allocation priority
Slots 3 and 5 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and 2
NOTE
Use two IF boards in paired slots to configure a 1+1 FD/SD IF protection group. Specifically, slots 1 and
2, slots 3 and 5, and slots 4 and 6 are paired slots respectively.
3.8.6 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISU2.
Related References
A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute
A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes
A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs
A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes
A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes
A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes
3.8.7 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance,
modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
92
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Radio Work Modes
Table 3-68 SDH microwave work modes (ISU2 board)
Service Capacity
Modulation Scheme
Channel Spacing (MHz)
STM-1
128QAM
28 (27.5)
2xSTM-1
128QAM
56 (55)
Table 3-69 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service)
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Scheme
Maximum
Number of
E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave
Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)
Without
Compressio
n
With L2
Frame
Header
Compressio
n
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv4)
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv6)
3.5
QPSK
2
4 to 5
4 to 6
4 to 6
4 to 10
3.5
16QAM
4
9 to 11
9 to 13
9 to 13
9 to 20
7
QPSK
5
10 to 13
10 to 15
10 to 22
10 to 33
7
16QAM
10
20 to 26
20 to 30
20 to 44
20 to 66
7
32QAM
12
25 to 32
25 to 36
25 to 54
25 to 80
7
64QAM
15
31 to 40
31 to 47
31 to 67
31 to 100
7
128QAM
18
37 to 47
37 to 56
37 to 80
37 to 119
7
256QAM
20
41 to 53
41 to 62
41 to 90
42 to 134
14 (13.75)
QPSK
10
20 to 26
20 to 31
20 to 44
20 to 66
14 (13.75)
16QAM
20
41 to 52
41 to 61
41 to 89
41 to 132
14 (13.75)
32QAM
24
51 to 65
51 to 77
51 to 110
51 to 164
14 (13.75)
64QAM
31
65 to 83
65 to 96
65 to 140
65 to 209
14 (13.75)
128QAM
37
76 to 97
76 to 113
76 to 165
76 to 245
14 (13.75)
256QAM
42
87 to 111
87 to 131
87 to 189
88 to 281
28 (27.5)
QPSK
20
41 to 52
41 to 62
41 to 89
41 to 132
28 (27.5)
16QAM
40
82 to 105
82 to 124
82 to 178
83 to 265
28 (27.5)
32QAM
52
107 to 136
107 to 161
107 to 230
107 to 343
28 (27.5)
64QAM
64
131 to 168
131 to 198
131 to 283
132 to 424
28 (27.5)
128QAM
75
155 to 198
155 to 233
155 to 333
156 to 495
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
93
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Scheme
Maximum
Number of
E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave
Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)
Without
Compressio
n
With L2
Frame
Header
Compressio
n
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv4)
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv6)
28 (27.5)
256QAM
75
181 to 230
181 to 272
181 to 388
182 to 577
40
QPSK
27
56 to 72
56 to 84
56 to 122
57 to 182
40
16QAM
55
114 to 145
114 to 172
114 to 247
114 to 366
40
32QAM
71
147 to 187
147 to 221
147 to 318
148 to 474
40
64QAM
75
181 to 230
181 to 272
181 to 388
182 to 583
40
128QAM
75
215 to 272
215 to 323
215 to 456
216 to 691
40
256QAM
75
249 to 318
249 to 375
249 to 538
251 to 800
56 (55)
QPSK
40
82 to 105
82 to 124
82 to 178
83 to 265
56 (55)
16QAM
75
166 to 212
166 to 250
165 to 356
167 to 533
56 (55)
32QAM
75
206 to 262
206 to 308
206 to 437
207 to 659
56 (55)
64QAM
75
262 to 333
262 to 388
262 to 567
264 to 836
56 (55)
128QAM
75
309 to 396
309 to 466
309 to 656
311 to 983
56 (55)
256QAM
75
360 to 456
360 to 538
360 to 777
362 to 1000
Table 3-70 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service)
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Scheme
Number of
STM-1
Services in
Hybrid
Microwave
Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)
Without
Compressio
n
With L2
Frame
Header
Compressio
n
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv4)
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv6)
28 (27.5)
128QAM
1
155 to 198
155 to 233
155 to 333
156 to 495
28 (27.5)
256QAM
1
181 to 230
181 to 272
181 to 388
182 to 577
40
64QAM
1
181 to 230
181 to 272
181 to 388
182 to 583
40
128QAM
1
215 to 272
215 to 323
215 to 456
216 to 691
40
256QAM
1
249 to 318
249 to 375
249 to 538
251 to 800
56 (55)
16QAM
1
166 to 212
166 to 250
165 to 356
167 to 533
56 (55)
32QAM
1
206 to 262
206 to 308
206 to 437
207 to 659
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
94
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Scheme
Number of
STM-1
Services in
Hybrid
Microwave
Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)
Without
Compressio
n
With L2
Frame
Header
Compressio
n
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv4)
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv6)
56 (55)
64QAM
1
262 to 333
262 to 388
262 to 567
264 to 836
56 (55)
128QAM
1
309 to 396
309 to 466
309 to 656
311 to 983
56 (55)
256QAM
1
360 to 456
360 to 538
360 to 777
362 to 1000
NOTE
For the integrated IP microwave work mode that the ISU2/ISX2 board supports:
l The throughput specifications listed in the tables are based on the following conditions.
l Without compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes
l With L2 frame header compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to
9600 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv4): untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from
64 bytes to 9600 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv6): S-tagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 92
bytes to 9600 bytes
l E1/STM-1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth
remaining after the E1/STM-1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided
for Ethernet services.
IF Performance
Table 3-71 IF performance
Item
Performance
IF signal
ODU O&M signal
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)
350
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)
140
Modulation scheme
ASK
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)
5.5
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)
10
Interface impedance (ohm)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
95
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem
Table 3-72 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem
Item
Performance
Encoding mode
LDPC encoding
Adaptive timedomain equalizer for
baseband signals
Supported
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-73 Mechanical behavior
Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.60 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 22 W
3.9 ISX2
The ISX2 is a universal XPIC IF board and provides the XPIC function for signals transmitted/
received in Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode. The ISX2 uses the DC-I power
distribution mode.
3.9.1 Version Description
The functional version of the ISX2 is SL91.
3.9.2 Functions and Features
The ISX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. In addition, the ISX2 provides the crosspolarization interference cancellation (XPIC) function for IF signals by transmitting/receiving
XPIC reference signals.
Table 3-74 lists the functions and features that the ISX2 supports. The ISX2 needs to work with
the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions and packet service functions.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
96
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-74 Functions and features
Function and Feature
Description
Basic functions
l Receives and transmits one IF signal.
l Provides management channels to the ODU.
l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
l Integrated IP radio
Radio type
l SDH radio
NOTE
The integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio
and the Packet radio.
Service categories in Integrated IP
radio mode
l Native E1 + Ethernet
l Native STM-1 + Ethernet
NOTE
Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet
services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.
Service categories in SDH radio
mode
l STM-1
AM
Supported only in integrated IP radio mode
Ethernet frame header compression
Supported
E1 priority
Supported only in integrated IP radio mode with native
TDM services being E1 services
XPIC
Supported
Radio work mode
See Technical Specifications of the ISX2.
Link-level
protection
1+1 HSB/FD/
SD protection
Supported
N+1 protection
Supported
LAG protection
at air interfaces
Supported
TDM service protection
SNCP
K byte pass-through
Supported
PLA
Supported
Ethernet service functions
See Table 3-75.
MPLS functions
See the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions provided
in the section for the system control, switching, and
timing board.
PWE3 functions
License
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
l 2xSTM-1
Air interface
capacity license
Supported
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
97
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Function and Feature
Clock at the
physical layer
3 Boards
Description
AM license
Supported
Clock source
Clock at the air interface
Clock
protection
Supports the following clock protection schemes:
l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
DCN
Inband DCN
Supported
Outband DCN
l Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC
bytes for each channel in Integrated IP radio mode.
l Supports one DCC that is composed of D1-D3
bytes, D4-D12 bytes, or D1-D12 bytes, for each
channel in SDH radio mode.
OM
Loopback
Supports the following loopback types:
l Inloops and outloops at IF ports
l Inloops and outloops at composite ports
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Cold reset and
warm reset
Supported
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
PRBS BER test
at IF ports
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board power
consumption
information
query
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
Board power
detection
Supported
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
98
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-75 Ethernet service functions
Function and Feature
Description
Ethernet
services
Supports the following types of E-Line services:
E-Line services
l E-Line services based on ports
l E-Line services based on port+VLAN
l E-Line services carried by QinQ links
l E-Line services carried by PWs
E-LAN services
Supports the following types of E-LAN services:
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
ERPS
Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T
G.8032/Y.1344.
OAM
l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
l Supports the packet loss, delay, and delay variation
monitoring function that complies with ITU-T Y.
1731.
LAG
Supported
Spanning tree protocol
Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the
CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions
equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.
QoS
See the description of QoS functions provided in the
section for the system control, switching, and timing
board.
RMON
Supported
3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves
as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISX2.
NOTE
The ISX2 adopts the same principle to process signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio mode
and signals transmitted/received in SDH radio mode. The difference is with regard to the microwave frame
structure and processed service types.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
99
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-36 Functional block diagram of the ISX2
Backplane
SMODEM
unit
HSM signal bus
Paired board
Microwave MODEM
unit
frame signal
MUX/DEMUX unit
IF
processing
unit
Paired XPIC
board
Combiner
interface
unit
IF
Service bus
Overhead
bus
Logic
processing
unit
ODU control signal
Ethernet
processing
unit
GE bus
Cross-connect unit
System control and
communication unit
Packet switching unit
XPIC signal
Control bus
System control and
communication unit
Logic
control unit
-48 V power supplied to the ODU
+3.3 V power supplied to the
other units on the board
Power
supply
unit
+3.3 V power supplied to
the monitoring circuit
Clock signal provided to the
other units on the board
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V
Clock
unit
System clock signal
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction
Table 3-76 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISX2
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Combiner interface
unit
Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals
and microwave service signals.
2
SMODEM unit
l Demodulates ODU control signals.
l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system
control and communication unit.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
100
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
3
IF processing unit
l Filters the received signals and splits the signals to two
channels of signals.
– Performs A/D conversion for one channel of
filtered signals and transmits the converted signals
to the MODEM unit.
– Outputs the other channel of filtered signals as the
XPIC signals.
l Performs A/D conversion for XPIC signals
transmitted from the paired ISX2 and transmits the
converted signals to the MODEM unit.
4
MODEM unit
l Performs digital demodulation by using XPIC IF
signals transmitted from the paired ISX2 as reference
signals.
l Performs XPIC operations for IF signals.
l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.
l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific
alarms.
5
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Detects microwave frame headers and generates
specific alarms and performance events.
l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames and generates
specific alarms and performance events.
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames and generates
specific alarms and performance events.
l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned
microwave messages and reports the changes to the
system control and communication unit over the
control bus.
l Extracts auxiliary channel bytes including orderwire
bytes, F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in
microwave frames and transmits to the logic
processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals to the specific positions in
VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic
processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated
IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and then
transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if
native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are
STM-1 services.
l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave
frams and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
101
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
6
Ethernet processing
unit
l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/
DEMUX unit.
l Sends the processed signals to the main and standby
packet switching units.
7
Logic processing
unit
l Processes clock signals.
l Transmits the overhead signals to the system control
and communication unit.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the main and standby cross-connect units.
NOTE
In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX
unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent
processing.
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-77 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISX2
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Logic processing
unit
l Processes clock signals.
l Processes overhead signals.
l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.
2
3
Ethernet processing
unit
l Receives GE signals from the packet switching unit.
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals that are
from the logic processing unit, if native TDM services
in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Processes GE signals.
l Adds overheads to the VC-4 signals that are from the
logic processing unit to form STM-1 signals, if native
TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1
services.
l Sets microwave frame overheads.
l Combines the E1/STM-1 signals, Ethernet signals,
and microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.
4
MODEM unit
l Performs FEC coding.
l Performs digital modulation.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
102
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
5
IF processing unit
l Performs D/A conversion.
l Performs analog modulation.
l Filters signals.
l Amplifies signals.
6
SMODEM unit
Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the
system control and communication unit.
7
Combiner interface
unit
Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service
signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the
combined signals to the IF cable.
Control Signal Processing
The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the
control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the
CPU unit over the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l
Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion.
l
Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the ISU2 after
performing DC-DC conversion.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
3.9.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the
front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
PULL
I
X-IN
X-OUT
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
O
ISX2
ODU-PWR
IF
XPIC
STAT
SRV
LINK
ODU
RMT
ACT
ISX2
Figure 3-37 Front panel of the ISX2
103
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Indicators
Table 3-78 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2
Indicator
State
Meaning
XPIC
On (green)
The XPIC input signal is
normal.
On (red)
The XPIC input signal is lost.
Off
The XPIC function is
disabled.
On (green)
The board is working
properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working.
STAT
l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.
SRV
LINK
ODU
On (green)
The services are normal.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm
occurs in the services.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm
occurs in the services.
On (green)
The radio link is normal.
On (red)
The radio link is faulty.
On (green)
The ODU is working
properly.
On (red)
l The ODU is reporting
critical or major alarms.
l There is no power
supplied to the ODU.
RMT
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
On (yellow)
The ODU is reporting minor
alarms.
Blinks on (yellow) and off at
300 ms intervals
The antennas are not aligned.
On (yellow)
The remote equipment is
reporting defects.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
104
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Indicator
ACT
State
Meaning
Off
The remote equipment is free
of defects.
On (green)
l In a 1+1 protected system,
the board works as the
active one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board has been
activated.
l In a 1+1 protected system,
the board works as the
standby one.
Off
l In an unprotected system,
the board is not activated.
Ports
Table 3-79 Description of the ports
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
IF
IF port
TNC
IF jumperb
ODU-PWRa
ODU power switch
-
-
X-IN
XPIC signal input
port
SMA
XPIC cable
X-OUT
XPIC signal output
port
SMA
NOTE
a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to
first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is
open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.
b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.
The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed
70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. If surface temperature reaches this
level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
105
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the
IF cable is removed.
The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before
the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.
3.9.5 Valid Slots
The ISX2 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS are the same
as the physical slots.
Figure 3-38 Slots for the ISX2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (ISX2)
Slot 6 (ISX2)
Slot 3 (ISX2)
Slot 4 (ISX2)
Slot 1 (ISX2)
Slot 2 (ISX2)
An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot
number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the
ODU plus 20.
Figure 3-39 Logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 25 (ODU)
Slot 26 (ODU)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 21 (ODU)
Slot 22 (ODU)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (ISX2)
Slot 6 (ISX2)
Slot 3 (ISX2)
Slot 4 (ISX2)
Slot 1 (ISX2)
Slot 2 (ISX2)
Table 3-80 Slot allocation
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Item
Description
Slot allocation priority
Slots 3 and 5 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and 2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
106
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
NOTE
Use two IF boards in paired slots to configure a 1+1 FD/SD IF protection group. Specifically, slots 1 and
2, slots 3 and 5, and slots 4 and 6 are paired slots respectively.
NOTE
One ISX2 pair for implementing the XPIC function must be installed on the same row or adjacently in the
same column.
3.9.6 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISX2.
Related References
A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute
A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes
A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs
A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes
A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes
A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes
3.9.7 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance,
modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Radio Work Modes
Table 3-81 SDH microwave work modes (ISX2 board)
Service Capacity
Modulation Scheme
Channel Spacing (MHz)
STM-1
128QAM
28 (27.5)
2xSTM-1
128QAM
56 (55)
NOTE
For the ISX2 board in SDH service mode, the microwave work modes are the same regardless of whether
the XPIC function is enabled or disabled.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
107
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-82 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service, XPIC disabled)
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Scheme
Maximum
Number of
E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave
Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)
Without
Compressio
n
With L2
Frame
Header
Compressio
n
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv4)
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv6)
7
QPSK
5
10 to 13
10 to 15
10 to 22
10 to 33
7
16QAM
10
20 to 26
20 to 30
20 to 44
20 to 66
7
32QAM
12
25 to 32
25 to 36
25 to 54
25 to 80
7
64QAM
15
31 to 40
31 to 47
31 to 67
31 to 100
7
128QAM
18
37 to 47
37 to 56
37 to 80
37 to 119
7
256QAM
20
41 to 53
41 to 62
41 to 90
42 to 134
14 (13.75)
QPSK
10
20 to 26
20 to 31
20 to 44
20 to 66
14 (13.75)
16QAM
20
41 to 52
41 to 61
41 to 89
41 to 132
14 (13.75)
32QAM
24
51 to 65
51 to 77
51 to 110
51 to 164
14 (13.75)
64QAM
31
65 to 83
65 to 96
65 to 140
65 to 209
14 (13.75)
128QAM
37
76 to 97
76 to 113
76 to 165
76 to 245
14 (13.75)
256QAM
42
87 to 111
87 to 131
87 to 189
88 to 281
28 (27.5)
QPSK
20
41 to 52
41 to 62
41 to 89
41 to 132
28 (27.5)
16QAM
40
82 to 105
82 to 124
82 to 178
83 to 265
28 (27.5)
32QAM
52
107 to 136
107 to 161
107 to 230
107 to 343
28 (27.5)
64QAM
64
131 to 168
131 to 198
131 to 283
132 to 424
28 (27.5)
128QAM
75
155 to 198
155 to 233
155 to 333
156 to 495
28 (27.5)
256QAM
75
181 to 230
181 to 272
181 to 388
182 to 577
40
QPSK
27
56 to 72
56 to 84
56 to 122
57 to 182
40
16QAM
55
114 to 145
114 to 172
114 to 247
114 to 366
40
32QAM
71
147 to 187
147 to 221
147 to 318
148 to 474
40
64QAM
75
181 to 230
181 to 272
181 to 388
182 to 583
40
128QAM
75
215 to 272
215 to 323
215 to 456
216 to 691
40
256QAM
75
249 to 318
249 to 375
249 to 538
251 to 800
56 (55)
QPSK
40
82 to 105
82 to 124
82 to 178
83 to 265
56 (55)
16QAM
75
166 to 212
166 to 250
165 to 356
167 to 533
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
108
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Scheme
Maximum
Number of
E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave
Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)
Without
Compressio
n
With L2
Frame
Header
Compressio
n
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv4)
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv6)
56 (55)
32QAM
75
206 to 262
206 to 308
206 to 437
207 to 659
56 (55)
64QAM
75
262 to 333
262 to 388
262 to 567
264 to 836
56 (55)
128QAM
75
309 to 396
309 to 466
309 to 656
311 to 983
56 (55)
256QAM
75
360 to 456
360 to 538
360 to 777
362 to 1000
Table 3-83 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service, XPIC enabled)
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Scheme
Maximum
Number of
E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave
Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)
Without
Compressio
n
With L2
Frame
Header
Compressio
n
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv4)
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv6)
7
QPSK
4
10 to 13
10 to 15
10 to 22
10 to 33
7
16QAM
9
20 to 26
20 to 30
20 to 44
20 to 66
7
32QAM
11
25 to 32
25 to 36
25 to 54
25 to 80
7
64QAMa
14
31 to 40
31 to 47
31 to 67
31 to 100
14 (13.75)
QPSK
9
20 to 26
20 to 31
20 to 44
20 to 66
14 (13.75)
16QAM
19
41 to 52
41 to 61
41 to 89
41 to 132
14 (13.75)
32QAM
24
51 to 65
51 to 77
51 to 110
51 to 164
14 (13.75)
64QAM
30
65 to 83
65 to 96
65 to 140
65 to 209
14 (13.75)
128QAMa
36
76 to 97
76 to 113
76 to 165
76 to 245
28 (27.5)
QPSK
20
41 to 52
41 to 62
41 to 89
41 to 132
28 (27.5)
16QAM
40
82 to 105
82 to 124
82 to 178
83 to 265
28 (27.5)
32QAM
52
107 to 136
107 to 161
107 to 230
107 to 343
28 (27.5)
64QAM
64
131 to 168
131 to 198
131 to 283
132 to 424
28 (27.5)
128QAM
75
155 to 198
155 to 233
155 to 333
156 to 495
28 (27.5)
256QAM
75
181 to 230
181 to 272
181 to 388
182 to 577
40
QPSK
27
56 to 72
56 to 84
56 to 122
57 to 182
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
109
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Scheme
Maximum
Number of
E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave
Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)
Without
Compressio
n
With L2
Frame
Header
Compressio
n
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv4)
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv6)
40
16QAM
55
114 to 145
114 to 172
114 to 247
114 to 366
40
32QAM
71
147 to 187
147 to 221
147 to 318
148 to 474
40
64QAM
75
181 to 230
181 to 272
181 to 388
182 to 583
40
128QAM
75
215 to 272
215 to 323
215 to 456
216 to 691
40
256QAM
75
249 to 318
249 to 375
249 to 538
251 to 800
56 (55)
QPSK
40
82 to 105
82 to 124
82 to 178
83 to 265
56 (55)
16QAM
75
166 to 212
166 to 250
165 to 356
167 to 533
56 (55)
32QAM
75
206 to 262
206 to 308
206 to 437
207 to 659
56 (55)
64QAM
75
262 to 333
262 to 388
262 to 567
264 to 836
56 (55)
128QAM
75
309 to 396
309 to 466
309 to 656
311 to 983
56 (55)
256QAM
75
360 to 456
360 to 538
360 to 777
362 to 1000
NOTE
a: In 7MHz/64QAM or 14MHz/128QAM mode, ISX2 boards do not support cooperation with 26 GHz to 38 GHz ODUs if XPIC
is enabled on the ISX2 boards.
Table 3-84 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service)
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Scheme
Number of
STM-1
Services in
Hybrid
Microwave
Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)
Without
Compressio
n
With L2
Frame
Header
Compressio
n
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv4)
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv6)
28 (27.5)
128QAM
1
155 to 198
155 to 233
155 to 333
156 to 495
28 (27.5)
256QAM
1
181 to 230
181 to 272
181 to 388
182 to 577
40
64QAM
1
181 to 230
181 to 272
181 to 388
182 to 583
40
128QAM
1
215 to 272
215 to 323
215 to 456
216 to 691
40
256QAM
1
249 to 318
249 to 375
249 to 538
251 to 800
56 (55)
16QAM
1
166 to 212
166 to 250
165 to 356
167 to 533
56 (55)
32QAM
1
206 to 262
206 to 308
206 to 437
207 to 659
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
110
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Scheme
Number of
STM-1
Services in
Hybrid
Microwave
Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)
Without
Compressio
n
With L2
Frame
Header
Compressio
n
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv4)
With L2+L3
Frame
Header
Compressio
n (IPv6)
56 (55)
64QAM
1
262 to 333
262 to 388
262 to 567
264 to 836
56 (55)
128QAM
1
309 to 396
309 to 466
309 to 656
311 to 983
56 (55)
256QAM
1
360 to 456
360 to 538
360 to 777
362 to 1000
NOTE
For the ISX2 board in STM-1 + Ethernet service mode, the microwave work modes are the same regardless of whether the XPIC
function is enabled or disabled.
NOTE
For the integrated IP microwave work mode that the ISU2/ISX2 board supports:
l The throughput specifications listed in the tables are based on the following conditions.
l Without compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes
l With L2 frame header compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to
9600 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv4): untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from
64 bytes to 9600 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv6): S-tagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 92
bytes to 9600 bytes
l E1/STM-1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth
remaining after the E1/STM-1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided
for Ethernet services.
IF Performance
Table 3-85 IF performance
Item
Performance
IF signal
ODU O&M signal
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)
350
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)
140
Modulation scheme
ASK
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)
5.5
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)
10
Interface impedance (ohm)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
111
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem
Table 3-86 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem
Item
Performance
Encoding mode
LDPC encoding
Adaptive timedomain equalizer for
baseband signals
Supported
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-87 Mechanical behavior
Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.60 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 23 W
3.10 EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA
The EM6T/EM6F/EM6TA/EM6FA is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE
electrical ports and two GE ports. The EM6T/EM6TA has similar functions to the EM6F/
EM6FA. The only difference is as follows: The GE ports on the EM6T/EM6TA use fixed
electrical ports whereas the GE ports on the EM6F/EM6FA use the SFP modules and therefore
can function as two FE/GE optical or GE electrical ports. The GE electrical ports on the
EM6F/EM6FA and the EM6T/EM6TA are compatible with the FE electrical ports.
NOTE
EM6TA/EM6FA boards have the same functions as EM6T/EM6F boards. The only difference is that
EM6TA/EM6FA boards reserve hardware resources for the IEEE 1588v2 function.
3.10.1 Version Description
The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F/EM6TA/EM6FA is SL91.
3.10.2 Functions and Features
The EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA receives/transmits, processes, and converges four FE
signals and two GE signals. The GE port on the EM6F/EM6FA can receive/transmit 2xFE optical
signals using FE small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical modules.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
112
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-88 lists the functions and features that the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA supports.
The EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA needs to work with the packet switching unit of the system
control, switching, and timing board to implement Ethernet service functions.
Table 3-88 Functions and features
Function and Feature
Description
EM6T/EM6TA
Basic functions
Port
specifications
EM6F/EM6FA
Receives/Transmits FE/GE service signals and works
with the packet switching unit to process the received
FE/GE service signals.
FE electrical
port
Provides four
10/100BASE-T(X) ports.
Provides four
10/100BASE-T(X) ports.
GE port
Provides two
10/100/1000BASE-T(X)
ports (fixed).
Provides two GE ports by
using SFP modules of any
of the following types:
l Dual-fiber
bidirectional FE/GE
optical module
l Colored CWDM GE
optical module
l Single-fiber
bidirectional FE/GE
module
l 10/100/1000BASE-T
(X) GE electrical
module
Backplane bus bandwidth
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
1 Gbit/s
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1 Gbit/s
113
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Function and Feature
3 Boards
Description
EM6T/EM6TA
Port attributes
Working mode
EM6F/EM6FA
l The FE electrical ports on EM6T/EM6F boards
support 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M
full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, and autonegotiation.
l The FE electrical ports on EM6TA/EM6FA boards
support 10M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex, and
auto-negotiation.
l The GE electrical ports on EM6T/EM6F boards
support 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M
full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, 1000M full-duplex,
and auto-negotiation.
l The GE electrical ports on EM6TA/EM6FA boards
support 10M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex,
1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation.
l The FE optical ports on EM6F/EM6FA boards
support 100M full-duplex and auto-negotiation.
l The GE optical ports support 1000M full-duplex
and auto-negotiation.
TAG attributes
l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access,
or hybrid.
l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet
port.
Services
Jumbo frame
Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame length
of 9600 bytes.
Traffic control
function
Supports the port-based traffic control function that
complies with IEEE 802.3x.
E-Line services
Supports the following types of E-Line services:
l E-Line services based on ports
l E-Line services based on port+VLAN
l E-Line services based on port+QinQ
E-LAN services
Supports the following types of E-LAN services:
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
LAG
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Inter-board
LAG
Supported
Supported
Intra-board
LAG
Supported
Supported
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
114
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Function and Feature
3 Boards
Description
EM6T/EM6TA
EM6F/EM6FA
ERPS
Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T
G.8032/Y.1344.
Spanning tree protocol
Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the
CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions
equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.
LPT
Supported
QoS
Supported
DiffServ
Supports simple traffic classification by specifying
PHB service classes for service flows based on their
QoS information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN
priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values) carried
by the packets.
Complex traffic
classification
Supports traffic classification at Ethernet ports based
on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, SVLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities,
S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values
carried by packets.
CAR
Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports.
Shaping
Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, prioritized
queue, or traffic flow.
Queue
scheduling
policies
Supports the following queue scheduling policies:
l SP
l WRR
l SP+WRR
ETH OAM
Ethernet service
OAM
l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
l Supports the packet loss, delay, and delay variation
monitoring function that complies with ITU-T Y.
1731.
Ethernet port
OAM
RMON
Clock
Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
Supported
Supported
Clock source
Synchronous Ethernet
Synchronous Ethernet
(not supported by the SFP
electrical module)
Clock
protection
Supports the following clock protection schemes:
l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
115
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Function and Feature
3 Boards
Description
EM6T/EM6TA
EM6F/EM6FA
DCN
Inband DCN
Each FE/GE port provides one inband DCN channel.
OM
Loopback
Supports the following loopback types:
l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports
l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports
Warm reset and
cold reset
Supported
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Supported
Board power
consumption
information
query
Supported
Supported
Board voltage
detection
Supported
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
Supported
Query of SFP
module
information
Not supported
Supported
3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one GE signal on the EM6T/EM6TA, and it serves as an
example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/
EM6FA.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
116
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-40 Functional block diagram
Backplane
GE signal
GE signal
GE signal
access unit
Control signal
Ethernet
processing
unit
FE signal
FE signal
access unit
Ethernet
signal
Logic
processing
unit
Ethernet
signal
Packet switching unit
Control signal
FE signal
Control bus of the board
Logic
control unit
Control bus
+3.3 V power supplied to the
board
Power
supply unit
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V power supplied to some I/O
circuits on the board
Clock signal provided to the
other units on the board
System control and
communication unit
+3.3 V
Clock unit
System clock signal
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction
Table 3-89 Signal processing in the receive direction
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
GE signal access
unit/FE signal access
unit
l Receives/Transmits GE/FE signals.
l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel
conversion for GE/FE signals.
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping,
CRC checks, and Ethernet performance measurement
for frame signals.
2
Ethernet processing
unit
l Adds tags identifying ingress ports to Ethernet data
frames.
l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames.
l Processes labels in MPLS/PWE3 packets.
l Performs QoS processing such as traffic classification
and CAR traffic monitoring for Ethernet data frames.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the logic processing
unit.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
117
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
3
Logic processing
unit
Transmits Ethernet data frames to the main and standby
packet switching units.
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-90 Signal processing in the transmit direction
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Logic processing unit
l Selects Ethernet data frames from the packet
switching unit.
l Transmits Ethernet data frames to the Ethernet
processing unit.
2
Ethernet processing
unit
l Processes labels in MPLS/PWE3 packets.
l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames.
l Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and
queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames to proper egress ports
based on egress tags contained in the Ethernet data
frames.
3
GE signal access
unit/FE signal access
unit
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC
code computing, and Ethernet performance
measurement.
l Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for
Ethernet data frames, and sends out the generated GE/
FE signals through Ethernet ports.
Control Signal Processing
The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access unit by using management control
signals.
The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit and logic processing unit over the
control bus on the board.
The logic control unit communicates with the main and standby system control and
communication units over the system control bus. The configuration data and query commands
from the system control and communication unit are issued to the various units of the board
through the logic control unit. The command response reported by each unit on the board, and
the alarms and performance events are reported to the system control and communication unit
also through the logic control unit.
Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit performs the following functions:
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
118
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
l
Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power supplies
into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
l
Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and then supplies the +3.3 V power
to some I/O circuits on the board.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
3.10.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, FE service ports, and GE service ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
STAT
PROG
SRV
EM6T
Figure 3-41 Front panel of the EM6T
GE1
GE2
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
STAT
PROG
SRV
EM6TA
Figure 3-42 Front panel of the EM6TA
GE1
GE2
EM6F
STAT
PROG
SRV
LINK1
LINK2
Figure 3-43 Front panel of the EM6F
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
GE1
GE2
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
GE2
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
STAT
PROG
SRV
L/A1
L/A2
EM6FA
Figure 3-44 Front panel of the EM6FA
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
GE1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
119
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Indicators
Table 3-91 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV
PROG
On (green)
The system is working properly.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the
system.
On (yellow)
A minor alarm occurs in the system.
Off
There is no power supplied to the system.
Blinks on (green) and off at
100 ms intervals
Software is being loaded to the board during
the power-on or resetting process of the
board.
Blinks on (green) and off at
300 ms intervals
The board software is in BIOS boot state
during the power-on or resetting process of
the board.
On (green)
l When the board is being powered on or
being reset, the upper layer software is
being initialized.
l When the board is running, the software
is running normally.
Blinks on (red) and off at 100
ms intervals
The BOOTROM self-check fails during the
power-on or resetting process of the board.
On (red)
l The memory self-check fails or loading
upper layer software fails during the
power-on or resetting process of the
board.
l The logic file or upper layer software is
lost during the running process of the
board.
l The pluggable storage card is faulty.
LINK1a
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
On (green)
The GE1 port is connected correctly and is
not receiving or transmitting data.
Blinking (green)
The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting
data.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
120
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Indicator
LINK2a
3 Boards
State
Meaning
Off
The GE1 port is not connected or is
connected incorrectly.
On (green)
The GE2 port is connected correctly and is
not receiving or transmitting data.
Blinking (green)
The GE2 port is receiving or transmitting
data.
Off
The GE2 port is not connected or is
connected incorrectly.
NOTE
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the
corresponding GE ports.
Table 3-92 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6TA/EM6FA
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV
PROG
On (green)
The system is working properly.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the
system.
On (yellow)
A minor alarm occurs in the system.
Off
There is no power supplied to the system.
Blinks on (green) and off at
100 ms intervals
Software is being loaded to the board during
the power-on or resetting process of the
board.
Blinks on (green) and off at
300 ms intervals
The board software is in BIOS boot state
during the power-on or resetting process of
the board.
On (green)
l When the board is being powered on or
being reset, the upper layer software is
being initialized.
l When the board is running, the software
is running normally.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
121
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Indicator
3 Boards
State
Meaning
Blinks on (red) and off at 100
ms intervals
The BOOTROM self-check fails during the
power-on or resetting process of the board.
On (red)
The memory self-check fails or loading
upper layer software fails during the poweron or resetting process of the board.
The logic file or upper layer software is lost
during the running process of the board.
The pluggable storage card is faulty.
L/A1a
L/A2a
On (green)
The GE1 port is connected correctly and is
not receiving or transmitting data.
Blinking (yellow)
The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting
data.
Off
The GE1 port is not connected or is
connected incorrectly.
On (green)
The GE2 port is connected correctly and is
not receiving or transmitting data.
Blinking (yellow)
The GE2 port is receiving or transmitting
data.
Off
The GE2 port is not connected or is
connected incorrectly.
NOTE
a: The L/A1 and L/A2 indicators are available only on the EM6FA and indicate the states of the
corresponding GE ports.
Ports
Table 3-93 Description of the ports on the EM6T/EM6TA
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
GE1
GE service port (fixed
electrical port)
RJ45
Network cable
GE2
FE1
FE service port
FE2
FE3
FE4
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
122
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-94 Description of the ports on the EM6F/EM6FA
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
GE1
GE service port (using SFP
modules)
RJ45 SFP electrical
module/LC SFP optical
module
5.9 Network Cable/5.5
Fiber Jumper
FE service port
RJ45
5.9 Network Cable
GE2
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
NOTE
On the NMS, GE1 and GE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively; FE1 to FE4 correspond to
PORT3 to PORT6 respectively.
The performance of the FE service ports on the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA complies with
the 10/100BASE-T(X) standard; the performance of the GE service ports on the EM6T/
EM6TA complies with the 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard; the performance of the GE service
ports on the EM6F/EM6FA complies with the 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard if SFP
electrical modules are used. All service ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X
modes. For the pin assignments for the ports, see Table 3-95 and Table 3-96. For the front view
of an RJ45 connector, see Figure 3-45.
Figure 3-45 Front view of the RJ45 connector
87654321
Table 3-95 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode
Pin
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
1
TX+
Transmitting data (+)
BIDA+
Bidirectional data wire A
(+)
2
TX-
Transmitting data (-)
BIDA-
Bidirectional data wire A
(-)
3
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+
Bidirectional data wire B
(+)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
123
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Pin
3 Boards
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
4
Reserved
-
BIDC+
Bidirectional data wire C
(+)
5
Reserved
-
BIDC-
Bidirectional data wire C
(-)
6
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-
Bidirectional data wire B
(-)
7
Reserved
-
BIDD+
Bidirectional data wire D
(+)
8
Reserved
-
BIDD-
Bidirectional data wire D
(-)
Table 3-96 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
1
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+
Bidirectional data wire B
(+)
2
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-
Bidirectional data wire B
(-)
3
TX+
Transmitting data (+)
BIDA+
Bidirectional data wire A
(+)
4
Reserved
-
BIDD+
Bidirectional data wire D
(+)
5
Reserved
-
BIDD-
Bidirectional data wire D
(-)
6
TX-
Transmitting data (-)
BIDA-
Bidirectional data wire A
(-)
7
Reserved
-
BIDC+
Bidirectional data wire C
(+)
8
Reserved
-
BIDC-
Bidirectional data wire C
(-)
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table
3-97.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
124
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-97 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector
Indicator
State
Meaning
LINK (green)
On
The link is working properly.
Off
The link is interrupted.
On or blinking
The port is transmitting or receiving
data.
Off
The port is not transmitting or
receiving data.
ACT (yellow)
When the SFP ports on the EM6F/EM6FA function as optical ports, optical modules are required.
l
When dual-fiber bidirectional SFP optical modules are used to provide ports, one SFP
optical module provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-46, in
which TX represents the transmit port and RX represents the receive port. One optical fiber
is connected to each port.
l
When single-fiber bidirectional optical modules are used to provide ports, one optical
module provides only the port on the left. This port is an optical port that can receive and
transmit service signals. One optical fiber is connected to this port.
Figure 3-46 Ports of an SFP optical module
TX
RX
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EM6F/EM6FA.
The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical port is CLASS 1.
That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
3.10.5 Valid Slots
The EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the EM6T/
EM6F on the NMS are the same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-47 Slots for the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 7
Slot 11 Slot 5 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)
(FAN) Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 1 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Slot 8
Slot 6 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)
Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)
Slot 2 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
125
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Figure 3-48 Logical slots of the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA on the NMS
Slot 7
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 8
Slot 11 Slot 5 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)
(FAN) Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 1 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)
Slot 6 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)
Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)
Slot 2 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)
Table 3-98 Slot allocation
Item
Description
Slot allocation priority
Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 3 and 5
3.10.6 Types of SFP Modules
The FE/GE small form-factor pluggable (SFP) ports on the EM6F/EM6FA support multiple
types of SFP modules.
Table 3-99 Types of SFP modules that the FE/GE port supports
Category
Part Number
Type
Wavelength and
Transmission
Distance
Dual-fiber
bidirectional GE
module
34060286
1000Base-SX
850 nm, 0.5 km
34060473
1000Base-LX
1310 nm, 10 km
34060298
1000BASE-VX
1310 nm, 40 km
34060513
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
1550 nm, 40 km
34060360
1000BASE-ZX
1550 nm, 80 km
34060416
1000BASE-CWDM
1471 nm, 40 km
34060417
1491 nm, 40 km
34060418
1511 nm, 40 km
34060419
1531 nm, 40 km
34060420
1551 nm, 40 km
34060421
1571 nm, 40 km
34060422
1591 nm, 40 km
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
126
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Category
Part Number
Single-fiber
bidirectional GE
module
3 Boards
Type
Wavelength and
Transmission
Distance
34060423
1611 nm, 40 km
34060483
1471 nm, 80 km
34060481
1491 nm, 80 km
34060479
1511 nm, 80 km
34060482
1531 nm, 80 km
34060478
1551 nm, 80 km
34060476
1571 nm, 80 km
34060477
1591 nm, 80 km
34060480
1611 nm, 80 km
34060475
1000BASE-BX-D
Transmit: 1490 nm;
receive: 1310 nm
10 km
34060470
1000BASE-BX-U
Transmit: 1310 nm;
receive: 1490 nm
10 km
34060540
1000BASE-BX-D
Transmit: 1490 nm;
receive: 1310 nm
40 km
34060539
1000BASE-BX-U
Transmit: 1310 nm;
receive: 1490 nm
40 km
Dual-fiber
bidirectional FE
module
Single-fiber
bidirectional FE
module
34060287
100BASE-FX
1310 nm, 2 km
34060276
100BASE-LX
1310 nm, 15 km
34060281
100BASE-VX
1310 nm, 40 km
34060282
100BASE-ZX
1550 nm, 80 km
34060364
100BASE-BX-D
Transmit: 1550 nm;
receive: 1310 nm
15 km
34060363
100BASE-BX-U
Transmit: 1310 nm;
receive: 1550 nm
15 km
Electrical
module
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
34100052
10/100/1000BASE-T
(X)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
-
127
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
NOTE
For the specifications for each type of optical module, see Table 3-101-Table 3-106 in 3.10.8 Technical
Specifications.
The types of SFP modules listed in the following table can be identified by board feature codes
in the bar codes of EM6F boards. A board feature code refers to the number next to the board
name in a bar code. The bar code of the EM6T/EM6TA does not contain a board feature code.
Table 3-100 Board feature code of the EM6F
Board Feature Code
Module Type
Part Number of the
Module
01
1000BASE-SX
34060286
02
1000BASE-LX
34060473
03
10/100/1000BASE-T(X)
34100052
10
100BASE-FX
34060287
11
100BASE-LX
34060276
NOTE
If the board feature code in the bar code of the EM6T/EM6TA is empty, no SFP module is installed on the
EM6T/EM6TA.
3.10.7 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/
EM6FA.
Related References
A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes
A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control
A.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
A.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes
A.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes
3.10.8 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including the GE port performance, FE port
performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Performance of FE/GE Optical Ports
The FE/GE optical ports on the EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the
main specifications for the FE/GE optical ports.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
128
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 uses SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces. Users can use different types of SFP
modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Table 3-101 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, short-distance
transmission)
Item
Performance
Classification code
1000BASE-SX (0.5 km)
1000BASE-LX (10 km)
Nominal wavelength (nm)
850
1310
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)
1000
Fiber type
Multi-mode
Single-mode
Transmission distance (km)
0.5
10
Operating wavelength (nm)
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
Mean launched power (dBm)
-9 to -3
-9 to -3
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
-17
-20
Minimum overload (dBm)
0
-3
Minimum extinction ratio
(dB)
9.5
9.5
Table 3-102 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, long-haul transmission)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Item
Performance
Classification code
1000BASE-VX
(40 km)
1000BASE-VX
(40 km)
1000BASE-ZX
(80 km)
Nominal wavelength (nm)
1310
1550
1550
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)
1000
1000
1000
Fiber type
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Transmission distance (km)
40
40
80
Operating wavelength (nm)
1270 to 1350
1480 to 1580
1500 to 1580
Mean launched power (dBm)
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
-2 to +5
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
-23
-22
-22
Minimum overload (dBm)
-3
-3
-3
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
129
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Item
Performance
Classification code
1000BASE-VX
(40 km)
1000BASE-VX
(40 km)
1000BASE-ZX
(80 km)
Minimum extinction ratio
(dB)
9
9
9
Table 3-103 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, CWDM)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Item
Performance
Classification code
1000BASE-CWDM (40
km)
1000BASE-CWDM (80
km)
Nominal wavelength (nm)
l Channel 1: 1471
l Channel 1: 1471
l Channel 2: 1491
l Channel 2: 1491
l Channel 3: 1511
l Channel 3: 1511
l Channel 4: 1531
l Channel 4: 1531
l Channel 5: 1551
l Channel 5: 1551
l Channel 6: 1571
l Channel 6: 1571
l Channel 7: 1591
l Channel 7: 1591
l Channel 8: 1611
l Channel 8: 1611
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)
1000
1000
Fiber type
Single-mode
Single-mode
Transmission distance (km)
40
80
Operating wavelength (nm)
Nominal wavelength ±6.5
Nominal wavelength ±6.5
Mean launched power (dBm)
0 to +5
0 to +5
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
-19
-28
Minimum overload (dBm)
0
-9
Minimum extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2
8.2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
130
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-104 GE optical interface performance (single-fiber bidirectional)
Item
Performance
1000BASEBX-D (10
km)
1000BASEBX-U
(10km)
1000BASEBX-D (40
km)
1000BASEBX-U
(40km)
Tx: 1490
Tx: 1310
Tx: 1490
Tx: 1310
Rx: 1310
Rx: 1490
Rx: 1310
Rx: 1490
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)
1000
1000
1000
1000
Fiber type
Multi-mode
Multi-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Transmission distance (km)
10
10
40
40
Operating wavelength (nm)
Tx: 1480 to
1500
Tx: 1260 to
1360
Tx: 1260 to
1360
Tx: 1480 to
1500
Rx: 1260 to
1360
Rx: 1480 to
1500
Rx: 1480 to
1500
Rx: 1260 to
1360
Mean launched power (dBm)
-9 to -3
-9 to -3
-3 to +3
-3 to +3
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
-19.5
-19.5
-23
-23
Minimum overload (dBm)
-3
-3
-3
-3
Minimum extinction ratio
(dB)
6
6
6
6
Nominal wavelength (nm)
Table 3-105 FE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional)
Item
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Performance
100BASEFX (2 km)
100BASELX (15 km)
100BASEVX (40 km)
100BASEZX (80 km)
Nominal wavelength (nm)
1310
1310
1310
1550
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)
100
100
100
100
Fiber type
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Transmission distance (km)
2
15
40
80
Operating wavelength (nm)
1270 to 1380
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
Mean launched power (dBm)
-19 to -14
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
-30
-28
-34
-34
Minimum overload (dBm)
-14
-8
-10
-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
131
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Item
3 Boards
Performance
Minimum extinction ratio
(dB)
100BASEFX (2 km)
100BASELX (15 km)
100BASEVX (40 km)
100BASEZX (80 km)
10
8.2
10
10.5
Table 3-106 FE optical interface performance (single-fiber bidirectional)
Item
Performance
Classification code
100BASE-BX-D (15 km)
100BASE-BX-U (15 km)
Nominal wavelength (nm)
Tx: 1550
Tx: 1310
Rx: 1310
Rx: 1550
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)
100
100
Fiber type
Single-mode
Single-mode
Transmission distance (km)
15
15
Operating wavelength (nm)
Tx: 1480 to 1580
Tx: 1260 to 1360
Rx: 1260 to 1360
Rx: 1480 to 1580
Mean launched power (dBm)
-15 to -8
-15 to -8
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
-32
-32
Minimum overload (dBm)
-8
-8
Minimum extinction ratio
(dB)
8.5
8.5
Performance of GE Electrical Ports
The GE electrical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists
the main specifications for the GE electrical ports.
Table 3-107 GE electrical interface performance
Item
Performance
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)
10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
132
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Item
Performance
Code pattern
Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)
MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)
4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)
Interface type
RJ45
Performance of FE Electrical Ports
The FE electrical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists
the main specifications for the FE electrical ports.
Table 3-108 FE electrical interface performance
Item
Performance
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)
10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)
Code pattern
Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)
MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)
Interface type
RJ45
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-109 Mechanical behavior
Item
Performance
EM6T
EM6TA
EM6F
Dimensions (H
x W x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.37 kg
0.40 kg
0.40 kg
EM6FA
0.40 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the EM6T: < 10.4 W
Power consumption of the EM6TA: < 16.2 W
Power consumption of the EM6F: < 11.3 W
Power consumption of the EM6FA: < 15.4 W
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
133
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
3.11 EMS6
The EMS6 is an FE/GE EoSDH processing board providing the L2 switching function. It
provides four FE electrical ports and two GE ports using small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
optical/electrical modules.
3.11.1 Version Description
The functional version of the EMS6 is SL91.
3.11.2 Functions and Features
The EMS6 receives/transmits 4xFE signals and 2xGE signals from the front panel and 1xGE
packet plane signals from the backplane, and encapsulates these Ethernet signals into
synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) signals to transmit the Ethernet signals on the SDH
network. The EMS6 supports transparent service transmission and Layer 2 switching.
Table 3-110 lists the functions and features that the EMS6 supports.
Table 3-110 Functions and features
Function and Feature
Description
Basic functions
Receives/transmits 4xFE signals, 2xGE signals, and
1xGE packet plane signals, and performs EoSDH
processing.
Port specifications
FE
electrical
port
Provides four 10/100BASE-T(X) ports.
GE port
Provides two GE ports by using small form-factor
pluggable (SFP) modules of any of the following types:
l 1000Base-SX
l 1000Base-LX
l 1000Base-VX
l 1000Base-ZX
l 10/100/1000BASE-T(X)
Port attributes
Working
mode
l The FE ports support 10M full-duplex, 100M fullduplex, and auto-negotiation.
l The GE electrical ports support 10M full-duplex,
10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M halfduplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation.
l The GE optical ports support 1000M full-duplex
and auto-negotiation.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
134
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Function and Feature
TAG
attributes
Description
l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet
port.
l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access,
or hybrid.
Services
Encapsulation and
mapping
Jumbo
frame
Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame length
of 9600 bytes.
Traffic
control
function
Supports the port-based traffic control function that
complies with IEEE 802.3x.
Ethernet
private line
(EPL)
services
Supports the EPL services based on ports.
Ethernet
virtual
private line
(EVPL)
services
Supports the following types of EVPL services:
Ethernet
private
LAN
(EPLAN)
services
Supports the EPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1d
bridges.
Ethernet
virtual
private
LAN
(EVPLAN)
services
Supports the following types of EVPLAN services:
Encapsulati
on format
Supports the following encapsulation formats:
l EVPL services based on port+VLAN
l EVPL services based on QinQ
l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
l Generic Framing Procedure (GFP)
l High Level Data Link Control (HDLC)
l Link Access Protocol-SDH (LAPS)
Maximum
TDM
service
capacity
supported
by the
backplane
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
4xVC-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
135
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Function and Feature
Link aggregation
group (LAG)
Description
Maximum
number of
VCTRUN
Ks
supported
by the board
8
Maximum
bandwidth
supported
by each
VCTRUN
K
l VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK7: 100 Mbit/s
Link
capacity
adjustment
scheme
(LCAS)
Supported
Inter-board
LAG
Not supported
Intra-board
LAG
Supported
l VCTRUNK8: 622 Mbit/s
NOTE
Port 7 (bridging port) on the EMS6 does not support intraboard LAG.
Ethernet ring protection switching
(ERPS)
Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T
G.8032/Y.1344.
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
Supports the STP and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
(RSTP), which comply with IEEE 802.1w.
IGMP Snooping
Supported
Link state pass through (LPT)a
Supported
NOTE
Port 7 (bridging port) on the EMS6 does not support LPT.
QoS
Traffic
classificatio
n
Supports the following traffic classification modes:
l Traffic classification based on ports
l Traffic classification based on port+C-VLAN ID
l Traffic classification based on port+S-VLAN ID
l Traffic classification based on port+C-VLAN ID
+S-VLAN ID
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
136
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Function and Feature
CoS
Description
Schedules packets in traffic flows to eight egress
queues of different CoSs by:
l Simple
l VLAN priority
l IP TOS value
l DSCP value
Committed
access rate
(CAR)
Provides the CAR function for traffic flows.
Shaping
Supports traffic shaping for a specific port or egress
queue.
Queue
scheduling
policy
Supports the following scheduling policies:
l SP
l WRR
l SP+WRR
l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
ETH OAM
l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
NOTE
Port 7 (bridging port) on the EMS6 does not support IEEE
802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM function.
Remote monitoring (RMON)
Supported
Port mirroring
Supported
Clock
Clock
source
Synchronous Ethernet
Clock
protection
Supports the following clock protection schemes:
NOTE
Ports 7 and 8 (bridging ports) on the EMS6 board do not
support synchronous Ethernet.
l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the Synchronization Status
Message (SSM) protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
OM
Loopback
Supports the following loopback types:
l Supports inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports
excluding ports 7 and 8 (bridging ports).
l Supports inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports
excluding port 8 (bridging port).
l Supports inloops on VC-3 paths.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
137
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Function and Feature
Description
Traffic
monitoring
Supported
Warm reset
and cold
reset
Supported
Board
manufactur
ing
information
query
Supported
Board
power
consumptio
n
information
query
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
NOTE
a: The LPT function is used to detect faults that occur on a service access node or an intermediate
transmission network, and instruct the service access node to immediately start the backup network for
communication. The LPT function ensures the normal transmission of important data.
3.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the EMS6, using FE/GE signal
processing as an example.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
138
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-49 Functional block diagram of the EMS6
Backplane
Ethernet signal
FE signal
GE signal
FE signal
access
unit
GE signal
access
unit
Ethernet
processing
unit
Encapsulation
unit
SDH signal
Logic
processing
unit
Mapping
unit
GE signal
Management
control signal
Cross-connect
unit
Packet
switching unit
Control signal of the board
Control bus
Logic
control
unit
+3.3 V power supplied
to the board
Power
supply unit
+3.3 V backup power
supplied to certain auxiliary
circuits on the board
Clock signal provided to the
other units on the board
System control and
communication unit
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V
Clock unit
System clock signal
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction
Table 3-111 Signal processing in the receive direction
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
FE/GE signal access
unit
l Receives FE/GE signals. If GE signals are received
through a GE optical port, O/E conversion is required.
l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel
conversion for FE/GE signals.
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping,
cyclic redundancy check (CRC) code processing, and
Ethernet performance measurement for frames.
2
Ethernet processing
unit
l Receives Ethernet signals from the FE/GE signal
access unit and GE signals from the packet switching
unit.
l Performs QoS processing, such as traffic
classification and committed access rate (CAR)
control, for Ethernet data frames based on service
types.
l Processes tags based on service types.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames based on service types.
3
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Encapsulation unit
Performs the High Level Data Link Control (HDLC),
Link Access Protocol-SDH (LAPS), or Generic Framing
Procedure (GFP) encapsulation for Ethernet frames.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
139
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
4
Mapping unit
Maps encapsulated Ethernet data frames into VC-12s,
VC-3s, VC-12-Xvs, or VC-3-Xvs.
5
Logic processing
unit
Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to
the cross-connect unit.
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-112 Signal processing in the transmit direction
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Logic processing unit
Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.
2
Mapping unit
Demaps encapsulated Ethernet data frames from VC-12s,
VC-3s, VC-12-Xvs, or VC-3-Xvs.
3
Encapsulation unit
Decapsulates Ethernet data frames after they are
demapped.
4
Ethernet processing
unit
l Processes tags based on service types.
l Performs QoS processing, such as traffic shaping and
queue scheduling, for Ethernet data frames.
l Performs Ethernet data frame delimitation, preamble
addition, CRC code computation, and Ethernet
performance measurement.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the FE/GE signal
access unit or the GE port connected to the packet
switching unit based on egress tags contained in the
Ethernet data frames.
5
FE signal access unit
Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for
Ethernet data frames, and transmits generated FE/GE
signals through Ethernet ports. For a GE optical port, the
FE signal access unit needs to perform E/O conversion
before transmitting signals through the GE optical port.
Control Signal Processing
The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access unit by using management control
signals.
The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit, encapsulation unit, mapping unit,
and logic processing unit using the control bus on the board.
The logic control unit communicates with the system control and communication unit using the
system control bus. The logic control unit issues configuration and query commands from the
system control and communication unit to various units on the board, and reports command
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
140
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
responses, alarms, and performance events reported by various units on the board to the system
control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48
V power into +3.3 V power using the DC-DC module, and supplies the +3.3 V power to the
other units on the board.
The power supply unit receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and supplies the
+3.3 V power to certain auxiliary circuits on the board.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
3.11.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, four FE ports, and two small form-factor pluggable (SFP) GE ports on the
front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
EMS6
STAT
PROG
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2
Figure 3-50 Front panel of the EMS6
GE1
GE2
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
Indicators
Table 3-113 Status explanation for indicators on the EMS6
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the board.
PROG
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Blinks on (green) and off at
100 ms intervals
Software is being loaded to the board during
the power-on or resetting process of the
board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
141
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Indicator
3 Boards
State
Meaning
Blinks on (green) and off at
300 ms intervals
The board software is in BIOS boot state
during the power-on or resetting process of
the board.
On (green)
l The upper layer software is being
initialized during the power-on or
resetting process of the board.
l The software is running properly during
the running process of the board.
Blinks on (red) and off at 100
ms intervals
The BOOTROM self-check fails during the
power-on or resetting process of the board.
On (red)
l The memory self-check fails or loading
upper layer software fails during the
power-on or resetting process of the
board.
l The logic file or upper layer software is
lost during the running process of the
board.
l The pluggable storage card is faulty.
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
On (green)
The system is working normally.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the
system.
On (yellow)
A minor alarm occurs in the system.
Off
There is no power supplied to the system.
On (green)
The GE1 port is connected correctly.
Blinks on (red) and off at 300
ms intervals
The receive optical power at the GE1 optical
port is higher than the upper threshold.
Blinks 300 ms on (red) and 700
ms off
The receive optical power at the GE1 optical
port is lower than the lower threshold.
Off
The GE1 port is not connected or is
connected incorrectly.
Blinking (yellow)
The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting
data.
Off
The GE1 port is not receiving or
transmitting data.
On (green)
The GE2 port is connected correctly.
Blinks on (red) and off at 300
ms intervals
The receive optical power at the GE2 optical
port is higher than the upper threshold.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
142
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Indicator
ACT2
3 Boards
State
Meaning
Blinks 300 ms on (red) and 700
ms off
The receive optical power at the GE2 optical
port is lower than the lower threshold.
Off
The GE1 port is not connected or is
connected incorrectly.
Blinking (yellow)
The GE2 port is receiving or transmitting
data.
Off
The GE2 port is not receiving or
transmitting data.
Ports
Table 3-114 Description of the ports on the EMS6
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding Cable
GE1
GE2
GE service port
(using SFP
modules)
RJ45 SFP electrical module/LC
SFP optical module
5.9 Network Cable/5.5 Fiber
Jumper
FE1
FE service port
RJ45
5.9 Network Cable
FE2
FE3
FE4
NOTE
On the network management system (NMS), GE1 and GE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively,
and FE1 to FE4 correspond to PORT3 to PORT6 respectively.
The performance of the FE electrical ports on the EMS6 complies with the 10/100BASE-T(X)
standard, and the performance of the GE electrical ports on the EMS6 complies with the
10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard if SFP electrical modules are used. The two types of ports
support the MDI, MDI-X, auto-MDI, and auto-MDI-X modes. For the front view of an RJ45
connector, see Figure 3-51. For the pin assignments for the ports, see Table 3-115 and Table
3-116.
Figure 3-51 Front view of the RJ45 connector
87654321
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
143
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-115 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
1
TX+
Transmitting data (+)
BIDA+
Bidirectional data wire A
(+)
2
TX-
Transmitting data (-)
BIDA-
Bidirectional data wire A
(-)
3
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+
Bidirectional data wire B
(+)
4
Reserved
-
BIDC+
Bidirectional data wire C
(+)
5
Reserved
-
BIDC-
Bidirectional data wire C
(-)
6
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-
Bidirectional data wire B
(-)
7
Reserved
-
BIDD+
Bidirectional data wire D
(+)
8
Reserved
-
BIDD-
Bidirectional data wire D
(-)
Table 3-116 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode
Pin
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
1
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+
Bidirectional data wire B
(+)
2
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-
Bidirectional data wire B
(-)
3
TX+
Transmitting data (+)
BIDA+
Bidirectional data wire A
(+)
4
Reserved
-
BIDD+
Bidirectional data wire D
(+)
5
Reserved
-
BIDD-
Bidirectional data wire D
(-)
6
TX-
Transmitting data (-)
BIDA-
Bidirectional data wire A
(-)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
144
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Pin
3 Boards
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
7
Reserved
-
BIDC+
Bidirectional data wire C
(+)
8
Reserved
-
BIDC-
Bidirectional data wire C
(-)
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table
3-117.
Table 3-117 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector
Indicator
State
Meaning
LINK (green)
On
The link is working properly.
Off
The link is interrupted.
On or blinking
The port is transmitting or receiving
data.
Off
The port is not transmitting or
receiving data.
ACT (yellow)
SFP optical modules are used to provide GE ports on the EMS6. One SFP optical module
provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-52, in which TX represents the
transmit port and RX represents the receive port.
Figure 3-52 Ports of an SFP optical module
RX
TX
3.11.5 Valid Slots
The EMS6 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the EMS6 on the network management
system (NMS) are the same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-53 Slots for the EMS6 in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (EMS6)
Slot 6 (EMS6)
Slot 3 (EMS6)
Slot 4 (EMS6)
Slot 1 (EMS6)
Slot 2 (EMS6)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
145
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Figure 3-54 Logical slots for the EMS6 on the NMS
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (EMS6)
Slot 6 (EMS6)
Slot 3 (EMS6)
Slot 4 (EMS6)
Slot 1 (EMS6)
Slot 2 (EMS6)
Table 3-118 Slot configuration for the EMS6
Item
Description
Slot allocation priority
Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 3 and 5
3.11.6 Types of SFP Modules
The GE port on the EMS6 board supports multiple types of small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
modules.
Table 3-119 Types of SFP modules that the GE port supports
Part Number
Type
34060286
1000Base-SX
34060473
1000Base-LX
34060298
1000Base-VX (40 km, 1310 nm)
34060513
1000Base-VX (40 km, 1550 nm)
34060360
1000Base-ZX
34100052
10/100/1000BASE-T(X)
The types of SFP modules listed in the following table can be identified by board feature codes
in the bar codes of EMS6 boards. A board feature code refers to the number next to the board
name in a bar code.
Table 3-120 Board feature codes of the EMS6
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Board Feature Code
Module Type
01
1000Base-SX
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
146
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Board Feature Code
Module Type
02
1000Base-LX
03
10/100/1000BASE-T(X)
NOTE
If the board feature code in the bar code of the EMS6 is empty, no SFP module is installed on the EMS6.
3.11.7 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EMS6.
Related References
A.7.5.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_External Port
A.7.5.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Internal Port
A.7.5.3 Parameter Description: Type Field of QinQ Frames
A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
3.11.8 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including the GE port performance, FE port
performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Performance of GE Optical Ports
The GE optical ports on the EMS6 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main
specifications for the GE optical ports.
Table 3-121 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, short-distance
transmission)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Item
Performance
Classification code
1000BASE-SX (0.5 km)
1000BASE-LX (10 km)
Nominal wavelength (nm)
850
1310
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)
1000
Fiber type
Multi-mode
Single-mode
Transmission distance (km)
0.5
10
Operating wavelength (nm)
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
Mean launched power (dBm)
-9 to -3
-9 to -3
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
-17
-20
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
147
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Item
Performance
Classification code
1000BASE-SX (0.5 km)
1000BASE-LX (10 km)
Minimum overload (dBm)
0
-3
Minimum extinction ratio
(dB)
9.5
9.5
Table 3-122 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, long-haul transmission)
Item
Performance
Classification code
1000BASE-VX
(40 km)
1000BASE-VX
(40 km)
1000BASE-ZX
(80 km)
Nominal wavelength (nm)
1310
1550
1550
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)
1000
1000
1000
Fiber type
Single-mode
Single-mode
Single-mode
Transmission distance (km)
40
40
80
Operating wavelength (nm)
1270 to 1350
1480 to 1580
1500 to 1580
Mean launched power (dBm)
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
-2 to +5
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
-23
-22
-22
Minimum overload (dBm)
-3
-3
-3
Minimum extinction ratio
(dB)
9
9
9
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 uses SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces. Users can use different types of SFP
modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Performance of GE Electrical Ports
The GE electrical ports on the EMS6 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the
main specifications for the GE electrical ports.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
148
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-123 GE electrical interface performance
Item
Performance
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)
10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)
Code pattern
Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)
MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)
4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)
Interface type
RJ45
Performance of FE Electrical Ports
The FE electrical ports on the EMS6 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main
specifications for the FE electrical ports.
Table 3-124 FE electrical interface performance
Item
Performance
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)
10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)
Code pattern
Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)
MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)
Interface type
RJ45
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-125 Mechanical behavior
Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.50 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the EMS6: < 16.5 W
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
149
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
3.12 EFP8
The EFP8 is an 8-port FE EoPDH processing board. The EFP board is connected to the packet
plane through its bridging GE port.
3.12.1 Version Description
The functional version of the EFP8 is SL91.
3.12.2 Functions and Features
The EFP8 receives/transmits 8xFE signals from its front panel and 1xGE packet plane signals
from the backplane, and encapsulates the Ethernet signals into E1 signals, and transmits the
Ethernet signals on the PDH network.
Table 3-126 lists the functions and features that the EFP8 supports.
Table 3-126 Functions and features
Function and Feature
Description
Basic functions
Receives/Transmits 8xFE signals and 1xGE packet
plane signals and performs EoPDH processing.
Port
specifications
FE electrical port:
10/100BASE-T
(X)
8
Port attributes
Working mode
The FE port supports 10M full-duplex, 100M fullduplex, and auto-negotiation.
TAG attributes
l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet
port.
l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access,
or hybrid.
Services
Jumbo frame
Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame
length of 2000 bytes.
Traffic control
function
Supports the port-based traffic control function that
complies with IEEE 802.3x.
EPL services
Supports the EPL services that are based on port.
EVPL services
Supports the following types of EVPL services:
l EVPL services based on port+VLAN
l EVPL services based on QinQ
EPLAN services
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Supports the EPLAN services that are based on IEEE
802.1d bridges.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
150
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Function and Feature
EVPLAN services
3 Boards
Description
Supports the following types of EVPLAN services:
l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad
bridges
Encapsulation
and mapping
LAG
Encapsulation
format
Generic framing procedure (GFP)
Maximum number
of VCTRUNKs
supported by the
board
16
Maximum TDM
service capacity
supported by the
backplane
1xVC-4 (63xE1)
Maximum number
of E1s that can be
bound with a
single VCTRUNK
16xE1
Link capacity
adjustment
scheme (LCAS)
Supported
Inter-board LAG
Not supported
Intra-board LAG
Supported
NOTE
Port 9 (bridging port) on the EFP8 does not support intraboard LAG.
Spanning tree protocol
Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the
CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions
equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.
IGMP snooping function
Supported
LPTa
Supported
NOTE
Port 9 (bridging port) on the EFP8 does not support LPT.
QoS
Traffic
classification
l Traffic classification based on ports
l Traffic classification based on port+VLAN ID
l Traffic classification based on port+VLAN ID
+VLAN PRI
l Traffic classification based on port+S-VLAN ID
l Traffic classification based on port+C-VLAN ID
+S-VLAN ID
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
151
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Function and Feature
CoS
3 Boards
Description
Grooms packets in traffic flows to eight egress
queues that belong to different service classes based
on the following conditions:
l Simple
l VLAN priority
l IP TOS value
l DSCP value
CAR
Provides the CAR function for traffic flows.
Shaping
Supports traffic shaping for queues at ports.
Queue scheduling
policies
Supports SP+WRR.
l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
ETH OAM
l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
NOTE
Port 9 (bridging port) of the EFP8 does not support the
OAM function that complies with IEEE 802.3ah.
RMON
Supported
Port mirroring
Supported
Clock
Clock source
Synchronous Ethernet
NOTE
Ports 9 and 10 (bridging ports) on the EFP8 board do not
support synchronous Ethernet.
Clock protection
Supports the following clock protection schemes:
l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
OM
Loopback
Supports the following loopback types:
l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports
excluding ports 9 and 10 (bridging ports)
l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports
excluding port 10 (bridging port)
l Inloops on VC-12 paths
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Warm reset and
cold reset
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information query
Supported
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
152
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Function and Feature
Description
Board power
consumption
information query
Supported
Board temperature
detection
Supported
NOTE
a: The LPT function is used to detect faults that occur at a service access node and in an intermediate
transmission network. If a fault is detected, the LPT notifies the equipment that receives the service of
starting the backup network at the earliest time for communication, ensuring normal transmission of
important data.
3.12.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one FE signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the EFP8.
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-55 Functional block diagram of the EFP8
Backplane
Ethernet signal
FE signal
FE
signal
access
unit
Ethernet
processing
unit
Encapsulation
unit
PDH signal
Logic
processing
unit
Mapping
unit
Management
control signal
GE signal
Cross-connect
unit
Packet
switching unit
Control signal of the board
Control bus
Logic
control
unit
+3.3 V power supplied
to the board
Power
supply unit
+3.3 V backup power
supplied to the board
Clock signal provided to the
other units on the board
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
System control and
communication unit
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V
Clock unit
System clock signal
153
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction
Table 3-127 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EFP8
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
FE signal access unit
l Receives/Transmits FE signals.
l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel
conversion for FE signals.
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping,
CRC code checks, and Ethernet performance
measurement for frame signals.
2
Ethernet processing
unit
l Receives/Transmits GE signals from the packet
switching unit.
l Performs QoS processing such as traffic classification
and CAR for Ethernet data frames based on service
categories.
l Processes tags based on service categories.
l Forwards data frames based on service categories.
3
Encapsulation unit
Performs GFP encapsulation for Ethernet frames.
4
Mapping unit
l Maps encapsulated data frames based on E1 virtual
concatenation and then encapsulates the data frames
to proper VC-12s.
l Processes pointers to form TU-12s.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TU-12s to form
one TUG-2.
l Performs byte interleaving for seven TUG-2s to form
one TUG-3.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TUG-3s to form
one C-4.
l Adds higher order path overhead bytes to one C-4 to
form one VC-4.
5
Logic processing
unit
Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to
the main and standby cross-connect units.
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-128 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EFP8
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Logic processing unit
Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the main cross-connect unit.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
154
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
2
Mapping unit
l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.
l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3.
l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2.
l Extracts E1 payload from VC-12s and demaps the E1
payload based on E1 virtual concatenation.
3
Encapsulation unit
Decapsulates signals after demapping.
4
Ethernet signal
processing unit
l Processes tags based on service categories.
l Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and
queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames.
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble adding, CRC
code computing, and Ethernet performance
measurement for Ethernet data frames.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the FE signal access
unit or the GE port that is connected to the packet
switching unit according to the egress flag.
FE signal access unit
5
Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for
Ethernet data frames, and sends the generated FE signals
to an Ethernet port.
Control Signal Processing
The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE signal access unit by using management control
signals.
The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit, encapsulation unit, mapping unit,
and logic processing unit over the control bus on the board.
The logic control unit communicates with the main and standby system control and
communication units over the system control bus. The configuration data and query commands
from the system control and communication unit are issued to the various units of the board
through the logic control unit. The command response reported by each unit on the board, and
alarms and performance events are reported to the system control and communication unit also
through the logic control unit.
Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l
Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power supplies
into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
l
Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power
backup for the other units on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
155
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
3.12.4 Front Panel
There are indicators and eight FE ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
PROG
SRV
STAT
EFP8
Figure 3-56 Front panel of the EFP8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Indicators
Table 3-129 Status explanation for indicators on the EFP8
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the board.
PROG
Blinks on (green) and off at
100 ms intervals
Software is being loaded to the board during
the power-on or resetting process of the
board.
Blinks on (green) and off at
300 ms intervals
The board software is in BIOS boot state
during the power-on or resetting process of
the board.
On (green)
l When the board is being powered on or
being reset, the upper layer software is
being initialized.
l When the board is running, the software
is running normally.
Blinks on (red) and off at 100
ms intervals
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
The BOOTROM self-check fails during the
power-on or resetting process of the board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
156
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Indicator
3 Boards
State
Meaning
On (red)
l The memory self-check fails or loading
upper layer software fails during the
power-on or resetting process of the
board.
l The logic file or upper layer software is
lost during the running process of the
board.
l The pluggable storage card is faulty.
SRV
On (green)
The system is working properly.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the
system.
On (yellow)
A minor alarm occurs in the system.
Off
There is no power supplied to the system.
Ports
Table 3-130 Description of the ports on the EFP8
Port
Description
FE1 to
FE8
FE port
Connector Type
Corresponding Cable
RJ45
5.9 Network Cable
The FE electrical ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. For the pin
assignments for the ports, see Table 3-131 and Table 3-132. For the front view of an RJ45
connector, see Figure 3-57.
Figure 3-57 Front view of the RJ45 connector
87654321
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
157
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-131 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X)
Signal
Function
1
TX+
Transmitting data (+)
2
TX-
Transmitting data (-)
3
RX+
Receiving data (+)
4
Reserved
-
5
Reserved
-
6
RX-
Receiving data (-)
7
Reserved
-
8
Reserved
-
Table 3-132 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X)
Signal
Function
1
RX+
Receiving data (+)
2
RX-
Receiving data (-)
3
TX+
Transmitting data (+)
4
Reserved
-
5
Reserved
-
6
TX-
Transmitting data (-)
7
Reserved
-
8
Reserved
-
The RJ45 port has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table 3-133.
Table 3-133 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Indicator
State
Meaning
LINK (green)
On
The link is working properly.
Off
The link is interrupted.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
158
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
ACT (yellow)
On or blinking
The port is transmitting or receiving
data.
Off
The port is not transmitting or
receiving data.
3.12.5 Valid Slots
The EFP8 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the EFP8 on the NMS are the same
as the physical slots.
Figure 3-58 Slots for the EFP8 in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (EFP8)
Slot 6 (EFP8)
Slot 3 (EFP8)
Slot 4 (EFP8)
Slot 1 (EFP8)
Slot 2 (EFP8)
Figure 3-59 Logical slots of the EFP8 on the NMS
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (EFP8)
Slot 6 (EFP8)
Slot 3 (EFP8)
Slot 4 (EFP8)
Slot 1 (EFP8)
Slot 2 (EFP8)
Table 3-134 Slot allocation
Item
Description
Slot allocation priority
Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 3 and 5
3.12.6 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EFP8.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
159
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Related References
A.7.5.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_External Port
A.7.5.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Internal Port
A.7.5.3 Parameter Description: Type Field of QinQ Frames
A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs
3.12.7 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including the FE port performance, board
mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Performance of FE Electrical Ports
The FE electrical ports on the EFP8 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main
specifications for the FE electrical ports.
Table 3-135 FE electrical interface performance
Item
Performance
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)
10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)
Code pattern
Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)
MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)
Interface type
RJ45
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-136 Mechanical behavior
Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.6 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the EFP8: < 13.5 W
3.13 SL1D/SL1DA
The SL1D/SL1DA is a 2xSTM-1 optical interface board. The SL1D/SL1DA can also provide
STM-1 electrical ports by using SFP electrical modules. Besides all the functions provided by
the SL1D, the SL1DA supports the K byte pass-through function.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
160
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
3.13.1 Version Description
The functional version of the SL1D/SL1DA is SL91.
3.13.2 Functions and Features
The SL1D/SL1DA receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical signals.
Table 3-137 lists the functions and features that the SL1D/SL1DA supports.
Table 3-137 Functions and features
Function and Feature
Description
Basic functions
Receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical
signals.
Port
specifications
Optical ports
l Adopts SFP optical modules and supports the
optical ports of Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 types.
l The characteristics of all the optical ports comply
with ITU-T G.957.
Electrical ports
l Adopts SFP electrical modules.
l The performance of the electrical ports complies
with ITU-T G.703.
Protection
Clock
Linear MSP
Supported
SNCP
Supported
Clock source
Each line port provides one SDH line clock signal.
Clock
protection
Supports the following clock protection schemes:
l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
DCN
Outband DCN
Each SDH line port can provide one DCC that is
composed of three DCC bytes, nine DCC bytes, or
twelve DCC bytes.
K byte pass-through
Supported only by the SL1DA
OM
Supports the following loopback types:
Loopback
l Outloops at optical/electrical ports
l Inloops at optical/electrical ports
l Outloops on VC-4 paths
l Inloops on VC-4 paths
Warm reset and
cold reset
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Supported
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
161
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Function and Feature
3 Boards
Description
Setting of the
on/off state of a
laser
Supported
ALS functiona
Supported
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board power
consumption
information
query
Supported
Detection and
query of SFP
module
information
Supported
NOTE
a: The ALS function is implemented as follows:
l When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500
ms, the laser at the specific transmit port is automatically shut down.
l The laser starts to launch laser pulses at a specified interval; that is, the laser emits light for two seconds
and stops emission for 60 seconds.
l After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser works properly and emits continuous light.
3.13.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one STM-1 optical signal, and it serves as an example to
describe the working principle and signal flow of the SL1D/SL1DA.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
162
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-60 Functional block diagram of the SL1D/SL1DA
Backplane
Service bus
Overhead bus
Logic processing
unit
Overhead
processing unit
STM-1
O/E conversion
unit
STM-1
Crossconnect unit
System control and
communication unit
System control and
communication unit
Control bus
Logic control
unit
Power supplied to the
other units on the board
+3.3 V
Clock signal provided to the
other units on the board
Clock unit
System clock signal
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction
Table 3-138 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SL1D/SL1DA
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
O/E conversion unit
l Regenerates STM-1 optical signals.
l Detects R_LOS alarms.
l Converts STM-1 optical signals into electrical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
163
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
2
Overhead processing
unit
l Restores clock signals.
l Aligns frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF alarms.
l Performs descrambling.
l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific alarms
and performance events.
l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and
generates specific alarms and performance events.
l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and
reports the SSM status to the system control and
communication unit.
l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K
bytes and transmits the overhead signal to the logic
processing unit.
l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific
performance events.
l Checks higher order path overheads and generates
specific alarms and performance events.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the logic processing unit.
3
Logic processing
unit
l Processes clock signals.
l Ttransmits the overhead signals to the system control
and communication unit.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the main and standby cross-connect units.
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-139 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SL1D/SL1DA
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Logic processing
unit
l Processes clock signals.
l Processes overhead signals.
l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.
2
Overhead processing
unit
l Sets higher order path overheads.
l Sets AU pointers.
l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes.
l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes.
l Performs scrambling.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
164
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
3
O/E conversion unit
Converts electrical signals into optical signals.
Control Signal Processing
The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the
control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the
CPU unit over the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit and enables FPGA loading.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
3.13.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, STM-1 ports, and a label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
SL1D
SL1D
STAT
SRV
LOS1
LOS2
Figure 3-61 Front panel of the SL1D (with optical ports)
STAT
SRV
LOS1
LOS2
SL1DA
Figure 3-62 Front panel of the SL1DA (with optical ports)
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SL1D
SL1D
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
STAT
SRV
LOS1
LOS2
Figure 3-63 Front panel of the SL1D (with electrical ports)
165
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
SL1DA
STAT
SRV
LOS1
LOS2
Figure 3-64 Front panel of the SL1DA (with electrical ports)
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
Indicators
Table 3-140 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D/SL1DA
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working
properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.
SRV
LOS1
LOS2
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
On (green)
The services are normal.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm
occurs in the services.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm
occurs in the services.
Off
The services are not
configured.
On (red)
The first port of the SL1D/
SL1DA is reporting the
R_LOS alarm.
Off
The first port of the SL1D/
SL1DA is free of R_LOS
alarms.
On (red)
The second port of the
SL1D/SL1DA is reporting
the R_LOS alarm.
Off
The second port of the
SL1D/SL1DA is free of
R_LOS alarms.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
166
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Ports
Table 3-141 Description of the ports
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
TX1
Transmit port of the
first STM-1 port
RX1
Receive port of the
first STM-1 port
l SFP optical
module: LC
l SFP electrical
module: SAA
straight/female
TX2
Transmit port of the
second STM-1 port
l SFP optical
module: 5.5
Fiber Jumper
l SFP electrical
module: 5.6
STM-1 Cable
RX2
Receive port of the
second STM-1 port
l SFP optical
module: LC
l SFP electrical
module: SAA
straight/female
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel.
The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical port is CLASS 1.
That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
3.13.5 Valid Slots
The SL1D/SL1DA can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the SL1D/SL1DA on the
NMS are the same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-65 Slots for the SL1D/SL1DA in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (SL1D/SL1DA)
Slot 6 (SL1D/SL1DA)
Slot 3 (SL1D/SL1DA)
Slot 4 (SL1D/SL1DA)
Slot 1 (SL1D/SL1DA)
Slot 2 (SL1D/SL1DA)
Figure 3-66 Logical slots of the SL1D/SL1DA on the NMS
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (SL1D/SL1DA)
Slot 6 (SL1D/SL1DA)
Slot 3 (SL1D/SL1DA)
Slot 4 (SL1D/SL1DA)
Slot 1 (SL1D/SL1DA)
Slot 2 (SL1D/SL1DA)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
167
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-142 Slot allocation
Item
Description
Slot allocation priority
Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 3 and 5
3.13.6 Board Feature Code
The board feature code of the SL1D/SL1DA indicates the type of SFP module. The board feature
code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
Table 3-143 Board feature code of the SL1D/SL1DA
Feature Code
Type of Optical Module
Part Number of the
Optical Module
01
Ie-1
34060287
02
S-1.1
34060276
03
L-1.1
34060281
04
L-1.2
34060282
05
STM-1e
34100104
3.13.7 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D/SL1DA.
Related References
A.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces
A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead
A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
3.13.8 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including the STM-1 optical/electrical port
performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
STM-1 Optical Interface Performance
The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. The
following table provides the typical performance of the interface.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
168
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-144 STM-1 optical interface performance
Item
Performance
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)
155520
Classification code
Ie-1
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Fiber type
Multi-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Transmission distance
(km)
2
15
40
80
Operating wavelength
(nm)
1270 to 1380
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
Mean launched power
(dBm)
-19 to -14
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
-30
-28
-34
-34
Minimum overload (dBm)
-14
-8
-10
-10
Minimum extinction ratio
(dB)
10
8.2
10
10
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 uses SFP optical modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of
SFP optical modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
STM-1 Electrical Interface Performance
The performance of the STM-1 electrical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703. The
following table provides the typical performance of the interface.
Table 3-145 STM-1 electrical interface performance
Item
Performance
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)
155520
Code type
CMI
Wire pair in each
transmission direction
One coaxial wire pair
Impedance (ohm)
75
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 uses SFP electrical modules to provide electrical interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
169
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-146 Mechanical behavior
Item
Performance
SL1D
SL1DA
Dimensions (H x W x
D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.30 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the SL1D: < 3.4 W
Power consumption of the SL1DA: < 3.3 W
3.14 ML1/MD1
The ML1 is a 16xSmart E1 service processing board. The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service
processing board.
3.14.1 Version Description
The functional version of the ML1 is SL92. The functional version of the MD1 is SL91.
3.14.2 Functions and Features
The ML1 receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The MD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
Table 3-147 lists the functions and features that the ML1/MD1 supports.
Table 3-147 Functions and features
Function and Feature
Description
ML1
MD1
Basic functions
Receives and transmits E1 signals, and supports
flexible configuration of E1 service categories.
E1 service categories
Supports the following E1 service categories:
l CES E1
l ATM/IMA E1
Port
specifications
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
75-ohm/120ohm E1 port
16
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
32
170
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Function and Feature
3 Boards
Description
ML1
Fractional E1
ATM/IMA
MD1
Supports transparent service transmission at the 64
kbit/s level.
Maximum
number of ATM
services
64
Maximum
number of ATM
connections
256
ATM traffic
management
Supported
ATM
encapsulation
mode
Supports the following ATM encapsulation modes:
l N-to-one VPC
l N-to-one VCC
l One-to-one VPC
l One-to-one VCC
Maximum
number of
concatenated
ATM cells
31
ATM OAM
Supports F4 OAM (VP level) and F5 OAM (VC level),
including the following functions:
l Alarm indication signal (AIS)/Remote defect
indication (RDI)
l Continuity check test
l Loopback test
CES
Maximum
number of IMA
groups
16
32
Maximum
number of
members in an
IMA group
16
Maximum
number of
services
16
Encapsulation
mode
Supports the following encapsulation modes:
32
l CESoPSN
l SAToP
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
171
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Function and Feature
3 Boards
Description
ML1
Service
category
Point-to-point services
Compression of
vacant slots
Supported (applicable to CESoPSN only)
Jitter buffering
time (us)
375-16000
Packet loading
time (us)
125-5000
CES ACR
Supported
Retiming
Supported
Clock protection
OM
MD1
Supports clock protection based on clock source
priorities.
Loopback
Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports.
Cold reset and
warm reset
Supported
PRBS tests at E1
ports
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board power
consumption
information
query
Supported
3.14.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the ML1/MD1.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
172
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-67 Functional block diagram of the ML1/MD1
Backplane
Service
bus
Logic processing
unit
Service
processing unit
E1
Signal interface
unit
E1
GE bus
Packet switching unit
Control bus
System control and
communication unit
Logic
control unit
+3.3 V power
supplied to the board
+3.3 V backup power
supplied to the board
Power
supply unit
Clock signal provided to the
other units of the board
Clock unit
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V
System clock signal
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction
Table 3-148 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ML1/MD1
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Signal interface unit
l Receives external E1 signals.
l Matches the resistance.
l Equalizes signals.
l Converts the level.
l Recovers clock signals.
l Buffers the received data.
l Performs HDB3 decoding.
2
Service processing
unit
l Frames E1 signals.
l Performs CES emulation or processes ATM/IMA
services.
l Encapsulates PWE3 services and converts the PWE3
services into Ethernet services.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
173
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
3
Logic processing
unit
l Implements the conversion from the internal service
bus into the GE bus in the backplane.
l Sends service signals to the packet switching unit.
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-149 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ML1/MD1
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Logic processing
unit
l Receives service signals from the packet switching
unit.
l Implements the conversion from the GE bus in the
backplane into the internal service bus.
2
Service processing
unit
l Decapsulates service signals.
l Re-forms CES packets or processes ATM/IMA
services.
l Converts signals into E1 signals and sends the E1
signals to the signal interface unit.
3
Signal interface unit
l Performs HDB3 coding.
l Performs clock re-timing.
l Performs pulse shaping.
l Drives the line.
l Sends E1 signals to a port.
Control Signal Processing
The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the
control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the
CPU unit over the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l
Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power supplies
into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
l
Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power
backup for the other units on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
174
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
3.14.4 Front Panel
There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
ML1
STAT
SRV
Figure 3-68 Front panel of the ML1
16
E1
1
MD1
STAT
SRV
Figure 3-69 Front panel of the MD1
16
1
32
17
Indicators
Table 3-150 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working
properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.
SRV
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
On (green)
The services are normal.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm
occurs in the services.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm
occurs in the services.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
175
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Indicator
3 Boards
State
Meaning
Off
The services are not
configured.
Ports
Table 3-151 Description of the ports on the ML1
Port
Description
Connector
Type
Corresponding Cable
1 to 16
The first to sixteenth
E1 ports
Anea 96
5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to
the External Equipment or
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel
Table 3-152 Description of the ports on the MD1
Port
Description
Connector
Type
Corresponding Cable
1 to 16
The first to sixteenth
E1 ports
Anea 96
5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to
the External Equipment or
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel
17 to 32
The seventeenth to
thirty-second E1
ports
Anea 96
5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to
the External Equipment or
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel
The ports on the ML1/MD1 use the Anea 96 connector. Figure 3-70 shows the front view of an
Anea 96 connector and Table 3-153 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.
Figure 3-70 Front view of an Anea 96 connector
POS.1
POS.96
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
176
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-153 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
The first received E1
differential signal (+)
25
The first transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
2
The first received E1
differential signal (-)
26
The first transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
3
The second received E1
differential signal (+)
27
The second transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
4
The second received E1
differential signal (-)
28
The second transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
5
The third received E1
differential signal (+)
29
The third transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
6
The third received E1
differential signal (-)
30
The third transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
7
The fourth received E1
differential signal (+)
31
The fourth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
8
The fourth received E1
differential signal (-)
32
The fourth transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
9
The fifth received E1
differential signal (+)
33
The fifth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
10
The fifth received E1
differential signal (-)
34
The fifth transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
11
The sixth received E1
differential signal (+)
35
The sixth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
12
The sixth received E1
differential signal (-)
36
The sixth transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
13
The seventh received E1
differential signal (+)
37
The seventh transmitted E1
differential signal (+)
14
The seventh received E1
differential signal (-)
38
The seventh transmitted E1
differential signal (-)
15
The eighth received E1
differential signal (+)
39
The eighth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
16
The eighth received E1
differential signal (-)
40
The eighth transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
17
The ninth received E1
differential signal (+)
41
The ninth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
18
The ninth received E1
differential signal (-)
42
The ninth transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
177
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
19
The tenth received E1
differential signal (+)
43
The tenth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
20
The tenth received E1
differential signal (-)
44
The tenth transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
21
The eleventh received E1
differential signal (+)
45
The eleventh transmitted E1
differential signal (+)
22
The eleventh received E1
differential signal (-)
46
The eleventh transmitted E1
differential signal (-)
23
The twelfth received E1
differential signal (+)
47
The twelfth transmitted E1
differential signal (+)
24
The twelfth received E1
differential signal (-)
48
The twelfth transmitted E1
differential signal (-)
49
The thirteenth received E1
differential signal (+)
73
The thirteenth transmitted E1
differential signal (+)
50
The thirteenth received E1
differential signal (-)
74
The thirteenth transmitted E1
differential signal (-)
51
The fourteenth received E1
differential signal (+)
75
The fourteenth transmitted E1
differential signal (+)
52
The fourteenth received E1
differential signal (-)
76
The fourteenth transmitted E1
differential signal (-)
53
The fifteenth received E1
differential signal (+)
77
The fifteenth transmitted E1
differential signal (+)
54
The fifteenth received E1
differential signal (-)
78
The fifteenth transmitted E1
differential signal (-)
55
The sixteenth received E1
differential signal (+)
79
The sixteenth transmitted E1
differential signal (+)
56
The sixteenth received E1
differential signal (-)
80
The sixteenth transmitted E1
differential signal (-)
3.14.5 Valid Slots
The ML1/MD1 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS are
the same as the physical slots.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
178
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Figure 3-71 Slots for the ML1/MD1 in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 6 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 3 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 4 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 1 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 2 (ML1/MD1)
Figure 3-72 Logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 6 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 3 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 4 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 1 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 2 (ML1/MD1)
Table 3-154 Slot allocation
Item
Description
Slot allocation priority
Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 3 and 5
3.14.6 Board Feature Code
The board feature code of the ML1/MD1 indicates the port impedance. The board feature code
refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
Table 3-155 Board feature code of the ML1/MD1
Board Feature Code
Port Impedance (Ohm)
A
75
B
120
3.14.7 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ML1/MD1.
Related References
A.5.1.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
179
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
A.5.1.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes
3.14.8 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including the E1 port performance, board
mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-156 E1 interface performance
Item
Performance
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)
2048
Code pattern
HDB3
Impedance (ohm)
75
120
Wire pair in each
transmission direction
One coaxial wire pair
One symmetrical wire pair
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-157 Mechanical behavior
Item
Performance
ML1
MD1
Dimensions (H x W x
D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.45 kg
0.50 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the ML1: < 7.0 W
Power consumption of the MD1: < 12.2 W
3.15 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm
tributary board.
3.15.1 Version Description
The SP3S has two functional versions: SL91SP3SVER.B and SL91SP3SVER.C. The SP3D also
has two functional versions: TNH1SP3DVER.B and TNH1SP3DVER.C. The difference
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
180
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
between VER.B and VER.C is that path indication on the front panel is optimized and the board
power consumption is reduced.
3.15.2 Functions and Features
The SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
Table 3-158 lists the functions and features that the SP3S/SP3D supports.
Table 3-158 Functions and features
Function and Feature
Description
SP3S
Basic functions
SP3D
Receives and transmits E1 signals.
Port
specifications
75-ohm/120ohm E1 port
16
Clock
Clock source
Supports a tributary clock source extracted from the
first or fifth E1 signal.
Clock
protection
Supports clock protection based on clock source
priorities.
E1 retiming
function
Supported
Loopback
Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports.
Cold reset and
warm reset
Supported
PRBS tests at E1
ports
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board power
consumption
information
query
Supported
OM
32
3.15.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
181
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-73 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D
Backplane
Codec unit
Interface unit
E1
Service bus
Logic processing
unit
Mapping/Demapping
unit
E1 signal
E1
Control bus
Cross-connect unit
System control and
communication unit
Logic
control unit
+3.3 V power supplied
to the board
Power
supply unit
+3.3 V backup power
supplied to the board
Clock signal provided to the
other units on the board
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V
Clock
unit
System clock signal
NOTE
The power supply units on the SP3SVER.C and SP3DVER.C boards do not support conversion from -48
V power into +3.3 V power.
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction
Table 3-159 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Interface unit
External E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and
then transmitted to the board.
2
Codec unit
l Equalizes the received signals.
l Recovers clock signals.
l Detects T_ALOS alarms.
l Performs HDB3 decoding.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
182
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
3
Mapping/
Demapping unit
l Asynchronously maps signals into C-12s.
l Adds path overhead bytes to C-12s to form VC-12s.
l Processes pointers to form TU-12s.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TU-12s to form
one TUG-2.
l Performs byte interleaving for seven TUG-2s to form
one TUG-3.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TUG-3s to form
one C-4.
l Adds higher order path overhead bytes to one C-4 to
form one VC-4.
4
Logic processing
unit
l Processes clock signals.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the main and standby cross-connect units.
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-160 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
1
Logic processing
unit
l Processes clock signals.
Mapping/
Demapping unit
l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.
2
l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.
l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3.
l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2.
l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects
specific alarms and performance events.
l Extracts E1 signals.
3
Codec unit
Performs HDB3 coding.
4
Interface unit
E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and then
transmitted to an external cable.
Control Signal Processing
The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the
control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the
CPU unit over the control bus.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
183
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l
Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power into +3.3
V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board. The power
supply units on the SP3SVER.C and SP3DVER.C boards do not support conversion from
-48 V power into +3.3 V power.
l
Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power
backup for the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
3.15.4 Front Panel
There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
SP3S
SP3S
STAT
SRV
Figure 3-74 Front panel of the SP3SVER.B
E1
1-16
SP3S
STAT
SRV
Figure 3-75 Front panel of the SP3SVER.C
16
E1
1
21
1
42
22
SP3D
SP3D
STAT
SRV
Figure 3-76 Front panel of the SP3DVER.B
SP3D
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
STAT
SRV
Figure 3-77 Front panel of the SP3DVER.C
16
1
32
17
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
184
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Indicators
Table 3-161 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working
properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.
SRV
On (green)
The services are normal.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm
occurs in the services.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm
occurs in the services.
Off
The services are not
configured.
Ports
Table 3-162 Description of the ports on the SP3S(VER.B and VER.C)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Port
Description
Connector
Type
Corresponding Cable
1-16
The first to sixteenth
E1 ports
Anea 96
5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to
the External Equipment,
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel or 5.7.3 E1
Transit Cable Terminated
with an Anea 96 Connector
and a DB44 Connector
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
185
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-163 Description of the ports on the SP3DVER.B
Port
Description
Connector
Type
Corresponding Cable
1-21
The first to sixteenth
E1 ports
Anea 96
5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to
the External Equipment or
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel
22-42
The seventeenth to
thirty-second E1
ports
Anea 96
5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to
the External Equipment or
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel
NOTE
On the OptiX RTN 950, only ports 1-16 and 22-37 of the SP3D are used. Ports 1-16 correspond to E1
signals 1-16 and ports 22-37 correspond to E1 signals 17-32.
Table 3-164 Description of the ports on the SP3DVER.C
Port
Description
Connector
Type
Corresponding Cable
1-16
The first to sixteenth
E1 ports
Anea 96
5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to
the External Equipment or
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel
17-32
The seventeenth to
thirty-second E1
ports
Anea 96
5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to
the External Equipment or
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel
The ports on the SP3S/SP3D use Anea 96 connectors. Figure 3-78 shows the front view of an
Anea 96 connector and Table 3-165 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.
Figure 3-78 Front view of an Anea 96 connector
POS.1
POS.96
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
186
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-165 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
The first received E1
differential signal (+)
25
The first transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
2
The first received E1
differential signal (-)
26
The first transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
3
The second received E1
differential signal (+)
27
The second transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
4
The second received E1
differential signal (-)
28
The second transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
5
The third received E1
differential signal (+)
29
The third transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
6
The third received E1
differential signal (-)
30
The third transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
7
The fourth received E1
differential signal (+)
31
The fourth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
8
The fourth received E1
differential signal (-)
32
The fourth transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
9
The fifth received E1
differential signal (+)
33
The fifth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
10
The fifth received E1
differential signal (-)
34
The fifth transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
11
The sixth received E1
differential signal (+)
35
The sixth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
12
The sixth received E1
differential signal (-)
36
The sixth transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
13
The seventh received E1
differential signal (+)
37
The seventh transmitted E1
differential signal (+)
14
The seventh received E1
differential signal (-)
38
The seventh transmitted E1
differential signal (-)
15
The eighth received E1
differential signal (+)
39
The eighth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
16
The eighth received E1
differential signal (-)
40
The eighth transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
17
The ninth received E1
differential signal (+)
41
The ninth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
18
The ninth received E1
differential signal (-)
42
The ninth transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
187
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
19
The tenth received E1
differential signal (+)
43
The tenth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
20
The tenth received E1
differential signal (-)
44
The tenth transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
21
The eleventh received E1
differential signal (+)
45
The eleventh transmitted E1
differential signal (+)
22
The eleventh received E1
differential signal (-)
46
The eleventh transmitted E1
differential signal (-)
23
The twelfth received E1
differential signal (+)
47
The twelfth transmitted E1
differential signal (+)
24
The twelfth received E1
differential signal (-)
48
The twelfth transmitted E1
differential signal (-)
49
The thirteenth received E1
differential signal (+)
73
The thirteenth transmitted E1
differential signal (+)
50
The thirteenth received E1
differential signal (-)
74
The thirteenth transmitted E1
differential signal (-)
51
The fourteenth received E1
differential signal (+)
75
The fourteenth transmitted E1
differential signal (+)
52
The fourteenth received E1
differential signal (-)
76
The fourteenth transmitted E1
differential signal (-)
53
The fifteenth received E1
differential signal (+)
77
The fifteenth transmitted E1
differential signal (+)
54
The fifteenth received E1
differential signal (-)
78
The fifteenth transmitted E1
differential signal (-)
55
The sixteenth received E1
differential signal (+)
79
The sixteenth transmitted E1
differential signal (+)
56
The sixteenth received E1
differential signal (-)
80
The sixteenth transmitted E1
differential signal (-)
3.15.5 Valid Slots
The SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS
are the same as the physical slots.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
188
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Figure 3-79 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 6 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 1 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 2 (SP3S/SP3D)
Figure 3-80 Logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 6 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 1 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 2 (SP3S/SP3D)
Table 3-166 Slot allocation
Item
Description
Slot allocation priority
Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 3 and 5
3.15.6 Board Feature Code
The board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D indicates the E1 port impedance. The board feature
code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
Table 3-167 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D
Board Feature Code
Port Impedance (Ohm)
A
120
B
75
3.15.7 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D.
Related References
A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
189
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs
3.15.8 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including the E1 port performance, board
mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-168 E1 interface performance
Item
Performance
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)
2048
Code pattern
HDB3
Impedance (ohm)
75
120
Wire pair in each
transmission direction
One coaxial wire pair
One symmetrical wire pair
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-169 Mechanical behavior
Item
Performance
SP3SVER.B
SP3SVER.C
Dimensio
ns (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.50 kg
0.40 kg
SP3DVER.B
SP3SVER.C
0.64 kg
0.54 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the SP3SVER.B: < 5.7 W
Power consumption of the SP3SVER.C: < 4.8 W
Power consumption of the SP3DVER.B: < 9.6 W
Power consumption of the SP3DVER.C: < 8.3 W
3.16 AUX
The AUX is an auxiliary management interface board of the OptiX RTN 950. One NE can house
only one AUX.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
190
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
3.16.1 Version Description
The functional version of the AUX is SL91.
3.16.2 Functions and Features
The AUX provides the system with one orderwire phone port, one synchronous data port, one
asynchronous data port, and one four-input/two-output external alarm port.
Table 3-170 lists the functions and features that the AUX supports.
Table 3-170 Functions and features
Function and Feature
Description
Orderwire phone port
1
Synchronous data port
1
The transmission rate of the port is 64 kbit/s and its
specifications comply with ITU-T G.703.
Asynchronous data port
1
The transmission rate of the port is equal to or less than 19.2
kbit/s and the interfacing level complies with RS-232.
External alarm port
Four inputs and two outputs
Hot swapping function
Supported
Board power consumption
information query
Supported
Power detection
Supported
3.16.3 Working Principle
The AUX consists of the orderwire unit, logic control unit, and clock unit.
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-81 Functional block diagram of the AUX
Backplane
Power
supply unit
4-input/2-output alarm port
One orderwire phone port
64 kbit/s
synchronous data port
Orderwire
unit
Logic control
unit
+3.3 V
Power dip
detection signal
System bus
System control and
communication unit
19.2 kbit/s
asynchronous data port
Clock unit
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Clock
signal
Board status
detection unit
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
System control and
communication unit
191
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Power Supply Unit
l
Receives the +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and supplies it to the other units on
the AUX.
l
Receives and shuts down control signals.
Orderwire Unit
l
Supports the input of four channels of alarms.
l
Supports the output of two channels of alarms.
l
Provides one orderwire port.
l
Provides one 64 kbit/s synchronous transparent data port.
l
Provides one 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data port.
NOTE
The 64 kbit/s synchronous data port can transparently transmit orderwire byte. One port, however, can implement
only one of the two functions: 64 kbit/s synchronous data port and transparent transmission of orderwire byte.
Logic Control Unit
l
Provides an interface with the CPU unit and works with the CPU unit to implement the
board control function.
l
Processes orderwire bytes and overhead bytes.
l
Processes clock signals.
l
Provides board status information.
l
Checks the status of the main and standby system control, switching, and timing boards.
l
Checks the status of the main and standby clocks.
l
Supports the switching of system clock reference sources automatically and by running
specific commands.
l
Supports the detection and reporting of the key clock status of each board in the system.
Board Status Detection Unit
l
Detects board performance data such as board voltage.
l
Stores board manufacturing information.
Clock Unit
Provides clock signals to the logic control unit.
3.16.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, management ports, and auxiliary ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-82 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AUX.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
192
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
AUX
STAT
SRV
Figure 3-82 Front panel of the AUX
F1/S1
PHONE
ALMO
ALMI
Indicators
Table 3-171 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working properly.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the
board.
SRV
On (green)
The system is working properly.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the
system.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the
system.
Off
There is no power supplied to the system.
Auxiliary Ports and Management Ports
Table 3-172 Description of the auxiliary ports and management ports
Port
Description
F1/S1
Synchronous/Asynchronous data port
ALMI
Alarm input port
ALMO
Alarm output port
PHONE
Orderwire phone port
Connector Type
RJ45
The auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the
ports, however, are different. Figure 3-83 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
193
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Figure 3-83 Front view of the RJ45 connector
87654321
Table 3-173 provides the pin assignments for the F1/S1 port.
Table 3-173 Pin assignments for the F1/S1 port
Port
Pin
Signal
F1/S1
1
Transmitting asynchronous data signals
2
Grounding end
3
Receiving asynchronous data signals
4
Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP)
5
Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING)
6
Grounding end
7
Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP)
8
Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)
For the pin assignments for the ALMI and ALMO ports, see Table 3-174 and see Table
3-175.
Table 3-174 Pin assignments for the ALMI port
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Port
Pin
Signal
ALMI
1
The first external alarm input signal
2
Grounding end for the first external alarm input signal
3
The second external alarm input signal
4
The third external alarm input signal
5
Grounding end for the third external alarm input signal
6
Grounding end for the second external alarm input
signal
7
The forth external alarm input signal
8
Grounding end for the forth external alarm input signal
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
194
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-175 Pin assignments for the ALMO port
Port
Pin
Signal
ALMO
1
The first external alarm output signal (+)
2
The first external alarm output signal (-)
3
The second external alarm output signal (+)
4
Connected in parallel with pin 1
5
Connected in parallel with pin 2
6
The second external alarm output signal (-)
7
Connected in parallel with pin 3
8
Connected in parallel with pin 6
3.16.5 Valid Slots
The AUX can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the AUX on the NMS are the same
as the physical slots.
Figure 3-84 Slots for the AUX in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (AUX)
Slot 6 (AUX)
Slot 3 (AUX)
Slot 4 (AUX)
Slot 1 (AUX)
Slot 2 (AUX)
Figure 3-85 Logical slots of the AUX on the NMS
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5 (AUX)
Slot 6 (AUX)
Slot 3 (AUX)
Slot 4 (AUX)
Slot 1 (AUX)
Slot 2 (AUX)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
195
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-176 Slot allocation
Item
Description
Slot allocation priority
Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 3 and 5
3.16.6 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including auxiliary port performance, board
mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Orderwire Interface Performance
Table 3-177 Orderwire interface performance
Item
Performance
Transmission path
Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huaweidefined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Orderwire type
Addressing call
Wire pair in each
transmission direction
One symmetrical wire pair
Impedance (ohm)
600
NOTE
The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when OptiX RTN
equipment calls 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire phones in the
orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is established.
Synchronous Data Interface Performance
Table 3-178 Synchronous data interface performance
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Item
Performance
Transmission path
Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined
byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)
64
Interface type
Codirectional
Interface characteristics
Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
196
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Asynchronous Data Interface
Table 3-179 Asynchronous data interface performance
Item
Performance
Transmission path
Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or the
Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)
≤ 19.2
Interface characteristics
Meets the RS-232 standard.
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-180 Mechanical behavior
Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.27 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 1.3 W
3.17 PIU
The PIU is the power interface board. The OptiX RTN 950 supports two PIUs, each of which
accesses one -48 V/-60 V DC power supply.
3.17.1 Version Description
The functional version of the PIU is TND1.
3.17.2 Functions and Features
The PIU supports power access, power protection, surge protection status monitoring, and
information reporting.
Table 3-181 lists the functions and features that the PIU supports.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
197
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-181 Functions and features
Function and Feature
Description
Basic functions
Power access
Two PIUs are provided and each accesses one -48 V
DC or -60 V DC power input.
Power output
The PIU provides other boards with -48 V power.
Protection
Supports 1+1 HSB protection.
Power
protection
l Protection against overcurrent
Surge
protection
Supported
Protection
l Protection against short circuits
Board power consumption
information query
Supported
Surge protection status monitoring
Supported
3.17.3 Working Principle
The PIU consists of the protection and detection unit, EMI filtering unit, and communication
control unit.
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-86 shows the functional block diagram of the PIU.
Figure 3-86 Functional block diagram of the PIU
Backplane
-48 V/-60 V
Protection and
detection unit
EMI filtering
unit
Detection
signal
-48 V
Detection signal
Communicatio
n control unit
Board operating in distributed
power supply mode
System control and
communication unit
+3.3 V
Protection and Detection Unit
The protection and detection unit primarily protects and detects the PIU. It performs the
following functions:
l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Provides protection against lightning strike and surge.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
198
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
l
Detects whether the surge-protection circuit fails and reports a surge-protection failure
alarm.
l
Monitors PIU temperature in real time and reports it to the system control and
communication unit through the communication control unit.
EMI Filtering Unit
The EMI filtering unit performs electro-magnetic interference (EMI) filtering.
Communication Control Unit
The communication control unit achieves communication between the system control and
communication unit and the PIU and reports the following information to the system control
and communication unit:
l
PIU manufacturing information
l
PCB version information
l
Surge-protection failure information
l
PIU temperature
3.17.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, power access ports, and a label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-87 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU.
-48V
PWR
NEG(-) RTN(+)
-60V
Figure 3-87 Front panel of the PIU
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
199
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Indicators
Table 3-182 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU
Indicator
Status
Description
PWR
On (green)
The power supply is connected.
Off
There is no power supplied to the PIU or the power
supply is connected incorrectly.
Ports
The PIU accesses one power supply. Table 3-183 lists the types of the ports on the PIU and their
respective usage.
Table 3-183 Description of the ports on the PIU
Port
Port Description
Connector Type
Corresponding Cable
NEG1(-)
-48 V power input
port
2 mm HM power
connector
5.1 Power Cable
RTN1(+)
BGND power input
port
Labels
Caution label for power operations: prompting you to read the operation guide before any power
operations.
CAUTION
Do not remove or install a PIU while the equipment is powered on. That is, turn off all the power
supplies of the PIU before removing or installing it.
3.17.5 Valid Slots
The PIU can be inserted in slots 9 and 10. The logical slots of the PIU on the NMS are the same
as the physical slots.
Figure 3-88 Slots for the PIU in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 11
Slot 9
(PIU)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 1
Slot 2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
200
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Figure 3-89 Logical slots of the PIU on the NMS
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 11
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 1
Slot 2
3.17.6 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including input voltage, board mechanical
behavior, and board power consumption.
Table 3-184 lists the technical specifications for the PIU.
Table 3-184 Technical specifications for the PIU
Item
Performance
Dimensions
21.0 mm x 41.4 mm x 229.9 mm
Weight
0.12 kg
Power consumption
< 0.5 W
Input voltage
-38.4 V to -72.0 V
3.18 FAN
The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat generated in the chassis through air cooling.
3.18.1 Version Description
The functional version of the FAN is TND1.
3.18.2 Functions and Features
The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status.
Table 3-185 lists the functions and features that the FAN supports.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
201
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Table 3-185 Functions and features
Function and Feature
Description
Power input
Accesses one +12 V power input from the active system
control, switching, and timing board and one +12 V power
input from the standby system control, switching, and timing
board to provide 1+1 protection.
Number of fans
6
Intelligent fan speed
adjustment
Supported
Protection
Provides soft-start for the power supply of the fans, protects
fans against overcurrent, and filters out high-frequency
signals.
OM
l Reports the information about the fan rotating speed,
alarms, version number, and board in-position status.
l Provides alarm indicators.
l Supports board power consumption information query
NOTE
l When one fan fails, it is recommended that you replace it within 96 hours if the ambient temperature
reaches 40°C; it is recommended that you replace it within 24 hours if the ambient temperature exceeds
40°C.
l When more than one fan fails, it is recommended that you replace the failed fans immediately.
3.18.3 Working Principle
The FAN consists of the fan unit, power unit, and communication monitoring unit.
Figure 3-90 shows the functional block diagram of the FAN.
Figure 3-90 Functional block diagram of the FAN
Backplane
Fan unit
+12 V
+12 V
Power unit
+12 V
Communication
detection signal
Communication
monitoring unit
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Communication
detection signal
System control and
communication unit
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
202
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Power Unit
l
Receives +12 V power from the backplane.
l
Provides the fan power with the following functions: soft-start, filtering, supply
combining, and overcurrent protection.
Fan Unit
Six air-cooling fans dissipate the heat generated by the system.
Communication Monitoring Unit
l
Detects the manufacturing information, PCB version information, and environmental
temperature of the FAN, and reports the information to the system control and
communication unit.
l
Detects the fan rotating speed and adjusts the speed according to the pulse-width
modulation signal from the system control and communication unit.
The system adjusts the fan rotating speed based on the working temperature, as listed in
Table 3-186.
Table 3-186 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed
Working Temperature
Rotating Speed
≤ 25°C
4800 rounds/minute
25°C to 60°C
Linear increase in accordance with the
temperature
≥ 60°C
16000 rounds/minute
3.18.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-91 shows the appearance of the front panel of the FAN.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
203
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Figure 3-91 Front panel of the FAN
FAN
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
Indicators
Table 3-187 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN
Indicator
State
Meaning
FAN
On (green)
The fan is working properly.
On (red)
The fan is faulty.
Off
The fan is not powered on or is not installed.
NOTE
The CRIT, MAJ, or MIN indicator on the front panel of the FAN indicates the current alarm severity of the
subrack.
ESD Wrist Strap Jack
An ESD wrist strap needs to be connected to the ESD wrist strap jack to achieve the proper
grounding of the human body.
Labels
The front panel of the FAN has the following labels:
l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
ESD protection label: indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
204
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
l
3 Boards
Fan warning label: warns you not to touch fan leaves when a fan is rotating.
3.18.5 Valid Slots
The FAN can be inserted in slot 11 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS
is the same as the physical slot.
Figure 3-92 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 9
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 1
Slot 2
Figure 3-93 Logical slot of the FAN on the NMS
Slot 10
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 9
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 1
Slot 2
3.18.6 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including board mechanical behavior and board
power consumption.
Table 3-188 lists the technical specifications for the FAN.
Table 3-188 Technical specifications for the FAN
Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D)
28.5 mm x 86.2 mm x 217.6 mm
Weight
0.302 kg
Power consumption
< 4.1 W (room temperature)
< 29.6 W (high temperature)
3.19 TCU6
The TDM connecting unit (TCU6) is a 6xE1 port conversion board. The TCU6 implements
conversion between DB44 ports and RJ45 ports.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
205
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
3.19.1 Version Description
The functional version of the TCU6 is SL91.
3.19.2 Functions and Features
The TCU6 implements conversion between DB44 ports and RJ45 ports for 6xE1 services. In
application, the TCU6 usually works with the SP3S (120 ohms) by connecting them using an
E1 transit cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector and a DB44 connector, therefore enabling
conversion between Anea 96 ports and RJ45 ports.
Table 3-189 lists the functions and features that the TCU6 supports.
Table 3-189 Functions and features
Function and Feature
Description
Basic functions
Enables conversion between Anea 96 ports and
RJ45 ports for E1 services when this board is
connected to the DB44 connector of an E1 transit
cable, the other end of which is terminated with an
Anea 96 connector.
Port
specifications
RJ45 port
6
DB44 port
1 (for receiving/transmitting 6xE1 signals)
Board information query and display on
the NMS
Not supported
NOTE
The TCU6 is a passive port conversion board, which does not provide software interfaces and ports for
connecting to the backplane.
3.19.3 Front Panel
There are six RJ45 ports and one DB44 port on the front panel.
TCU6
Front Panel Diagram
1
1
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
2
3
4
5
6
6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
206
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Ports
Table 3-190 Description of the ports on the TCU6
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
1-6 (RJ45)
The first to sixth E1
RJ45 ports
RJ45
-
1-6 (DB44)
The first to sixth E1
DB44 ports
DB44
5.7.3 E1 Transit
Cable Terminated
with an Anea 96
Connector and a
DB44 Connector
Figure 3-94 shows the front view of an RJ45 connector.
Figure 3-94 Front view of an RJ45 connector
87654321
NOTE
The two indicators on an RJ45 connector do not indicate port status and are steady off.
Each RJ45 port transmits 1xE1 signals. Table 3-191 provides the pin assignments for an RJ45
port.
Table 3-191 Pin assignments for an RJ45 port
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Port
Pin
Signal
n (n = 1-6)
1
The nth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
2
The nth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
3
Reserved
4
The nth received E1 differential signal (+)
5
The nth received E1 differential signal (-)
6
Reserved
7
Reserved
8
Reserved
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
207
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Figure 3-95 shows the front view of a DB44 connector.
Figure 3-95 Pin assignments for a DB44 port
Pos. 15
Pos. 1
Pos. 30
Pos. 16
Pos. 31
Pos. 44
Table 3-192 Pin assignments for a DB44 port
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
15
The first received E1 differential
signal (-)
38
The first transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
30
The first received E1 differential
signal (+)
23
The first transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
14
The second received E1 differential
signal (-)
37
The second transmitted E1
differential signal (-)
29
The second received E1 differential
signal (+)
22
The second transmitted E1
differential signal (+)
13
The third received E1 differential
signal (-)
36
The third transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
28
The third received E1 differential
signal (+)
21
The third transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
12
The fourth received E1 differential
signal (-)
35
The fourth transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
27
The fourth received E1 differential
signal (+)
20
The four transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
11
The fifth received E1 differential
signal (-)
34
The fifth transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
26
The fifth received E1 differential
signal (+)
19
The fifth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
10
The sixth received E1 differential
signal (-)
33
The sixth transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
25
The sixth received E1 differential
signal (+)
18
The sixth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
9
The seventh transmitted E1
differential signal (+)
32
The seventh received E1 differential
signal (+)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
208
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3 Boards
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
24
The seventh transmitted E1
differential signal (-)
17
The seventh received E1 differential
signal (-)
8
The eighth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
31
The eighth received E1 differential
signal (+)
7
The eighth transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
16
The eighth received E1 differential
signal (-)
1-6
and
39-4
4
Grounding
Othe
rs
Not defined
3.19.4 Valid Slots
The TCU6 can be inserted in slot 4 or 6 of the IDU chassis. The TCU6 has no logical slots and
is not displayed on the NMS.
The TCU6 usually works with the SP3S. The TCU6 is inserted in slot 6 and the SP3S is inserted
in slot 4.
Figure 3-96 Slots for the TCU6 in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 5
Slot 6 (TCU6)
Slot 3
Slot 4 (SP3S)
Slot 1
Slot 2
You can also insert the TCU6 in slot 4 and the SP3S in slot 6.
3.19.5 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including only the mechanical behavior.
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-193 Mechanical behavior
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight
0.27 kg
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
209
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
4 Accessories
4
Accessories
About This Chapter
The accessories of the OptiX RTN 950 include the E1 panel and the power distribution unit
(PDU). Select appropriate accessories based on the requirements.
4.1 E1 Panel
When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, install an E1 panel in the cabinet and this E1
panel functions as a DDF for the IDU.
4.2 PDU
A PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet to distribute the input power supply to devices
in the cabinet.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
210
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
4 Accessories
4.1 E1 Panel
When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, install an E1 panel in the cabinet and this E1
panel functions as a DDF for the IDU.
The dimensions (H x W x D) of the E1 panel are 42 mm x 483 mm x 33 mm. An E1 panel
provides cable distribution for 16 E1s.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
R9
R10
R11
R12
R13
R14
R15
R16
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
T10
T11
T12
T13
T14
T15
T16
1-8
9-16
Ports
Table 4-1 Port description of an E1 panel
Port
Description
Connector Type
T1-T16
Transmit ports for the first to
sixteenth E1 ports (connected
to external equipment)
BNC
R1-R16
Receive ports for the first to
sixteenth E1 ports (connected
to external equipment)
1-8
The first to eighth E1 ports
(connected to an IDU)
9-16
The ninth to sixteenth E1
ports (connected to an IDU)
Grounding bolt
Connecting a PGND cable
DB37
-
NOTE
The port impedance of each E1 port on an E1 panel is 75 ohms.
Figure 4-2 shows the front view of an E1 port that is connected to an IDU. Table 4-2 provides
the pin assignments for the E1 port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
211
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
4 Accessories
Figure 4-2 Front view of an E1 port (E1 panel)
Pos. 1
Pos. 37
Table 4-2 Pin assignments for an E1 port (E1 panel)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
20
The first E1 received differential
signal (+)
21
The first E1 transmitted
differential signal (+)
2
The first E1 received differential
signal (-)
3
The first E1 transmitted
differential signal (-)
22
The second E1 received
differential signal (+)
23
The second E1 transmitted
differential signal (+)
4
The second E1 received
differential signal (-)
5
The second E1 transmitted
differential signal (-)
24
The third E1 received differential
signal (+)
25
The third E1 transmitted
differential signal (+)
6
The third E1 received differential
signal (-)
7
The third E1 transmitted
differential signal (-)
26
The fourth E1 received
differential signal (+)
27
The fourth E1 transmitted
differential signal (+)
8
The fourth E1 received
differential signal (-)
9
The fourth E1 transmitted
differential signal (-)
36
The fifth E1 received differential
signal (+)
35
The fifth E1 transmitted
differential signal (+)
17
The fifth E1 received differential
signal (-)
16
The fifth E1 transmitted
differential signal (-)
34
The sixth E1 received differential
signal (+)
33
The sixth E1 transmitted
differential signal (+)
15
The sixth E1 received differential
signal (-)
14
The sixth E1 transmitted
differential signal (-)
32
The seventh E1 received
differential signal (+)
31
The seventh E1 transmitted
differential signal (+)
13
The seventh E1 received
differential signal (-)
12
The seventh E1 transmitted
differential signal (-)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
212
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
4 Accessories
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
30
The eighth E1 received
differential signal (+)
29
The eighth E1 transmitted
differential signal (+)
11
The eighth E1 received
differential signal (-)
10
The eighth E1 transmitted
differential signal (-)
Others
Reserved
-
-
4.2 PDU
A PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet to distribute the input power supply to devices
in the cabinet.
4.2.1 Front Panel
There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches
on the front panel of a PDU.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 4-3 Front panel of the PDU
1
1
2
3
2
4
OUTPUT
3
4
A
B
ON
2
1
3
4
OUTPUT
ON
RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-)
OFF
20A
20A 20A 20A
OFF
INPUT
20A
20A 20A 20A
5
6
1. Output power terminals (A)
2. PGND terminals
3. Input power terminals
4. Output power terminals (B)
5. Power switches (A)
6. Power switches (B)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
213
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
4 Accessories
Ports
Table 4-3 Ports on the PDU
Position
Port
Description
Output power
terminals (A)
+
Power output (+)
-
Power output (-)
PGND
terminals
Wiring terminal
for a two-hole
OT terminal
For connecting PGND cables
Input power
terminals
RTN1(+)
The first power input (+)
RTN2(+)
The second power input (+)
NEG1(-)
The first power input (-)
NEG2(-)
The second power input (-)
Output power
terminals (B)
+
Power output (+)
-
Power output (-)
Power
switches (A)
20 A
Switches for power outputs
Power
switches (B)
20 A
The fuse capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to
the right correspond to output power terminals 1 to 4 on
side A.
Switches for power outputs
The fuse capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to
the right correspond to output power terminals 1 to 4 on
side B.
4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle
After implementing simple power distribution, a PDU feeds power to devices in a cabinet.
Functions
l
The PDU supports two -48 V/-60 V DC power inputs.
l
Each input power supply provides four outputs.
l
The fuse capacity of the switch for each power output is 20 A.
l
The PDU supports DC-C and DC-I power distribution.
Working Principle
A PDU consists of input terminals, output terminals, and circuit breakers and it performs simple
distribution operations for the input power.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
214
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
4 Accessories
Figure 4-4 Functional block diagram of the PDU
OUTPUT A
+
SW1
SW2
INPUT
+
+
SW3
RTN1(+)
BGND
+
SW4
RTN2(+)
-
1
2
3
4
OUTPUT B
+
NEG1(-)
BGND
SW1
NEG2(-)
SW2
+
+
SW4
PGND
+
SW4
-
1
2
3
4
4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode
A PDU supports DC-C and DC-I power distribution. The DC-C power distribution is the default
mode.
A short-circuit copper bar inside a PDU controls the power distribution mode of the PDU.
DC-C Power Distribution Mode
To use DC-C power distribution, use the short-circuit copper bar to short-circuit terminal RTN1
(+), terminal RTN2(+), and PGND terminals.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
215
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
4 Accessories
Figure 4-5 Interior of the PDU in DC-C mode
DC-I Power Distribution Mode
To use DC-I power distribution, remove the short-circuit copper bar.
Figure 4-6 Interior of the PDU in DC-I mode
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
216
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
5 Cables
5
Cables
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the purpose, appearance, and pin assignments of various cables used on
the IDU 950.
5.1 Power Cable
A power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to a power supply device (for example, a PDU
on top of the cabinet) for access of the -48 V power to the IDU.
5.2 PGND Cable
PGND cables are available in two categories: IDU PGND cables and E1 panel PGND cables.
5.3 IF Jumper
An IF jumper connects the IDU to an IF cable. The IF jumper works with the IF cable to transmit
IF signals and O&M signals in addition to supplying -48 V power between the ODU and the
IDU.
5.4 XPIC Cable
An XPIC cable transmits reference IF signals between the two XPIC boards in an XPIC
workgroup to implement the XPIC function.
5.5 Fiber Jumper
A fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper has an LC/PC connector
that is connected to an SDH optical port or GE optical port on the OptiX RTN 950. The connector
at the other end of the fiber jumper depends on the type of the optical port on the equipment to
be connected.
5.6 STM-1 Cable
An STM-1 cable transmits/receives STM-1 signals. One end of the STM-1 cable has an SAA
connector that is connected to an STM-1 electrical port. The connector at the other end of the
STM-1 cable is connected to a DDF and needs to be prepared on site as required.
5.7 E1 Cables
E1 cables are available in two categories: E1 cable (Anea 96) connected to the external equipment
and E1 cable connected to the E1 panel.
5.8 Orderwire Cable
An orderwire cable connects an orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire
cable are terminated with an RJ11 connector. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
217
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
5 Cables
PHONE port on the AUX. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected to the port of the
orderwire phone.
5.9 Network Cable
A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are
terminated with an RJ45 connector.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
218
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
5 Cables
5.1 Power Cable
A power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to a power supply device (for example, a PDU
on top of the cabinet) for access of the -48 V power to the IDU.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-1 Power cable
Table 5-1 Power cable specifications
Model
Cable
Terminal
6 mm2 power
cable and
terminal
Power cable, 450 V/
750 V, H07Z-K-6
mm2, blue/black, low
smoke zero halogen
cable
Common terminal, single cord end terminal,
conductor cross section 6 mm2, 30 A, insertion
depth 12 mm, blue
NOTE
For the OptiX RTN 950, power cables with a 6 mm2 cross-sectional area can extend for a maximum distance
of 43 m.
5.2 PGND Cable
PGND cables are available in two categories: IDU PGND cables and E1 panel PGND cables.
5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable
An IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of external
equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and external equipment
share the same ground.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
219
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable
Main label
1
Cable tie
H.S.tube
2
L
1. Bare crimping terminal, OT
2. Bare crimping terminal, OT
Pin Assignments
None.
5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable
An E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point of
external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel and
external equipment share the same ground.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
220
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable
Main label
1
L
Bare crimping terminal, OT
Pin Assignments
None.
5.3 IF Jumper
An IF jumper connects the IDU to an IF cable. The IF jumper works with the IF cable to transmit
IF signals and O&M signals in addition to supplying -48 V power between the ODU and the
IDU.
An IF jumper is a 2 m RG-223 cable. One end of the IF jumper has a type-N connector that is
connected to the IF cable. The other end of the IF jumper has a TNC connector that is connected
to the IF board.
NOTE
l A 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.
l If an RG-8U or 1/2-inch IF cable is used, an IF jumper is required to connect the RG-8U or 1/2-inch
IF cable to the IF board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
221
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-4 IF jumper
1
H.S.tube 2 PCS
2
L = 3 cm
2000 mm
1. RF coaxial cable connector, TNC, male
2. RF coaxial cable connector, type-N, female
Pin Assignments
None.
5.4 XPIC Cable
An XPIC cable transmits reference IF signals between the two XPIC boards in an XPIC
workgroup to implement the XPIC function.
An XPIC cable is an RG316 cable that has SMA connectors at both ends. One end of the XPIC
cable is connected to the X-IN port of one XPIC board in an XPIC workgroup, and the other
end of the XPIC cable is connected to the X-OUT port of the other XPIC board in the same
XPIC work group.
When the XPIC function is disabled for XPIC boards, an XPIC cable is used to connect the XIN port to the X-OUT port on the same XPIC board to loop back signals.
XPIC cables are available in the following types:
l
XPIC cables with angle connectors: These XPIC cables are long and used to connect two
XPIC boards in the horizontal direction, for example, XPIC boards in slots 3 and 4.
l
XPIC cables with straight connectors: These XPIC cables are short and used to connect
two XPIC boards in the vertical direction, for example, IFX2 boards in slots 3 and 5. These
XPIC cables are also used to connect the X-IN port to the X-OUT port on the same XPIC
board to loop back signals.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
222
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-5 XPIC cable
1
1
L1
2
2
L2
1. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, angle, male
2. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, straight, male
Pin Assignments
None.
5.5 Fiber Jumper
A fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper has an LC/PC connector
that is connected to an SDH optical port or GE optical port on the OptiX RTN 950. The connector
at the other end of the fiber jumper depends on the type of the optical port on the equipment to
be connected.
Types of Fiber Jumpers
Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers
Connector 1
Connector 2
Cable
LC/PC
FC/PC
2 mm single-mode fiber
2 mm multi-mode fiber
LC/PC
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
SC/PC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2 mm single-mode fiber
223
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Connector 1
5 Cables
Connector 2
Cable
2 mm multi-mode fiber
LC/PC
LC/PC
2 mm single-mode fiber
2 mm multi-mode fiber
NOTE
For the OptiX RTN 950, multi-mode fibers are required to connect to 1000BASE-SX GE optical ports.
Fiber Connectors
The following figures show three common types of fiber connectors, namely, LC/PC connector,
SC/PC connector, and FC/PC connector.
Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
224
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
5 Cables
Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector
Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector
5.6 STM-1 Cable
An STM-1 cable transmits/receives STM-1 signals. One end of the STM-1 cable has an SAA
connector that is connected to an STM-1 electrical port. The connector at the other end of the
STM-1 cable is connected to a DDF and needs to be prepared on site as required.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
225
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-9 STM-1 cable
1. Coaxial connector, SAA straight/male
2. Main label
3. Coaxial cable
Pin Assignments
None.
Cable Specifications
Item
Description
Connector
Coaxial connector, SAA connector (1.0/2.3), 75-ohm straight/male
Cable model
Coaxial cable, 75-ohm, 3.9 mm, 2.1 mm, 0.34 mm, shielded
Number of cores
One
Core diameter
Diameter of the shield layer (3.9 mm), diameter of the internal
insulation layer (2.1 mm), diameter of the internal conductor (0.34
mm)
Length
10 m
Fireproof class
CM
5.7 E1 Cables
E1 cables are available in two categories: E1 cable (Anea 96) connected to the external equipment
and E1 cable connected to the E1 panel.
5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment
An E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to directly
receive E1 signals from or transmits E1 signals to external equipment.
Each E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment can transmit a maximum of 16 E1
signals. There are two types of E1 cables that are connected to the external equipment: 75-ohm
coaxial cables and 120-ohm twisted pair cables.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
226
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-10 E1 cable connected to the external equipment
Main label
1
W
A
X1
ViewA
Pos.96
Cable connector, Anea,
96-pin,female
Pos.1
1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female
NOTE
l A 120-ohm E1 cable and a 75-ohm E1 cable have the same appearance.
l The core diameter of a 75-ohm E1 cable is 1.6 mm. Therefore, use a crimping tool with an opening of
2.5 mm (0.098-inch) to attach the end of the 75-ohm E1 cable on the DDF frame with a 75-1-1 coaxial
connector.
Pin Assignments
Table 5-3 Pin assignments for a 75-ohm E1 cable
Pin
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
W
Core
Serial
No.
1
Tip
1
2
Ring
3
Tip
4
Ring
5
Tip
6
Ring
7
Tip
3
5
7
Remark
s
Pin
R0
R1
R2
R3
W
Remark
s
Core
Serial
No.
25
Tip
2
T0
26
Ring
27
Tip
4
T1
28
Ring
29
Tip
6
T2
30
Ring
31
Tip
8
T3
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
227
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Pin
W
Core
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
5 Cables
8
Ring
9
Tip
10
Ring
11
Tip
12
Ring
13
Tip
14
Ring
15
Tip
16
Ring
18
Ring
17
Tip
20
Ring
19
Tip
22
Ring
21
Tip
24
Ring
23
Tip
50
Ring
49
Tip
52
Ring
51
Tip
54
Ring
53
Tip
56
Ring
55
Shell
Serial
No.
Remark
s
Pin
W
Core
32
Ring
33
Tip
34
Ring
35
Tip
36
Ring
37
Tip
38
Ring
39
Tip
40
Ring
42
Ring
41
Tip
44
Ring
43
Tip
46
Ring
45
Tip
48
Ring
47
Tip
74
Ring
73
Tip
76
Ring
75
Tip
78
Ring
75
Tip
80
Ring
Tip
79
Tip
Braid
Shell
Braid
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
R9
R10
R11
R12
R13
R14
R15
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Serial
No.
Remark
s
10
T4
12
T5
14
T6
16
T7
18
T8
20
T9
22
T10
24
T11
26
T12
28
T13
30
T14
32
T15
228
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
5 Cables
Table 5-4 Pin assignments for a 120-ohm E1 cable
Pin
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
W
Rema
rks
Tape
Color
Pin
Blue
Color
of the
Core
Relati
onshi
p
1
White
R0
2
Blue
Twiste
d pair
3
White
R1
4
Green
Twiste
d pair
5
White
R2
6
Grey
Twiste
d pair
7
Red
R3
8
Orang
e
Twiste
d pair
9
Red
R4
10
Brown
Twiste
d pair
11
Black
R5
12
Blue
Twiste
d pair
13
Black
R6
14
Green
Twiste
d pair
15
Black
Twiste
d pair
R7
16
Grey
17
White
18
Blue
19
White
20
Green
21
White
22
Grey
23
Red
Twiste
d pair
R8
Twiste
d pair
R9
Twiste
d pair
R10
Twiste
d pair
R11
Orang
e
W
Rema
rks
Tape
Color
Blue
Color
of the
Core
Relati
onshi
p
25
White
T0
26
Orang
e
Twiste
d pair
27
White
T1
28
Brown
Twiste
d pair
29
Red
T2
30
Blue
Twiste
d pair
31
Red
T3
32
Green
Twiste
d pair
33
Red
T4
34
Grey
Twiste
d pair
35
Black
T5
36
Orang
e
Twiste
d pair
37
Black
T6
38
Brown
Twiste
d pair
39
Yello
w
Twiste
d pair
T7
40
Blue
41
White
T8
42
Orang
e
Twiste
d pair
43
White
T9
44
Brown
Twiste
d pair
45
Red
T10
46
Blue
Twiste
d pair
47
Red
Twiste
d pair
T11
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Orang
e
229
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Pin
W
Color
of the
Core
24
Orang
e
49
Red
50
Brown
51
Black
52
Blue
53
Black
54
Green
55
Black
56
Shell
Relati
onshi
p
5 Cables
Rema
rks
Tape
Color
Pin
W
Color
of the
Core
48
Green
73
Red
74
Grey
75
Black
76
Orang
e
77
Black
78
Brown
79
Yello
w
Grey
80
Blue
Braid
Shell
Braid
Twiste
d pair
R12
Twiste
d pair
R13
Twiste
d pair
R14
Twiste
d pair
R15
Relati
onshi
p
Rema
rks
Twiste
d pair
T12
Twiste
d pair
T13
Twiste
d pair
T14
Twiste
d pair
T15
Tape
Color
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel
An E1 cable that is connected to the E1 panel is used when the E1 panel functions as a DDF.
One end of the E1 cable has an Anea 96 connector that is connected to an E1 port on the IDU.
The other end of the E1 cable has a DB37 connector that is connected to the E1 panel.
Each E1 cable can transmit 16 E1 signals. The port impedance of the E1 cable is 75 ohms.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
230
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-11 E1 cable connected to the E1 panel
X1: Cable connector, Anea 96, female
X2/X3: Cable connector, type D, 37 male
Label 1: "CHAN 0-7"
Label 2: "CHAN 8-15"
Pin Assignments
Table 5-5 Pin assignments for the E1 cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector and a DB37
connector
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Wire
Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2/X3
Remarks
Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2/X3
Remarks
W1
X1.2
X2.20
R0
X1.10
X2.36
R4
X1.1
X2.2
X1.9
X2.17
X1.26
X2.21
X1.34
X2.35
X1.25
X2.3
X1.33
X2.16
X1.4
X2.22
X1.12
X2.34
X1.3
X2.4
X1.11
X2.15
X1.28
X2.23
X1.36
X2.33
X1.27
X2.5
X1.35
X2.14
X1.6
X2.24
X1.14
X2.32
T0
R1
T1
R2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
T4
R5
T5
R6
231
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Wire
W2
5 Cables
Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2/X3
X1.5
X2.6
X1.30
X2.25
X1.29
X2.7
X1.8
X2.26
X1.7
X2.8
X1.32
X2.27
X1.31
X2.9
X1.18
X3.20
X1.17
X3.2
X1.42
X3.21
X1.41
X3.3
X1.20
X3.22
X1.19
X3.4
X1.44
X3.23
X1.43
X3.5
X1.22
X3.24
X1.21
X3.6
X1.46
X3.25
X1.45
X3.7
X1.24
X3.26
X1.23
X3.8
X1.48
X3.27
X1.47
Shell
Remarks
Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2/X3
X1.13
X2.13
X1.38
X2.31
X1.37
X2.12
X1.16
X2.30
X1.15
X2.11
X1.40
X2.29
X1.39
X2.10
X1.50
X3.36
X1.49
X3.17
X1.74
X3.35
X1.73
X3.16
X1.52
X3.34
X1.51
X3.15
X1.76
X3.33
X1.75
X3.14
X1.54
X3.32
X1.53
X3.13
X1.78
X3.31
X1.77
X3.12
X1.56
X3.30
X1.55
X3.11
X1.80
X3.29
X3.9
X1.79
X3.10
Braid
Shell
Braid
T2
R3
T3
R8
T8
R9
T9
R10
T10
R11
T11
Remarks
T6
R7
T7
R12
T12
R13
T13
R14
T14
R15
T15
5.7.3 E1 Transit Cable Terminated with an Anea 96 Connector and
a DB44 Connector
When the TCU6 works with the SP3S, an E1 transit cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector
and a DB44 connector is required for connecting the two boards. For the E1 transit cable, the
Anea 96 connector is connected to the E1 port on the SP3S, and the DB44 connector is connected
to the DB44 E1 port on the TCU6.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
232
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
5 Cables
This E1 transit cable can transmit 6xE1 signals. The port impedance of the cable is 120 ohms,
and therefore this cable can work only with the 120-ohm SP3S. The cable is 0.6 m long.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-12 E1 transit cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector and a DB44 connector
Main Label
A
X2
Pos.15
Pos.16
Pos.30
Pos.31
X1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female
X2. Cable connector, type-D, 44 male
Pin Assignments
Table 5-6 Pin assignments for the E1 transit cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector and a
DB44 connector
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Wire
Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2
Remarks
Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2
Remarks
W1
X1.2
X2.15
R0
X1.8
X2.12
R3
X1.1
X2.30
X1.7
X2.27
X1.26
X2.38
X1.32
X2.35
X1.25
X2.23
X1.31
X2.20
X1.4
X2.14
X1.10
X2.11
X1.3
X2.29
X1.9
X2.26
X1.28
X2.37
X1.34
X2.34
X1.27
X2.22
X1.33
X2.19
X1.6
X2.13
X1.12
X2.10
T0
R1
T1
R2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
T3
R4
T4
R5
233
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Wire
5 Cables
Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2
X1.5
X2.28
X1.30
X2.36
X1.29
Shell
Remarks
Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2
X1.11
X2.25
X1.36
X2.33
X2.21
X1.35
X2.18
Braid
Shell
Braid
T2
Remarks
T5
5.8 Orderwire Cable
An orderwire cable connects an orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire
cable are terminated with an RJ11 connector. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the
PHONE port on the AUX. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected to the port of the
orderwire phone.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-13 Orderwire cable
1
Main label
6
6
1
X1
X2
1
1. Orderwire port, RJ11 connector
Pin Assignments
Table 5-7 Pin assignments for the orderwire cable
Connector X1
Connector X2
Function
X1.3
X2.3
Tip
X1.4
X2.4
Ring
5.9 Network Cable
A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are
terminated with an RJ45 connector.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
234
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
5 Cables
Two types of interfaces use RJ45 connectors, which are medium dependent interfaces (MDIs)
and MDI-Xs. MDIs are used by terminal equipment, for example, network card. The pin
assignments for MDIs are provided in Table 5-8. MDI-Xs are used by network equipment. The
pin assignments for MDI-Xs are provided in Table 5-9.
Table 5-8 Pin assignments for MDIs
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
1
TX+
Transmitting data (+)
BIDA+
Bidirectional data wire A
(+)
2
TX-
Transmitting data (-)
BIDA-
Bidirectional data wire A
(-)
3
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+
Bidirectional data wire B
(+)
4
Reserved
-
BIDC+
Bidirectional data wire C
(+)
5
Reserved
-
BIDC-
Bidirectional data wire C
(-)
6
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-
Bidirectional data wire B
(-)
7
Reserved
-
BIDD+
Bidirectional data wire D
(+)
8
Reserved
-
BIDD-
Bidirectional data wire D
(-)
Table 5-9 Pin assignments for MDI-Xs
Pin
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
1
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+
Bidirectional data wire B
(+)
2
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-
Bidirectional data wire B
(-)
3
TX+
Transmitting data (+)
BIDA+
Bidirectional data wire A
(+)
4
Reserved
-
BIDD+
Bidirectional data wire D
(+)
5
Reserved
-
BIDD-
Bidirectional data wire D
(-)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
235
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Pin
5 Cables
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
6
TX-
Transmitting data (-)
BIDA-
Bidirectional data wire A
(-)
7
Reserved
-
BIDC+
Bidirectional data wire C
(+)
8
Reserved
-
BIDC-
Bidirectional data wire C
(-)
Straight-through cables are used between MDIs and MDI-Xs, and crossover cables are used
between MDIs or between MDI-Xs. The only difference between straight-through cables and
crossover cables is with regard to the pin assignment.
The NMS/COM port, NE cascading port, and Ethernet electrical service ports of the OptiX RTN
950 support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. Straight-through cables and
crossover cables can be used to connect the NMS/COM port, EXT port, and Ethernet electrical
service ports to MDIs or MDI-Xs.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-14 Network cable
1
Label 1 Main label
Label 2
8
8
1
1
1. Network port connector, RJ45
Pin Assignments
Table 5-10 Pin assignments for the straight-through cable
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
Relation
X1.1
X2.1
White/Orange
Twisted pair
X1.2
X2.2
Orange
X1.3
X2.3
White/Green
X1.6
X2.6
Green
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Twisted pair
236
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
5 Cables
Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
Relation
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
Twisted pair
X1.5
X2.5
White/Blue
X1.7
X2.7
White/Brown
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
Twisted pair
Table 5-11 Pin assignments for the crossover cable
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
Relation
X1.6
X2.2
Orange
Twisted pair
X1.3
X2.1
White/Orange
X1.1
X2.3
White/Green
X1.2
X2.6
Green
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.5
X2.5
White/Blue
X1.7
X2.7
White/Brown
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
237
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A
Parameters Description
This chapter describes the parameters used in this document.
A.1 Parameters for Network Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to network management.
A.2 Radio Link Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links.
A.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP).
A.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services.
A.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces.
A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the Packet Plane
This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on the
packet plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet port
parameters, and QoS parameters.
A.7 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the EoS/EoPDH Plane
This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on the EoS/
EoPDH plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet
port parameters, and QoS parameters.
A.8 RMON Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances.
A.9 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services
This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS/PWE3 services.
A.10 Clock Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks.
A.11 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
238
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.1 Parameters for Network Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to network management.
A.1.1 Parameters for NE Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs).
A.1.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching
This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.
Navigation Path
Choose File > Discovery > NE from the Main Menu.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
239
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for the Search Field
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Address Type
IP Address of GNE
IP Address Range of GNE
l If the OSI protocol is
used on the DCN, you
can search for an NE
based on NSAP
Address only.
NSAP Address
IP Address Range of GNE
l If the IP protocol is
used on the DCN, you
can search for an NE
based on IP Address
of GNE or IP Address
Range of GNE.
l To search for all the
NEs that communicate
with the gateway NE,
select IP Address
Range of GNE.
l To select the gateway
NE only, select IP
Address of GNE.
NOTE
If Address Type is set to IP
Address of GNE or IP
Address Range of GNE,
and if the U2000 (server)
and the gateway NE are
located in different network
segments, ensure that the
U2000 and relevant routers
are configured with the IP
routes for the network
segment in which the
U2000 and gateway NE are
located.
If Address Type is set to
NSAP Address, ensure that
the OSI protocol stack is
installed.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
240
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Search Address
-
-
l If Address Type is set
to IP Address of
GNE, enter the IP
address of the gateway
NE, such as 129.9.x.x.
l If Address Type is set
to IP Address Range
of GNE, enter the
number of the IP
network segment in
which the gateway NE
is located, such as
129.9.255.255.
l If Address Type is set
to NSAP Address,
enter the NSAP
address of the gateway
NE.
User Name
-
-
This parameter specifies
the user name of the
gateway NE.
Password
-
-
This parameter specifies
the password of the
gateway NE.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
241
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter for Searching for NEs
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Create NE after search
Selected
Deselected
l To create NEs in
batches, it is
recommended that you
select Create NE
after search. The NEs
are automatically
created after they are
found.
Deselected
l After Create NE after
search is selected,
enter NE User and
Password that are
used for creating an
NE.
NOTE
If only Create NE after
search is selected, Search
for NE is selected
automatically.
NE User
-
-
l This parameter
specifies the user name
to be entered when an
NE is created.
l This parameter is valid
only when Create NE
after search is
selected.
Password
-
-
l This parameter
specifies the password
to be entered when an
NE is created.
l This parameter is valid
only when Create NE
after search is
selected.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
242
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Upload after create
Selected
Deselected
l This parameter
specifies whether to
automatically upload
the NE data after the
NE is found and
created.
Deselected
l If only Upload after
create is selected,
Search for NE and
Create NE after
search are selected
automatically.
Parameter for the Found NEs
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE ID
-
-
This parameter indicates
the ID of the found NE,
which consists of
extended ID and NE ID.
GNE Address
-
-
This parameter indicates
the address of the gateway
NE that is connected to the
found NE.
GNE ID
-
-
This parameter indicates
the ID of the gateway NE
that is connected to the
found NE.
Created As GNE
Yes
Yes
l This parameter
specifies the password
to be entered when an
NE is created.
No
l This parameter is valid
only when Create NE
after search is
selected.
Connection Mode
Common
Common
The communication
between the client and the
server is encrypted if this
parameter is set to
Security SSL.
1400
This parameter specifies
the communication port.
Security SSL
Port
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
243
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Status
Created
-
This parameter indicates
whether the found NE is
created.
Uncreated
A.1.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE creation.
Navigation Path
1.
Choose File > Creat > NE from the Main Menu.
2.
Choose RTN Series > OptiX RTN 950 from the Object Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Type
-
-
This parameter indicates
the type of the NE to be
created.
ID
1 to 49135
-
l The ID refers to the
basic ID. If the
extended ID is not
used, the basic ID of an
NE must be unique on
the networks that are
managed by the same
NMS.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
l The NE ID consisting
of the basic ID and
extended ID identifies
an NE on the NMS.
Extended ID
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
1 to 254
9
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
If the number of existing
NEs does not exceed the
range represented by the
basic ID, do not change
Extended ID.
244
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Name
-
-
l This parameter
specifies the name of
the NE.
l After you have
specified the name of
the NE, the name is
displayed under the
icon of the NE.
Remarks
-
-
This parameter specifies
the remarks of the NE.
Gateway Type
Non-Gateway
Non-Gateway
l This parameter is set to
Gateway if the new
NE is a gateway NE.
Gateway
l This parameter is set to
Non-Gateway if the
new NE is a nongateway NE.
l This parameter is set
according to the DCN
planning if the new NE
can function as a
gateway NE or a nongateway NE.
Gateway
-
-
This parameter indicates
the gateway NE of the new
NE when Gateway Type
is set to Non-Gateway.
Protocol
IP
IP
l This parameter needs
to be set when
Gateway Type is set
to Gateway.
OSI
l When the OSI over
DCC solution is used,
this parameter is set to
OSI.
l In other cases, this
parameter is set to IP.
IP Address
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
This parameter indicates
the IP address of the new
NE. This parameter needs
to be set when Affiliated
Gateway Protocol is set
to IP.
245
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Connection Mode
Common
Common
The communication
between the client and the
server is encrypted if this
parameter is set to
Security SSL.
Security SSL
Port
-
1400
This parameter specifies
the communication port.
NE User
-
-
This parameter specifies
the user name to be
entered when an NE is
created.
Password
-
-
This parameter specifies
the password to be entered
when an NE is created.
NSAP Address
-
-
This parameter indicates
the NSAP address of the
new NE. This parameter
needs to be set when
Affiliated Gateway
Protocol is set to OSI.
You need to set the area ID
only, and the other parts
are automatically
generated by the NE.
A.1.1.3 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs
This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.
Navigation Path
1.
In the Main Topology, right-click the NE whose ID needs to be changed.
2.
Choose Object Attributes.
3.
Click Modify NE ID.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
246
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Changing NE IDs
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
New ID
-
-
l The new ID refers to
the basic ID. If the
extended ID is not
used, the basic ID of an
NE must be unique on
the networks that are
managed by the same
NMS.
l This parameter is set
according to the
network plan.
NOTE
The NE ID consisting of the
basic ID and extended ID
identifies an NE on the
NMS.
1 to 254
New Extended ID
9
If the number of existing
NEs does not exceed the
range represented by the
basic ID, do not change
the extended ID.
A.1.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization
This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.
Navigation Path
1.
Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from
the Main Menu.
2.
Click the NE Time Synchronization tab.
Parameters for NE Time Synchronization
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name
-
-
This parameter indicates
the name of the NE.
NE ID
-
-
This parameter indicates
the ID of the NE.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
247
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Synchronous Mode
Standard NTP
Null
l If this parameter is set
to NM, the NE
synchronizes the time
of the NMS server.
NM
Null
l If this parameter is set
to Standard NTP, the
NE synchronizes the
Network Time
Protocol (NTP) server
through the standard
NTP.
Standard NTP
Authentication
Enabled
Disabled
This parameter is valid
only when Synchronous
Mode is set to Standard
NTP.
Disabled
Parameters for the Standard NTP Server
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Standard NTP Server
Identifier
NE ID
NE ID
l If the NE functions as
the gateway NE, this
parameter is set to IP.
IP
l If the NE functions as
a non-gateway NE and
communicates with
the gateway NE
through the HWECC
protocol, this
parameter is set to NE
ID.
l If the NE functions as
a non-gateway NE and
communicates with
the gateway NE
through the IP
protocol, this
parameter is set to IP.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
248
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Standard NTP Server
-
-
l If the NE functions as
the gateway NE, this
parameter is set to the
IP address of the
external NTP server.
l If the NE functions as
a non-gateway NE,
this parameter is set to
the ID or IP address of
the gateway NE.
Standard NTP Server
Key
0 to 1024
0
l If the NTP server does
not need to
authenticated, this
parameter is set to the
value "0".
l If the NTP server
needs to be
authenticated, the
authentication is
performed according
to the allocated key of
the NTP server. In this
case, the NE
authenticates the NTP
server based on the key
and the corresponding
password (specified in
the management of the
standard NTP key).
Parameters for Setting Automatic Synchronization
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Synchronization
Starting Time
-
-
l This parameter
specifies the start time
of the synchronization
period. After this
parameter is specified,
the NMS and the NE
synchronize the time
once at the intervals of
Synchronization
Period(days).
l It is recommended that
you use the default
value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
249
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
DST
Selected
Deselected
l This parameter
indicates whether
Synchronization
Starting Time is the
daylight saving time.
Deselected
l This parameter is set
according to the actual
situation.
Synchronization Period
(days)
1 to 300
l This parameter
indicates the period of
synchronizing the time
of the NE with the time
of the NMS.
1
l It is recommended that
you use the default
value.
A.1.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for localization management of the NE
time.
Navigation Path
1.
Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Localization
Management from the Main Menu.
2.
Select the NE for time localization management from the Object Tree, and then click
.
Parameters for Localization Management of the NE Time
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE
-
-
This parameter indicates the name of the
NE.
TimeZone
-
-
This parameter indicates the time zone.
DST
-
-
This parameter indicates whether DST is
enabled.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
250
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Time Zone
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Time Zone
-
-
l After the time zone is changed, the
current time of the NE is changed
accordingly.
l This parameter is set according to the
place where the NE is located.
DST
Selected
Deselected
Deselected
l The parameters related to daylight
saving time can be valid only when this
parameter is selected.
l This parameter is set according to the
situation whether daylight saving time is
used in the place where the NE is located.
1 to 120
Offset
-
This parameter specifies the offset value of
the daylight saving time.
WEEK
This parameter specifies the method of
adjusting the daylight saving time.
Unit: minute(s)
Start Rule
WEEK
DATE
Start Time
-
-
This parameter specifies the start daylight
saving time.
End Rule
WEEK
WEEK
This parameter specifies the method of
adjusting the daylight saving time.
-
This parameter specifies the end daylight
saving time.
DATE
End Time
-
A.1.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the standard NTP key.
Navigation Path
1.
Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from
the Main Menu.
2.
Click the Standard NTP Key Management tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
251
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Key
1 to 1024
-
l This parameter
indicates the key for
NTP authentication.
l This parameter is set
according to the
requirements of the
external NTP server.
-
Password
-
l This parameter
indicates the password
that corresponds to
Key.
l This parameter is set
according to the
requirements of the
external NTP server.
Yes
Trusted
Yes
No
l When this parameter is
set to No, the key
verification is not
trusted. After
receiving the key, the
NE rejects the clock
synchronization
service.
l When this parameter is
set to Yes, the key
verification is trusted.
After receiving the
key, the NE provides
the clock
synchronization
service.
l After receiving an
unknown or incorrect
key, the NE rejects the
clock synchronization
service. Hence, it is
recommended that you
set a trusted key only.
A.1.1.7 Parameter Description: License Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the license.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
252
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > License
Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the License Management tab.
Parameters for Managing Licenses
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
This parameter displays the boards that need
to be supported by licenses.
License File Type
-
-
This parameter displays the license type
corresponding to each board.
Capacity
-
-
This parameter displays the capacity of each
board.
Loaded
-
-
This parameter displays whether the
corresponding license file is loaded to each
board.
A.1.1.8 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for automatically disabling the functions
of an NE.
Navigation Path
1.
On the Main Topology, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic
Disabling of NE Function.
2.
Select the NE whose functions need to be automatically disabled from the Object Tree, and
.
then click
Parameters for Automatically Disabling the Functions of NEs
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name
-
-
This parameter indicates the name of the
NE.
NE Type
OptiX RTN 950
-
This parameter indicates the type of the NE.
Operation Type
-
-
This parameter indicates the type of the
operation, such as loopback, and shutdown
of the laser.
Auto Disabling
Disabled
Enabled
This parameter specifies whether to
automatically disable the operations such as
loopback, and shutdown of the laser.
Enabled
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
253
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Auto Disabling
Time(min)
1 to 2880
5
This parameter specifies the time of
automatically disabling the operations such
as loopback, and shutdown of the laser.
A.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for communications management.
A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting
This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication >
Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.
Parameters for NE Communication Setting
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IP Address
-
Before delivery, the
IP address of the NE
is set to 129.9.0.x.
The letter x indicates
the basic ID.
Gateway IP
Address
-
0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask
-
255.255.0.0
In the HWECC solution, an IP address is set
according to the following rules:
l The IP address, subnet mask, and default
gateway of the gateway NE should meet
the planning requirements of the
external DCN.
l If an NE uses the extended ECC, the IP
address must be in the same network
segment.
l The IP address of other NEs should be
set according to the NE ID. In this case,
the IP address of an NE should be set in
the format of 0x81000000+ID. That is,
if the ID is 0x090001, the IP address
should be set to 129.9.0.1.
Extended ID
1 to 254
9
l Do not change the extended ID when the
number of actual NEs does not exceed
the range permitted by the basic NE ID.
l It is recommended that this parameter
takes the default value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
254
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NSAP Address
-
-
This parameter is valid only when the OSI
over DCC solution is applied. This
parameter is used to set only the area ID of
an NSAP address. The other parts of the
NSAP address are automatically generated
by the NE.
Connection Mode
Common + Security
SSL
Common + Security
SSL
l Specifies the connection mode that the
gateway NE allows the NMS to use for
connecting to the gateway NE.
Common
Security SSL
l If the gateway NE has no special
security requirement for connection to
the NMS, Connection Mode can be set
to Common.
l If the gateway NE requests secure
connection to the NMS for preventing
information interception and cracking,
Connection Mode needs to be set to
Security SSL.
l If NE communication security level
needs to be the same as NMS
communication security level,
Connection Mode needs to be set to
Common + Security SSL.
l The default parameter value is
recommended unless the gateway NE
requires that the NMS use the SSL
connection mode.
l The parameter value takes effect only
when it is set for a gateway NE and the
gateway NE is connected to the NMS by
means of the IP protocol.
A.1.2.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the DCC rate.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC
Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the DCC Rate Configuration tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
255
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for DCC Rate Configuration
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the port that is
connected to the DCC channel.
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
It is recommended that you use the default
value, except for the following cases:
Disabled
l If the port is connected to the other ECC
subnet, Enabled/Disabled is set to
Disabled.
l If the port is connected to a third-party
network and does not exchange the
network management information with
other ports, Enabled/Disabled is set to
Disabled.
Channel
D1-D3
D4-D12
D1-D12
D1-D1
D1-D1 (for the PDH
radio whose
transmission
capacity is less than
16xE1)
D1-D3 (for other
cases)
It is recommended that you use the default
value, except for the following cases:
l If the IP DCN or OSI over DCC solution
is adopted, Channel for the SDH line
ports is set to a value that is the same as
the value for third-party network.
l If the DCC transparent transmission
solution is adopted, the value of
Channel for the SDH line ports should
not conflict with the value that is set for
the third-party network.
DCC Resources
-
-
This parameter indicates the DCC
resources.
Communication
Status
-
-
This parameter indicates the
communication status.
Protocol Type
HWECC
HWECC
It is recommended that you use the default
value, except for the following cases:
TCP/IP
l If the IP DCN solution is adopted,
Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP.
OSI
L2DCN
l If the OSI over DCC solution is adopted,
Protocol Type is set to OSI.
l When the L2 DCN solution is used, set
Protocol Type to L2DCN.
IP Address
-
-
l IP Address is available only if Protocol
Type is set to TCP/IP.
l When the IP DCN solution is used and
the NE functions as an ABR, this
parameter specifies the interface IP
address of the non-backbone area port on
the ABR.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
256
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Subnet Mask
-
-
l Subnet Mask is available only if
Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP.
l When the IP DCN solution is used and
the NE functions as an ABR, this
parameter specifies the subnet mask of
the non-backbone area port on the ABR.
A.1.2.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission
Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for DCC transparent transmission management.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC
Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the DCC Transparent Transmission Management tab.
3.
Click Create.
Parameters for DCC Transparent Transmission Management
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Timeslot/
Porta
-
-
This parameter specifies the source timeslot
or port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
257
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Transparent
Transmission of
Overhead Bytes at
Source Port
D1
-
l Only one overhead byte can be selected
each time.
D2
l X1, X2, X3, and X4 indicate the
customized overhead bytes that are used
for transmitting asynchronous data
services.
D3
D4
D5
D6
l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that
is used. For example, an overhead byte
cannot be a byte in the used DCC
channel.
D7
D8
D9
NOTE
Only the ISU2/ISX2/SL1DA board supports
transparent transmission of the K1/K2 byte.
D10
D11
D12
E1
E2
F1
K1
K2
X1
X2
X3
X4
Sink Timeslot/
Porta
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
This parameter specifies the sink timeslot or
port.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
258
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Transparent
Transmission of
Overhead Bytes at
Sink Port
D1
-
l Only one overhead byte can be selected
each time.
D2
l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that
is used. For example, an overhead byte
cannot be a byte in the used DCC
channel.
D3
D4
D5
D6
l Generally, Transparent Transmission
of Overhead Bytes at Sink Port can be
set to a value that is the same as or
different from the value in the case of
Transparent Transmission of
Overhead Bytes at Source Port.
D7
D8
D9
D10
NOTE
Only the ISU2/ISX2/SL1DA board supports
transparent transmission of the K1/K2 byte.
D11
D12
E1
E2
F1
K1
K2
X1
X2
X3
X4
NOTE
a. A bidirectional cross-connection is set up between the source port and the sink port. Hence, a port functions
the same regardless of the source port or sink port.
A.1.2.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the extended ECCs of Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
Click an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the
Function Tree.
Parameters for the ECC Extended Mode
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ECC Extended
Mode
Auto mode
Auto mode
It is recommended that you use the default
value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Specified mode
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
259
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Setting the Server
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IP
-
-
This parameter indicates the IP address of
the server.
Port
1601 to 1699
0
l This parameter is valid only when ECC
Extended Mode is set to Specified
mode.
l This parameter can be set only when the
NE functions as the server of the
extended ECC. In normal cases, the NE
that is close to the NMS functions as the
server.
l This parameter can be set to any value
from 1601 to 1699.
Parameters for Setting the Client
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Opposite IP
-
0.0.0.0
Port
1601 to 1699
0
l This parameter is valid only when ECC
Extended Mode is set to Specified
mode.
l This parameter can be set only when the
NE functions as the client of the
extended ECC. Except for the NE that
functions as the server, all other NEs that
use the extended ECC can function as the
client.
l Opposite IP and Port are respectively
set to the IP address of the server NE and
the specified port number.
A.1.2.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE ECC link management.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > NE ECC
Link Management from the Function Tree.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
260
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter for NE ECC Link Management
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination NE
-
-
This parameter specifies the sink NE of the
ECC connection.
Transfer NE
-
-
This parameter specifies the next transfer
NE and the direction of the ECC route.
Distance
-
-
l This parameter specifies the number of
NEs (excluding the source NE and sink
NE) through which the ECC route
passes, namely, the number of ECC
packet forwarding attempts. The value
can be set to a value that is greater than
the number of actual ECC packet
forwarding attempts. If the value is set to
a value that is less than the number of
actual ECC packet forwarding attempts,
however, the destination NE fails to be
accessed.
l If the value is set to 0, it indicates that the
source NE is adjacent to the destination
NE.
-
Level
-
l This parameter indicates that multiple
ECC routes from the source NE to the
destination NE may be available. An
ECC route of a higher priority is selected
to transmit the packets to the destination
NE.
l If the ECC route is generated
automatically, the priority is 4.
l If the ECC route is added manually, the
priority is 5.
Mode
-
-
This parameter indicates the ECC routing
mode.
SCC No.
-
-
This parameter specifies the physical port
through which the ECC route passes. The
value of this parameter is automatically
assigned the NE.
A.1.2.6 Parameter Description: ECC Link Management_Availability Test
This topic describes the parameters that are used to test ECC availability.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
261
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and then choose
Communication > NE ECC Link Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Reachability Test and choose Ping Test or Trace Route from the drop-down menu.
Ping Test Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Target NE
-
-
Specifies the NE for which a ping test will
be performed.
Packet Length
(Byte)
0-800
64
l Specifies the test packet length.
Packet Quantity
1-65535
l It is recommended that this parameter
take its default value.
3
l Specifies the number of test packets.
l It is recommended that this parameter
take its default value.
Sending Interval
(ms)
0-65535
0
l Specifies the test packet transmission
interval.
l It is recommended that this parameter
take its default value.
To Be Translated
(ms)
1-65535
1000
l Specifies the maximum time for test
packet to wait until being responded to.
l It is recommended that this parameter
take its default value.
Traceroute Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Target NE
-
-
Specifies the NE for which a traceroute test
will be performed.
To Be Translated
(ms)
0-65535
1000
l Specifies the maximum time for test
packet to wait until being responded to.
l It is recommended that this parameter
take its default value.
Forwarding NEs
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
0-255
64
Specifies the number of NEs that test
packets will traverse during the forwarding
process.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
262
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.1.2.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route
Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for IP route management.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP
Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the IP Route Management tab.
Parameters for IP Route Management
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination
Address
-
-
This parameter indicates the destination
address of the packets. This parameter can
be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or
C only, but cannot be set to the IP address
of the local host or the loopback address
with the 127 field.
Subnet Mask
-
-
This parameter indicates the subnet mask of
the destination address of the packets.
Gateway
-
-
This parameter indicates the IP address of
the gateway on the subnetwork where the
NE is located, namely, the IP address of the
next hop of the packets.
Protocol
-
-
l DIRECT: indicates the route between
the local NE and an adjacent NE.
l STATIC: indicates the route that is
created manually.
l OSPF: indicates the route between the
local NE and a non-adjacent NE.
l RIP: indicates the route that is
discovered by the routing information
protocol.
l OSPF_ASE: indicates the route whose
Destination Address is beyond the
OSPF domain.
l OSPF_NSSA: indicates the route whose
Destination Address is in a not so
stubby area (NSSA).
l A route can be deleted in the case of
STATIC only, but cannot be edited in
the other cases.
l Compared with a dynamic route, a static
route has a higher priority. If any conflict
occurs, the static route is preferred.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
263
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Interface
-
-
This parameter indicates the interface that is
used on the route. Interface is a concept
specified in the TCP/IP protocol stack. In
the TCP/IP protocol stack, you can create
multiple types of interface, such as a
loopback interface (namely, the interface
whose IP address is 127.0.0.1), an Ethernet
interface, and PPP interface. Each interface
must have a unique interface name.
Metric
-
-
This parameter indicates the maximum
number of routers through which the
packets are transmitted. Metric is used to
indicate the overhead bytes that are
transmitted to the destination address. The
smaller the value, the less the overhead
bytes. If multiple routes can reach the same
destination address, a route whose overhead
is less is preferred to transmit the packets.
A.1.2.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route
Management Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for new static IP routes.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP
Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the IP Route Management tab.
3.
Click New.
Parameters for Creating IP Routes
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination
Address
-
-
This parameter specifies the destination
address of the packets. This parameter can
be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or
C only, but cannot be set to the IP address
of the local host or the loopback address
with the 127 field.
Subnet Mask
-
-
This parameter indicates the subnet mask of
the destination address of the packets.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
264
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Gateway
-
-
This parameter specifies the IP address of
the gateway on the subnetwork where the
NE is located, namely, the IP address of the
next hop of the packets.
A.1.2.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_Availability Test
This topic describes the parameters that are used to test IP DCN availability.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and then choose
Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Reachability Test and choose Ping Test or Trace Route from the drop-down menu.
Ping Test Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Target NE IP
-
-
Specifies the NE for which a ping test will
be performed.
Packet Length
(Byte)
0-800
64
l Specifies the test packet length.
Packet Quantity
1-65535
l It is recommended that this parameter
take its default value.
3
l Specifies the number of test packets.
l It is recommended that this parameter
take its default value.
Sending Interval
(ms)
0-65535
0
l Specifies the test packet transmission
interval.
l It is recommended that this parameter
take its default value.
To Be Translated
(ms)
1-65535
5000
l Specifies the maximum time for test
packet to wait until being responded to.
l It is recommended that this parameter
take its default value.
Traceroute Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Target NE IP
-
-
Specifies the NE for which a traceroute test
will be performed.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
265
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Max Hops
1-30
10
Specifies the number of hops which test
packets traverse during the packet
transmission process.
A.1.2.10 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter
Settings
This topic describes the parameters that are used for OSPF settings.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP
Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the OSPF Parameter Settings tab.
OSPF Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Area
-
0.0.0.0
l If only an OSPF area is configured on an
NE, set this parameter according to the
planning information.
l If multiple OSPF areas are configured on
an NE, this parameter takes its default
value 0.0.0.0.
DCC Hello Timer
(s)
1 to 255
10
l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the Hello
packet timer for the DCC channel or
inband DCN.
l The Hello packets are used for detecting
the neighbor router on the network that
is connected to the router. By
periodically transmitting the hello
packets, you can determine whether the
interface on the neighbor router is still in
the active status.
l DCC Hello Timer(s) determines the
interval for the hello packet timer to
transmit the hello packets.
l In the case of two interconnected NEs,
DCC Hello Timer(s) must be set to the
same value.
l Unless otherwise specified, it is
recommended that this parameter take its
default value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
266
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
DCC Neighbor
Dead Time(s)
1 to 65535
40
l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies
the dead time of a neighbor router for the
DCC channel or inband DCN.
l If the local router fails to receive the
hello packets from the connected
neighbor router within the time specified
in DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s), it
considers that the neighbor router is
unavailable.
l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) should
be set to a value that is a minimum of
twice the value of DCC Hello Timer
(s).
l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC
Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to
the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF
protocol fails to operate normally.
l Unless otherwise specified, it is
recommended that this parameter take its
default value.
DCC
Retransmission
Timer(s)
1 to 65535
5
l DCC Retransmission Timer(s)
specifies the interval for transmitting a
request through the DCC channel or
inband DCN to retransmit the link state
advertisement (LSA) packets.
l Unless otherwise specified, it is
recommended that this parameter take its
default value.
DCC Delay(s)
1 to 3600
1
l DCC Delay(s) specifies the delay time
to transmit the LSA packets through the
DCC channel or inband DCN.
l The LSA packets in the LSA database of
the local router are aged as the time
elapses, but are not aged when they are
being transmitted on the network.
Hence, before the LSA packets are
transmitted, you need to increase the age
of the LSA packets based on the value of
DCC Delay(s).
l Unless otherwise specified, it is
recommended that this parameter take its
default value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
267
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAN Hello Timer
(s)
1 to 255
10
l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the hello
packet timer at the Ethernet network
management port or NE cascading port.
l The hello packets are used for detecting
the neighbor router on the network that
is connected to the router. By
periodically transmitting the hello
packets, you can determine whether the
interface on the neighbor router is still in
the active status.
l LAN Hello Timer(s) determines the
interval for the hello packet timer of the
NE to transmit the hello packets.
l In the case of two interconnected NEs,
LAN Hello Timer(s) must be set to the
same value.
l Unless otherwise specified, it is
recommended that this parameter take its
default value.
LAN Neighbor
Dead Time(s)
1 to 65535
40
l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies
the dead time of a neighbor router at the
LAN interface.
l If the local router fails to receive the
hello packets from the connected
neighbor router within the time specified
in LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s), it
considers that the neighbor router is
unavailable.
l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) should be
set to a value that is a minimum of two
times the value of LAN Neighbor Dead
Time(s).
l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC
Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to
the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF
protocol fails to operate normally.
l Unless otherwise specified, it is
recommended that this parameter take its
default value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
268
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAN
Retransmission
Timer(s)
1 to 65535
5
l LAN Retransmission Timer(s)
specifies the time for transmitting a
request for retransmission of the LSA
packets through the Ethernet network
management port or NE cascading port.
l Unless otherwise specified, it is
recommended that this parameter take its
default value.
LAN Delay(s)
1 to 3600
1
l LAN Delay(s) specifies the delay time
to transmit the LSA packets through the
Ethernet network management port or
NE cascading port.
l The LSA packets in the LSA database of
the local router are aged as the time
elapses, but are not aged when they are
being transmitted on the network.
Hence, before the LSA packets are
transmitted, you need to increase the age
of the LSA packets based on the value of
LAN Delay(s).
l Unless otherwise specified, it is
recommended that this parameter take its
default value.
OSPF Status
Enabled
Enabled
Specifies whether the OSPF protocol is
enabled. If an NE uses only static routes
with OSPF disabled, set this parameter to
Disabled.
Disabled
l Specifies whether to enable the STUB
Area.
Disabled
STUB Area
Enabled
Disabled
l Set this parameter as required.
l A backbone area cannot be a STUB area.
NSSA Area
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether to enable the NSSA
Area.
l Set this parameter as required.
l A backbone area cannot be an NSSA
area.
Direct route
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether the direct route
automatic flooding function is enabled.
l Direct route: the route detected by the
link layer protocol.
l Set this parameter as required.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
269
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Static route
Enabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether the static route
automatic flooding function is enabled.
Disabled
l Static route: the route manually
configured by the network
administrator.
l Set this parameter as required.
RIP route
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether the RIP route
automatic flooding function is enabled.
l RIP route: the route detected by the RIP
protocol.
l Set this parameter as required.
Default route
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether the default route
automatic flooding function is enabled
for ASBRs.
l Default OSPF routes are routes whose
destination addresses and subnet masks
are 0s.
l Set this parameter according to the
planning information.
Router ID
-
-
The Router IP address is always the NE IP
address.
Opaque LSA of
External Network
Port
Enabled
Enabled
l Specifies whether the Ethernet network
management port or NE cascading port
transmits Type-10 LSAs.
Disabled
l If this parameter is set to Disabled, the
Ethernet network management port or
NE cascading port transmits network
management information.
l Set this parameter as required.
LAN Interface
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether the OSPF protocol is
enabled for the Ethernet network
management port or NE cascading port.
l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the
OSPF protocol is communicated with
other equipment through the Ethernet
network management port or NE
cascading port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
270
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
OSPF authentication parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Interface Type
-
-
l Displays the DCN port types that allow
the OSPF authentication key to be
specified.
l LAN indicates the Ethernet network
management port or NE cascading port.
l DCC indicates the DCC channels or
inband DCN port.
none
Authentication
Type
none
MD5
l Specifies the OSPF authentication mode
for which a key needs to be set.
l If Authentication Type is MD5, a key
needs to be set for the MD5
authentication mode.
simple
l If Authentication Type is simple, a key
needs to be set for the simple
authentication mode.
l If Authentication Type is none, all
preset keys for the related port type are
cleared.
Authentication
Password
-
-
Specifies the OSPF authentication password
for each port type.
MD5 Key
1-255
-
MD5 Key is available only when
Authentication Type is MD5.
A.1.2.11 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the proxy ARP.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP
Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Proxy ARP tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
271
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for configuring the proxy ARP
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Proxy ARP
Disabled
Disabled
l The proxy ARP enables the NEs in the
same network segment but different
domains to communicate with each
other.
Enabled
l To realize communication between such
NEs, the source NE sends the ARP
broadcast packet to address the route to
the destination NE. The NE with the
proxy ARP function enabled checks the
routing table after sensing the ARP
broadcast packet. If the routing table
contains the destination address that the
ARP broadcast packet looks for, the NE
returns an ARP spoofing packet, which
enables the NE that sends the ARP
broadcast packet to consider that the
MAC address of the NE that returns the
ARP spoofing packet is the MAC
address of the destination NE. In this
manner, the packet that is to be sent to
the destination NE is first sent to the NE
with the proxy ARP function enabled
and then forwarded to the destination
NE.
A.1.2.12 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas
This topic describes the parameters that are related to management of multiple OSPF areas.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE and choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack
Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Multi-OSPF Management tab.
Parameters Required for Configuring Multiple OSPF Areas
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ID
-
-
Displays the area ID.
Default Area
-
-
Displays whether an area is the default area.
Authentication
Type
none
none
MD5
l Specifies the OSPF authentication type
used by an area.
simple
l none indicates no authentication.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
272
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Automatic Route
Aggregation
Enabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether automatic route
aggregation is enabled for an area.
Disabled
l The number of routes after automatic
route aggregation is the same as the
number of Networks.
Stub Type
-
-
Displays the STUB type of an area.
Network Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IP Address
-
-
Displays the IP addresses of the Networks
in an area.
Subnet Mask
-
-
Displays the subnet masks of the Networks
in an area.
Parameters for Configuring Manual Route Aggregation
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IP Address
-
-
Displays the IP address of the Network
where route aggregation is manually
enabled.
Subnet Mask
-
-
Displays the subnet mask of the Network
where route aggregation is manually
enabled.
A.1.2.13 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding
OSPF Areas
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding OSFP areas.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE and choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack
Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Multi-OSPF Management tab.
3.
Click New.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
273
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters Required for Creating OSPF Areas
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ID
-
-
l Set the area ID of a new OSPF area
according to the planning information.
l An NE can be configured with a
maximum of four OSPF areas.
IP Address
-
-
l Set the IP addresses of the Networks in
an area according to planning
information.
l An area supports a maximum of four
Networks.
Subnet Mask
-
-
Set the subnet masks of the Networks in an
area according to planning information. A
subnet mask can contain a maximum of 30
bits.
Authentication
Type
none
none
Specifies the OSPF authentication type used
by an area according to planning
information.
MD5
simple
l none indicates no authentication.
l MD5 indicates that authentication is
performed based on the preset password,
with the password encrypted in MD5
mode.
l simple: indicates that authentication is
performed based on the preset password,
with the password not encrypted.
Enabled
Automatic Route
Aggregation
Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether automatic route
aggregation is enabled for an area.
l The number of routes after automatic
route aggregation is the same as the
number of Networks.
STUB Type
NON-STUB
STUB
NSSA
NON-STUB
Set the STUB type of an area according to
planning information.
l For the backbone area, this parameter
must be set to NON-STUB.
l For other areas, it is recommended that
you set this parameter to NON-STUB. If
required, this parameter can also be set
to STUB or NSSA.
A.1.2.14 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding
Routes to Be Manually Aggregated
This topic describes the parameters for adding routes to be manually aggregated.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
274
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE and choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack
Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Multi-OSPF Management tab.
3.
In Manual Route Aggregation, click Add.
Parameters for Configuring Manual Route Aggregation
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ID Address
-
-
Specifies the IP address of the Network
where routes need to be aggregated
manually.
Subnet Mask
-
-
Specifies the subnet mask of the Network
where routes need to be aggregated
manually.
A.1.2.15 Parameter Description: Port OSPF Setting
This section describes the parameters that are used for setting port OSPF parameters.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE and choose Communication > IP Protocol
Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Port OSPF Parameter Settings tab.
Port OSPF Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the ports that allow OSPF
parameters to be set.
Path Type
-
-
Displays the current DCC channel type.
OSPF Status
Enabled
Enabled
l Specifies whether to enable the OSPF.
l Set this parameter as required.
Disabled
Opaque LSA of
External Network
Port
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
l Specifies whether DCC channels support
Opaque LSAs.
l Set this parameter as required.
A.1.2.16 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the network layer of the OSI protocol
model.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
275
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI
Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Network Layer Parameters tab.
Network Layer Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE
-
-
This parameter indicates the name of the
NE.
Configuration Role
ES
L1
l An NE whose Configuration Role is set
to L1 cannot function as a neighbor of an
NE in the other area. It uses a route in the
local area only and accesses the other
area by distributing the default route of
the nearest L2 NE.
L1
L2
l An NE whose Configuration Role is set
to L2 can function as a neighbor of an
NE in the other area and can use a route
in the backbone area. The backbone area
is a collection that is formed by
consecutive L2 NEs. That is, the L2 NE
of all the roles must be consecutive
(connected to each other).
NOTE
Configuration Role cannot be set to ES.
-
Current Role
-
This parameter indicates the current role.
A.1.2.17 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table
This topic describes the parameters that are related to OSI routing tables.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI
Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Routing Table tab.
Parameters for Link Adjacency Table
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the port used for
OSI communication.
Data Link Layer
-
-
This parameter indicates the protocol that is
used at the data link layer.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
276
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Adjacency No.
-
-
l This parameter specifies the identifier of
the adjacency that is set up by two NEs
through the OSI protocol. One adjacency
number corresponds to an OSI
adjacency.
l The value is dynamically allocated by
the NE.
Adjacency Type
-
-
This parameter indicates the type of the
adjacency.
Adjacency State
-
-
This parameter indicates the state of the
adjacency.
Peer End Area ID
-
-
This parameter indicates the area ID that is
contained in the NSAP address of the
opposite NE.
Peer End System
ID
-
-
This parameter indicates the system ID of
the opposite NE. Generally, the system ID
is the MAC address.
Parameters for L1 and L2 Routing Tables
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination SYSID
-
-
This parameter indicates the system ID of
the destination NE. Generally, the system
ID is the MAC address.
Metric
-
-
This parameter indicates the number of hops
that reach the destination NE or destination
area.
Adjacency No.1
-
-
This parameter indicates the number of the
adjacent link that is connected to the
destination NE.
Adjacency No.2
-
-
This parameter indicates the number of the
adjacent link that is connected to the
destination NE.
A.1.2.18 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the OSI tunnels.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
277
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI
Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the OSI Tunnel tab.
Parameters for OSI Tunnel Attributes
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Remote IP Address
-
-
This parameter indicates the IP address of
the opposite end of the OSI tunnel.
LAPD Actor
User
User
l This parameter specifies the LAPD
actor.
Network
l If the adjacent NEs run the OSI protocol,
they can perform the LAPD negotiation
only when the LAPD actor is set to
User at one end and is set to Network at
the other end.
Efficient LAPD
Enable
-
-
This parameter indicates whether the
current LAPD is enabled.
Configurable
LAPD Enable
Enabled
Enabled
This parameter specifies whether the LAPD
is enabled.
Disabled
LAPD Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Remote IP Address
-
-
This parameter indicates the IP address of
the opposite end of the OSI tunnel.
L2 Wait Time to
Retry(s)
1 to 20
1
l This parameter specifies L2 Wait Time
to Retry(s).
l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) indicates the
interval for retransmitting packets at the
LAPD link layer.
l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) needs to be
set according to the network situation. If
the network is in good situation, L2 Wait
Time to Retry(s) can be set to a smaller
value. Otherwise, it is recommended that
you set L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) to a
greater value.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information. In normal
cases, it is recommended that you use the
default value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
278
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
L2 Retry Times
2 to 6
3
l This parameter specifies L2 Retry
Times.
l L2 Retry Times indicates the maximum
number of packet retransmission
attempts at the LAPD link layer.
l L2 Retry Times needs to be set
according to the network situation. If the
network is in good situation, L2 Retry
Times can be set to a smaller value.
Otherwise, it is recommended that you
set L2 Retry Times to a greater value.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information. In normal
cases, it is recommended that you use the
default value.
L3 Hello Timer(s)
1 to 100
3
l This parameter specifies L3 Hello
Timer(s).
l L3 Hello Timer(s) indicates the Hello
packet timer at the LAPD link network
layer. It is used for periodical
transmission of the Hello packets.
l The Hello timer determines the interval
for transmitting the Hello packets once.
L3 Hello Timer(s) needs to be set
according to the network situation. If the
network is in good situation, L3 Hello
Timer(s) can be set to a greater value.
Otherwise, it is recommended that you
set L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information. In normal
cases, it is recommended that you use the
default value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
279
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
L3 ES Timer(s)
1 to 200
50
l This parameter specifies L3 ES Timer
(s).
l L3 ES Timer(s) indicates the ES
configuration timer at the LAPD link
network layer. It is used for setting the
time to transmit the configuration
information on the ES route.
l L3 ES Timer(s) needs to be set
according to the network situation. If the
network is in good situation, L3 ES
Timer(s) can be set to a greater value.
Otherwise, it is recommended that you
set L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information. In normal
cases, it is recommended that you use the
default value.
L3 IS Timer(s)
1 to 200
10
l This parameter specifies L3 IS Timer
(s).
l L3 IS Timer(s) indicates the IS
configuration timer at the LAPD link
network layer. It is used for setting the
time to transmit the configuration
information through the L1/L2 router.
l L3 IS Timer(s) needs to be set according
to the network situation. If the network
is in good situation, L3 IS Timer(s) can
be set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is
recommended that you set L3 IS Timer
(s) to a smaller value.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information. In normal
cases, it is recommended that you use the
default value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
280
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
L3 Hold Timer(s)
2 to 63
5
l This parameter specifies L3 Hold Timer
(s).
l L3 Hold Timer(s) indicates the hold
timer at the LAPD link network layer.
l L3 Hold Timer(s) needs to be set
according to the network situation. If the
network is in good situation, L3 Hold
Timer(s) can be set to a smaller value.
Otherwise, it is recommended that you
set L3 IS Timer(s) to a greater value.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information. In normal
cases, it is recommended that you use the
default value.
1 to 63
COST
20
l This parameter specifies COST.
l COST indicates the overhead value of
the virtual LAPD that corresponds to the
OSI tunnel.
l The overhead value determines whether
this link is perverted. If the overhead
value is smaller, this link has a higher
priority to be selected.
l This parameter needs to set according to
the planning information.
A.1.2.19 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Port Parameters
This topic describes the OSI port parameters.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose
Communication > OSI Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Port Parameters tab.
OSI port parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAPD Role
User
User
l This parameter is available only when
Protocol Type is OSI.
Network
l Set LAPD Role to User at one end of a
DCC and to Network at the other end of
the DCC.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
281
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAPD MTU
-
-
This parameter displays the maximum
LAPD packet length.
A.1.2.20 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for bandwidth management of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN
Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Bandwidth Management tab.
Parameters for Bandwidth Management
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Ethernet Board
VLAN ID
2 to 4094
4094
l The equipment on the traditional DCN
can be connected to the NMS through the
SCC board, but the OptiX RTN 950 can
also be connected to the NMS through an
Ethernet interface. If an Ethernet port is
used to carry the network management
information, the NE differentiates the
network management information and
Ethernet service information according
to the VLAN ID.
l If the default VLAN ID of the inband
DCN conflicts with the VLAN ID in the
service, the Ethernet Board VLAN ID
of the inband DCN can be changed
manually. The same VLAN ID must be,
however, is used on the network-wide
inband DCN.
Bandwidth(Kbit/s)
64 to 1000
512
Bandwidth(Kbit/s) specifies the bandwidth
for inband DCN messaging on the Ethernet
link.
E1 Port
Bandwidth(Kbit/s)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
Tunnel Bandwidth
(Kbit/s)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
IF Port Bandwidth
(Kbit/s)
64 to 1000
512
IF Port Bandwidth(Kbit/s) specifies the
bandwidth for inband DCN messaging on
the radio link.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
282
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.1.2.21 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting
This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting ports of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN
Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Port Settings tab.
Parameters for Setting Ports
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Name
-
-
This parameter indicates the port name.
Enabled Status
Enabled
Enabled
l Enabled Status specifies the enabling
status of the port.
Disabled
l The network management information
can be transmitted over the inband DCN
when the DCN function is enabled for
the ports at both ends of a link.
IP
Protocol Type
IP
HWECC
l If Protocol Type is set to different
values for two interconnected sets of
equipment, equipment interconnection
fails. Therefore, set Protocol Type to the
same value for both ends of a link.
L2DCN
-
IP Address
l Specifies the DCN protocol used by the
inband DCN.
-
l This parameter is available only when
Protocol Type is set to IP.
l When the IP DCN solution is used and
the NE functions as an ABR, this
parameter specifies the interface IP
address of the non-backbone area port on
the ABR.
-
Subnet Mask
-
l This parameter is available only when
Protocol Type is set to IP.
l When the IP DCN solution is used and
the NE functions as an ABR, this
parameter specifies the subnet mask of
the non-backbone area port on the ABR.
A.1.2.22 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access Control
This section describes the parameters for configuring access control.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
283
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
l
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose
Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.
l
Click the Access Control tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Name
-
-
Displays the Ethernet ports that support this
function.
Enabled Status
Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies the enabling status of the port.
Enabled
l If the Enabled Status is set to
Enabled, this port can be used to support
access of the management information
from the NMS.
l If the Enabled Status is set to
Disabled, this port cannot be used to
support access of the management
information from the NMS.
IP Address
-
0.0.0.0
Specifies the IP address of the port.
Subnet Mask
-
0.0.0.0
Specifies the submask of the port.
A.1.2.23 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Packet Control
This topic describes the parameters for controlling the priority of inband DCN packets.
Navigation Path
l
In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and then choose
Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.
l
Click the Packet Control tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Packet Type
-
-
Displays the packet type for which the
packet priority can be manually specified.
Supported
Application
-
-
This parameter cannot be specified
manually.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
284
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Packet Priority
CS6
CS6 (Packet Type
is VLAN)
Specifies the PHB service class of inband
DCN packets.
EF
BE (Packet Type is
DSCP)
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
A.1.2.24 Parameter Description: L2 DCN Management
This section describes the parameters that are related to L2 DCN management.
Navigation Path
l
In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and then choose
Communication > L2DCN Management from the Function Tree.
l
Click Query.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Config Status
Auto
Auto
When the OptiX RTN 950 uses the L2 DCN
solution, the RSTP protocol can be used to
prevent L2 forwarding loops. It is
recommended that the RSTP protocol uses
its default enable/disable mode Auto for the
OptiX RTN 950 NE level. That is, the RSTP
protocol is automatically enabled/disabled
depending on the enable/disable status of
the L2 DCN function over IF ports.
-
l Real Status is queried to be Disabled in
the following scenarios:
Disabled
Real Status
Disabled
Enabled
– Config Status is set to Disabled.
– When Config Status is set to Auto,
the L2 DCN function is disabled for
all IF ports on the NE.
l When Config Status is set to Auto, the
L2 DCN function is enabled for at least
one IF port on the NE. In this case, the
RSTP protocol will automatically work.
At this time, the queried Real Status is
Enabled.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
285
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.1.2.25 Parameter Description: Access Control
This topic describes the parameters that are used for access control of the NMS.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Access
Control from the Function Tree.
Parameters for Ethernet Access Control
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable Ethernet
Access
Selected
-
After The First Network Port is set to
Enabled for Ethernet access, the NE can
access the NMS through the Ethernet port.
PORT
-
-
This parameter displays the NMS port and
the NE cascading port on the system control,
switching, and timing board.
Work Mode
adapt
-
This parameter specifies the working modes
of the NMS port and the NE cascading port
on the system control, switching, and timing
board.
-
This parameter displays the working modes
of the NMS port and the NE cascading port
on the system control, switching, and timing
board.
Deselected
10M Half_Duplex
10M Full_Duplex
100M Half_Duplex
100M Full_Duplex
Actual Work Mode
-
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled
Specifies whether the Ethernet network
management port or NE cascading port is
enabled.
Disabled
Parameters for Access Control over Serial Ports
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable Serial Port
Access
Selected
Selected
After Enable Serial Port Access is
selected, the NE can access the NMS or
command lines through the serial port.
Access Command
Line
Selected
Deselected
If Access Command Line is selected, the
serial interface can be used to access the
command line terminal.
Access NM
Selected
Deselected
If Access NM is selected, the serial interface
can be used to access the NMS.
Deselected
Deselected
Deselected
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
286
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Baud Rate
1200
9600
l This parameter specifies the data
transmission rate in the communications
through serial ports.
2400
4800
l This parameter is set according to the
rate of the serial port at the opposite end,
and the rates at both ends must be the
same.
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
A.1.3 Parameters for Network Security Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to network security management.
A.1.3.1 Parameter Description: NE User Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE user management.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > NE
User Management from the Function Tree.
A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
2.
Close the dialog box.
Parameters for NE user management
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE
-
-
Displays the current NE
name.
NE User
-
-
Displays the registered NE
user name.
User Level
-
-
Displays the registered NE
user level.
NE User Flag
-
-
Displays whether a
registered NE user is
logged in.
A.1.3.2 Parameter Description: NE User Management_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an NE user.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
287
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > NE
User Management from the Function Tree. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful.
2.
Close the dialog box.
3.
Click Add.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE User
-
-
Specifies the name of a
registered NE user.
NOTE
The name of an NE cannot
contain any space or
Chinese characters.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
288
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
User Level
Monitor Level
Monitor Level
l A Debug Level NE
user has all security
and configuration
authorities, and has the
right to run debugging
commands.
Operation Level
Maintenance Level
System Level
Debug Level
l A System Level NE
user has all security
and configuration
authorities.
l A Maintenance
Level NE user has
some security
authorities, some
configuration
authorities, the
communication setting
authority, and the log
management
authority.
l An Operation Level
NE user has all fault
performance
authorities, some
security authorities,
and some
configuration
authorities.
l A Monitor Level NE
user has the right to use
all query commands, to
log in, to log out, and to
change its own
password.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
289
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE User Flag
LCT NE User
LCT NE User
l Specifies the NE user
flag.
EMS NE User
l LCT NE User
indicates NE users for
NE management on
the U2000 Local Craft
Terminal (U2000
LCT).
CMD NE User
General NE User
l EMS NE User
indicates NE users for
NE management on
the U2000.
l CMD NE User
indicates NE users for
NE management on
the CMD.
l General NE User
indicates NE users for
all NMS types.
Detailed Description
-
-
Describes a configured
NE user.
New Password
-
-
l Specifies the password
for a new NE user.
Confirm Password
-
-
Enter the same value as
New Password.
Immediate Password
Change
Yes
Yes
Specifies whether the
password of a registered
NE user can be changed.
No
A.1.3.3 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control
This topic describes the parameters that are used for LCT access control.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > LCT Access
Control from the Function Tree.
Parameters for LCT Access Control
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE
-
-
This parameter indicates the name of the
NE.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
290
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LCT Access
Control Switch
Access Allowed
Access Allowed
l No NMS user logs in to the NE. In this
case, when the LCT requests an LCT
user to log in to the NE, the NE does not
check the status of LCT Access Control
Switch, and directly allows the LCT user
to log in to the NE.
Disable Access
l An NMS user first logs in to the NE. In
this case, when the LCT requests an LCT
user to log in to the NE, the NE
determines whether to allow the LCT
user to log in to the NE through the LCT
according to the status of LCT Access
Control Switch.
l An LCT user first logs in to the NE. In
this case, when the NMS requests an
NMS user to log in to the NE, the NMS
user can directly log in to the NE. After
the NMS user successfully logs in to the
NE, the online LCT user is not affected.
l When both the LCT user and NMS user
log in to the NE, the online LCT user is
not affected after LCT Access Control
Switch is set to Disable Access.
A.1.3.4 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RADIUS configuration.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose Security > NE
RADIUS Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Function
-
-
Server ID
-
-
Server Type
-
-
Specifies the desired RADIUS function, the
authentication server ID, and the server type.
l Function, Server ID, and Server Type are
associated with the servers that are
configured in Creating a RADIUS Server
or a RADIUS Proxy Server.
l Select the desired RADIUS server or proxy
server according to planning information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
291
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Server Status
Active
Active
Specifies the active/standby status of the
RADIUS server or proxy server.
Standby
l If no standby server is required, set Server
Status to Active.
l The OptiX RTN 950 supports one active
server and one standby server. If both the
active and standby servers are configured,
set Server Status of the active server to
Active and Server Status of the standby
server to Standby.
-
Shared Key
-
Specifies the key for communication between
an NE and the RADIUS server.
l Set Shared Key to the same value on the
NE and on the RADIUS server.
l If Server Type is Proxy Server, Shared
Key is not available.
Interval of Packet
Transmission
3-10
5
Packet
Retransmission
Attempts
1-5
3
Specifies the number of packet retransmission
attempts and the interval between the attempts.
l If an NE does not receive the response from
the RADIUS server within a specific
period, the NE re-transmits the
authentication request for the configured
attempt times and at the configured
interval.
l It is recommended that Interval of Packet
Transmission and Packet
Retransmission Attempts take their
default values.
A.1.3.5 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_RADIUS Server
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RADIUS server configuration.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose Security > NE
RADIUS Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the RADIUS Server Configuration tab.
The RADIUS Server Information dialog box is displayed.
3.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Click New.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
292
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Function
Authentication
Authentication
Accounting
Specifies the RADIUS function that an NE
needs to use.
Authentication +
Accounting
l For NE RADIUS authentication, select
Authentication.
l For both NE RADIUS authentication and
NE usage accounting, set this parameter to
Authentication + Accounting or
Accounting (when the Authentication
function has been enabled).
RADIUS Server
Server Type
RADIUS Server
Proxy Server
Specifies the server type used for NE RADIUS
authentication.
l When an NE uses RADIUS authentication
in the NAS mode or functions as a proxy
server, set Server Type to RADIUS
Server.
l When an NE uses RADIUS authentication
in the proxy NAS mode, set Server Type
to Proxy Server.
IP Address
Server ID
NE ID
IP Address
Specifies the address of the server that is used
for NE RADIUS authentication.
l If Server Type is RADIUS Server, set
Server ID to IP Address and specify the
IP address of the RADIUS server.
l If Server Type is Proxy Server, it is
recommended that you set Server ID to
NE ID and set the gateway NE as the proxy
server.
l If Server Type is Proxy Server and there
is no IP route between the NE and the proxy
server, Server ID can be set to only NE
ID. If Server Type is Proxy Server and
there is an IP route between the NE and the
proxy server, Server ID can be set to NE
ID or IP Address.
A.1.3.6 Parameter Description: Enabling/Disabling the RADIUS Function
This topic describes the parameters that are required for enabling/disabling the RADIUS
function.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose Security > NE
RADIUS Configuration from the Function Tree.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
293
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE
-
-
Displays the NE name.
RADIUS Client
Open
Close
Specifies whether an NE has the ability to be
a RADIUS client. The RADIUS function can
be enabled on an NE only if RADIUS Client
is set to Open for the NE.
Close
Specifies whether an NE has the ability to be
a proxy server.
Close
Proxy Server
Open
Close
l If an NE needs to function as a proxy
server, set Proxy Server to Open for the
NE.
l Proxy Server can be set to Open only if
RADIUS Client is set to Open.
l When an NE uses RADIUS authentication
in the proxy NAS mode, set Proxy
Server to Close.
A.2 Radio Link Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links.
A.2.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC
Workgroup_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the XPIC tab.
3.
Click New.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
294
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IF Channel
Bandwidth
ISX2:
-
l This parameter specifies the channel
spacing when the XPIC function is
enabled.
7M
14M
l When this parameter is set to 56M or
40M, the high-power ODU must be
used.
28M
40M
56M
IFX2:
7M
14M
28M
56M
Polarization
Direction-V
-
-
l This parameter indicates the polarization
direction of a radio link.
l It is recommended that you install the
two XPIC IF boards that form an XPIC
workgroup in the slots that are at the
same layer or in the same column, and
set the IF port on the XPIC IF board that
has a smaller slot number to Link ID-V
and the IF port on the other XPIC IF
board to Link ID-H.
1 to 4094
1
l Set Link ID-V and Link ID-H.
l A link ID is an identifier of a radio link
and is used to prevent the radio links
between sites from being wrongly
connected.
l When the link ID received by an NE is
different from the link ID set for the NE,
the NE reports an MW_LIM alarm and
inserts the AIS.
l These two parameters are set according
to the planning information. These two
parameters must be set to different
values, but Link ID-V must be set to the
same value at both ends of a link and
Link ID-H must also be set to the same
value at both ends of a link.
Polarization
Direction-H
Link ID-V
Link ID-H
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
295
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Transmit Power
(dBm)
-
-
l This parameter specifies the transmit
power of an ODU. The value of this
parameter must not exceed the rated
power range supported by the ODU.
l It is recommended that you set the
transmit power of the ODU to the same
value at both ends of a radio link.
l Consider the receive power of the ODU
at the opposite end when you set this
parameter. Ensure that the receive power
of the ODU at the opposite end can
ensure stable radio services.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Maximum
Transmit Power
(dBm)
-
-
l This parameter specifies the maximum
transmit power of the ODU. This
parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power rang of the
ODU in the guaranteed capacity
modulation module.
l This parameter is set to limit the
maximum transmit power of the ODU
within this preset range.
l The maximum transmit power adjusted
by using the ATPC function should not
exceed this value.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Transmission
Frequency(MHz)
-
-
l This parameter indicates the channel
central frequency.
l The value of this parameter must not be
less than the sum of the lower transmit
frequency limit supported by the ODU
and a half of the channel spacing, and
must not be more than the difference
between the upper transmit frequency
limit supported by the ODU and a half of
the channel spacing.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
296
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
T/R Spacing(MHz)
-
-
l This parameter specifies the spacing
between the transmit frequency and the
receive frequency of an ODU to prevent
mutual interference between the
transmitter and the receiver.
l If Station Type of the ODU is TX
high, the transmit frequency is one T/R
spacing higher than the receive
frequency. If Station Type of the ODU
is TX low, the transmit frequency is one
T/R spacing lower than the receive
frequency.
l If the ODU supports only one T/R
spacing, this parameter is set to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing
supported by the ODU is used.
l A valid T/R spacing value is determined
by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing
should be set according to the technical
specifications of the ODU.
l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be
set to the same value at both ends of a
radio link.
Transmission
Status
unmute
mute
unmute
l When this parameter is set to mute, the
ODU does not transmit microwave
signals but can normally receive
microwave signals.
l When this parameter is set to unmute,
the ODU normally transmits and
receives microwave signals.
l In normal cases, Transmission Status is
set to unmute.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
297
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ATPC Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter specifies whether the
ATPC function is enabled.
Enabled
l If this parameter is set to Enabled and if
the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher
or lower than the central value between
the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold at the receive end, the
receiver notifies the transmitter to
decrease or increase the transmit power
until the RSL is within the range that is
2 dB higher or lower than the central
value between the ATPC upper
threshold and the ATPC lower threshold.
l The settings of the ATPC attributes must
be consistent at both ends of a radio link.
l In the case of areas where fast fading
severely affects the radio transmission, it
is recommended that you set this
parameter to Disabled.
l During the commissioning process, set
this parameter to Disabled to ensure that
the transmit power is not changed. After
the commissioning, re-set the ATPC
attributes.
ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm)
-
-45.0
ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm)
-
-70.0
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
l The central value between the ATPC
upper threshold and the ATPC lower
threshold is set as the expected receive
power.
l It is recommended that you set ATPC
Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of
the planned central value between the
ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC
Lower Threshold(dBm) to the
difference between the planned central
value between the ATPC upper
threshold and the ATPC lower threshold
and 10 dB.
l You can set the ATPC upper threshold
only when ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable Status is set to
Disabled.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
298
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Status
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter specifies whether the
ATPC automatic threshold function is
enabled.
Enabled
l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the
equipment automatically uses the preset
ATPC upper and lower thresholds
according to the work mode of the radio
link.
A.2.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the XPIC tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Group ID
-
-
This parameter indicates the ID of the work
group.
Polarization
Direction-V
-
-
This parameter indicates the IF port to which
the polarization direction V corresponds.
Link ID-V
-
-
This parameter indicates the link ID to
which the polarization direction V
corresponds.
Polarization
Direction-H
-
-
This parameter indicates the IF port to which
the polarization direction H corresponds.
Link ID-H
-
-
This parameter indicates the link ID to
which the polarization direction H
corresponds.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
299
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IF Channel
Bandwidth
ISX2:
-
l IF Channel Bandwidth refers to the
channel spacing of the corresponding
radio links.
7M
14M
l When this parameter is set to 56M or
40M, the high-power ODU must be
used.
28M
40M
56M
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
IFX2:
7M
14M
28M
56M
Power to Be
Received -V(dBm)
-90.0 to -20.0
-10.0
l This parameter is used to set the
expected receive power of the ODU and
is mainly used in the antenna alignment
stage. After this parameter is set, the NE
automatically enables the antenna
misalignment indicating function.
l When the antenna misalignment
indicating function is enabled, if the
actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB
lower than the power expected to be
received, the ODU indicator on the IF
board connected to the ODU blinks
yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off),
indicating that the antenna is not aligned.
l After the antenna alignment, after the
state that the antenna is aligned lasts for
30 minutes, the NE automatically
disables the antenna misalignment
indicating function.
l When this parameter takes the default
value, the antenna misalignment
indicating function is disabled.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
300
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Power to Be
Received -H(dBm)
-90.0 to -20.0
-10.0
l This parameter is used to set the
expected receive power of the ODU and
is mainly used in the antenna alignment
stage. After this parameter is set, the NE
automatically enables the antenna
misalignment indicating function.
l When the antenna misalignment
indicating function is enabled, if the
actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB
lower than the power expected to be
received, the ODU indicator on the IF
board connected to the ODU blinks
yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off),
indicating that the antenna is not aligned.
l After the antenna alignment, after the
state that the antenna is aligned lasts for
30 minutes, the NE automatically
disables the antenna misalignment
indicating function.
l When this parameter takes the default
value, the antenna misalignment
indicating function is disabled.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Maximum
Transmit Power
(dBm)
-
-
l This parameter specifies the maximum
transmit power of the ODU. This
parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power rang of the
ODU in the guaranteed capacity
modulation module.
l This parameter is set to limit the
maximum transmit power of the ODU
within this preset range.
l The maximum transmit power adjusted
by using the ATPC function should not
exceed this value.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
301
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Transmit Power
(dBm)
-
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
transmit power of the ODU. This
parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power range of the
ODU.
l It is recommended that you set the
transmit power of the ODU to the same
value at both ends of a radio link.
l Consider the receive power of the ODU
at the opposite end when you set this
parameter. Ensure that the receive power
of the ODU at the opposite end can
ensure stable radio services.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Transmission
Frequency(MHz)
-
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
transmit frequency of the ODU, namely,
the channel central frequency.
l The value of this parameter must not be
less than the sum of the lower TX
frequency limit supported by the ODU
and a half of the channel spacing, and
must not be more than the difference
between the upper TX frequency limit
supported by the ODU and a half of the
channel spacing.
l The difference between the transmit
frequencies of both the ends of a radio
link should be one T/R spacing.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
302
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
T/R Spacing(MHz)
-
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
spacing between the transmit frequency
and receive frequency of the ODU to
prevent mutual interference between the
transmitter and receiver.
l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the
transmit frequency is one T/R spacing
higher than the receive frequency. If the
ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit
frequency is one T/R spacing lower than
the receive frequency.
l If the ODU supports only one T/R
spacing, this parameter is set to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing
supported by the ODU is used.
l A valid T/R spacing value is determined
by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing
should be set according to the technical
specifications of the ODU.
l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be
set to the same value at both ends of a
radio link.
Transmission
Status
unmute
unmute
mute
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
transmit status of the ODU.
l If this parameter is set to mute, the
transmitter of the ODU does not work
but can normally receive microwave
signals.
l If this parameter is set to unmute, the
ODU can normally transmit and receive
microwave signals.
l In normal cases, this parameter is set to
unmute.
Parameters for Hybrid/AM Configuration
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Group ID
-
-
This parameter indicates the ID of the work
group.
Polarization
direction
-
-
This parameter indicates the IF port to which
the polarization direction H or the
polarization direction V corresponds.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
303
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
AM Enable Status
Disabled
Disabled
l When AM Enable Status is set to
Disabled, the radio link uses only the
specified modulation scheme. In this
case, you need to select Manually
Specified Modulation Mode.
Enabled
l When AM Enable Status is set to
Enabled, the radio link uses the
corresponding modulation scheme
according to the channel conditions.
Hence, the Hybrid radio can ensure the
reliable transmission of the E1 services and
provide bandwidth adaptively for the
Ethernet services when the AM function is
enabled.
Modulation Mode
of the Guarantee
AM Capacity
QPSK
-
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
This parameter specifies the highest-gain
modulation scheme that the AM function
supports. This parameter is set according to
the planning information. Generally, the
value of this parameter is determined by the
bandwidth of the services that need to be
transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the
availability of the radio link that
corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
must be higher than Modulation Mode of the
Guarantee AM Capacity.
This parameter is valid only when AM
Enable Status is set to Enabled.
Modulation Mode
of the Full AM
Capacity
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
-
This parameter specifies the highest-gain
modulation scheme that the AM function
supports. This parameter is set according to
the planning information. Generally, the
value of this parameter is determined by the
bandwidth of the services that need to be
transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the
availability of the radio link that
corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
must be higher than Modulation Mode of the
Guarantee AM Capacity.
This parameter is valid only when AM
Enable Status is set to Enabled.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
304
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Manually Specified
Modulation Mode
QPSK
QPSK
This parameter specifies the modulation
scheme that the radio link uses for signal
transmission.
16QAM
32QAM
This parameter is valid only when AM
Enable Status is set to Disabled.
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
Transmit-End
Modulation Mode
-
-
Displays the modulation mode at the
transmit end.
Receive-End
Modulation Mode
-
-
Displays the modulation mode at the receive
end.
Parameters for ATPC Management
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Group ID
-
-
This parameter indicates the object to be set.
ATPC Enable
Status
Disabled
-
l This parameter specifies whether the
ATPC function is enabled.
Enabled
l If this parameter is set to Enabled and if
the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher
or lower than the central value between
the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold at the receive end, the
receiver notifies the transmitter to
decrease or increase the transmit power
until the RSL is within the range that is
2 dB higher or lower than the central
value between the ATPC upper threshold
and the ATPC lower threshold.
l The settings of the ATPC attributes must
be consistent at both ends of a radio link.
l In the case of areas where fast fading
severely affects the radio transmission, it
is recommended that you set this
parameter to Disabled.
l During the commissioning process, set
this parameter to Disabled to ensure that
the transmit power is not changed. After
the commissioning, re-set the ATPC
attributes.
ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
l Set the central value between the ATPC
upper threshold and the ATPC lower
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
305
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm)
-
-
threshold to a value for the expected
receive power.
l It is recommended that you set ATPC
Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of
the planned central value between the
ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC
Lower Threshold(dBm) o the
difference between the planned central
value between the ATPC upper threshold
and the ATPC lower threshold and 10
dB.
l You can set this parameter only when
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable
Status is set to Disabled.
ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Status
Disabled
-
l This parameter specifies whether the
ATPC automatic threshold function is
enabled.
Enabled
l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the
equipment automatically uses the preset
ATPC upper and lower thresholds
according to the work mode of the radio
link.
l If this parameter is set to Disabled, you
need to manually set ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm).
A.2.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF N+1 protection group.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Create.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
306
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR time(s)
300 to 720
600
l This parameter specifies the wait-torestore (WTR) time.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
set WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
Enabled
SD enable
Enabled
Disabled
l This parameter specifies whether the
signal degradation switching function of
N+1 protection is enabled.
l When this parameter is set to Enabled,
the signal degradation condition is
considered as a trigger condition of
protection switching.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Enabled.
Slot Mapping Relation Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Select Mapping
Direction
Work Unit
Work Unit
l This parameter specifies the mapping
direction of N+1 protection.
Protection Unit
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Select Mapping
Way
-
-
l In the case of N+1 protection, map N IF
ports as Work Unit and map the
remaining IF port as Protection Unit.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Mapped Board
-
-
This parameter indicates the working unit
and protection unit that have been set.
A.2.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF N+1 protection.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
307
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
Protection Group Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group
ID
-
-
This parameter indicates the ID of the
protection group.
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
WTR time.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
set WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
SD Enable
Enabled
-
Disabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether the SD switching function of N
+1 protection is enabled.
l When this parameter is set to Enabled,
the SD condition is considered as a
trigger condition of protection
switching.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Enabled.
Protocol Status
-
-
This parameter indicates the status of the
switching control protocol.
Protection Unit Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Unit
-
-
This parameter indicates the protection unit.
Line
-
-
This parameter indicates the information
about the working board or protection
board.
Switching Status
-
-
This parameter indicates the switching state.
Protected Unit
-
-
This parameter indicates the protected unit.
Remote/Local End
Indication
-
-
This parameter indicates the local end or
remote end.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
308
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.2.5 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_Create
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Create.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Working Mode
HSB
HSB
l This parameter specifies the working
mode of the IF 1+1 protection.
FD
SD
l When Working Mode is set to HSB, the
equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby
configuration for the IF board and ODU
at both ends of each hop of a radio link
to realize the protection.
l When Working Mode is set to FD, the
system uses two channels that have a
frequency spacing between them, to
transmit and receive the same signal. The
remote end selects signals from the two
received signals. With FD protection, the
impact of the fading on signal
transmission is reduced.
l When Working Mode is set to SD, the
system uses two antennas that have a
space distance between them, to receive
the same signal. The equipment selects
signals from the two received signals.
With SD protection, the impact of the
fading on signal transmission is reduced.
l The FD mode and SD mode are
compatible with the HSB switching
function.
l This parameter is set according to the
network plan.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
309
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Revertive Mode
Revertive Mode
Revertive Mode
l This parameter specifies the revertive
mode of the IF 1+1 protection.
Non-Revertive
l When Revertive Mode is set to
Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the
switching state releases the switching
and enables the former working channel
to return to the normal state some time
after the former working channel is
restored to normal. It is recommended
that you set this parameter to Revertive
Mode.
l When Revertive Mode is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the
switching state keeps the current state
unchanged unless another switching
occurs even though the former working
channel is restored to normal.
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
600
l This parameter specifies the wait-torestore (WTR) time.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
set WTR Time(s), a revertive switching
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive
Mode. It is recommended that you use
the default value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
310
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable Reverse
Switching
Enabled
Enabled
l This parameter indicates whether the
reverse switching function is enabled.
Disabled
l When both the main IF board and the
standby IF board at the sink end report
service alarms, they send the alarms to
the source end by using the MWRDI
overhead in the microwave frame. When
Enable Reverse Switching at the source
end is set to Enabled and the reverse
switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1
protection switching occurs at the source
end.
l Enable Reverse Switching is valid only
when Working Mode is set to HSB or
SD.
l Generally, if Working Mode is set to
HSB, it is recommended that you set
Enable Reverse Switching to
Disabled; if Working Mode is set to
SD, it is recommended that you set
Enable Reverse Switching to
Enabled.
Working Board
-
-
This parameter specifies the working board
of the protection group.
Protection Board
-
-
This parameter specifies the protection
board of the protection group.
Alarm Report
Mode
Only board alarms
Only board alarms
l When Alarm Report Mode is set to
Only board alarms, only IF board
alarms are reported.
Only protection
group alarms
Protection group
and board alarms
l When Alarm Report Mode is set to
Only protection group alarms, alarms
are reported if a protection group fails or
degrades and suppress IF board alarms
and radio link alarms.
l When Alarm Report Mode is set to
Protection group and board alarms,
IF board alarms and protection group
alarms are reported.
l It is recommended that you set Alarm
Report Mode to Only protection
group alarms. In this case, protection
group alarms are reported to indicate
radio link faults.
NOTE
The faulty board reports related fault alarms
regardless of parameter settings.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
311
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Anti-jitter Time(s)
0 to 600
300
l When Anti-jitter Time(s) is not set to 0,
a protection group does not report an
alarm immediately after it is degraded,
but reports the alarm after the specified
anti-jitter time expires.
l It is recommended that Anti-jitter Time
(s) take its default value.
NOTE
Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s),Anti-jitter Time(s) and Enable
Reverse Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.
A.2.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
Protection Group Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group
ID
-
-
This parameter indicates the ID of the
protection group.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
312
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Working Mode
HSB
-
l This parameter indicates the working
mode of the created IF 1+1 protection
group.
FD
SD
l In HSB mode, the equipment provides a
1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF
board and ODU at both ends of each hop
of a radio link to realize the protection.
l In FD mode, the system uses two
channels that have a frequency spacing
between them, to transmit and receive
the same signal. The remote end selects
signals from the two received signals.
With FD protection, the impact of the
fading on signal transmission is reduced.
l In SD mode, the system uses two
antennas that have a space distance
between them, to receive the same signal.
The equipment selects signals from the
two received signals. With SD
protection, the impact of the fading on
signal transmission is reduced.
l The FD mode and SD mode are
compatible with the HSB switching
function.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Revertive Mode
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
Mode
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
revertive mode of the protection group.
l When this parameter is set to Revertive
Mode, the NE that is in the switching
state releases the switching and enables
the former working channel to return to
the normal state some time after the
former working channel is restored to
normal.
l When this parameter is set to NonRevertive Mode, the NE that is in the
switching state keeps the current state
unchanged unless another switching
occurs even though the former working
channel is restored to normal.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Revertive Mode.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
313
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
WTR time.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
set WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive
Mode.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
Enable Reverse
Switching
Enabled
-
Disabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether the reverse switching function is
enabled.
l When both the main IF board and the
standby IF board at the sink end report
service alarms, they send the alarms to
the source end by using the MWRDI
overhead in the microwave frame. When
this parameter at the source end is set to
Enabled and the reverse switching
conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection
switching occurs at the source end.
l This parameter is valid only when
Working Mode is set to HSB or SD.
NE Switching
Status
-
-
l This parameter indicates the switching
state on the equipment side.
l Unknown is displayed when the
switching state on the channel side is not
queried or not obtained after a query.
Channel Switching
Status
-
-
l This parameter indicates the switching
state on the channel side.
l Unknown is displayed when the
switching state on the channel side is not
queried or not obtained after a query.
Active Port of
Device
-
-
This parameter indicates the current
working board on the equipment side.
Active Port of
Channel
-
-
This parameter indicates the current
working board on the channel side.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
314
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Alarm Report
Mode
Only board alarms
-
l When Alarm Report Mode is set to
Only board alarms, only IF board
alarms are reported.
Only Protection
group alarms
l When Alarm Report Mode is set to
Only protection group alarms, alarms
are reported if a protection group fails or
degrades and suppress IF board alarms
and radio link alarms.
Protection group
and board alarms
l When Alarm Report Mode is set to
Protection group and board alarms, IF
board alarms and protection group
alarms are reported.
l It is recommended that you set Alarm
Report Mode to Only protection group
alarms. In this case, protection group
alarms are reported to indicate radio link
faults.
NOTE
The faulty board reports related fault alarms
regardless of parameter settings.
Anti-jitter Time
0 to 600
-
l When Anti-jitter Time(s) is not set to 0,
a protection group does not report an
alarm immediately after it is degraded,
but reports the alarm after the specified
anti-jitter time expires.
l It is recommended that Anti-jitter Time
(s) take its default value.
NOTE
Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, and WTR Time(s) must be set to the same
value at both ends of a radio hop.
Slot Mapping Relation Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Unit
-
-
This parameter indicates the working board
and protection board.
Slot Mapping
Relation
-
-
This parameter indicates the names and
ports of the working board and protection
board.
Working Status of
Device
-
-
This parameter indicates the working state
on the equipment side.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
315
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Signal Status of
Channel
-
-
This parameter indicates the status of the
link signal.
A.2.7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_Creating a PLA
Group
This topic describes the parameters for creating a PLA group.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and then choose
Configuration > Physical Link Aggregation from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Parameters for Creating a PLA group
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PLA ID
1 to 3
-
This parameter specifies the ID of a PLA
group.
Main Board
-
-
This parameter specifies the main IF board
in a PLA group.
Main Port
-
-
This parameter specifies the main port in a
PLA group.
Board
-
-
This parameter specifies the slave IF board
in a PLA group.
Port
-
-
This parameter specifies the slave port in a
PLA group.
Selected Slave
Ports
-
-
This parameter displays the slave IF board
and slave port that have been selected.
A.2.8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_PLA
This topic describes PLA parameters.
Navigation Path
1.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and then choose
Configuration > Physical Link Aggregation from the Function Tree.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
316
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
PLA Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PLA ID
-
-
This parameter displays the ID of a PLA
group.
Main Board
-
-
This parameter displays the main IF board
in a PLA group.
Main Port
-
-
This parameter displays the main port in a
PLA group.
Hardware Status
of Main Port
-
-
This parameter displays whether the main IF
board in a PLA group is functional.
Link Status of
Main Port
-
-
This parameter displays whether the main
link in a PLA group is functional.
Work Status of
Main Port
-
-
This parameter displays the working status
of the main port in a PLA group.
Minimum Active
Links
-
-
This parameter specifies the minimum
number of available links in a PLA group
and helps to trigger ERPS switching even if
not all members in the PLA group fail
For example, if you set Minimum Active
Links to 2, ERPS switching is triggered
when either PLA member link fails.
Slave Board
-
-
This parameter displays the slave IF board
in a PLA group.
Slave Port
-
-
This parameter displays the slave port in a
PLA group.
Hardware Status
of Slave Port
-
-
This parameter displays whether the slave IF
board in a PLA group is functional.
Link Status of
Slave Port
-
-
This parameter displays whether the slave
link in a PLA group is functional.
Work Status of
Slave Port
-
-
This parameter displays the working status
of the slave port in a PLA group.
A.2.9 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
317
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Configuring the IF
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Work Mode
1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
work mode of the radio link in "work
mode number, service capacity, channel
spacing, modulation mode" format.
2,4E1,3.5MHz,
16QAM
3,8E1,14MHz,QPS
K
l This parameter is set according to the
network plan. The work modes of the IF
boards at the two ends of a radio link
must be the same.
4,8E1,7MHz,
16QAM
5,16E1,28MHz,QP
SK
NOTE
The IF1 board supports this parameter.
6,16E1,14MHz,
16QAM
7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM
10,22E1,14MHz,
32QAM
11,26E1,14MHz,
64QAM
12,32E1,14MHz,
128QAM
13,35E1,28MHz,
16QAM
14,44E1,28MHz,
32QAM
15,53E1,28MHz,
64QAM
Link ID
1 to 4094
1
l Link ID indicates or specifies the ID of
a radio link. As the identifier of a radio
link, this parameter is used to prevent
incorrect connections of radio links
between sites.
l If the value of Received Radio Link
ID does not match the preset value of
Link ID at the local end, the local end
inserts the AIS signal to the downstream
direction of the service. At the same time,
the local end reports MW_LIM alarm to
the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do
not match.
l Link ID is set according to the network
plan. Each radio link of an NE should
have a unique link ID, and the link IDs at
both ends of a radio link should be the
same.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
318
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Received Link ID
-
-
l This parameter indicates the received ID
of the radio link.
l If the value of Received Radio Link
ID does not match the preset value of
Radio Link ID at the local end, the local
end inserts the AIS signal to the
downstream direction of the service. At
the same time, the local end reports an
alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link
IDs do not match.
l When the radio link becomes faulty, this
parameter is displayed as an invalid
value.
IF Service Type
Hybrid(Native E1
+ETH)
Hybrid(Native E1
+ETH)
Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH)
l Displays or specifies the type of services
carried by the IF board.
l If the Integrated IP radio transmits
Native E1 services, set this parameter to
Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
SDH
l If the Integrated IP radio transmits
Native STM-1 services, set this
parameter to Hybrid(Native STM-1
+ETH).
l If the SDH radio transmits SDH services,
set this parameter to SDH.
NOTE
The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this
parameter.
IF Channel
Bandwidth
3.5M
-
7M
14M
28M
IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the
channel spacing of the corresponding radio
link. This parameter is set according to the
network plan.
NOTE
40M
l This parameter is not applicable to the IF1
board.
56M
l The IFU2 board does not support the value
40M.
l The IFX2 board does not support the values
40M.
l IF Channel Bandwidth can be set to 3.5M
only for the ISU2 board.
AM Mode
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
This parameter is not applicable to the OptiX
RTN 950.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
319
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
AM Enable Status
Disabled
Disabled
l When AM Enable Status is set to
Disabled, the radio link uses only the
specified modulation scheme. In this
case, you need to select Manually
Specified Modulation Mode.
Enabled
l When AM Enable Status is set to
Enabled, the radio link uses the
corresponding modulation scheme
according to the channel conditions.
l Hence, the Integrated IP radio can ensure
the reliable transmission of the E1
services and provide bandwidth
adaptively for the Ethernet services
when the AM function is enabled.
l The ISX2/ISU2 does not support the AM
function when IF Service Type is
SDH.
l When IF Channel Bandwidth is 3.5M
for the ISU2 board, the AM function is
unavailable and AM Enable Status
must be set to Disabled.
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
Manually Specified
Modulation Mode
QPSK
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
l This parameter is valid only when AM
Enable Status is set to Disabled.
64QAM
128QAM
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
256QAM
Modulation Mode
of the Guarantee
AM Capacity
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
l This parameter specifies the modulation
scheme that the radio link uses for signal
transmission.
QPSK
l This parameter is valid only when AM
Enable Status is set to Enabled.
l Modulation Mode of the Guarantee
AM Capacity specifies the lowest-order
modulation scheme that the AM function
supports. This parameter is set according
to the network plan. Generally, the value
of this parameter is determined by the
service transmission bandwidth that the
Hybrid radio must ensure and the
availability of the radio link that
corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
320
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Modulation Mode
of the Full AM
Capacity
QPSK
QPSK
l This parameter is valid only when AM
Enable Status is set to Enabled.
16QAM
l Modulation Mode of the Full AM
Capacity specifies the highest-order
modulation scheme that the AM function
supports. This parameter is set according
to the network plan. Generally, the value
of this parameter is determined by the
bandwidth of the services that need to be
transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the
availability of the radio link that
corresponds to this modulation scheme.
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM
Capacity must be higher than Modulation
Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
STM-1 Capacity
-
-
l Specifies the STM-1 capacity of the IF
board.
l This parameter is available only when IF
Service Type is set to Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH) and SDH.
l If IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH), this parameter can be set
to 0 or 1.
l If IF Service Type is SDH, this
parameter can be set to 1 or 2.
NOTE
The IF1, IFU2, and IFX2 boards do not support
this parameter.
Guarantee E1
Capacity
-
-
l If AM Enable Status is set to Enabled,
this parameter needs to be set according
to IF Channel Bandwidth, Modulation
Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity,
and the actually transmitted services.
l If AM Enable Status is set to
Disabled, this parameter needs to be set
according to IF Channel Bandwidth,
Manually Specified Modulation
Mode, and the actually transmitted
services.
l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this
parameter is available when IF Service
Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
321
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Guarantee E1
Capacity Range
-
-
Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF
board in guarantee capacity modulation
mode.
Data Service
Bandwidth(Mbit/
s)
-
-
Displays the data service bandwidth of the
IF board.
Enable E1 Priority
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter specifies whether to
enable the E1 priority function.
Enabled
l This parameter is valid only when AM
Enable Status is set to Enabled.
l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this
parameter is available when IF Service
Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
Full E1 Capacity
-
-
l This parameter specifies the number of
transmitted E1 services in Modulation
Mode of the Full AM Capacity.
l This parameter is valid if Enable E1
Priority is set to Enabled.
l E1 service bandwidth in full capacity
mode ≤ Service bandwidth in full
capacity mode - Service bandwidth in
guarantee capacity mode + E1 service
bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode.
In addition, the number of E1 services in
full capacity modulation mode should be
smaller than or equal to the maximum
number of E1 services in full capacity
modulation mode.
l The Full E1 Capacity must be set to the
same value at both ends of a radio link.
l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this
parameter is available when IF Service
Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
Full E1 Capacity
Range
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF
board in full capacity modulation mode.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
322
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Configuring the RF
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
TX Frequency
(MHz)
-
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
transmit frequency of the ODU, namely,
the channel central frequency.
l The value of this parameter must not be
less than the sum of the lower TX
frequency limit supported by the ODU
and a half of the channel spacing, and
must not be more than the difference
between the upper TX frequency limit
supported by the ODU and a half of the
channel spacing.
l The difference between the transmit
frequencies of both the ends of a radio
link should be one T/R spacing.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the network plan.
Range of TX
Frequency(MHz)
-
-
l This parameter indicates the range of the
transmit frequency of the ODU.
l The Range of Frequency(MHz)
depends on the specifications of the
ODU.
Actual TX
Frequency(MHz)
-
-
This parameter indicates the actual transmit
frequency of the ODU.
Actual RX
Frequency(MHz)
-
-
This parameter indicates the actual receive
frequency of the ODU.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
323
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
T/R Spacing(MHz)
-
-
l This parameter specifies the spacing
between the transmit frequency and the
receive frequency of an ODU to prevent
interference between them.
l If Station Type of the ODU is TX
high, the TX frequency is one T/R
spacing higher than the receive
frequency. If Station Type of the ODU
is TX low, the TX frequency is one T/R
spacing lower than the receive
frequency.
l If the ODU supports only one T/R
spacing, set this parameter to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing supported
by the ODU is used.
l A valid T/R spacing value is determined
by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing
should be set according to the technical
specifications of the ODU.
l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be
set to the same value at both the ends of
a radio link.
Actual T/R
Spacing(MHz)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
This parameter indicates the actual T/R
spacing of the ODU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
324
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Configuring the Power
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
TX Power(dBm)
-
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
transmit power of the ODU. This
parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power range of the
ODU.
l This parameter cannot take a value
greater than the preset value of
Maximum Transmit Power(dBm).
l It is recommended that you set the
transmit power of the ODU to the same
value at both ends of a radio link.
l Consider the receive power of the ODU
at the opposite end when you set this
parameter. Ensure that the receive power
of the ODU at the opposite end can
ensure stable radio services.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the network plan.
Range of TX
Power(dBm)
-
-
This parameter indicates the range of the
transmit power of the ODU.
Actual TX Power
(dBm)
-
-
l This parameter indicates the actual
transmit power of the ODU.
l If the ATPC function is enabled, the
queried actual transmit power may be
different from the preset value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
325
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Power to Be
Received(dBm)
-90.0 to -20.0
-10.0
l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used to
set the expected receive power of the
ODU and is mainly used in the antenna
alignment stage. After this parameter is
set, the NE automatically enables the
antenna misalignment indicating
function.
l When the antenna misalignment
indicating function is enabled, When the
antenna non-alignment indication
function is enabled, if the actual receive
power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the
power expected to be received, the ODU
indicator on the IF board connected to
the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300
ms off), indicating that the antenna is not
aligned.
l After the antenna alignment, after the
state that the antenna is aligned lasts for
30 minutes, the NE automatically
disables the antenna misalignment
indicating function.
l When Power to Be Received(dBm)
takes the default value (-10.0), the
antenna misalignment indicating
function is disabled.
l This parameter is set according to the
network plan.
Actual RX Power
(dBm)
-
-
This parameter indicates the actual receive
power of the ODU.
TX Status
Unmute
Unmute
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
transmit status of the ODU.
Mute
l When this parameter is set to Mute, the
transmitter of the ODU does not work
but can normally receive microwave
signals.
l When this parameter is set to Unmute,
the ODU can normally transmit and
receive microwave signals.
l In normal cases, it is recommended that
you set TX Status to unmute.
Actual TX Status
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
This parameter indicates the actual transmit
status of the ODU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
326
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Equipment Information
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Frequency(GHz)
-
-
This parameter indicates the frequency band
where the ODU operates.
Equip Type
-
-
l This parameter indicates the equipment
type of the ODU.
l PDH and SDH indicate the transmission
capacity only and are irrelevant to the
type of transmitted service.
Station Type
-
-
l This parameter indicates whether the
ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low
station.
l The transmit frequency of a Tx high
station is one T/R spacing higher than the
transmit frequency of a Tx low station.
Produce SN
-
-
This parameter indicates the manufacturing
serial number and the manufacturer code of
the ODU.
Transmission
Power Level
-
-
This parameter indicates the level of the
output power of the ODU.
A.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP).
A.3.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating linear MSP groups.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear
MS from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Create.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
327
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default
Value
Description
Protection Type
1+1 Protection
1+1 Protection
l This parameter specifies the
protection type of the linear
MSP group.
1:N Protection
l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP,
one working channel and one
protection channel are
required. When the working
channel fails, the service is
switched from the working
channel to the protection
channel.
l In the case of 1:N linear MSP,
N working channels and one
protection channel are
required. Normal services are
transmitted on the working
channels and extra services
are transmitted on the
protection channel. When one
working channel fails, the
services are switched from
this working channel to the
protection channel, and the
extra services are interrupted.
l If extra services need to be
transmitted or several
working channels are
required, select 1:N
Protection.
l This parameter is set
according to the planning
information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
328
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default
Value
Description
Switching Mode
Single-Ended
Switching
Single-Ended
Switching (1
+1 Protection)
l This parameter specifies the
switching mode of the linear
MSP.
Dual-Ended
Switching (1:N
Protection)
l In single-ended mode, the
switching occurs only at one
end and the state of the other
end remains unchanged.
Dual-Ended
Switching
l In dual-ended mode, the
switching occurs at both ends
at the same time.
l If the linear MSP type is set to
1:N Protection, Switching
Mode can be set to DualEnded Switching only.
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
Revertive
Non-Revertive
(1+1
Protection)
l This parameter specifies the
revertive mode of the linear
MSP.
Revertive (1:N
Protection)
l When this parameter is set to
Revertive, the NE that is in
the switching state releases
the switching and enables the
former working channel to
return to the normal state
some time after the former
working channel is restored to
normal.
l When this parameter is set to
Non-Revertive, the NE that
is in the switching state keeps
the current state unchanged
unless another switching
occurs even though the
former working channel is
restored to normal.
l It is recommended that you
set this parameter to
Revertive.
l If the linear MSP type is set to
1:N Protection, Revertive
Mode can be set to
Revertive only.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
329
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default
Value
Description
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
600
l This parameter specifies the
WTR time.
l When the time after the
former working channel is
restored to normal reaches the
preset WTR time, a revertive
switching occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s)
only when Revertive Mode
is set to Revertive.
l It is recommended that you
use the default value.
SD Enable
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
l This parameter indicates or
specifies whether the
switching at the SD alarm of
the linear MSP is enabled.
l When this parameter is set to
Enabled, the B2_SD alarm is
considered as a switching
condition.
l It is recommended that you
set this parameter to
Enabled.
Protocol Type
New Protocol
New Protocol
Restructure
Protocol
l The new protocol is
supported at the early stage,
and the mainstream protocol
version is used currently.
l The restructure protocol
optimizes the new protocol
and provides better measures
to protect the new protocol,
thus ensuring that the new
protocol runs in a better
manner.
l The new protocol is more
mature, and the restructure
protocol complies with the
standard. It is recommended
that you use the new protocol.
l You must ensure that the
interconnected NEs run the
protocols of the same type.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
330
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Slot Mapping Relation Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Select Mapping
Direction
West Working Unit
West Working Unit
This parameter specifies the mapping
direction of the linear MSP.
Select Mapping
Mode
-
-
l This parameter specifies the mapping
board and port in the mapping direction.
West Protection
Unit
l If the protection type is set to 1+1
Protection, only one line port can be
mapped as West Working Unit.
l Only one line port can be mapped as
West Protection Unit.
l The line port mapped as West
Protection Unit and the line port
mapped as West Working Unit should
be configured for different boards if
possible.
-
Mapped Board
-
This parameter indicates the preset slot
mapping relations, including the mapping
direction and the corresponding mapping
mode.
A.3.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP
This topic describes the parameters that are related to linear MSP groups.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MS
from the Function Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group
ID
-
-
This parameter indicates the ID of the
protection group.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
331
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Type
-
-
l This parameter indicates the protection
type of the linear MSP group.
l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, one
working channel and one protection
channel are required. When the working
channel fails, the service is switched
from the working channel to the
protection channel.
l In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N working
channels and one protection channel are
required. Normal services are
transmitted on the working channels and
extra services are transmitted on the
protection channel. When one working
channel fails, the services are switched
from this working channel to the
protection channel, and the extra
services are interrupted.
l If extra services need to be transmitted
or several working channels are
required, select 1:N Protection.
Switching Mode
Single-Ended
Switching
Dual-Ended
Switching
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
switching mode of the linear MSP.
l In single-ended mode, the switching
occurs only at one end and the state of
the other end remains unchanged.
l In dual-ended mode, the switching
occurs at both ends at the same time.
l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N
Protection, Switching Mode can be set
to Dual-Ended Switching only.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
332
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
revertive mode of the linear MSP.
Revertive
l When this parameter is set to
Revertive, the NE that is in the
switching state releases the switching
and enables the former working channel
to return to the normal state some time
after the former working channel is
restored to normal.
l When this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the
switching state keeps the current state
unchanged unless another switching
occurs even though the former working
channel is restored to normal.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Revertive.
l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N
Protection, Revertive Mode can be set
to Revertive only.
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
WTR time.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
preset WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
SD Enable
Enabled
Disabled
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether the reverse switching function
is enabled.
l When this parameter is set to Enabled,
the B2_SD alarm is considered as a
switching condition.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Enabled.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
333
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protocol Type
New Protocol
-
l The new protocol is supported at the
early stage, and the mainstream protocol
version is used currently.
Restructure Protocol
l The restructure protocol optimizes the
new protocol and provides better
measures to protect the new protocol,
thus ensuring that the new protocol runs
in a better manner.
l You must ensure that the interconnected
NEs run the protocols of the same type.
l The new protocol is more mature, and
the restructure protocol complies with
the standard. It is recommended that you
use the new protocol.
Protocol Status
-
-
This parameter indicates the protocol status
of the linear MSP.
Protection Subnet
-
-
This parameter displays the protection
subnet where the MS protection is
configured.
Slot Mapping Relation Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Unit
-
-
This parameter indicates that which of the
units, namely, the west protection unit or the
west working unit, is currently in the
protection status.
West Line
-
-
This parameter indicates the west protection
unit and the west working unit of the linear
MSP.
West Switching
Status
-
-
This parameter indicates the switching
status of the line.
Protected Unit
-
-
This parameter indicates the working
channel protected by the current protection
channel.
Remote/Local End
Indication
-
-
When Switching Mode is set to DualEnded Switching, the central office end
that issues the switching command is
displayed.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
334
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services.
A.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point crossconnections.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH
Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the crossconnection.
3.
Click Create.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Level
VC12
VC12
l This parameter specifies the level of the
service to be created.
VC3
l If the service is an E1 service or a data
service that is bound with VC-12
channels, set this parameter to VC12.
VC4
l If the service is a data service that is
bound with VC-3 channels, set this
parameter to VC3.
l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass
through the NE, set this parameter to
VC4.
Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Unidirectional
l When this parameter is set to
Unidirectional, create only the crossconnections from the service source to
the service sink.
l When this parameter is set to
Bidirectional, create the crossconnections from the service source to
the service sink and the crossconnections from the service sink to the
service source.
l In normal cases, it is recommended that
you set this parameter to Bidirectional.
Source Slot
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
This parameter specifies the slot of the
service source.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
335
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source VC4
-
-
l This parameter specifies the number of
the VC-4 channel where the service
source is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when
Source Slot is set to the slot of the
tributary board.
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
-
-
l This parameter indicates the timeslot
range of the service source.
l This parameter can be set to a number or
several numbers. When setting this
parameter to several numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate the discrete
numbers, or use the endash (-) to
represent a consecutive number. For
example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l This parameter is set according to the
network plan.
Sink Slot
-
-
This parameter specifies the slot of the
service sink.
Sink VC4
-
-
l This parameter specifies the number of
the VC-4 channel where the service sink
is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when Sink
Slot is set to the slot of the tributary
board.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
-
-
l This parameter specifies the timeslot
range of the service sink.
l This parameter can be set to a number or
several numbers. When setting this
parameter to several numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate the discrete
numbers, or use the endash (-) to
represent a consecutive number. For
example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l This parameter is set according to the
network plan.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
336
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
E1 Priority
High
-
l This parameter specifies the priority of
an E1 service. This parameter is
available only if the E1 priority function
is enabled for the ports configured in the
cross-connections.
Low
None
l If E1 Priority is set to High,
transmission of the E1 service is ensured
in any modulation scheme.
l If E1 Priority is set to Low, transmission
of the E1 service is ensured only in fullcapacity modulation scheme
l If the service priority is not specified
during service creation, E1 Priority is
None. In this case, the E1 priority of a
service needs to be changed after the
service is created.
Yes
Activate
Immediately
Yes
No
l This parameter specifies whether to
immediately activate the configured
service.
l To immediately deliver the configured
SDH service to the NE, set this parameter
to Yes.
A.4.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP
Service Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH
Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the crossconnection.
3.
Click Create SNCP Service.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Type
SNCP
SNCP
This parameter indicates that the type of the
service to be created is SNCP.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
337
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
l When this parameter is set to
Unidirectional, create only the crossconnections from the SNCP service
source to the SNCP service sink.
Unidirectional
l When this parameter is set to
Bidirectional, create the crossconnections from the SNCP service
source to the service sink and the crossconnections from the SNCP service sink
to the service source.
l In normal cases, it is recommended that
you set this parameter to Bidirectional.
Level
VC12
VC3
VC4
VC12
l This parameter specifies the level of the
SCNP service to be created.
l If the service is an E1 service or a data
service that is bound with VC-12
channels, set this parameter to VC12.
l If the service is a data service that is
bound with VC-3 channels, set this
parameter to VC3.
l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass
through the NE, set this parameter to
VC4.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
338
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Hold-off Time
(100ms)
0 to 100
0
l This parameter specifies the duration of
the hold-off time.
l When a line is faulty, SNCP switching
can be performed on the NE after a delay
of time to prevent the situation where the
NE performs SNCP switching and other
protection switching at the same time.
l Hold-off Time(100ms) is generally set
to prevent SNCP protection switching,
when SNCP works with N+1 protection.
Hold-off Time(100ms) must be longer
than the switching time of any protection
mode that works with SNCP. Generally,
Hold-off Time(100ms) is set to 200 ms.
l When SNCP works with 1+1 FD/SD,
trigger conditions for HSM switching or
SNCP switching trigger HSM switching
but do not trigger SNCP switching.
Therefore, Hold-off Time(100ms) does
not need to be set in this case.
l The switching time of 1+1 HSB/FD/SD
protection is much longer than that of
SNCP. Therefore, to shorten service
interruptions, it is recommended that you
do not set Hold-off Time(100ms) when
SNCP works with 1+1 HSB/FD/SD
protection.
l If only the SNCP scheme is available, it
is recommended that you set the hold-off
time to 0.
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
Revertive
Non-Revertive
l This parameter specifies whether to
switch the service to the original working
channel after the fault is rectified.
l If this parameter is set to Revertive, the
service is switched from the protection
channel to the original working channel.
If this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the service is not switched
from the protection channel to the
original working channel.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Revertive.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
339
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
600
l This parameter specifies the WTR time.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
preset WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
Source Slot
-
-
This parameter specifies the slot of the
service source.
Source VC4
-
-
l This parameter specifies the number of
the VC-4 channel where the service
source is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when
Source Slot is set to the slot of the
tributary board.
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
-
-
l This parameter indicates the timeslot
range of the service source.
l This parameter can be set to a number or
several numbers. When setting this
parameter to several numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate the discrete
numbers, or use the endash (-) to
represent a consecutive number. For
example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Sink Slot
-
-
This parameter specifies the slot of the
service sink.
Sink VC4
-
-
l This parameter specifies the number of
the VC-4 channel where the service sink
is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when Sink
Slot is set to the slot of the tributary
board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
340
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
-
-
l This parameter specifies the timeslot
range of the service sink.
l This parameter can be set to a number or
several numbers. When setting this
parameter to several numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate the discrete
numbers, or use the endash (-) to
represent a consecutive number. For
example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Selected
Configure SNCP
Tangent Ring
Deselected
Deselected
l After the Configure SNCP Tangent
Ring checkbox is selected, you can
quickly configure the SNCP service for
the SNCP ring tangent point.
l In normal cases, it is recommended that
you do not select this checkbox.
Selected
Activate
Immediately
Deselected
Selected
l This parameter specifies whether to
immediately activate the configured
SNCP service.
l After the Activate Immediately
checkbox is selected, you can
immediately activate the created SNCP
service.
A.4.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service
Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services
This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCP
services.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH
Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Optional: If a bidirectional SDH service is created, select this service in CrossConnection. Right-click the selected service and choose Expand to Unidirectional from
the shortcut menu.
3.
Select the unidirectional service. Right-click the selected service and choose Convert to
SNCP Service from the shortcut menu.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
341
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Type
SNCP
SNCP
This parameter indicates that the type of the
service to be created is SNCP.
Direction
Unidirectional
-
This parameter indicates the direction of the
SNCP service.
Level
-
-
l This parameter indicates the level of the
SNCP service.
l If the service is an E1 service or a data
service that is bound with VC-12
channels, the parameter value is VC12.
l If the service is a data service that is
bound with VC-3 channels, the
parameter value is VC3.
l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass
through the NE, the parameter value is
VC4.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
342
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Hold-off Time
(100ms)
0 to 100
0
l This parameter specifies the duration of
the hold-off time.
l When a line is faulty, SNCP switching
can be performed on the NE after a delay
of time to prevent the situation where the
NE performs SNCP switching and other
protection switching at the same time.
l Hold-off Time(100ms) is generally set
to prevent SNCP protection switching,
when SNCP works with N+1 protection.
Hold-off Time(100ms) must be longer
than the switching time of any protection
mode that works with SNCP. Generally,
Hold-off Time(100ms) is set to 200 ms.
l When SNCP works with 1+1 FD/SD,
trigger conditions for HSM switching or
SNCP switching trigger HSM switching
but do not trigger SNCP switching.
Therefore, Hold-off Time(100ms) does
not need to be set in this case.
l The switching time of 1+1 HSB/FD/SD
protection is much longer than that of
SNCP. Therefore, to shorten service
interruptions, it is recommended that you
do not set Hold-off Time(100ms) when
SNCP works with 1+1 HSB/FD/SD
protection.
l If only the SNCP scheme is available, it
is recommended that you set the hold-off
time to 0.
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
Revertive
Non-Revertive
l This parameter specifies whether to
switch the service to the original working
channel after the fault is rectified. If this
parameter is set to "Revertive", the
service is switched from the protection
channel to the original working channel.
l If this parameter is set to Revertive, the
service is switched from the protection
channel to the original working channel.
If this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the service is not switched
from the protection channel to the
original working channel.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Revertive.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
343
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
600
l This parameter specifies the WTR time.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
preset WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
Source Slot
-
-
This parameter specifies the slot of the
service source.
Source VC4
-
-
l This parameter specifies the number of
the VC-4 channel where the service
source is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when
Source Slot is set to the slot of the
tributary board.
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
-
-
l This parameter indicates the timeslot
range of the service source.
l This parameter can be set to a number or
several numbers. When setting this
parameter to several numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate the discrete
numbers, or use the endash (-) to
represent a consecutive number. For
example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Sink Slot
-
-
This parameter specifies the slot of the
service sink.
Sink VC4
-
-
l This parameter specifies the number of
the VC-4 channel where the service sink
is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when Sink
Slot is set to the slot of the tributary
board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
344
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
-
-
l This parameter specifies the timeslot
range of the service sink.
l This parameter can be set to a number or
several numbers. When setting this
parameter to several numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate the discrete
numbers, or use the endash (-) to
represent a consecutive number. For
example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Configure SNCP
Tangent Ring
-
-
After the Configure SNCP Tangent Ring
checkbox is selected, you can quickly
configure the SNCP service for the SNCP
ring tangent point.
Activate
Immediately
-
-
l This parameter indicates whether to
immediately activate the configured
SNCP service.
l After the Activate Immediately
checkbox is selected, you can
immediately activate the created SNCP
service.
A.4.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring SDH services (namely,
configuring cross-connections).
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
345
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Cross-Connection Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Level
VC12
-
l This parameter indicates the level of the
service.
VC3
l If the service is an E1 service or a data
service that is bound with VC-12
channels, VC12 is displayed.
VC4
l If the service is a data service that is
bound with VC-3 channels, VC3 is
displayed.
l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass
through the NE, VC4 is displayed.
Source Slot
-
-
This parameter indicates the slot of the
service source.
Source Timeslot/
Path
-
-
This parameter indicates the timeslot or
timeslot range of the service source.
Sink Slot
-
-
This parameter indicates the slot of the
source sink.
Sink Timeslot/
Path
-
-
This parameter indicates the timeslot or
timeslot range of the service sink.
E1 Priority
High
-
l This parameter specifies the priority of
an E1 service. This parameter is
available only if the E1 priority function
is enabled for the ports configured in the
cross-connections.
Low
None
l If E1 Priority is set to High,
transmission of the E1 service is ensured
in any modulation scheme.
l If E1 Priority is set to Low, transmission
of the E1 service is ensured only in fullcapacity modulation scheme
l If the service priority is not specified
during service creation, E1 Priority is
None. In this case, the E1 priority of a
service needs to be changed after the
service is created.
Activation Status
Yes
-
This parameter indicates whether to activate
the service.
No
Bound Group
Number
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
Lockout Status
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
346
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Trail Name
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
Schedule No.
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
Parameters for Automatically Created Cross-Connections
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Level
VC12
-
l This parameter indicates the level of the
service.
VC3
l If the service is an E1 service or a data
service that is bound with VC-12
channels, VC12 is displayed.
VC4
l If the service is a data service that is
bound with VC-3 channels, VC3 is
displayed.
l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass
through the NE, VC4 is displayed.
Source Slot
-
-
This parameter indicates the slot of the
service source.
Source Timeslot/
Path
-
-
This parameter indicates the timeslot or
timeslot range of the service source.
Sink Slot
-
-
This parameter indicates the slot of the
source sink.
Sink Timeslot/
Path
-
-
This parameter indicates the timeslot or
timeslot range of the service sink.
Lockout Status
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
Trail Name
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
Schedule No.
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
A.4.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control
This topic describes the parameters that are used for controlling SNCP services.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
347
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SNCP Service
Control from the Function Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Type
-
-
This parameter indicates the service
protection type of the protection group.
Source
-
-
This parameter indicates the timeslots where
the working service source and protection
service source of the protection group are
located.
Sink
-
-
This parameter indicates the timeslots where
the working service sink and protection
service sink of the protection group are
located.
Level
VC12
-
l This parameter indicates the level of the
service.
VC3
l If the service is an E1 service or a data
service that is bound with VC-12
channels, VC12 is displayed.
VC4
l If the service is a data service that is
bound with VC-3 channels, VC3 is
displayed.
l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass
through the NE, VC4 is displayed.
Current Status
-
-
This parameter indicates the current
switching mode and switching status of the
services of the protection group.
Revertive Mode
Revertive
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
revertive mode of the service.
Non-Revertive
l This parameter determines whether to
switch the service from the protection
channel to the original working channel
after the fault is rectified.
l If this parameter is set to Revertive, the
service is switched from the protection
channel to the original working channel.
If this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the service is not switched
from the protection channel to the
original working channel.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Revertive.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
348
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
WTR time.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
preset WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
Hold-off Time
(100ms)
0 to 100
-
l This parameter specifies the duration of
the hold-off time.
l When a line is faulty, SNCP switching
can be performed on the NE after a delay
of time to prevent the situation where the
NE performs SNCP switching and other
protection switching at the same time.
l Hold-off Time(100ms) is generally set
to prevent SNCP protection switching,
when SNCP works with N+1 protection.
Hold-off Time(100ms) must be longer
than the switching time of any protection
mode that works with SNCP. Generally,
Hold-off Time(100ms) is set to 200 ms.
l When SNCP works with 1+1 FD/SD,
trigger conditions for HSM switching or
SNCP switching trigger HSM switching
but do not trigger SNCP switching.
Therefore, Hold-off Time(100ms) does
not need to be set in this case.
l The switching time of 1+1 HSB/FD/SD
protection is much longer than that of
SNCP. Therefore, to shorten service
interruptions, it is recommended that you
do not set Hold-off Time(100ms) when
SNCP works with 1+1 HSB/FD/SD
protection.
l If only the SNCP scheme is available, it
is recommended that you set the hold-off
time to 0.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
349
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
SD Initiation
Condition
-
Null
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
conditions that trigger the protection
switching of the service.
l After being selected as SD Initiation
Condition, an alarm becomes a
condition for triggering switching of an
SNCP service.
l It is recommended that you set SD
Initiation Condition to the same
condition for Working Service and
Protection Service.
l The protection switching conditions in
SD Initiation Condition are optional
values not included in the default values,
and they are set according to the planning
information.
Trail Status
-
-
This parameter indicates the status of the
working service and protection service of
the protection group.
Service Grouping
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
Group Type
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
Active Channel
-
-
This parameter indicates whether the
working service or protection service is
currently received by the protection group.
Trail Name
-
-
Displays the trail name.
A.4.6 Parameter Description: TU_AIS Insertion
This section describes the parameters for TU_AIS insertion.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the IF board from the Object Tree and choose Alarm > Triggered
Alarm Insertion from the Function Tree.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
350
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-1 Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the slot ID of the IF board and the
ID of the IF port.
High Channel
-
-
Displays the higher order path number of the
IF board.
Low Channel
-
-
Displays the lower order path number of the
IF board.
Insert TU_AIS to
E1_AIS
Enable
Auto
l When Insert TU_AIS to E1_AIS is
Auto, the TU_AIS is automatically
inserted after the E1_AIS is detected in
the E1 channel.
Disable
Auto
l Generally, it is recommended that Auto
take its default value.
A.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces.
A.5.1 PDH Port Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to PDH ports supported by Smart E1 interface
boards.
A.5.1.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of PDH ports.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the General Attributes tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the ID of a
service port.
Name
-
-
Specifies or displays the
customized port name.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
351
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Mode
Layer 1
Layer 2
l Specifies the working
mode of a PDH port.
Layer 2
l When this parameter is
set to Layer 1, the port
can transmit TDM
signals. A port can
transmit CES and
serial services only if
this parameter is set to
Layer 1.
l When this parameter is
set to Layer 2, the port
can transmit ATM
signals.
Encapsulation Type
-
-
l Displays
Encapsulation Type
of a PDH port.
l When Port Mode is
Layer 1,
Encapsulation Type
takes its default value
Null.
l When Port Mode is
Layer 2,
Encapsulation Type
takes its default value
ATM.
A.5.1.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of PDH ports.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the name of a
service port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
352
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Frame Format
Unframe
CRC-4 Multiframe
l Specifies the frame
format.
Double Frame
l If a CES service uses
the emulation mode of
CESoPSN, this
parameter can assume
the value CRC-4
Multiframe or
Double Frame. The
value CRC-4
Multiframe is
recommended.
CRC-4 Multiframe
l If a CES service uses
the emulation mode of
SAToP, this parameter
needs to assume the
value Unframe.
l The value of Frame
Format must be the
same at the local and
opposite ends.
Line Encoding Format
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Displays the line encoding
format. The parameter
value is always HDB3.
353
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Loopback Mode
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
l Specifies the loopback
status for a port.
Inloop
l Non-Loopback
indicates that
loopbacks are
cancelled or not
performed.
Outloop
l Inloop indicates that
the signals that need to
be transmitted to the
opposite end are
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that
the received signals are
looped back.
l This function is used
for fault locating for
the PDH ports. This
function affects
services over related
ports. Therefore,
exercise precaution
before starting this
function.
l Generally, this
parameter is set to
Non-Loopback.
Impedance
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Displays the port
impedance.
354
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Frame Mode
30(ATM)
-
l 30 timeslots: In an E1
frame format,
timeslots 1 to 15 and 17
to 31 are used to
transmit service data,
and timeslot 16 is used
to transmit signaling.
31(ATM,CES)
l 31 timeslots: In an E1
frame format,
timeslots 1 to 31 are
used to transmit
service data.
l This parameter is
unavailable if Frame
Format is Unframe.
l The port frame modes
need to be the same at
the local and opposite
ends.
Clock Mode
Master Mode
Master Mode
Slave Mode
System Clock Mode
l Master Mode: The
system clock is used as
the output clock of
services.
l Slave Mode: The CES
ACR clock is used as
the output clock of
services. The port
inputting E1 clocks on
Slave is set to Slave
Mode.
l System Clock Mode:
The upstream E1 line
clock of the opposite
equipment is used as
the output clock of
services. The port
inputting E1 clocks on
Master is set to System
Clock Mode
Composite Port
Loopback
-
-
For the OptiX RTN 950,
this parameter cannot be
configured.
Service Load Indication
-
-
For the OptiX RTN 950,
this parameter cannot be
configured.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
355
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Equalize Input Signal
-
-
For the OptiX RTN 950,
this parameter cannot be
configured.
Equalize Outpput Signal
-
-
For the OptiX RTN 950,
this parameter cannot be
configured.
A.5.2 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards
This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet ports on the packet plane.
A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of an Ethernet interface.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the General Attributes tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the port name.
Name
-
-
Specifies the port name.
Enable Port
Enabled
Enabled
l Specifies whether an
Ethernet port is
enabled. An Ethernet
port can receive,
process, and forward
Ethernet services only
if this parameter is set
to Enabled.
Disabled
l Set this parameter
according to the
planning information.
NOTE
Port 10 of the EFP8 board
does not support this
parameter.
Port 8 of the EMS6 board
does not support this
parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
356
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Mode
Layer 2
Layer 2
l Port Mode specifies
the mode of the
Ethernet port.
Layer 3
Layer Mix
l If Port Mode is Layer
2, Encapsulation
Type can be set to
Null, 802.1Q, or
QinQ.
l If Port Mode is Layer
3, Encapsulation
Type can be set to
802.1Q only and the
port can carry MPLS
tunnels.
NOTE
Port 10 of the EFP8 board
does not support the value
Layer 3 and Layer Mix.
Port 8 of the EMS6 board
does not support the value
Layer 3 and Layer Mix.
Encapsulation Type
Null
-
802.1Q
QinQ
l Encapsulation Type
specifies the method of
the port to process the
received packets.
l If you set
Encapsulation Type
to Null, the port
transparently
transmits the received
packets.
l If you set
Encapsulation Type
to 802.1Q, the port
identifies the packets
that comply with the
IEEE 802.1q standard.
l If you set
Encapsulation Type
to QinQ, the port
identifies the packets
that comply with the
IEEE 802.1ad QinQ
standard.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
357
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation
Auto-Negotiation
l The Ethernet ports of
different types support
different Working
Mode.
10M Half-Duplex
10M Full-Duplex
100M Half-Duplex
100M Full-Duplex
1000M Full-Duplex
l When the equipment
on the opposite side
works in autonegotiation mode, set
the Working Mode of
the equipment on the
local side to AutoNegotiation.
l When the equipment
on the opposite side
works in full-duplex
mode, set the
Working Mode of the
equipment on the local
side to 10M FullDuplex, 100M FullDuplex, or 1000M
Full-Duplex
depending on the port
rate of the equipment
on the opposite side.
l When the equipment
on the opposite side
works in half-duplex
mode, set the
Working Mode of the
equipment on the local
side to 10M HalfDuplex, 100M HalfDuplex, or AutoNegotiation
depending on the port
rate of the equipment
on the opposite side.
l FE ports support 10M
full-duplex, 10M halfduplex, 100M fullduplex, 100M halfduplex, and autonegotiation.
l GE electrical ports
support 10M fullduplex, 10M halfduplex, 100M fullduplex, 100M half-
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
358
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Parameter
Value Range
A Parameters Description
Default Value
Description
duplex, 1000M fullduplex, and autonegotiation.
l GE optical ports
support 1000M fullduplex and autonegotiation.
NOTE
Port 10 of the EFP8 board
does not support this
parameter.
Port 8 of the EMS6 board
does not support this
parameter.
Max Frame Length
(byte)
1518 to 9600
1522
The value of Max Frame
Length(byte) should be
greater than the length of
any frame to be
transported.
Auto-Negotiation
Ability
10M Half-Duplex
FE: 100M Full-Duplex
10M Full-Duplex
GE: 1000M Full-Duplex
l Auto-Negotiation
Ability specifies the
auto-negotiation
capability of the
Ethernet port.
100M Half-Duplex
100M Full-Duplex
1000M Full-Duplex
l For GE optical ports,
Auto-Negotiation
Ability can be set to
1000M Full-Duplex
only.
l Auto-Negotiation
Ability is valid only
when Working Mode
is set to AutoNegotiation.
Logical Port Attribute
Optical Port
-
Electrical Port
l This parameter
specifies the attribute
of the logical port.
l The SFP on the
EM6F,EM6FA board
supports the optical
port and electrical
port.
Physical Port Attribute
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
This parameter indicates
the attribute of the
physical port.
359
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Traffic Monitoring
Status
Enabled
Disabled
This parameters indicates
the enabled status of the
traffic monitoring
function over an Ethernet
port.
Traffic Monitoring
Period (min)
1 to 30
15
This parameter indicates
the traffic monitoring
period.
Disabled
A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control
This topic describes the parameters that are related to flow control.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Flow Control tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates
the port name.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
360
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode
Disabled
Disabled
l Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode is
valid only when
Working Mode is not
set to AutoNegotiation.
Enable Symmetric Flow
Control
l Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode
of the equipment on
the local side must be
consistent with the
non-autonegotiation
flow control mode of
the equipment on the
opposite side
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports only two nonauto-negotiation flow
control modes,
namely, Disabled
mode and Enable
Symmetric Flow
Control mode.
NOTE
Port 10 of the EFP8 board
does not support this
parameter.
Port 8 of the EMS6 board
does not support this
parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
361
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Auto-Negotiation Flow
Control Mode
Disabled
Disabled
l Auto-Negotiation
Flow Control Mode is
valid only when
Working Mode is set
to Auto-Negotiation.
Enable Symmetric Flow
Control
l Auto-Negotiation
Flow Control Mode
of the equipment on
the local side must be
consistent with the
auto-negotiation flow
control mode of the
equipment on the
opposite side
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports only two
auto-negotiation flow
control modes,
namely, Disabled
mode and Enable
Symmetric Flow
Control mode.
NOTE
Port 10 of the EFP8 board
does not support this
parameter.
Port 8 of the EMS6 board
does not support this
parameter.
A.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
NOTE
The parameter Layer 2 Attributes is meaningful only when Port Mode is set to Layer 2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
362
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates
the port name.
QinQ Type Domain
-
-
l When Encapsulation
Type in the General
Attributes tab page is
set to QinQ, you need
to set QinQ Type
Domain. The default
value is 88A8.
l When Encapsulation
Type in the General
Attributes tab page is
set to Null or 802.1Q,
you cannot set QinQ
Type Domain. In this
case, QinQ Type
Domain is displayed
as FFFF and cannot be
changed.
l QinQ Type Domain
should be set to the
same value for all the
ports on the EM6T/
EM6TA/EM6F/
EM6FA board.
TAG
Tag Aware
Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
l If all the accessed
services are frames
with the VLAN tag
(tagged frames), set
TAG to Tag Aware.
l If all the accessed
services are frames
without the VLAN tag
(untagged frames), set
TAG to Access.
l If the accessed
services contain
tagged frames and
untagged frames, set
TAG to Hybrid.
NOTE
TAG specifies the TAG
flag of a port. For details
about the TAG flags and
associated frameprocessing methods, see
Table A-2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
363
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Default VLAN ID
1 to 4094
1
l Default VLAN ID is
valid only when TAG
is set to Access or
Hybrid.
l Default VLAN ID is
set according to the
actual situations.
NOTE
For details about the
functions of Default VLAN
ID, see Table A-2.
VLAN Priority
0 to 7
l VLAN Priority is
valid only when TAG
is set to Access or
Hybrid.
0
l When the VLAN
priority is required to
divide streams or to be
used for other
purposes, VLAN
Priority is set
according to the
planning information.
In normal cases, it is
recommended that you
use the default value.
NOTE
For details about the
functions of VLAN
Priority, see Table A-2.
Table A-2 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames
Port
Ingress UNI
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
The port receives the
frame.
The port discards
the frame.
The port receives
the frame.
Untagged frame
The port discards the
frame.
The ports add the
VLAN tag, to which
Default VLAN ID
and VLAN
Priority
correspond, to the
frame and receive
the frame.
The ports add the
VLAN tag, to which
Default VLAN ID
and VLAN
Priority
correspond, to the
frame and receive
the frame.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
364
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Port
Egress UNI
A Parameters Description
Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
The port transmits
the frame.
The port strips the
VLAN tag from the
frame and then
transmits the frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
Default VLAN
ID, the port
strips the VLAN
tag from the
frame and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
not Default
VLAN ID, the
port directly
transmits the
frame.
A.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 3 attributes of Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Layer 3 Attributes tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
NOTE
Layer 3 Attributes is valid only if Port Mode is set to Layer 3.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the port name.
Enable Tunnel
Disabled
Enabled
l If Enable Tunnel is set
Enabled, a port
identifies and
processes MPLS
labels.
Enabled
l Enable Tunnel is
available if you set
Port Mode to Layer 3
in the General
Attributes tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
365
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Specify IP Address
Manually
Unspecified
l Specifies the method of
setting the IP address
of a port.
Unspecified
l The value
Unspecified indicates
that the IP addresses do
not need to be
configured.
l The value Manually
indicates that the IP
address of the port can
be manually
configured.
-
IP Address
0.0.0.0
l Specifies the IP
address of a port.
l This parameter is
available when Specify
IP Address is
Manually.
l The IP addresses of
different ports on the
NE cannot be in the
same network
segment, but the IP
addresses of the ports
at both ends of the
MPLS tunnel must be
in the same network
segment.
-
IP Mask
255.255.255.252
l Specifies the subnet
mask of a port.
l This parameter is
available when Specify
IP Address is
Manually.
A.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
366
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates
the port name.
Port Physical
Parameters
-
-
This parameter indicates
the physical parameters of
the port.
MAC Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
l This parameter
specifies the loopback
state at the MAC layer.
When this parameter is
set to Inloop, the
Ethernet signals
transmitted to the
opposite end are
looped back.
Inloop
l In normal cases, it is
recommended that you
use the default value.
PHY Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
Inloop
l This parameter
specifies the loopback
state at the PHY layer.
When this parameter is
set to Inloop, the
Ethernet signals
transmitted to the
opposite end are
looped back.
l In normal cases, it is
recommended that you
use the default value.
MAC Address
-
-
This parameter indicates
the MAC address of the
port.
Transmitting Rate(kbit/
s)
-
-
This parameter indicates
the rate at which the data
packets are transmitted.
Receiving Rate(kbit/s)
-
-
This parameter indicates
the rate at which the data
packets are received.
Loopback Check
Enabled
Disabled
This parameter specifies
whether to enable loop
detection, which is used to
check whether a loop
exists on the port.
Disabled
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
367
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Loopback Port Block
Enabled
Disabled
This parameter indicates
whether to enable the loop
port shutdown function.
Disabled
Egress PIR Bandwidth
(Kbit/s)
-
-
This parameter indicates
the egress PIR bandwidth.
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter
specifies whether to
limit the traffic rate of
the broadcast packets
according to the
proportion of the
broadcast packets in
the total packets.
When the equipment at
the opposite end may
encounter a broadcast
storm, this parameter
is set to Enabled.
Enabled
l If Ethernet services are
E-LAN services, the
recommended value is
Enabled.
l This parameter takes
effect only for E-LAN
services in the ingress
direction.
Broadcast Packet
Suppression Threshold
0 to 100
30
When the proportion of
the broadcast packets in
the total packets exceeds
the value of this
parameter, the received
broadcast packets are
discarded. The value of
this parameter should be
more than the proportion
of the broadcast packets in
the total packets before
the broadcast storm
occurs. In normal cases,
this parameter is set to
default value.
Network Cable Mode
-
-
This parameter displays
the working mode of the
network cable connected
to an Ethernet port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
368
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.5.3 Serial Port Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to serial ports.
A.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Basic Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of series ports.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Interface Management > Serial Port from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the General Attributes tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the name of the
port where a serial service
is configured.
Name
-
-
Specifies or displays the
customized port name.
Level
-
-
l Specifies or displays
the serial port level.
l 64K Timeslot: 64 kbit/
s timeslots of E1
signals can be bound.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports 64K Timeslot
only.
Used Port
-
-
Displays the physical port
that carries a serial
service.
64K Timeslot
-
-
Displays the timeslots that
a serial service occupies.
The timeslots can be
consecutive or not.
Port Mode
Layer 2
Layer 3
l Displays or specifies
the port mode.
Layer 3
l A port supports ATM
encapsulation if its
Port Mode is Layer
2. A port does not
support encapsulation
if its Port Mode is
Layer 3.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
369
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Encapsulation Type
-
-
l Displays and specifies
the encapsulation type
of a PW.
l When Port Mode is
Layer 2, this
parameter displays
ATM; when Port
Mode is Layer 3, this
parameter displays
Null.
A.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Creation of Serial Ports
This topic describes parameters that are used for creating serial ports.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the New tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Number(e.g:1,3-6)
-
-
Specifies the port where
the serial service is
configured.
Name
-
-
Specifies the customized
port name.
Level
64K Timeslot
64K Timeslot
l Specifies the serial
port level.
l When this parameter is
set to 64K Timeslot ,
E1 timeslots can be
bound.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports only the parameter
value 64K Timeslot .
Used Board
-
-
Specifies the board where
a serial port is located.
Used Port
-
-
Displays the board where
a serial port is located.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
370
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
High Channel
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this parameter.
Low Channel(e.g:1,3-6)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this parameter.
64K Timeslot(e.g:1,3-6)
-
-
Specifies the 64 kbit/s
timeslots to be bound with
the serial port. The
timeslots can be
consecutive or not.
A.5.4 Microwave Interface Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF_ETH interfaces.
A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of microwave
interfaces.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Basic Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding
IF port.
Name
-
-
This parameter indicates or specifies the
customized port name.
Port Mode
Layer 2
Layer 2
l If Port Mode is Layer 2, Encapsulation
Type can be set to Null, 802.1Q, or
QinQ.
Layer 3
Layer Mix
l If Port Mode is Layer 3, Encapsulation
Type can be set to 802.1Q only and the
port can carry tunnels.
l If Port Mode is Layer Mix,
Encapsulation Type can be set to only
802.1Q or QinQ and the port can carry
both tunnels and Native Ethernet
services.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
371
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Encapsulation
Type
Null
802.1Q
l Encapsulation Type specifies the
method of the port to process the
received packets.
802.1Q
QinQ
l If Encapsulation Type is set to Null, the
port transparently transmits the received
packets.
l If Encapsulation Type is set to
802.1Q, the port identifies the packets
that comply with the IEEE 802.1Q
standard.
l If Encapsulation Type is set to QinQ,
the port identifies the packets that
comply with the IEEE 802.1ad QinQ
standard.
A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes of microwave
interfaces.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.
Parameters for Layer 2 Attributes
NOTE
The parameter Layer 2 Attributes is meaningful only when Port Mode is set to Layer 2.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding
IF port.
QinQ Type
Domain
-
-
l When Encapsulation Type in the
General Attributes tab page is set to
QinQ, you need to set QinQ Type
Domain. The default value is 88A8.
l When Encapsulation Type in the
General Attributes tab page is set to
Null or 802.1Q, you cannot set QinQ
Type Domain. In this case, QinQ Type
Domain is displayed as FFFF and
cannot be changed.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
372
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tag
Tag Aware
Tag Aware
l If all the accessed services are frames
that contain the VLAN tag (tagged
frames), set Tag to "Tag Aware".
Access
Hybrid
l If all the accessed services are frames
that do not contain the VLAN tag
(untagged frames), set Tag to "Access".
l If the accessed services contain tagged
frames and untagged frames, set Tag to
"Hybrid".
NOTE
Tag specifies the TAG flag of a port. For details
about the TAG flags and associated frameprocessing methods, see Table A-3.
Default VLAN ID
1 to 4094
1
l Default VLAN ID is valid only when
TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.
l Default VLAN ID needs to be set
according to the actual situations.
NOTE
For details about the functions of Default VLAN
ID, see Table A-3.
VLAN Priority
0
0
1
l VLAN Priority is valid only when
TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.
l When the VLAN priority is required to
divide streams or to be used for other
purposes, VLAN Priority needs to be set
according to the planning information. In
normal cases, it is recommended that you
use the default value.
2
3
4
5
6
NOTE
For details about the functions of VLAN
Priority, see Table A-3.
7
Table A-3 Data frame processing
Status
Ingress Port
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
The port receives the
frame.
The port discards
the frame.
The port receives
the frame.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
373
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Status
Egress Port
A Parameters Description
Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Untagged frame
The port discards the
frame.
The port receives
the frame after the
VLAN tag that
corresponds to
"Default VLAN ID"
and "VLAN
Priority" is added to
the frame.
The port receives
the frame after the
VLAN tag that
corresponds to
"Default VLAN ID"
and "VLAN
Priority" is added to
the frame.
Tagged frame
The port transmits
the frame.
The port strips the
VLAN tag from the
frame and then
transmits the frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
"Default VLAN
ID", the port
strips the VLAN
tag from the
frame and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
not "Default
VLAN ID", the
port directly
transmits the
frame.
A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 3 attributes of an IF_ETH port.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Layer 3 Attributes tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the
corresponding IF port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
374
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable Tunnel
Disabled
Disabled
l A port identifies and
processes MPLS
labels, if its Enable
Tunnel is set
Enabled.
Enabled
l Enable Tunnel is
available if you set
Port Mode to Layer
3 in the General
Attributes tab.
Specify IP Address
Manually
Unspecified
Unspecified
l Specifies the method
of setting the IP
address of a port.
l The value
Unspecified indicates
that the IP addresses do
not need to be
configured for a port.
l The value Manually
indicates that the IP
address of a port can be
manually configured.
IP Address
-
0.0.0.0
l Specifies the IP
address for a port.
l This parameter is
available when
Specify IP Address is
Manually.
l The IP addresses of
different ports on the
NE cannot be in the
same network
segment, but the IP
addresses of the ports
at both ends of the
MPLS tunnel must be
in the same network
segment.
IP Mask
-
255.255.255.252
l Specifies the subnet
mask of a port.
l This parameter is
available when
Specify IP Address is
Manually.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
375
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of microwave
interfaces.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Parameters for Advanced Attributes
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding
IF port.
Radio Link ID
1 to 4094
1
l This parameter specifies the ID of the
radio link. As the identifier of a radio
link, this parameter is used to prevent
incorrect connections of radio links
between sites.
l The ID of each radio link of an NE must
be unique, and the link IDs at both ends
of a radio link must be the same.
Received Radio
Link ID
-
-
l This parameter indicates the received ID
of the radio link.
l If the value of Received Radio Link
ID does not match with the preset value
of Radio Link ID at the local end, the
local end inserts the AIS signal to the
downstream direction of the service. At
the same time, the local end reports an
alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link
IDs do not match.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
376
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IF Port Loopback
-
-
l This parameter indicates the loopback
status of the IF interface.
l Non-Loopback indicates that the
loopback is cancelled or not performed.
l Inloop indicates that the IF signals
transmitted to the opposite end are
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received IF
signals are looped back.
l Generally, this parameter is used to
locate the faults that occur at each IF
interface. The IF loopback is used for
diagnosis. If this function is enabled, the
services at the related ports are affected.
In normal cases, this parameter is set to
Non-Loopback.
Composite Port
Loopback
-
-
l This parameter indicates the loopback
status on the composite interface.
l Non-Loopback indicates that the
loopback is cancelled or not performed.
l Inloop indicates that the composite
signals transmitted to the opposite end
are looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received
composite signals are looped back.
l In normal cases, this parameter is set to
Non-Loopback.
Error Frame
Discard Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to discard the Ethernet frame
when a CRC error occurs in an Ethernet
frame.
l If the Ethernet service transmitted on the
IF_ETH port is a voice service or a video
service, you can set this parameter to
Disabled.
MAC Address
-
-
This parameter indicates the MAC address
of the port.
Transmitting Rate
(Kbit/s)
-
-
This parameter indicates the transmit rate of
the local port.
Receiving Rate
(Kbit/s)
-
-
This parameter indicates the receive rate of
the local port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
377
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MAC Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
l This parameter specifies the loopback
state at the MAC layer. When this
parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet
signals transmitted to the opposite end
are looped back.
Inloop
l In normal cases, it is recommended that
you use the default value.
NOTE
The ISU2 and ISX2 boards can not be set to
Inloop.
Speed
Transmission at
L2
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
l If Speed Transmission at L2 is set to
Enabled, the Layer-2 Ethernet packets
transmitted at microwave ports will be
compressed to improve transmission
efficiency.
l If the Layer 2 header compression
function can be enabled for the ISU2 or
ISX2 board, it is recommended that you
set Speed Transmission at L2 to
Enabled.
l The settings of Speed Transmission at
L2 must be the same at both ends of a
radio link.
NOTE
The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this
parameter.
Speed
Transmission at
L3
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
l If Speed Transmission at L3 is set to
Enabled, the IP packets transmitted at
microwave ports will be compressed to
improve transmission efficiency.
l If the Layer 3 header compression
function can be enabled for the ISU2 or
ISX2 board, it is recommended that you
set Speed Transmission at L3 to
Enabled.
l The settings of Speed Transmission at
L3 must be the same at both ends of a
radio link.
NOTE
l The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this
parameter.
l When Speed Transmission at L3 is set to
Enabled, Encapsulation Type of the ISU2
and ISX2 boards cannot be set to Null.
Loopback Check
Disabled
Enabled
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Disabled
This parameter specifies whether to enable
loop detection, which is used to check
whether a loop exists on the port.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
378
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Loopback Port
Shutdown
Disabled
Disabled
This parameter indicates whether to enable
the automatic shut-down of looped ports.
Enabling
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter specifies whether to limit
the traffic rate of the broadcast packets
according to the proportion of the
broadcast packets in the total packets.
When the equipment at the opposite end
may encounter a broadcast storm, this
parameter is set to Enabled.
Enabled
Enabled
l If Ethernet services are E-LAN services,
the recommended value is Enabled.
l This parameter takes effect only for ELAN services in the ingress direction.
0 to 100
Enabling
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Threshold
30
When the proportion of the broadcast
packets in the total packets exceeds the value
of this parameter, the received broadcast
packets are discarded. The value of this
parameter should be more than the
proportion of the broadcast packets in the
total packets before the broadcast storm
occurs. In normal cases, this parameter is set
to default value.
A.5.5 IF Board Parameters
This topic describes parameters that are related to IF boards.
A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF attributes.
Navigation Path
l
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
l
Click the IF Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding
IF interface.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
379
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Radio Link ID
1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
work mode of the radio link in "work
mode number, service capacity, channel
spacing, modulation mode" format.
2,4E1,3.5MHz,
16QAM
3,8E1,14MHz,QPS
K
l This parameter is set according to the
network plan. The work modes of the IF
boards at the two ends of a radio link
must be the same.
4,8E1,7MHz,
16QAM
5,16E1,28MHz,QP
SK
NOTE
The IF1 board supports this parameter.
6,16E1,14MHz,
16QAM
7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM
10,22E1,14MHz,
32QAM
11,26E1,14MHz,
64QAM
12,32E1,14MHz,
128QAM
13,35E1,28MHz,
16QAM
14,44E1,28MHz,
32QAM
15,53E1,28MHz,
64QAM
IF Service Type
Hybrid(Native E1
+ETH)
Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH)
SDH
Hybrid(Native E1
+ETH)
l Displays or specifies the type of services
carried by the IF board.
l If the Integrated IP radio transmits
Native E1 services, set this parameter to
Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
l If the Integrated IP radio transmits
Native STM-1 services, set this
parameter to Hybrid(Native STM-1
+ETH).
l If the SDH radio transmits SDH services,
set this parameter to SDH.
NOTE
The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this
parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
380
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Radio Link ID
1 to 4094
1
l Link ID indicates or specifies the ID of
a radio link. As the identifier of a radio
link, this parameter is used to prevent
incorrect connections of radio links
between sites.
l If the value of Received Radio Link
ID does not match the preset value of
Link ID at the local end, the local end
inserts the AIS signal to the downstream
direction of the service. At the same
time, the local end reports MW_LIM
alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link
IDs do not match.
l Link ID is set according to the network
plan. Each radio link of an NE should
have a unique link ID, and the link IDs
at both ends of a radio link should be the
same.
Received Radio
Link ID
-
-
l This parameter indicates the received ID
of the radio link.
l If the value of Received Radio Link
ID does not match the preset value of
Radio Link ID at the local end, the local
end inserts the AIS signal to the
downstream direction of the service. At
the same time, the local end reports an
alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link
IDs do not match.
l When the radio link becomes faulty, this
parameter is displayed as an invalid
value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
381
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IF Port Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
loopback status of the IF interface.
Inloop
l Non-Loopback indicates that the
loopback is cancelled or not performed.
Outloop
l Inloop indicates that the IF signals
transmitted to the opposite end are
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received IF
signals are looped back.
l Generally, IF Port Loopback is used to
locate the faults that occur at each IF
interface. The IF loopback is used for
diagnosis. If this function is enabled, the
services at the related ports are affected.
In normal cases, this parameter is set to
Non-Loopback.
2M Wayside
Enable Statusa
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether the radio link transmits the
wayside E1 service.
l The wayside E1 service can be supported
by the IF1 board in the
7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM,
8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or 9,E3,14MHz,
16QAM mode.
2M Wayside Input
Boarda
-
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
slot in which the 2M wayside service is
accessed.
l This parameter can be set only when 2M
Wayside Enable Status is set to
Enabled.
l The wayside E1 service can be supported
by the IF1 board in the
7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM,
8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or 9,E3,14MHz,
16QAM mode.
350 MHz
Consecutive Wave
Status
Stop
Start
Stop
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
status of transmitting the 350 MHz
carrier signals at the IF interface.
l 350 MHz Consecutive Wave Status
can be set to Start in the commissioning
process only. In normal cases, this
parameter is set to Stop. Otherwise, the
services are interrupted.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
382
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
XPIC Enabledb
Enabled
Enabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether the XPIC function of the XPIC
IF board is enabled.
Disabled
l If the XPIC IF board does not perform
the XPIC function, XPIC Enabled
should be set to Disabled.
Enable IEEE-1588
Timeslotc
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslot needs to be
set consistently between two ends of a radio
link.
NOTE
l a. The IFU2 and IFX2 boards do not support way-side services.
l b. The IFU2, ISU2, and IF1 boards do not support the XPIC function.
l c. The IF1 board does not support the IEEE-1588 timeslot function.
Parameters for Hybrid/AM Configuration
NOTE
The IF1 board does not support Hybrid/AM configuration.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding
IF port.
IF Channel
Bandwidth
3.5M
-
IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the
channel spacing of the corresponding radio
link. This parameter is set according to the
network plan.
7M
14M
28M
40M
56M
NOTE
l This parameter is not applicable to the IF1
board.
l The IFU2 board does not support the value
40M.
l The IFX2 board does not support the values
40M.
l IF Channel Bandwidth can be set to 3.5M
only for the ISU2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
383
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
AM Enable Status
Disabled
Disabled
l When AM Enable Status is set to
Disabled, the radio link uses only the
specified modulation scheme. In this
case, you need to select Manually
Specified Modulation Mode.
Enabled
l When AM Enable Status is set to
Enabled, the radio link uses the
corresponding modulation scheme
according to the channel conditions.
l Hence, the Integrated IP radio can ensure
the reliable transmission of the E1
services and provide bandwidth
adaptively for the Ethernet services
when the AM function is enabled.
l The ISX2/ISU2 does not support the AM
function when IF Service Type is
SDH.
l When IF Channel Bandwidth is 3.5M
for the ISU2 board, the AM function is
unavailable and AM Enable Status
must be set to Disabled.
Modulation Mode
of the Guarantee
AM Capacity
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
QPSK
l This parameter is valid only when AM
Enable Status is set to Enabled.
l Modulation Mode of the Guarantee
AM Capacity specifies the lowest-order
modulation scheme that the AM function
supports. This parameter is set according
to the network plan. Generally, the value
of this parameter is determined by the
service transmission bandwidth that the
Hybrid radio must ensure and the
availability of the radio link that
corresponds to this modulation scheme.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
384
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Modulation Mode
of the Full AM
Capacity
QPSK
QPSK
l This parameter is valid only when AM
Enable Status is set to Enabled.
16QAM
l Modulation Mode of the Full AM
Capacity specifies the highest-order
modulation scheme that the AM function
supports. This parameter is set according
to the network plan. Generally, the value
of this parameter is determined by the
bandwidth of the services that need to be
transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the
availability of the radio link that
corresponds to this modulation scheme.
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM
Capacity must be higher than Modulation
Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.
Manually
Specified
Modulation Mode
QPSK
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
l This parameter specifies the modulation
scheme that the radio link uses for signal
transmission.
l This parameter is valid only when AM
Enable Status is set to Disabled.
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
STM-1 Capacity
-
-
l Specifies the STM-1 capacity of the IF
board.
l This parameter is available only when IF
Service Type is set to Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH) and SDH.
l If IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH), this parameter can be set
to 0 or 1.
l If IF Service Type is SDH, this
parameter can be set to 1 or 2.
NOTE
The IFU2 and IFX2 boards do not support this
parameter.
Enable E1 Priority
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
l This parameter specifies whether to
enable the E1 priority function.
l This parameter is valid only when AM
Enable Status is set to Enabled.
l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this
parameter is available when IF Service
Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
385
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Guarantee E1
Capacity
-
-
l If AM Enable Status is set to Enabled,
this parameter needs to be set according
to IF Channel Bandwidth, Modulation
Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity,
and the actually transmitted services.
l If AM Enable Status is set to
Disabled, this parameter needs to be set
according to IF Channel Bandwidth,
Manually Specified Modulation
Mode, and the actually transmitted
services.
l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this
parameter is available when IF Service
Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
Guarantee E1
Capacity Range
-
-
Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF
board in guarantee capacity modulation
mode.
Data Service
Bandwidth(Mbit/
s)
-
-
Displays the data service bandwidth of the
IF board.
Full E1 Capacity
-
-
l This parameter specifies the number of
transmitted E1 services in Modulation
Mode of the Full AM Capacity.
l This parameter is valid if Enable E1
Priority is set to Enabled.
l E1 service bandwidth in full capacity
mode ≤ Service bandwidth in full
capacity mode - Service bandwidth in
guarantee capacity mode + E1 service
bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode.
In addition, the number of E1 services in
full capacity modulation mode should be
smaller than or equal to the maximum
number of E1 services in full capacity
modulation mode.
l The Full E1 Capacity must be set to the
same value at both ends of a radio link.
l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this
parameter is available when IF Service
Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
Full E1 Capacity
-
-
Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF
board in full capacity modulation mode.
Transmit-End
Modulation Mode
-
-
Displays the modulation mode at the
transmit mode.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
386
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Receive-End
Modulation Mode
-
-
Displays the modulation mode at the receive
mode.
Guarantee AM
Service Capacity
(Mbit/s)
-
-
Displays the guarantee AM service capacity.
Full AM Service
Capacity(Mbit/s)
-
-
Displays the full AM service capacity.
Transmitted AM
Service Capacity
(Mbit/s)
-
-
Displays the transmitted AM service
capacity.
Received AM
Service Capacity
(Mbit/s)
-
-
Displays the received AM service capacity.
E1 Capacity For
High Priority
-
-
Displays the number of configured highpriority E1s.
A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.
Navigation Path
l
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
l
Click the ATPC Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding
IF interface.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
387
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ATPC Enable
Status
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter specifies whether the
ATPC function is enabled.
Enabled
l When this parameter is set to Enabled
and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB
higher or lower than the central value
between the ATPC upper threshold and
the ATPC lower threshold at the receive
end, the receiver notifies the transmitter
to decrease or increase the transmit
power until the RSL is within the range
that is 2 dB higher or lower than the
central value between the ATPC upper
threshold and the ATPC lower threshold.
l The settings of the ATPC attributes must
be consistent at both ends of a radio link.
l In the case of areas where fast fading
severely affects the radio transmission, it
is recommended that you set ATPC
Enable Status to Disabled.
l During the commissioning process, set
this parameter to Disabled to ensure that
the transmit power is not changed. After
the commissioning, re-set the ATPC
attributes.
ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm)
-
-45.0
ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm)
-
-70.0
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
l Set the central value between the ATPC
upper threshold and the ATPC lower
threshold to a value for the expected
receive power.
l It is recommended that you set ATPC
Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of
the planned central value between the
ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC
Lower Threshold(dBm) to the
difference between the planned central
value between the ATPC upper threshold
and the ATPC lower threshold and 10
dB.
l You can set the ATPC upper threshold
only when ATPC Automatic
Threshold(dBm) is set to Disabled.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
388
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Status
Enabled
Disabled
l This parameter specifies whether the
ATPC automatic threshold function is
enabled.
Disabled
l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable
Status is set to Enabled, the equipment
automatically uses the preset ATPC
upper and lower thresholds according to
the work mode of the radio link.
l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable
Status is set to Disabled, you need to
manually set ATPC Upper Automatic
Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower
Automatic Threshold(dBm).
ATPC Upper
Automatic
Threshold(dBm)
-
-
ATPC Lower
Automatic
Threshold(dBm)
-
-
l This parameter indicates that the
equipment automatically uses the preset
ATPC upper and lower thresholds.
l This parameter is valid only when ATPC
Automatic Threshold Enable Status is
set to Enabled.
A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes
This section describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.
Navigation Path
l
In the NE Explorer, select the IF board, and then choose Configuration > IF Interface
from the Function Tree.
l
Click the AM Advanced Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding
IF interface.
Modulation Mode
-
-
Displays the modulation schemes.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
389
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
E1 Capacity
-
-
l You can specify the number of E1s that
can be transmitted in intermediate
modulation scheme, by setting the
advanced attributes correspondingly.
l Generally, it is recommended that this
parameter takes the default value. To
ensure that a specific number of E1s can
be transmitted in intermediate
modulation scheme, adjust the E1
capacity in each modulation scheme
according to the network planning
information.
l If the E1 priority function is enabled, the
maximum number of allowed E1
services in the current mode = Min
{[Bandwidth of the air interface in the
current mode - (Bandwidth for the
assured capacity - Assured E1 number x
2Mbps)]/2Mbps, E1 number in the
highest-gain modulation mode}.
-
Data Service
Bandwidth(Mbit/
s)
-
Displays the data service bandwidth.
A.5.5.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records
This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATPC adjustment records.
Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > ATPC Adjustment Records from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the port for the
ATPC adjustment.
Event NO.
-
-
This parameter indicates the number of the
ATPC adjustment event.
Adjustment Time
-
-
This parameter indicates the time of the
ATPC adjustment.
Adjustment
Direction
-
-
This parameter indicates the direction of the
adjustment at the port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
390
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Switchover
-
-
This parameter indicates the switching
operation at the port.
Transmitted
Power(dBm)
-
-
This parameter indicates the transmitted
power of the port to be switched.
Received Power
(dBm)
-
-
This parameter indicates the received power
of the port to be switched.
A.5.5.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS)
test.
Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the port for the
PRBS test.
Direction
Cross
Cross
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
direction of the PRBS test.
Tributary
l In the tributary direction, the PRBS test
is performed to check the connectivity of
the cable from the tributary board to the
DDF.
l In the cross-connect direction, the PRBS
test is performed to check the processing
of the service from the tributary board to
the NE at the remote end.
Duration
1 to 255
1
This parameter indicates or specifies the
duration of the PRBS test.
Measured Time
s
s
This parameter indicates or specifies the
time unit used for the PRBS test.
10min
h
Start Time
-
-
This parameter indicates the start time of the
PRBS test.
Progress
-
-
This parameter indicates the progress
percentage of the PRBS test.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
391
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Total PRBS
-
-
This parameter indicates the number of bit
errors that occur in the PRBS test.
Accumulating
Mode
Selected
Deselected
This parameter specifies whether to display
the values in accumulative mode. If
Accumulating Mode is selected, it
indicates that the values are displayed in
accumulative mode.
Deselected
A.5.6 ODU Parameters
This topic describes parameters that are related to ODUs.
A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute
This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio frequency attributes of an ODU.
Navigation Path
l
Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU
Interface from the Function Tree.
l
Click the Radio Frequency Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding
ODU.
Transmit
Frequency(MHz)
-
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
transmit frequency of the ODU, namely,
the central frequency of the channel.
l The value of Transmit Frequency
(MHz) must not be less than the sum of
the minimum transmit frequency
supported by the ODU and a half of the
channel spacing, and must not be more
than the difference between the
maximum transmit frequency supported
by the ODU and a half of the channel
spacing.
l The difference between the transmit
frequencies at both ends of a radio link
should be one T/R spacing.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
392
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
T/R Spacing(MHz)
-
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
spacing between the transmit frequency
and receive frequency of the ODU to
prevent mutual interference of the
transmitter and receiver.
l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the
transmit frequency is one T/R spacing
higher than the receive frequency. If the
ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit
frequency is one T/R spacing lower than
the receive frequency.
l If the ODU supports only one T/R
spacing, T/R Spacing(MHz) is set to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing supported
by the ODU is used.
l A valid T/R spacing value is determined
by the ODU itself, and T/R Spacing
(MHz) should be set according to the
technical specifications of the ODU.
l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be
set to the same value at both ends of a
radio link.
Actual Transmit
Frequency(MHz)
-
-
This parameter indicates the actual transmit
frequency of the ODU.
Actual Receive
Frequency(MHz)
-
-
This parameter indicates the actual receive
frequency of the ODU.
Actual T/R
Spacing(MHz)
-
-
This parameter indicates the actual T/R
spacing of the ODU.
The range of
frequency point
(MHz)
-
-
This parameter indicates the working range
of the frequency of the ODU.
A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the power attributes of the
ODU.
Navigation Path
l
Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU
Interface from the Function Tree.
l
Click the Power Attributes tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
393
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding
ODU.
Maximum
Transmit Power
(dBm)
-
-
l Maximum Transmit Power(dBm) is
set according to the network plan. This
parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power rang of the
ODU in the guaranteed capacity
modulation module.
l This parameter is set to limit the
maximum transmit power of the ODU
within this preset range.
l The maximum transmit power adjusted
by using the ATPC function should not
exceed Maximum Transmit Power
(dBm).
Transmit Power
(dBm)
-
-
l Transmit Power(dBm) is set according
to the network plan. This parameter
specifies the transmit power of the ODU.
This parameter cannot be set to a value
that exceeds the nominal power rang of
the ODU or a value that exceeds
Maximum Transmit Power(dBm).
l It is recommended that you set the
transmit power of the ODU to the same
value at both ends of a radio link.
l Consider the receive power of the ODU
at the opposite end when you set this
parameter. Ensure that the receive power
of the ODU at the opposite end can
ensure stable radio services.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
394
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Power to Be
Received(dBm)
-90.0 to -20.0
-10.0
l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used to
set the expected receive power of the
ODU and is mainly used in the antenna
alignment stage. After this parameter is
set, the NE automatically enables the
antenna misalignment indicating
function.
l When the antenna misalignment
indicating function is enabled, if the
actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB
lower than the power expected to be
received, the ODU indicator on the IF
board connected to the ODU blinks
yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off),
indicating that the antenna is not aligned.
l After the antenna alignment, after the
state that the antenna is aligned lasts for
30 minutes, the NE automatically
disables the antenna misalignment
indicating function.
l Power to Be Received(dBm) is set
according to the network plan. When this
parameter takes the default value, the
antenna misalignment indicating
function is disabled.
TX High
Threshold(dBm)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
l If the value of the actual transmit power
of the ODU is greater than the preset
value of TX High Threshold(dBm), the
system separately records the duration
when the value of the actual transmit
power of the ODU is greater than the
preset value of TX High Threshold
(dBm) and the duration when the value
of the actual transmit power of the ODU
is greater than the preset value of TX
Low Threshold(dBm) in the
performance events.
l If the value of the actual transmit power
of the ODU is greater than the preset
value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) and
is lower than the preset value of TX High
Threshold(dBm), the system records
the duration when the value of the actual
transmit power of the ODU is greater
than the preset value of TX Low
Threshold(dBm) in the performance
events.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
395
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
TX Low Threshold
(dBm)
-
-
l If the value of the actual transmit power
of the ODU is lower than the preset value
of TX Low Threshold(dBm), the
system does not record it.
l TX High Threshold(dBm) and TX
Low Threshold(dBm) are valid only
when the ATPC function is enabled.
RX High
Threshold(dBm)
-
-
l If the value of the actual receive power
of the ODU is lower than the preset value
of RX Low Threshold(dBm), the
system records the duration when the
value of the actual receive power of the
ODU is lower than the preset value of
RX Low Threshold(dBm) and duration
when the value of the actual transmit
power of the ODU is lower than the
preset value of RX High Threshold
(dBm)in the performance events.
l If the value of the actual receive power
of the ODU is greater than the preset
value of RX Low Threshold(dBm) and
is lower than the preset value of RX High
Threshold(dBm), the system records
the duration when the value of the actual
receive power of the ODU is Lower than
the preset value of RX High Threshold
(dBm) in the performance events.
l If the value of the actual receive power
of the ODU is greater than the preset
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
396
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
RX Low Threshold
(dBm)
-
-
Actual Transmit
Power(dBm)
-
-
Description
value of RX High Threshold(dBm), the
system does not record it.
l This parameter indicates the actual
transmit power of the ODU.
l If the ATPC function is enabled, the
queried actual transmit power may be
different from the preset value.
Actual Receive
Power(dBm)
-
-
This parameter indicates the actual receive
power of the ODU.
Actual range of
Power(dBm)
-
-
This parameter indicates the range of the
actual transmit power of the ODU.
Transmission
Power Type
-
-
This parameter indicates the level of the
output power of the ODU.
A.5.6.3 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the equipment information of
the ODU.
Navigation Path
l
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree.
l
Click the Equipment Information tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
397
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding
ODU.
Frequency(GHz)
-
-
This parameter indicates the frequency band
where the ODU operates.
Equipment Type
-
-
l This parameter indicates the equipment
type of the ODU.
l PDH and SDH indicate the transmission
capacity only and are irrelevant to the
type of transmitted service.
T/R Spacing(MHz)
-
-
This parameter indicates the T/R spacing of
the ODU.
Intermediate
Frequency
Bandwidth (MHz)
-
-
This parameter indicates the IF frequency
bandwidth of the ODU.
IF Bandwidth
Type
-
-
Displays the IF bandwidth type.
Station Type
-
-
l This parameter indicates whether the
ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low
station.
l The transmit frequency of a Tx high
station is one T/R spacing higher than the
transmit frequency of a Tx low station.
Transmission
Power Type
-
-
This parameter indicates the level of the
output power of the ODU.
Produce Time
-
-
This parameter indicates the manufacturing
time of the ODU.
Produce SN
-
-
This parameter indicates the manufacturing
serial number and the manufacturer code of
the ODU.
A.5.6.4 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes of the
ODU.
Navigation Path
l
Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU
Interface from the Function Tree.
l
Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
398
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding
ODU.
RF Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
loopback status of the RF interface of the
ODU.
Inloop
l Non-Loopback indicates that the
loopback is canceled or not performed.
l Inloop indicates that the RF signals
transmitted to the opposite end are
looped back.
l RF Loopback function is used for fault
locating for the RF interfaces. The RF
Loopback function is used for diagnosis
and may affect the services that are
transmitted over the interfaces. Hence,
exercise caution before starting this
function.
l In normal cases, RF Loopback is set to
Non-Loopback.
unmute
Configure
Transmission
Status
unmute
mute
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
transmit status of the ODU.
l If Configure Transmission Status is set
to mute, the transmitter of the ODU does
not work but can normally receive
microwave signals.
l If Configure Transmission Status is set
to unmute, the ODU can normally
transmit and receive microwave signals.
l In normal cases, Configure
Transmission Status is set to unmute.
Actual
Transmission
Status
-
-
Displays the ODU manufacturer
information.
Factory
Information
-
-
This parameter indicates the manufacturer
information about the ODU.
Remarks
-
-
Specifies the remarks of the ODU.
A.5.7 Parameters for SDH Interface Boards
This topic describes parameters that are related to SDH interface boards.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
399
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the SDH interfaces.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Select By Board/Port(Channel), and select Port or VC4 Channel from the list box.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding
SDH interface.
Optical Interface
Namea
-
-
This parameter indicates or specifies the
name of the optical interface.
Laser Switcha
On
On
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
on/off state of the laser.
Off
l This parameter is set for SDH optical
interfaces only.
l In normal cases, this parameter is set to
On.
Optical(Electrical)
Interface
Loopbacka
Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
Non-Loopback
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
loopback status on the SDH interface.
l Non-Loopback indicates that the
loopback is canceled or not performed.
l Inloop indicates that the SDH signals
transmitted to the opposite end are
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received SDH
signals are looped back.
l This function is used for fault locating
for the SDH interfaces. The Optical
(Electrical) Interface Loopback
function is used for diagnosis and may
affect the services that are transmitted
over the interfaces. Hence, exercise
precaution before starting this function.
l In normal cases, this parameter is set to
Non-Loopback.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
400
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VC4 Loopbackb
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
loopback status in the VC-4 path.
Inloop
l Non-Loopback indicates that the
loopback is canceled or not performed.
Outloop
l Inloop indicates that the VC-4 signals
transmitted to the opposite end are
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received
VC-4 signals are looped back.
l This function is used for fault locating
for the VC-4 paths. The VC4
Loopback function is used for diagnosis
and may affect the services that are
transmitted over the interfaces. Hence,
exercise precaution before starting this
function.
l In normal cases, this parameter is set to
Non-Loopback.
NOTE
l a: Indicates the parameters that are supported when Port is selected from the list box.
l b: Indicates the parameters that are supported when VC4 Channel is selected from the list box.
A.5.7.2 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the automatic laser shutdown (ALS)
function.
Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Automatic Laser Shutdown from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Optical Interface
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding
optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
401
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Auto Shutdown
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether the Auto Laser Shutdown
function is enabled or disabled for the
laser.
Enabled
l The ALS function allows the laser to shut
down automatically when an optical port
does not carry services, an optical fiber
is broken, or no optical signal is received.
l You can set On Period(ms), Off Period
(ms), and Continuously On-test Period
(ms) only when this parameter is set to
Enabled.
On Period(ms)
1000 to 3000
2000
This parameter indicates or specifies the
period when a shutdown laser automatically
starts up and tests whether the optical fiber
is normal.
Off Period(ms)
2000 to 300000
60000
This parameter indicates or specifies the
period when the laser does not work (with
the ALS function being enabled).
Continuously Ontest Period(ms)
2000 to 300000
90000
This parameter indicates or specifies the
period when a shutdown laser is manually
started up and tests whether the optical fiber
is normal.
A.5.8 Parameters for PDH Interface Boards
This topic describes parameters that are related to PDH interface boards.
A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PDH ports.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Select By Board/Port(Channel).
3.
Select Port from the list box.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
402
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding
port.
Port Name
-
-
This parameter indicates or specifies the
name of the port.
Tributary
Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
loopback status in the associated path of
the tributary unit.
Inloop
Outloop
l Non-Loopback indicates that the
loopback is canceled or not performed.
l Inloop indicates that the PDH signals
transmitted to the opposite end are
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received PDH
signals are looped back.
l This function is used for fault locating
for the paths of the tributary unit. The
Tributary Loopback function is used
for diagnosis and may affect the services
that are transmitted over the interfaces.
Hence, exercise precaution before
starting this function.
l In normal cases, this parameter is set to
Non-Loopback.
Port Impedance
-
-
This parameter indicates the impedance of a
path, which depends on the tributary unit.
Service Load
Indication
Load
Load
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
service loading status in a specific path.
Non-Loaded
l When this parameter is set to Load, the
board detects whether alarms exist in the
path.
l When this parameter is set to NonLoaded, the board does not detect
whether there are alarms in the path.
l If a path does not carry any services, you
can set this parameter to Non-Loaded
for the path to mask all the alarms. If a
path carries services, you need to set this
parameter to Load for the path.
Input Signal
Equalization
Unequalized
Equalized
Unequalized
l This parameter indicates whether the
input signals are equalized.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to default value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
403
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Retiming Mode
Normal
Normal
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
retiming mode of a specific path.
Retiming Mode of
Tributary Clock
l By using the retiming function, the
retiming reference signal from the SDH
network and the service data signal are
combined and then sent to the client
equipment, therefore decreasing the
output jitter in the signal. In this way, the
retiming function ensures that the service
code flow can normally transfer the
retiming reference signal.
Retiming Mode of
Cross-Connect
Clock
l When this parameter is set to Normal,
the retiming function is not used.
l When this parameter is set to Retiming
Mode of Tributary Clock, the retiming
function is used with the clock of the
upstream tributary unit traced.
l When this parameter is set to Retiming
Mode of Cross-Connect Clock, the
retiming function is used with the clock
of the cross-connect unit traced.
l It is recommended that the external
clock, instead of the retiming function,
should be used to provide reference
clock signals for the equipment.
l If the retiming function is required, it is
recommended that you set this parameter
to Retiming Mode of Cross-connect
Clock.
Port Service Type
-
-
This parameter indicates the type of services
that are processed in a path. It depends on
the services that are transmitted in a path.
Output Signal
Equalization
Unequalized
Unequalized
l This parameter indicates whether the
output signals are equalized.
Equalized
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
404
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
E1 Frame Format
Unframe
Unframe
Specifies the E1 frame format for E1 ports.
l To detect E1 BER performance on the
OptiX RTN 950, set E1 Frame
Format of the local E1 port to the same
value as that of the opposite E1 port. It is
recommended that E1 Frame Format of
both the local and opposite E1 ports be
CRC-4 Multiframe.
Double Frame
CRC-4 Multiframe
l In other scenarios wherein the OptiX
RTN 950 is used, it is recommended that
E1 Frame Format take its default value
Unframe. If E1 Frame Format is
Unframe, the OptiX RTN 950
transparently transmits E1 frames and
the local E1 port allows for
interconnection with another E1 port
whose E1 Frame Format is Double
Frame or CRC-4 Multiframe.
NOTE
E1 Frame Format needs to be set to the same
value at both ends of an E1 link.
A.5.8.2 Parameter Description: PRBS Test
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS)
test.
Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the port for the
PRBS test.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
405
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Direction
Cross
Cross
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
direction of the PRBS test.
Tributary
l In the tributary direction, the PRBS test
is performed to check the connectivity of
the cable from the tributary board to the
DDF.
l In the cross-connect direction, the PRBS
test is performed to check the processing
of the service from the tributary board to
the NE at the remote end.
Duration
1 to 255
1
This parameter indicates or specifies the
duration of the PRBS test.
Measured Time
s
s
This parameter indicates or specifies the
time unit used for the PRBS test.
10min
h
Start Time
-
-
This parameter indicates the start time of the
PRBS test.
Progress
-
-
This parameter indicates the progress
percentage of the PRBS test.
Total PRBS
-
-
This parameter indicates the number of bit
errors that occur in the PRBS test.
Accumulating
Mode
Selected
Deselected
This parameter specifies whether to display
the values in accumulative mode. If
Accumulating Mode is selected, it
indicates that the values are displayed in
accumulative mode.
Deselected
A.5.9 Parameters for Overhead
This topic describes the parameters that are related to overhead.
A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the regenerator section overheads
(RSOHs).
Navigation Path
1.
Select an SDH interface board in the NE Explorer Choose Configuration > Overhead
Management > Regenerator Section Overhead from the Function Tree.
2.
Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
406
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Setting the Display Format
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Display in Text
Format
Selected
Selected
This parameter specifies the display in the
text format.
Display in
Hexadecimal
Selected
Deselected
This parameter specifies the display in the
hexadecimal format.
Deselected
Deselected
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
-
-
This parameter indicates the object to be set.
J0 to be Sent
([Mode]Content)
-
[16 Bytes]HuaWei
SBS
If the NE at the opposite end reports the
J0_MM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the J0 byte to be received at the
opposite end.
J0 to be Received
([Mode]Content)
-
[Disabled]
l This parameter specifies the J0 byte to be
received.
l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the
board does not monitor the received J0
byte.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
-
J0 Received
([Mode]Content)
-
This parameter indicates the J0 byte that is
actually received.
A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-4 path overheads (POHs).
Navigation Path
1.
Select SDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree.
2.
Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.
Parameters for Setting the Display Format
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Display in Text
Format
Selected
Selected
This parameter specifies the display in the
text format.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Deselected
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
407
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Display in
Hexadecimal
Selected
Deselected
This parameter specifies the display in the
hexadecimal format.
Deselected
Parameters for the Trace Byte J1
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
-
-
This parameter indicates the object to be set.
J1 to be Sent
([Mode]Content)
-
[16 Bytes]HuaWei
SBS
If the NE at the opposite end reports the
HP_TIM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the J1 byte to be received at the
opposite end.
J1 to be Received
([Mode]Content)
-
[Disabled]
l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the
board does not monitor the received J1
byte.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
J1 Received
([Mode]Content)
-
-
This parameter displays the J1 byte that is
actually received.
Parameters for the Signal Flag C2
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
-
-
This parameter indicates the object to be set.
C2 to be Sent
-
-
If the NE at the opposite end reports the
HP_SLM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the C2 byte to be received at the
opposite end.
C2 to be Received
-
-
If the NE at the local end reports the
HP_SLM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the C2 byte to be sent at the
opposite end.
C2 Received
-
-
This parameter displays the C2 byte that is
actually received.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
408
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Overhead Termination
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
-
-
This parameter indicates the object to be set.
VC4 Overhead
Termination
Termination
Auto
l If this parameter is set to PassThrough, the NE forwards the original
overhead after monitoring the VC-4 path
overhead regardless of the C2 byte.
Pass-Through
Auto
l If this parameter is set to Termination,
the NE generates the new VC-4 path
overhead according to the board setting
after monitoring the VC-4 path overhead
regardless of the C2 byte.
l If this parameter is set to Auto, the VC-4
path overhead in the VC-4 pass-through
service is passed through, and the VC-4
path overhead in the VC-12 service is
terminated.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-12 path overheads (POHs).
Navigation Path
1.
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Overhead Management > VC12 Path Overhead from the Function
Tree.
2.
Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.
Parameters for Setting the Display Format
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Display in Text
Format
Selected
Selected
This parameter specifies the display in the
text format.
Display in
Hexadecimal
Selected
Deselected
This parameter specifies the display in the
hexadecimal format.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Deselected
Deselected
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
409
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for the Trace Byte
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
-
-
This parameter indicates the object to be set.
J2 to be Sent
-
[16 Bytes]HuaWei
SBS
If the NE at the opposite end reports the
LP_TIM or LP_TIM_VC12 alarm, this
parameter is set according to the J2 byte to
be received by the NE at the opposite end.
J2 to be Received
-
[Disabled]
l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the
board does not monitor the received J2
byte.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
NOTE
IF boards do not support this parameter.
-
J2 Received
-
This parameter displays the J2 byte that is
actually received.
Parameters for the Signal Flag
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
-
-
This parameter indicates the object to be set.
Signal Label
(L1,L2,L3 of V5) to
be Sent
-
-
If the NE at the opposite end reports the
LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC12 alarm, this
parameter is set according to the V5 byte to
be received at the opposite end.
Signal Label
(L1,L2,L3 of V5) to
be Received
-
-
If the NE at the local end reports the
LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC12 alarm, this
parameter is set according to the V5 byte to
be sent at the opposite end.
NOTE
IF boards do not support this parameter.
Signal Label
(L1,L2,L3 of V5)
Received
-
-
This parameter displays the V5 byte that is
actually received.
A.5.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Virtual Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters of Ethernet virtual interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
410
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Virtual Interface from the Function
Tree.
2.
Click the Basic Attributes tab.
3.
Choose New > Create Ethernet Virtual Interface.
Basic Attributes of Ethernet Virtual Interfaces
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
1 to 8191
-
This parameter displays or specifies the port
number of an Ethernet virtual interface.
Name
-
-
This parameter displays or specifies the port
name of an Ethernet virtual interface.
Port Type
EoA Virtual
Interface
EoA Virtual
Interface
This parameter displays or specifies the port
type of an Ethernet virtual interface.
VLAN Sub Interface
The OptiX RTN 950 allows Port Type to be
set to VLAN Sub Interface only.
Board
-
-
This parameter displays or specifies the
board where an Ethernet virtual interface is
located.
Port
-
-
This parameter displays or specifies the port
where an Ethernet virtual interface is
located.
VPI
-
-
Setting this parameter is not available.
VCI
-
-
Setting this parameter is not available.
AAL5
Encapsulation
Type
-
-
Setting this parameter is not available.
VLAN
-
-
This parameter specifies the VLAN ID that
an Ethernet virtual interface uses.
This parameter can be set when Port Type
is VLAN Sub Interface.
Specify IP Address
Manually
Unspecified
Unspecified
This parameter specifies whether to set the
IP address for a port.
l Unspecified: indicates that the IP
address will not be specified for a port.
l Manually: indicates that the IP address
will be specified for a port. If the
specified IP address is a valid value, it
will become the IP address of this port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
411
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IP Address
-
0.0.0.0
This parameter specifies the IP address of a
port.
l This parameter can be set only when
Specify IP Address is Manually.
l The IP addresses of different ports on an
NE must be in different network
segments, but the IP addresses of the
ports at both ends of an MPLS tunnel
must be in the same network segment.
IP Mask
-
255.255.255.252
This parameter specifies the subnet mask for
a port.
This parameter can be set only when Specify
IP Address is Manually.
Enable Tunnel
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
This parameter specifies whether to enable
an MPLS tunnel.
This parameter specifies the MPLS enabled
status for a port. If you set Enable Tunnel
to Enabled for a port, the port identifies and
processes MPLS labels.
MAC Address
-
-
This parameter displays the port MAC
address of an Ethernet virtual interface.
Layer 3 Attributes
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter displays an IF port.
Enable Tunnel
Enabled
Disabled
This parameter displays or specifies whether
to enable an MPLS tunnel.
Disabled
Set the MPLS enabled status for a port. If
you set Enable Tunnel to Enabled, the port
identifies and processes MPLS labels.
Specify IP
Address
Manually
Unspecified
Unspecified
This parameter displays or specifies whether
to set the IP address for a port.
l Unspecified: indicates that the IP
address will not be specified for a port.
l Manually: indicates that the IP address
will be specified for a port. If the
specified IP address is a valid value, it
will become the IP address of this port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
412
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IP Address
-
0.0.0.0
This parameter displays or specifies the IP
address of a port.
l This parameter can be set only when
Specify IP Address is Manually.
l The IP addresses of different ports on an
NE must be in different network
segments, but the IP addresses of the
ports at both ends of an MPLS tunnel
must be in the same network segment.
-
IP Mask
255.255.255.252
This parameter displays or specifies the
subnet mask of a port.
This parameter can be set only when Specify
IP Address is Manually.
A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features
on the Packet Plane
This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on the
packet plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet port
parameters, and QoS parameters.
A.6.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services
This topic describes the parameters that are related to Ethernet services.
A.6.1.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation
This topic describes the interface parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet line (E-Line)
service.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
413
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-4 Service direction of UNI-UNI
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294
-
This parameter specifies
the ID of the E-Line
service.
Service Name
-
-
This parameter specifies
the name of the E-Line
service.
Direction
UNI-UNI
UNI-UNI
l This parameter
specifies the direction
of the E-Line service.
UNI-NNI
NNI-NNI
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l Set this parameter to
UNI-UNI.
414
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
BPDU
Not Transparently
Transmitted
Not Transparently
Transmitted
l This parameter
specifies the
transparent
transmission ID of the
bridge protocol data
unit (BPDU) packets.
It is used to indicate
whether the E-Line
service transparently
transmits the BPDU
packets.
Transparently
Transmitted
l If the BPDU packets
are used as the service
packets and
transparently
transmitted to the
opposite end, set this
parameter to
Transparently
Transmitted. That is,
the parameter value
Transparently
Transmitted takes
effect only if
Encapsulation Type
of the source and sink
ports of the E-Line
service are Null.
l In other cases, set this
parameter to Not
Transparently
Transmitted.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
MTU(bytes)
-
-
This parameter cannot be
set here.
Service Tag Role
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
415
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Port
-
-
l Before setting this
parameter, check and
ensure that the
attributes in Ethernet
Interface of the port
are set correctly and
are the same as the
planning information.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
the same as the value
of sink port.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
used for the E-LAN
port.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
416
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source VLANs
1 to 4094
-
l This parameter can be
set to null, a number,
or several numbers.
When setting this
parameter to several
numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate
the discrete numbers,
or use the endash (-) to
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and
6.
l The number and value
of VLANs must be the
same value of Sink
VLANs.
l If this parameter is set
to null, all the services
at the source port are
used as the service
source.
l If this parameter is not
set to null, only the
service that contains
the VLAN ID at the
source port can be used
as the service source.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
417
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink Port
-
-
l Before setting this
parameter, check and
ensure that the
attributes in Ethernet
Interface of the port
are set correctly and
are the same as the
planning information.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
the same as the value
of Source Port.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
used for the E-LAN
port.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
418
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink VLANs
1 to 4094
-
l This parameter can be
set to null, a number,
or several numbers.
When setting this
parameter to several
numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate
the discrete numbers,
or use the endash (-) to
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and
6.
l The number and value
of VLANs must be the
same value of Source
VLANs.
l If this parameter is set
to null, all the services
at the sink port are
used as the service
sink.
l If this parameter is not
set to null, only the
service that contains
the VLAN ID at the
sink port can be used
as the service sink.
Table A-5 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by PWs)
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294
-
This parameter specifies
the ID of the E-Line
service.
Service Name
-
-
This parameter specifies
the name of the E-Line
service.
Direction
UNI-UNI
UNI-UNI
l This parameter
specifies the direction
of the E-Line service.
UNI-NNI
NNI-NNI
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l Set this parameter to
UNI-NNI.
419
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
BPDU
Not Transparently
Transmitted
Not Transparently
Transmitted
For UNI-NNI ETH
PWE3 services, the
parameter value is always
Not Transparently
Transmitted.
Transparently
Transmitted
MTU(bytes)
-
-
This parameter cannot be
set here.
Service Tag Role
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Source Port
-
-
l Before setting this
parameter, check and
ensure that the
attributes in Ethernet
Interface of the port
are set correctly and
are the same as the
planning information.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
the same as the value
of sink port.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
used for the E-LAN
port.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
420
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source VLANs
1 to 4094
-
l This parameter can be
set to null, a number,
or several numbers.
When setting this
parameter to several
numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate
the discrete numbers,
or use the endash (-) to
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and
6.
l If this parameter is set
to null, all the services
at the source port are
used as the service
source.
l If this parameter is not
set to null, only the
service that contains
the VLAN ID at the
source port can be
used as the service
source.
PRI
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Bearer Type
QinQ Link
PW
For UNI-NNI ETH
PWE3 services, the
parameter value is always
PW.
PW
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
421
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Type
No Protection
No Protection
l If this parameter is set
to PW APS, working
and protection PWs
need to be configured.
PW APS
Slave Protection Pair
l If this parameter is set
to Slave Protection
Pair, you need to bind
the slave PW APS
protection group with
the master PW APS
protection group. The
switching of the
master PW APS
protection group
triggers the switching
of the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.
Table A-6 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by QinQ links)
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294
-
This parameter specifies
the ID of the E-Line
service.
Service Name
-
-
This parameter specifies
the name of the E-Line
service.
Direction
UNI-UNI
UNI-UNI
l This parameter
specifies the direction
of the E-Line service.
UNI-NNI
NNI-NNI
BPDU
Not Transparently
Transmitted
l Set this parameter to
UNI-NNI.
Not Transparently
Transmitted
For UNI-NNI QinQ
services, the parameter
value is always Not
Transparently
Transmitted.
Transparently
Transmitted
MTU(bytes)
-
-
This parameter cannot be
set here.
Service Tag Role
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
422
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Port
-
-
l Before setting this
parameter, check and
ensure that the
attributes in Ethernet
Interface of the port
are set correctly and
are the same as the
planning information.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
the same as the value
of sink port.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
used for the E-LAN
port.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Source VLANs
1 to 4094
-
l This parameter can be
set to null, a number,
or several numbers.
When setting this
parameter to several
numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate
the discrete numbers,
or use the endash (-) to
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and
6.
l If this parameter is set
to null, all the services
at the source port are
used as the service
source.
l If this parameter is not
set to null, only the
service that contains
the VLAN ID at the
source port can be used
as the service source.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
423
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PRI
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Bearer Type
QinQ Link
PW
For NNI-NNI QinQ
services, the parameter
value is always QinQ
Link.
-
Selects or specifies the ID
of a QinQ link. You can
create a QinQ link or
select an existing QinQ
link.
PW
QinQ Link ID
-
Table A-7 Service direction of NNI-NNI
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294
-
This parameter specifies
the ID of the E-Line
service.
Service Name
-
-
This parameter specifies
the name of the E-Line
service.
Direction
UNI-UNI
UNI-UNI
l This parameter
specifies the direction
of the E-Line service.
UNI-NNI
NNI-NNI
BPDU
Not Transparently
Transmitted
l Set this parameter to
NNI-NNI.
Not Transparently
Transmitted
For NNI-NNI QinQ
services, the parameter
value is always
Not Transparently
Transmitted
.
Transparently
Transmitted
MTU(bytes)
-
-
This parameter cannot be
set here.
Service Tag Role
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
PRI
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
424
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bearer Type 1
QinQ Link
QinQ Link
Uses the QinQ link to
carry the E-Line service.
QinQ Link ID 1
-
-
l Selects the QinQ link
ID of the first QinQ
link.
l The QinQ link ID is
preset in QinQ Link.
Bearer Type 2
QinQ Link
QinQ Link
Uses the QinQ link to
carry the E-Line service.
QinQ Link ID 2
-
-
l Selects the QinQ link
ID of the second QinQ
link.
l The QinQ link ID is
preset in QinQ Link.
QinQ Link ID
-
-
Selects or specifies the ID
of a QinQ link. You can
create a QinQ link or
select an existing QinQ
link.
Parameters of PWs
NOTE
l Parameters of PWs need to be configured only when Direction is UNI-NNI and Bearer Type is PW.
l If the parameter Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS or Slave Protection Pair, all the parameters
of working and protection PWs need to be configured. This section considers the parameters of the working
PW as an example.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
-
-
Specifies the ID of the PW
that carries services.
PW Signaling Type
Static
Static
Labels for static PWs need
to be manually assigned.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
425
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW Type
Ethernet
Ethernet
l Specifies the type of
the PW.
Ethernet Tagged Mode
l PW Type indicates
whether P-TAG is
added to Ethernet
frames that are
encapsulated for
transmission on PWs.
If it is not required to
add VLAN IDs, set this
parameter to
Ethernet. If it is
required to add VLAN
IDs, set this parameter
to Ethernet Tagged
Mode and then set
Request VLAN in the
Advanced Attributes
tab.
PW Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Displays the direction of
the PW.
PW Encapsulation Type
MPLS
MPLS
Displays the
encapsulation type of the
packets on the PW.
PW Ingress Label/
Source Port
16 to 1048575
-
Specifies the PW Ingress
label.
PW Egress Label/Sink
Port
16 to 1048575
-
Specifies the PW Egress
label.
Tunnel selection mode
-
-
Displays the method to
select tunnels.
Tunnel Type
MPLS
MPLS
Displays the type of the
tunnel that carries the PW.
Tunnel
-
-
A tunnel needs to be
selected. If no tunnel is
available, creation of a
PW will fail.
Egress Tunnel
-
-
For a bidirectional tunnel,
the system will configure
the egress tunnel
automatically.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
426
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Peer LSR ID
-
-
Specifies the LSR ID of
the PW at the remote end.
If an existing tunnel is
selected, the LSR ID will
be automatically assigned.
QoS Parameters (PW)
NOTE
QoS parameters need to be configured only when Direction is UNI-NNI and Bearer Type is PW.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
-
-
Specifies whether the
bandwidth limit function
is enabled.
l This function limits the
bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
l An ETH PWE3 service
corresponds to a PW.
Therefore, this
function can also limit
the bandwidth of ETH
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.
Policy
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this parameter.
CIR(Kbit/s)
-
-
Specifies the committed
information rate (CIR) of
a PW.
It is recommended that
you set this parameter to
the same value as PIR.
CBS(byte)
-
-
Specifies the committed
burst size (CBS) of a PW.
PIR(Kbit/s)
-
-
Specifies the peak
information rate (PIR) of a
PW.
It is recommended that
you set this parameter to
the same value as CIR.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
427
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PBS(byte)
-
-
Specifies the peak burst
size (PBS) of a PW.
EXP
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this parameter.
LSP Mode
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe: When stripping
MPLS tunnel labels from
packets, an egress node
does not update the
scheduling priority for the
packets.
Parameters of Advanced Attributes (PW)
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Word
No Use
No Use
For ETH PWE3 services,
the parameter value is
always No Use.
Control Channel Type
None
Alert Label
l Specifies the mode of
PW connectivity
check.
Alert Label
l None indicates that
VCCV is not used.
l Alert Label indicates
VCCV packets in
Alert Label
encapsulation mode.
VCCV Verification
Mode
Ping
Ping
None
l Specifies the VCCV
verification mode. The
VCCV verification is
used for PW
connectivity check.
l If the VCCV-Ping test
is required, do not set
this parameter to
None.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
428
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Request VLAN
-
-
l Set this parameter
when PW Type is
Ethernet Tagged
Mode.
l If the received packets
do not carry any
VLAN IDs, the PW
will add VLAN IDs to
the packets as required
by the setting of this
parameter.
-
TPID
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support request VLAN
TPID of the PW level.
Protection Group Parameters (PW APS)
NOTE
The parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to
PW APS.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Type
-
-
Specifies the protection
type.
Protection Group ID
-
-
Specifies the protection
group ID.
Enabling Status
Disabled
Disabled
l Specifies the enabling
status of the PW
protection group.
Enabled
l During the creation of
a protection group, set
Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
APS protection group
is configured at both
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.
Protection Mode
-
-
Displays the protection
mode.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports 1:1 protection
mode.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
429
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Working PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the
working PW.
Protection PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the
protection PW.
Switching Mode
-
-
Displays the switching
mode to be used when a
PW fails.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports dual-ended
switching.
Revertive Mode
Non-revertive
Revertive
Revertive
l This parameter
specifies whether to
switch services back to
the original working
PW after it recovers.
l The value Revertive
indicates that services
are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Nonrevertive indicates
that services are not
switched to the
original working PW.
l The value Revertive is
recommended.
Switchover Restoration
Time(min)
1 to 12
1
l Specifies the WTR
time of the protection
group.
l When the preset WTR
time expires after the
original working PW
recovers, services are
switched to the
original working PW.
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.
l The default value is
recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
430
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Switchover Delay Time
(100ms)
0 to 100
0
l Specifies the hold-off
time of the protection
group.
l If this parameter is set
to a value other than 0,
the protection group
does not trigger
switching once it
detects faults, but waits
until the hold-off time
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist. If any
faults persist, the
switching is triggered;
otherwise, no
switching is triggered.
l The default value is
recommended.
-
Detection mode
-
Displays the detection
mode of the PW APS
protection group.
OAM Parameters
NOTE
l The OAM parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of
PWs is set to PW APS.
l To configure PW OAM parameters, choose Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management >
PW OAM Parameter from the Function Tree.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
OAM Status
-
-
Displays the enabling
status of PW OAM.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
431
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Detection Mode
Auto-Sensing
Auto-Sensing
l Specifies the detection
mode of OAM packets.
Manual
l Manual: The
connectivity check
(CC) packets are sent
at the interval specified
by the user.
l Auto-Sensing: The
connectivity check
(CC) packets are sent
at the interval of
receiving PW OAM
packets.
l If Detection Mode is
set to Manual, you
need to set the PW
OAM detection
packets to be received
and transmitted.
l The value AutoSensing is
recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
432
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Detection Packet Type
CV
CV
l CV: The detection
packets are sent at a
fixed interval.
FFD
l FFD: The detection
packets are sent at the
interval specified by
the user.
l If Detection Mode is
set to Auto-Sensing,
this parameter
specifies the PW OAM
detection packets to be
transmitted.
l If Detection Mode is
set to Manual, this
parameter specifies the
PW OAM detection
packets to be received
and transmitted.
l The value FFD is
assumed for PW APS
and the value CV is
assumed for
continuous
connectivity check on
PWs.
Detection Packet Period
(ms)
3.3
50
10
l Specifies the period of
detection packets.
l This parameter is
configurable when
Detection Packet
Type is FFD and
assumes the fixed
value of 1000 when
Detection Packet
Type is CV.
20
50
100
200
500
l Set this parameter to
3.3 for PW APS.
LSR ID to be Received
-
-
Specifies the LSR ID to be
received.
PW ID to be Received
-
-
Specifies the PW ID to be
received.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
433
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Protection Group Parameters (Slave Protection Pair)
NOTE
The parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to
Slave Protection Pair.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Mode
-
-
Displays the protection
mode.
Protection Group ID
-
-
Specifies the ID of the
slave protection pair. The
switching of the master
PW APS protection group
triggers the switching of
the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.
Working PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the
working PW in the slave
protection pair.
Protection PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the
protection PW in the slave
protection pair.
A.6.1.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service
This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-Line services.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294
-
This parameter indicates
the ID of the E-Line
service.
Service Name
-
-
This parameter indicates
or specifies the name of
the E-Line service.
Source Node
-
-
This parameter indicates
the source node.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
434
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink Node
-
-
This parameter indicates
the sink node.
Service Tag Role
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
MTU(byte)
-
-
This parameter cannot be
queried here.
BPDU
Not Transparently
Transmitted
-
This parameter indicates
the transparent
transmission tag of the
bridge protocol data unit
(BPDU) packets. This
parameter is used to
indicate whether the
Ethernet line
transparently transmits
the BPDU packets.
-
This parameter indicates
whether E-Line service is
deployed.
Transparently
Transmitted
Deployment Status
-
Parameters Associated with UNI Ports
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates
the UNI port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
435
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLANs
1 to 4094
-
This parameter indicates
or specifies the VLAN ID
of the UNI port.
l This parameter can be
set to null, a number,
or several numbers.
When setting this
parameter to several
numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate
the discrete numbers,
or use the endash (-) to
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and
6.
l This parameter is valid
only when Direction
is set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI in the
process of creating an
E-Line service.
l If this parameter is set
to null, all the services
of the UNI work as the
service source or
service sink.
l If this parameter is not
set to null, only the
services of the UNI
port whose VLAN IDs
are included in the set
value of this parameter
work as the service
source or service sink.
NNI Parameters (PW)
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
-
-
This parameter displays
the PW ID.
Working Status
-
-
This parameter displays
the working status of a
PW.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
436
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable Status
-
-
This parameter displays
whether a PW is enabled.
PW Signaling Type
-
-
This parameter displays
the PW signaling type.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 uses
static PWs only.
PW Type
-
-
This parameter displays
the configured PW type.
PW Direction
-
-
This parameter displays
the direction of the PW.
PW Encapsulation Type
-
-
This parameter displays
the PW encapsulation
type.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 uses
MPLS only.
PW Ingress Label/
Source Port
-
-
This parameter displays
the configured PW ingress
label.
PW Egress Label/Sink
Port
-
-
This parameter displays
the configured PW egress
label.
Tunnel Type
MPLS
MPLS
This parameter displays
the type of the tunnel that
carries a PW.
Peer LSR ID
-
-
This parameter displays
the opposite LSR ID.
Tunnel
-
-
This parameter displays
the tunnel.
Control Word
-
-
For ETH PWE3 services,
the parameter value is
always No Use.
Control Channel Type
-
-
This parameter displays
the control channel type.
VCCV Verification
Mode
-
-
This parameter displays
the VCCV mode.
Local Working Status
-
-
Displays the working
status of the PW at the
local end.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
437
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Remote Working Status
-
-
This parameter displays
the working status of the
PW at the remote end.
Compositive Working
Status
-
-
This parameter displays
the comprehensive
working status of the PW.
Request VLAN
-
-
This parameter displays
the request VLAN.
Deployment Status
-
-
This parameter displays
the deployment status.
Tunnel Automatic
Selection Policy
-
-
This parameter displays
the automatic tunnel
selection policy.
TPID
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support request
VLAN TPID of the PW
level.
Parameters Associated with NNI Ports
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
QinQ Link ID
1 to 4294967295
-
l This parameter
indicates the QinQ link
ID of the QinQ link
connected to the NNI
port.
l This parameter is valid
only when Direction
is set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI in the
process of creating an
E-Line service.
Port
-
-
l This parameter
indicates the NNI port.
l This parameter is valid
only when Direction
is set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI in the
process of creating an
E-Line service.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
438
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
S-VLAN ID
-
-
l This parameter
indicates or specifies
the VLAN ID of the
NNI port.
l This parameter is valid
only when Direction
is set to UNI-NNI or
NNI-NNI in the
process of creating an
E-Line service.
l This parameter is
preset in QinQ Link.
QoS Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
-
-
This parameter displays
the PW ID.
Direction
-
-
l This parameter
displays the direction
of the PW.
l Egress indicates the
egress direction of the
PW.
l Ingress indicates the
ingress direction of the
PW.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
439
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
-
-
This parameter displays or
specifies whether the
bandwidth limit function
is enabled for a PW to
prevent network
congestion.
l Regarding
transmission channels,
this function can be
used to limit the
bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
l An ETH PWE3
service corresponds to
a PW. Therefore, this
function can also limit
the bandwidth of ETH
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.
Policy
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
CIR (Kbit/s)
-
-
This parameter displays or
specifies the committed
information rate (CIR) of
a PW.
It is recommended that
you set this parameter to
the same value as PIR.
CBS (kbyte)
-
-
This parameter displays or
specifies the committed
burst size (CBS) of a PW.
PIR (kbit/s)
-
-
This parameter displays or
specifies the peak
information rate (PIR) of
a PW.
It is recommended that
you set this parameter to
the same value as CIR.
PBS (kbyte)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
This parameter displays or
specifies the peak burst
size (PBS) of a PW.
440
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
EXP
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
LSP Mode
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe: When stripping
MPLS tunnel labels from
packets, an egress node
does not update the
scheduling priority for the
packets.
Parameters for the Port Attributes
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the port
information.
Enable Port
-
-
l This parameter
indicates whether to
enable the port.
l This parameter is
preset in General
Attributes of
Ethernet Interface.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
441
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Encapsulation Type
Null
-
l This parameter
indicates the
encapsulation type of
the port.
802.1Q
QinQ
l This parameter is valid
only when Direction
is set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI in the
process of creating an
E-Line service.
l If this parameter is set
to Null, the port
transparently
transmits the received
packets.
l If this parameter is set
to 802.1Q, the port
identifies the packets
that comply with the
IEEE 802.1Q
standard.
l If this parameter is set
to QinQ, the port
identifies the packets
that comply with the
IEEE 802.1 QinQ
standard.
l This parameter is
preset in General
Attributes of
Ethernet Interface.
TAG
Tag Aware
-
Access
Hybrid
l This parameter
displays the tag of the
port.
l This parameter is
preset in Layer 2
Attributes of
Ethernet Interface .
Protection Group Parameters (PW APS)
NOTE
The following parameters are available only after the PW APS protection group is configured.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
442
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the
protection group to be
created.
Working PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the
working PW.
Protection PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the
protection PW.
Protection Mode
-
-
Displays the protection
mode.
Enabling Status
Enabled
-
l Displays or specifies
the enabling status of
the PW protection
group.
Disabled
l During the creation of
a protection group, set
Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
APS protection group
is configured at both
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.
Switchover Mode
-
-
Displays the switching
mode to be used when a
PW fails.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supporting dual-ended
switching.
Restoration Mode
Non-revertive
-
Revertive
l Specifies whether to
switch services to the
original working PW
after the fault is
rectified.
l The value Revertive
indicates that services
are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Nonrevertive indicates
that services are not
switched to the
original working PW.
l The value Revertive is
recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
443
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Switchover Restoration
Time(min)
1 to 12
-
l Displays or specifies
the WTR time of the
protection group.
l When the preset WTR
time expires after the
original working PW
recovers, services are
switched to the
original working PW.
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.
Switchover Delay Time
(100ms)
0 to 100
-
l Displays or specifies
the hold-off time of the
protection group.
l If this parameter is set
to a value other than 0,
the protection group
does not trigger
switching once it
detects faults, but waits
until the hold-off time
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist. If any
faults persist, the
switching is triggered;
otherwise, no
switching is triggered.
Deployment Status
-
-
Display the deployment
status of the protection
group.
Switchover Status
-
-
Displays the switchover
status of the protection
group.
Protocol Status
-
-
Displays the enabling
status of the protocol.
Working Path Status
-
-
Displays the status of the
current working path.
Protection Path Status
-
-
Display the status of the
current protection path.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
444
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Protection Group Parameters (Slave Protection Pair)
NOTE
The following parameters are available only after the slave protection pair is configured.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group ID
-
-
Specifies the ID of the
slave protection pair. The
switching of the master
PW APS protection group
triggers the switching of
the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.
Working PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the
working PW in the slave
protection pair.
Protection PW ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the
protection PW in the slave
protection pair.
DNI PW ID
-
-
Displays the DNI PW ID.
PW Type
-
-
Displays the PW type.
Deployment Status
-
-
Displays the deployment
status of the slave
protection pair.
A.6.1.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Items for E-Line
Services_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating VLAN forwarding table items.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the VLAN Forwarding Table Item tab.
3.
Click New.
Parameters for VLAN Forwarding Table Item
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Interface Type
V-UNI
V-UNI
This parameter specifies
the network attribute of
the source interface.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
445
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Interface
-
-
This parameter specifies
the source interface.
Source VLAN ID
1 to 4094
-
This parameter specifies
the VLAN ID of the
source service.
Sink Interface Type
V-UNI
V-UNI
This parameter specifies
the network attribute of
the sink interface.
Sink Interface
-
-
This parameter specifies
the sink interface.
Sink VLAN ID
1 to 4094
-
This parameter specifies
the VLAN ID of the sink
service.
NOTE
l The VLAN ID of the UNI-UNI E-Line service can be converted after a VLAN forwarding table item is
created. In this case, a service from Source Interface to Sink Interface carries the VLAN ID specified in
Sink VLAN ID when the service is transmitted from Sink Interface.
l The VLAN ID in a VLAN forwarding table item is converted unidirectionally and can be converted from
Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID only. The VLAN ID can be converted bidirectionally only when the
other VLAN forwarding table item is configured reversely.
l In normal cases, Ethernet services are bidirectional. Hence, you need to set bidirectional conversion of
VLAN IDs.
A.6.1.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet local area network (ELAN) service.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
446
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294
-
l This parameter
specifies the ID of the
E-LAN service.
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports simultaneous
creation of an E-LAN
service only.
Service Name
-
-
This parameter specifies
the name of the E-LAN
service.
BPDU
-
-
l This parameter
indicates the
transparent
transmission tag of the
BPDU packets.
l In the case of an ELAN service, this
parameter supports
only Not
Transparently
Transmitted and
cannot be set
manually.
l Not Transparently
Transmitted
indicates that the
BPDU packets are
used as the protocol
packets to compute the
spanning tree topology
of the network.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
447
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tag Type
C-Awared
C-Awared
l C-Awared indicates
that the packets are
learnt according to CTag (the VLAN tag on
the client-side). To
create the 802.1q
bridge, set this
parameter to CAwared.
S-Awared
Tag-Transparent
l S-Awared indicates
that the packets are
learnt according to STag (the VLAN tag at
the carrier service
layer). To create the
802.1ad bridge, set this
parameter to SAwared.
l Tag-Transparent
indicates that the
packets are
transparently
transmitted. To create
the 802.1d bridge, set
this parameter to TagTransparent.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
448
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Self-Learning MAC
Address
Enabled
Enabled
l This parameter
specifies whether to
enable the MAC
address self-learning
function.
Disabled
l If the MAC selflearning function of an
Ethernet LAN is
enabled, the Ethernet
LAN learns an MAC
address according to
the original MAC
address in the packet
and automatically
refreshes the MAC
address forwarding
table.
l If the MAC selflearning function of an
Ethernet LAN is
disabled, a static MAC
address forwarding
table is recommended
to be configured.
MAC Address Learning
Mode
IVL
-
SVL
l This parameter
indicates the mode
used to learn an MAC
address.
l When the bridge uses
the SVL mode, all the
VLANs share one
MAC address table. If
the bridge uses the IVL
mode, each VLAN has
an MAC address table.
Deployment Status
-
-
This parameter indicates
whether E-LAN service is
deployed.
MTU(byte)
-
-
This parameter cannot be
set here.
Service Tag Role
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
449
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for UNIs
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates
the UNI port.
SVLAN
1 to 4094
-
l This parameter
specifies the S-VLAN
ID of the UNI port.
l This parameter is valid
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
VLANs/CVLAN
1 to 4094
-
l This parameter
specifies the VLAN ID
of the UNI port.
l This parameter can be
set to null, a number,
or several numbers.
When setting this
parameter to several
numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate
the discrete numbers,
or use the endash (-) to
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and
6.
l If this parameter is set
to null, all the services
of the UNI work as the
service source or
service sink.
l If this parameter is not
set to null, only the
services of the UNI
port whose VLAN IDs
are included in the set
value of this parameter
work as the service
source or service sink.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
450
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters of NNIs
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
l This parameter
indicates the NNI port.
l This parameter is valid
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
SVLANs
-
-
l This parameter
specifies the S-VLAN
ID of the NNI port.
l This parameter is valid
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
Parameters for the Split Horizon Group
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Split Horizon Group ID
-
1
l This parameter
indicates the ID of the
split horizon group.
l The default split
horizon group ID is 1
and cannot be set
manually.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
451
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Split Horizon Group
Member
-
-
l A split horizon group
member indicates the
logical port member in
the split horizon
group.
l The port members that
are added to the same
split horizon group
cannot communicate
with each other.
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports only the
division of the split
horizon group
members according to
the Ethernet physical
port.
l If a UNI or NNI logical
port of the 802.1ad
bridge is added to a
split horizon group
member, the physical
port that is mounted
with the logical port is
automatically added to
the split horizon group
member.
A.6.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service
This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-LAN services.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
452
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294
-
l This parameter
indicates the ID of the
E-LAN service.
l The supports
simultaneous creation
of an E-LAN service
only.
Service Name
-
-
This parameter specifies
the name of the E-LAN
service.
BPDU
-
-
l This parameter
indicates the
transparent
transmission tag of the
BPDU packets.
l In the case of an ELAN service, this
parameter supports
only Not
Transparently
Transmitted and
cannot be set
manually.
l Not Transparently
Transmitted
indicates that the
BPDU packets are
used as the protocol
packets to compute the
spanning tree topology
of the network.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
453
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tag Type
C-Awared
C-Awared
l C-Awared indicates
that the packets are
learnt according to CTag (the VLAN tag on
the client-side). To
create the 802.1q
bridge, set this
parameter to CAwared.
S-Awared
Tag-Transparent
l S-Awared indicates
that the packets are
learnt according to STag (the VLAN tag at
the carrier service
layer). To create the
802.1ad bridge, set this
parameter to SAwared.
l Tag-Transparent
indicates that the
packets are
transparently
transmitted. To create
the 802.1d bridge, set
this parameter to TagTransparent.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
454
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Self-Learning MAC
Address
Enabled
Enabled
l This parameter
indicates whether to
enable the MAC
address self-learning
function.
l If the MAC selflearning function of an
Ethernet LAN is
enabled, the Ethernet
LAN learns an MAC
address according to
the original MAC
address in the packet
and automatically
refreshes the MAC
address forwarding
table.
l If the MAC selflearning function of an
Ethernet LAN is
disabled, a static MAC
address forwarding
table is recommended
to be configured.
MAC Address Learning
Mode
-
-
l This parameter
indicates the mode
used to learn an MAC
address.
l When the bridge uses
the SVL mode, all the
VLANs share one
MAC address table. If
the bridge uses the IVL
mode, each VLAN has
an MAC address table.
MTU(byte)
-
-
This parameter cannot be
queried here.
Service Tag Role
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Deployment Status
-
-
This parameter indicates
whether E-LAN service is
deployed.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
455
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for UNIs
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates
the UNI port.
SVLAN
1 to 4094
-
l This parameter
specifies the S-VLAN
ID of the UNI port.
l This parameter is valid
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
VLANs/CVLAN
1 to 4094
-
l This parameter
specifies the VLAN ID
of the UNI port.
l This parameter can be
set to null, a number,
or several numbers.
When setting this
parameter to several
numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate
the discrete numbers,
or use the endash (-) to
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and
6.
l If this parameter is set
to null, the E-LAN
service exclusively
uses the corresponding
UNI physical port.
That is, the entire port
is mounted to the
bridge.
l If this parameter is set
to a non-null value,
only the
corresponding UNI
port whose service
packets contain this
VLAN ID works as the
logical port and is
mounted to the bridge.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
456
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for NNIs
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
l This parameter
indicates the NNI port.
l This parameter is valid
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
SVLANs
-
-
l This parameter
specifies the S-VLAN
ID of the UNI port.
l This parameter is valid
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
l This parameter can be
set to null, a number,
or several numbers.
When setting this
parameter to several
numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate
the discrete numbers,
or use the endash (-) to
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and
6.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
457
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Static MAC Addresses
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
-
-
l This parameter is
invalid if MAC
Address Learning
Mode is SVL. That is,
the preset static MAC
address entries are
valid for all VLANs.
l If MAC Address
Learning Mode is set
to IVL, the preset
static MAC address
entries are valid for
only the VLANs
whose VLAN ID is
equal to the preset
VLAN ID.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
MAC Address
-
-
l This parameter
indicates or specifies
the static MAC
address.
l A static MAC address
is an address that is set
manually. It is not
aged automatically
and needs to be deleted
manually.
l Generally, a static
MAC address is used
for the port that
receives but does not
forward Ethernet
service packets or the
port whose MAC
address need not be
aged automatically.
Egress Interface
-
-
l This parameter
specifies the Ethernet
port that corresponds
to the MAC address.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
458
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Self-Learning MAC Address
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
-
-
l This parameter is
invalid if MAC
Address Learning
Mode is SVL. That is,
the preset self-learning
MAC address entries
are valid for all
VLANs.
l If MAC Address
Learning Mode is set
to IVL, the preset selflearning MAC address
entries are valid for
only the VLANs
whose VLAN ID is
equal to the preset
VLAN ID.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
MAC Address
-
-
l This parameter
indicates or specifies
the self-learning MAC
address. A selflearning MAC address
is also called a
dynamic MAC
address.
l A self-learning MAC
address is an entry
obtained by a bridge in
SVL or IVL learning
mode. A self-learning
MAC address can be
aged.
Egress Interface
-
-
l This parameter
specifies the Ethernet
port that corresponds
to the MAC address.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
459
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters Associated with MAC Address Learning
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Aging Ability
Enabled
Enabled
The OptiX RTN 950
supports enabling/
disabling of the aging
function and aging time
for the MAC address
table.
If one routing entry is not
updated in a certain
period, that is, if no new
packet from this MAC
address is received to
enable the re-learning of
this MAC address, this
routing entry is
automatically deleted.
This mechanism is called
aging, and this period is
called aging time. The
aging time of a MAC
address table is 5 minutes
by default.
Disabled
Aging Time(min)
1 to 640
5
Parameters for Disabled MAC Addresses
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
-
-
This parameter indicates
or specifies the VLAN ID
of the service. A disabled
MAC address is valid for
the VLAN whose VLAN
ID is equal to the preset
VLAN ID.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
460
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MAC Address
-
-
l This parameter
specifies or indicates
the disabled MAC
address. A disabled
MAC address is also
called a blacklisted
MAC address.
l This parameter is used
for discarding an
entry, also called a
black hole entry,
whose data frame that
contains a specific
destination MAC
address. A disabled
MAC address needs to
be set manually and
cannot be aged.
Parameters for the Split Horizon Group
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Split Horizon Group ID
-
1
l This parameter
indicates the ID of the
split horizon group.
l The default split
horizon group ID is 1
and cannot be set
manually.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
461
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Split Horizon Group
Member
-
-
l A split horizon group
member indicates the
logical port member in
the split horizon
group.
l The port members that
are added to different
split horizon groups
cannot communicate
with each other.
l The supports only the
division of the split
horizon group
members according to
the Ethernet physical
port.
l If a UNI or NNI logical
port of the 802.1ad
bridge is added to a
split horizon group
member, the physical
port that is mounted
with the logical port is
automatically added to
the split horizon group
member.
Parameters for Unknown Frame Processing
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Frame Type
Unicast
-
This parameter indicates
the type of the received
unknown frame.
Broadcast
Selects the method of
processing the unknown
frame. If this parameter is
set to Discard, the
unknown frame is directly
discarded. If this
parameter is set to
Broadcast, the unknown
frame is broadcast at the
forwarding port.
Multicast
Handing Mode
Discard
Broadcast
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
462
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.6.1.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a QinQ link.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > QinQ Link from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Parameters for the General Attributes
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
QinQ Link ID
1 to 4294967295
-
This parameter specifies
the ID of the QinQ link.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports 1024 QinQ links,
whose IDs must be different
from each other.
Board
-
-
This parameter specifies
the board where the QinQ
link is located.
Port
-
-
This parameter specifies
the port where the QinQ
link is located.
S-Vlan ID
1 to 4094
-
l This parameter
specifies the VLAN ID
(at the network
operator side) for the
QinQ link.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
A.6.1.7 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Services_Creation
This topic describes the parameters for creating E-AGGR services.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-AGGR Service from the Function
Tree.
2.
Click New.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
463
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294
-
This parameter specifies
the ID of an E-AGGR
service.
Service Name
-
-
This parameter specifies
the name of an E-AGGR
service.
MTU(bytes)
-
-
Setting this parameter is
not available.
Service Tag Role
-
-
Setting this parameter is
not available.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Location
Sink
-
This parameter specifies
whether a port functions
as a service source or sink.
UNI Parameters
Source
You can configure one or
more source ports but only
one sink port for an EAGGR service.
Otherwise, configuration
of the E-AGGR service
will fail.
Port
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
This parameter displays
UNI ports.
464
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLANs
1 to 4094
-
l This parameter
specifies the VLAN ID
for a UNI port.
l Set this parameter to a
numeral or several
numerals. When you
set this parameter to
several numerals, use
","s to separate
discrete values and use
" - "s to indicate
consecutive numerals.
For example, 1, 3 - 6
indicates numerals 1,
3, 4, 5, and 6.
l It is recommended that
you do not set this
parameter to null.
Priority
-
-
Setting this parameter is
not available.
NNI (PW) Parameters
Table A-8 Basic attributes
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Location
Sink
-
This parameter specifies
whether a port functions
as a service source or sink.
Source
You can configure one or
more source ports but only
one sink port for an EAGGR service.
Otherwise, configuration
of the E-AGGR service
will fail.
PW ID
1 to 4294967295
-
This parameter specifies
the ID of a PW.
PW Signaling Type
Static
Static
This parameter displays
the signaling type of a
PW.
You need to allocate the
same PW label for both
ends of a static PW.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
465
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW Type
Ethernet
Ethernet
l This parameter
specifies whether PTAGs will be added to
Ethernet frames when
the Ethernet frames are
encapsulated on a PW.
Ethernet Tagged Mode
l If Request VLAN
does not need to be
added to Ethernet
frames that are
encapsulated on a PW,
set this parameter to
Ethernet. If Request
VLAN needs to be
added to Ethernet
frames that are
encapsulated on a PW,
set this parameter to
Ethernet Tagged
Mode.
Currently, this parameter
can be set only to
Ethernet because EAGGR services on the
OptiX RTN 950 do not
support PWs in Ethernet
tagged mode.
PW Direction
-
-
This parameter displays
the direction of a PW.
PW Encapsulation Type
MPLS
MPLS
This parameter displays
the encapsulation type of
a PW.
PW Incoming Label
16 to 1048575
-
This parameter specifies
the ingress label for a PW.
PW Outgoing Label
16 to 1048575
-
This parameter specifies
the egress label for a PW.
Tunnel Selection Mode
-
-
This parameter displays
whether an existing
MPLS tunnel or a new
MPLS tunnel is used.
Tunnel Type
-
-
This parameter displays
the type of a tunnel.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
466
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel
-
-
This parameter requires
you to select an existing
static MPLS tunnel. If
there is no static MPLS
tunnel available, PW
creation will fail.
Peer LSR ID
-
-
This parameter specifies
the LSR ID for the NE at
the opposite end of a PW.
If an existing MPLS
tunnel is used, the peer
LSR ID is automatically
generated based on the
local LSR ID.
Table A-9 Advanced attributes
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Word
Not in use
Not in use
For ETH PWE3 services,
this parameter has a fixed
value of Not in use.
Control Channel Type
Alert Label
None
This parameter specifies
the control channel type,
which determines the PW
continuity check (CC)
mode.
l None: indicates that
virtual circuit
connectivity
verification (VCCV)
packets are not used.
l
l Alert Label: indicates
that VCCV packets in
Alert Label
encapsulation mode
are used.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
467
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCCV Verification
Mode
Ping
Ping
l This parameter
specifies the VCCV
verification mode,
which is used for a PW
CC test.
None
l If the LSP ping
function is used to
implement VCCV,
VCCV Verification
Mode cannot be set to
None.
Request VLAN
-
-
Setting this parameter is
not available.
TPID
-
-
Setting this parameter is
not available.
Parameters for a VLAN Forwarding Table
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Interface Type
V-UNI
V-UNI
This parameter specifies
the network attribute for a
source port.
Source Interface
-
-
This parameter specifies a
source port.
Source VLAN ID
1 to 4094
-
This parameter specifies
the source VLAN ID.
Sink Interface Type
V-UNI
V-UNI
This parameter specifies
the network attribute for
the sink port.
Sink Interface
-
-
This parameter specifies
the sink port.
Sink VLAN ID
1 to 4094
-
This parameter specifies
the sink VLAN ID.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
468
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
NOTE
l Regardless of whether VLAN ID swapping is required by an E-AGGR service, a VLAN forwarding table
needs to be configured, specifying the source and sink VLAN IDs of each VLAN-based service.
l A VLAN forwarding table enables VLAN ID swapping for an E-AGGR service. After a VLAN forwarding
table is created, a service from Source Interface will carry the VLAN ID specified in Sink VLAN ID when
leaving Sink Interface.
l For an E-AGGR service, the VLAN forwarding table specifies bidirectional VLAN ID swapping
relationships. This means that swapping from Sink VLAN ID to Source VLAN ID and swapping from
Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID will be implemented once a VLAN forwarding entry for changing
Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID is configured.
l For service aggregation from UNI ports to an NNI port, Source VLAN ID must take any of the VLAN IDs
that have been configured for UNI ports.
l For service aggregation from NNI ports to a UNI port, Sink VLAN ID must take any of the VLAN IDs that
have been configured for UNI ports.
QoS (PW)
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
-
-
This parameter displays
the ID of a PW.
Direction
-
-
l This parameter
displays the direction
of a PW.
l Egress: indicates the
egress direction of a
PW.
l Ingress: indicates the
ingress direction of a
PW.
PW Type
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
This parameter displays
the type of a PW.
469
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
-
-
This parameter displays or
specifies whether the
bandwidth limit function
is enabled for a PW to
prevent network
congestion.
l For transmission
channels, the
bandwidth limit
function controls the
bandwidth of one or
more PWs as required.
l For services, the
bandwidth limit
function controls the
bandwidth of each
ETH PWE3 service in
an MPLS tunnel,
because an ETH
PWE3 service
corresponds to a PW.
Policy
-
-
Setting this parameter is
not available.
CIR(Kbit/s)
-
-
This parameter displays or
specifies the committed
information rate (CIR) for
a PW.
The CIR is recommended
to be the same as the PIR.
CBS(Kbit/s)
-
-
This parameter displays or
specifies the committed
burst size (CBS) for a PW.
PIR(Kbit/s)
-
-
This parameter displays or
specifies the peak
information rate (PIR) for
a PW.
The PIR is recommended
to be the same as the CIR.
PBS(Kbit/s)
-
-
This parameter displays or
specifies the peak burst
size (PBS) for a PW.
EXP
-
-
Setting this parameter is
not available.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
470
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LSP Mode
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe: When an egress
node strips off the MPLS
tunnel labels in the
received service packets,
it does not renew the
packet scheduling
priorities.
A.6.1.8 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Services
This topic describes E-AGGR service parameters.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-AGGR Service from the Function
Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294
-
This parameter specifies
the ID of an E-AGGR
service.
Service Name
-
-
This parameter specifies
the name of an E-AGGR
service.
MTU(byte)
-
-
Setting this parameter is
not available.
Service Tag Role
-
-
Setting this parameter is
not available. OptiX RTN
950.
Deployment Status
-
-
This parameter displays
whether an E-AGGR
service has been deployed.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ID
-
-
This parameter displays
the ID of a UNI port.
UNI Parameters
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
471
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Location
-
-
This parameter displays
whether a port functions
as a service source or sink.
Port
-
-
This parameter displays
UNI ports.
VLANs
-
-
This parameter displays
the VLAN ID of a UNI
port.
Priority
-
-
Setting this parameter is
not available.
NNI (PW) Parameters
Table A-10 Basic attributes
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ID
-
-
This parameter displays
the ID of an NNI port.
Location
-
-
This parameter displays
whether a port functions
as a service source or sink.
PW ID
-
-
This parameter displays
the ID of a PW.
PW Status
-
-
This parameter displays
whether a PW is enabled.
PW Signaling Type
-
-
This parameter displays
the signaling type of a
PW.
PW Type
-
-
This parameter displays
the type of a PW.
PW Direction
-
-
This parameter displays
the direction of a PW.
PW Encapsulation Type
-
-
This parameter displays
the encapsulation type of
a PW.
PW Incoming Label
-
-
This parameter displays
the ingress label of a PW.
PW Outgoing Label
-
-
This parameter displays
the egress label of a PW.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
472
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Peer LSR ID
-
-
This parameter displays
the LSR ID for the NE at
the opposite end of a PW.
Tunnel Type
-
-
This parameter displays
the type of a tunnel.
Tunnel
-
-
This parameter displays
the tunnel carrying PWs.
Select an existing static
MPLS tunnel. If there is
no static MPLS tunnel
available, PW creation
will fail.
Control Word
-
-
This parameter displays
whether the control word
is used.
Control Channel Type
-
-
This parameter displays
the control channel type.
VCCV Verification
Mode
-
-
This parameter displays
the VCCV verification
mode.
Local Operation Status
-
-
This parameter displays
the PW running status at
the local end.
Local Operation Status
-
-
This parameter displays
the PW running status at
the opposite end.
Overall Operation
Status
-
-
This parameter displays
the overall PW running
status.
Request VLAN
-
-
This parameter displays
the request VLAN ID.
Automatic Tunnel
Selection Policy
-
-
This parameter displays
the automatic tunnel
selection policy.
TPID
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not allow TPIDs in
request VLANs to be
specified for a PW.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
473
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for a VLAN Forwarding Table
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Interface Type
V-UNI
V-UNI
This parameter specifies
the network attribute for a
source port.
Source Interface
-
-
This parameter specifies a
source port.
Source VLAN ID
1 to 4094
-
This parameter specifies
the source VLAN ID.
Sink Interface Type
V-UNI
V-UNI
This parameter specifies
the network attribute for
the sink port.
Sink Interface
-
-
This parameter specifies
the sink port.
Sink VLAN ID
1 to 4094
-
This parameter specifies
the sink VLAN ID.
NOTE
l Regardless of whether VLAN ID swapping is required by an E-AGGR service, a VLAN forwarding table
needs to be configured, specifying the source and sink VLAN IDs of each VLAN-based service.
l A VLAN forwarding table enables VLAN ID swapping for an E-AGGR service. After a VLAN forwarding
table is created, a service from Source Interface will carry the VLAN ID specified in Sink VLAN ID when
leaving Sink Interface.
l For an E-AGGR service, the VLAN forwarding table specifies bidirectional VLAN ID swapping
relationships. This means that swapping from Sink VLAN ID to Source VLAN ID and swapping from
Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID will be implemented once a VLAN forwarding entry for changing
Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID is configured.
l For service aggregation from UNI ports to an NNI port, Source VLAN ID must take any of the VLAN IDs
that have been configured for UNI ports.
l For service aggregation from NNI ports to a UNI port, Sink VLAN ID must take any of the VLAN IDs that
have been configured for UNI ports.
QoS (PW)
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
-
-
This parameter displays
the ID of a PW.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
474
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Direction
-
-
l This parameter
displays the direction
of a PW.
l Egress: indicates the
egress direction of a
PW.
l Ingress: indicates the
ingress direction of a
PW.
PW Type
-
-
This parameter displays
the type of a PW.
Bandwidth Limit
-
-
This parameter displays or
specifies whether the
bandwidth limit function
is enabled for a PW to
prevent network
congestion.
l For transmission
channels, the
bandwidth limit
function controls the
bandwidth of one or
more PWs as required.
l For services, the
bandwidth limit
function controls the
bandwidth of each
ETH PWE3 service in
an MPLS tunnel,
because an ETH
PWE3 service
corresponds to a PW.
Policy
-
-
Setting this parameter is
not available.
CIR(Kbit/s)
-
-
This parameter displays or
specifies the committed
information rate (CIR) for
a PW.
The CIR is recommended
to be the same as the PIR.
CBS(Kbit/s)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
This parameter displays or
specifies the committed
burst size (CBS) for a PW.
475
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PIR(Kbit/s)
-
-
This parameter displays or
specifies the peak
information rate (PIR) for
a PW.
The PIR is recommended
to be the same as the CIR.
PBS(Kbit/s)
-
-
This parameter displays or
specifies the peak burst
size (PBS) for a PW.
EXP
-
-
Setting this parameter is
not available.
LSP Mode
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe: When an egress
node strips off the MPLS
tunnel labels in the
received service packets,
it does not renew the
packet scheduling
priorities.
A.6.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet protocol.
A.6.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protection > ERPS Management.
2.
Click New.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
476
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ERPS ID
1 to 8
-
l This parameter
specifies the ID of the
Ethernet ring
protection switching
(ERPS) instance.
l The IDs of ERPS
instances on an NE
must be different from
each other.
East Port
-
-
This parameter specifies
the east port of the ERPS
instance.
West Port
-
-
This parameter specifies
the west port of the ERPS
instance.
RPL Owner Ring Node
Flag
Yes
No
l This parameter
specifies whether the
node on the ring is the
ring protection link
(RPL) owner.
No
l Only one node on the
ring can be set as the
RPL owner for each
Ethernet ring.
l An RPL owner needs
to balance the traffic
on each link of an
Ethernet ring.
Therefore, it is not
recommended that you
select a convergence
node as an RPL owner.
Instead, select the NE
that is farthest away
from the convergence
node as an RPL owner.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
477
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
RPL Port
-
-
l This parameter
specifies the RPL port.
l There is only one RPL
port and this RPL port
must be the east or
west port on the RPL
owner node.
l It is recommended that
you set the east port on
an RPL owner as an
RPL Port.
Control VLAN
1 to 4094
-
l This parameter
specifies the VLAN ID
of Control VLAN.
l Each node on the
Ethernet ring transmits
the R-APS packets on
the dedicated ring APS
(R-APS) channel to
ensure consistency
between the nodes
when the ERPS
switching is
performed. Control
VLAN is used for
isolating the dedicated
R-APS channel.
Therefore, the VLAN
ID in Control VLAN
cannot be duplicate
with the VLAN IDs
that are contained in
the service packets.
l The ID of a Control
VLAN must not be the
same as any VLAN ID
used by Ethernet
services. All ring
nodes should use the
same Control VLAN
ID.
Destination Node
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
01-19-A7-00-00-01
01-19-A7-00-00-01
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
This parameter indicates
the MAC address of the
destination node. The
default destination MAC
address in the R-APS
packets is always 01-19A7-00-00-01.
478
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.6.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)
management.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ERPS ID
1 to 8
-
This parameter indicates
the ID of the ERPS
instance.
East Port
-
-
This parameter indicates
the east port of the ERPS
instance.
West Port
-
-
This parameter indicates
the west port of the ERPS
instance.
RPL Owner Ring Node
Flag
Yes
-
This parameter indicates
whether a node on the ring
is the ring protection link
(RPL) owner.
RPL Port
-
-
This parameter indicates
the RPL port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
No
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
479
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control VLAN
1 to 4094
-
l This parameter
indicates or specifies
the VLAN ID of
Control VLAN.
l Each node on the
Ethernet ring transmits
the R-APS packets on
the dedicated ring APS
(R-APS) channel to
ensure consistency
between the nodes
when the ERPS
switching is
performed. Control
VLAN is used for
isolating the dedicated
R-APS channel.
Therefore, the VLAN
ID in Control VLAN
cannot be duplicate
with the VLAN IDs
that are contained in
the service packets or
inband DCN packets.
l The Control VLAN
must be set to the same
value for all the NEs
on an ERPS ring.
Destination Node
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
01-19-A7-00-00-01
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
This parameter indicates
the MAC address of the
destination node. The
default destination MAC
address in the R-APS
packets is always 01-19A7-00-00-01.
480
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Hold-Off Time(ms)
0 to 10000, in step of 100
0
l This parameter
indicates or specifies
the hold-off time of the
ERPS hold-off timer.
l The hold-off timer is
used for negotiating
the protection
switching sequence
when the ERPS
coexists with other
protection schemes so
that the fault can be
rectified in the case of
other protection
switching (such as
LAG protection)
before the ERPS
occurs. When a node
on the ring detects one
or more new faults, it
starts up the hold-off
timer if the preset
hold-off time is set to a
value that is not 0.
During the hold-off
time, the fault is not
reported to trigger an
ERPS. When the holdoff timer times out, the
node checks the link
status regardless
whether the fault that
triggers the startup of
the timer exists. If the
fault exists, the node
reports it to trigger an
ERPS. This fault can
be the same as or
different from the fault
that triggers the initial
startup of the hold-off
timer.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
481
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Guard Time(ms)
10 to 2000, in step of 10
500
l This parameter
indicates or specifies
the guard time of the
ERPS guard timer.
l The nodes on the ring
continuously forward
the R-APS packets to
the Ethernet ring. As a
result, the outdated RAPS packets may exist
on the ring network.
After a node on the
ring receives the
outdated R-APS
packets, an incorrect
ERPS may occur. The
ERPS guard timer is an
R-APS timer used for
preventing a node on
the ring from receiving
outdated R-APS
packets. When a faulty
node on the ring
detects that the
switching condition is
cleared, the node starts
up the guard timer and
starts to forward the RAPS (NR) packets.
During this period, the
R-APS packets
received by the node
are discarded. The
received R-APS
packets are forwarded
only after the time of
the guard timer
expires.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
482
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(mm:ss)
5 to 12, in step of 1
5
l This parameter
indicates or specifies
the WTR time of the
WRT timer in the case
of ERPS protection.
l The WTR time refers
to the duration from
the time when the
working channel is
restored to the time
when the switching is
released. When the
working channel is
restored, the WTR
timer of the RPL
owner starts up. In
addition, a signal that
indicates the operation
of the WTR timer is
continuously output in
the timing process.
When the WTR timer
times out and no
switching request of a
higher priority is
received, the signal
indicating the
operation of the WTR
timer is not
transmitted. In
addition, the WTR
release signal is
continuously output.
l The WTR timer is used
to prevent frequent
switching caused by
the unstable working
channel.
Packet Transmit
Interval(s)
1 to 10
5
This parameter displays or
specifies the interval for
sending R-APS packets
periodically.
Entity Level
0 to 7
4
This parameter indicates
or specifies the level of the
maintenance entity.
Last Switching Request
-
-
This parameter indicates
the last switching request.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
483
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
RB Status
-
-
This parameter indicates
the RB (RPL Blocked)
status of the packets
received by the working
node.
l noRB: The RPL is not
blocked.
l RB: The RPL is
blocked.
DNF Status
-
-
This parameter indicates
the DNF status of the
packets received by the
working node.
l noDNF: The R-APS
packets do not contain
the DNF flag. In this
case, the packets are
forwarded by the node
that detects the fault on
a non-RPL link, and
the node that receives
the packets is
requested to clear the
forwarding address
table.
l DNF: The R-APS
packets contain the
DNF flags. In this
case, the packets are
forwarded by the node
that detects the fault on
an RPL link, and the
node that receives the
packets is informed
not to clear the
forwarding address
table.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
484
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
State Machine Status
-
-
This parameter indicates
the status of the state
machine at the working
node.
l Idle: The Ethernet ring
is in normal state. For
example, no node on
the Ethernet ring
detects any faults or
receives the R_APS
(NR, RB) packets.
l Protection: The
Ethernet ring is in
protected state. For
example, a fault on the
node triggers the
ERPS, or a node on the
ring is in the WTR
period after the fault is
rectified.
Node Carried with
Current Packet
-
-
This parameter indicates
the MAC address carried
in the R-APS packets
received by the current
node. The MAC address
refers to the MAC address
of the source node that
initiates the switching
request.
East Port Status
-
-
Displays the status of the
east port.
West Port Status
-
-
Displays the status of the
west port.
A.6.2.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Port Group Parameters tab.
3.
Click Create.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
485
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protocol Type
MSTP
MSTP
This parameter specifies
the protocol type.
STP
l MSTP: stands for
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol. The
OptiX RTN 950
supports the CIST
MSTP only.
l STP: stands for
Spanning Tree
Protocol.
Enable Protocol
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter
specifies whether to
enable the protocol of
the port group or a
member port in the
port group.
l If the STP or MSTP is
enabled, the spanning
tree topology is
automatically reconfigured. As a
result, the services are
interrupted.
Parameters for Application Ports
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
This parameter specifies
the board where the
member of port group is
located.
Available Port List
-
-
This parameter indicates
the available port list in
which a port can be added
to the port group.
Selected Port List
-
-
This parameter indicates
the selected ports that can
be added to the port group.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
486
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.6.2.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Port Group Parameters tab.
3.
On the main interface, select the port group to be configured.
4.
Click Config. The Config Port Group dialog box is displayed.
Parameters for the Added Port
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
This parameter specifies
the board where the
member of port group is
located.
Available Port List
-
-
This parameter indicates
the available port list in
which a port needs to be
added to the port group.
Selected Port List
-
-
This parameter indicates
the selected ports that
need to be added to the
port group.
A.6.2.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to MSTP bridges.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Bridge Parameters tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
487
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Group ID
-
-
l This parameter
indicates the ID of the
port group.
l This parameter can be
set to only the port
group ID that is
automatically
allocated.
MST Domain Name
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Redaction Level
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Mapping List
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Group ID
-
-
l This parameter
indicates the ID of the
port group.
Bridge Parameters
l This parameter can be
set to only the port
Group ID that is
automatically
allocated.
MST Domain Max Hop
Count
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
20
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Specifies the maximum
hop count of the MSTP.
488
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Network Diameter
2 to 7
7
l This parameter
specifies the MSTP
network diameter.
l Network Diameter is
related to the link
whose number of
switches is the most
and is indicated by the
number of switches
that are connected to
the link. When you set
Network Diameter
for the switches, the
MSTP automatically
sets Max Age(s),
Hello Time(s), and
Forward Delay(s) to
the more appropriate
values for the
switches.
l If the value of
Network Diameter is
greater, the network is
in a larger scale.
Hello Time(s)
1 to 10
2
l This parameter
specifies the interval
for transmitting the
CBPDU packets
through the bridge.
l The greater the value
of this parameter, the
less the network
resources that are
occupied by the
spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
489
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Max Age(s)
6 to 40
20
l This parameter
specifies the
maximum age of the
CBPDU packet that is
recorded by the port.
l The greater the value,
the longer the
transmission distance
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater. When the
value of this parameter
is greater, it is less
possible that the bridge
detects the link fault in
a timely manner and
thus the network
adaptation ability is
reduced.
Forward Delay(s)
4 to 30
15
l This parameter
specifies the holdoff
time of a port in the
listening state and in
the learning state.
l The greater the value,
the longer the delay of
the network state
change. Hence, the
topology changes are
slower and the
recovery in the case of
faults is slower.
Port Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates
the port in the port group.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
490
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable Edge Attribute
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter
specifies the
management edge
attributes of the port.
Enabled
l This parameter
specifies whether to
set the port as an edge
port. The edge port
refers to the bridge
port that is connected
to the LAN. In normal
cases, this port does
not receive or transmit
BPDU messages.
l This parameter can be
set to Enabled only
when the port is
directly connected to
the data
communications
terminal equipment,
such as a computer. In
other cases, it is
recommended that you
use the default value.
Actual Edge Attribute
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
This parameter indicates
the actual management
edge attributes of the port.
491
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Point-to-Point Attribute
false
auto
l This parameter
specifies the point-topoint attribute of the
port.
true
auto
l false: forced nonpoint-to-point link
attribute
l true: forced point-topoint link attribute
l auto: automatically
detected point-topoint link attribute
l If this parameter is set
to auto, the bridge
determines Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute of the port
according to the actual
working mode. If the
actual working mode
is full-duplex, the
actual point-to-point
attribute is true. If the
actual working mode
is half-duplex, Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute is false.
l Only the designated
port whose Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute is "True"
can transmit the rapid
state migration request
and response.
l It is recommended that
you use the default
value.
Actual Point-to-Point
Attribute
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
This parameter indicates
the actual point-to-point
attribute of the port.
492
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Max Transmit Packet
Count
1 to 255
3
l This parameter
specifies the
maximum number of
packets to be
transmitted.
l The maximum number
of packets to be
transmitted by the port
refers to the maximum
number of MSTP
packets that the port
can transmit within 1s.
l This parameter needs
to be set according to
the planning
information.
A.6.2.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the MSTP CIST.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the CIST&MSTI Parameters tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Group
-
-
This parameter specifies
the port group.
MSTI ID
0
0
This parameter indicates
the MSTI ID. The value 0
indicates common and
internal spanning tree
(CIST). The OptiX RTN
950 supports only the
MSTP that uses CIST.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
493
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bridge Priority
0 to 61440, in step of 4096
32768
l The most significant
16 bits of the bridge ID
indicate the priority of
the bridge.
l When the value is
smaller, the priority is
higher. As a result, the
bridge is more possible
to be selected as the
root bridge.
l If the priorities of all
the bridges in the STP/
MSTP network use the
same value, the bridge
whose MAC address is
the smallest is selected
as the root bridge.
Port Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates
the port in the port group.
Priority
0 to 240, in step of 16
128
l The most significant
eight bits of the port ID
indicate the port
priority.
l When the value is
smaller, the priority is
higher.
Path Cost
1 to 200000000
FE Port: 200000
GE Port: 20000
l This parameter
indicates the status of
the network that the
port is connected to.
l In the case of the
bridges on both ends of
the path, set this
parameter to the same
value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
494
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.6.2.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About
the CIST
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the running information about the MSTP
CIST.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the CIST Running Information tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Group ID
-
-
This parameter indicates
the ID of the port group.
Protocol Running Mode
MSTP
-
l This parameter
indicates the running
mode of the protocol.
STP
l MSTP: stands for
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol. The
OptiX RTN 950
supports only the
CIST-based MSTP.
l STP: stands for
Spanning Tree
Protocol.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
495
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bridge Priority
0 to 61440, in step of 4096
32768
l This parameter
indicates the priority
of the bridge.
l The most significant
16 bits of the bridge ID
indicate the priority of
the bridge.
l When the value is
smaller, the priority is
higher. As a result, the
bridge is more possible
to be selected as the
root bridge.
l If the priorities of all
the bridges in the STP
network use the same
value, the bridge
whose MAC address is
the smallest is selected
as the root bridge.
Bridge MAC Address
-
-
This parameter indicates
the MAC address of the
bridge.
Root Bridge Priority
0 to 61440, in step of 4096
32768
This parameter indicates
the priority of the root
bridge.
Root Bridge MAC
Address
-
-
This parameter indicates
the MAC address of the
root bridge.
External Path Cost
ERPC
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Domain Root Bridge
Priority
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Domain Root Bridge
MAC Address
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Internal Path Cost IRPC
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
496
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Root Port Priority
0 to 240, in step of 16
128
l This parameter
indicates the priority
of the root port.
l The most significant
eight bits of the ID of
the root port indicate
the priority of the root
port.
l When the value is
smaller, the priority is
higher.
Root Port
-
-
This parameter indicates
the root port.
Hello Time(s)
-
2
l This parameter
indicates the interval
for transmitting
CBPDU packets
through the bridge.
l The greater the value
of this parameter, the
less the network
resources that are
occupied by the
spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.
Max Age(s)
6 to 40
20
l This parameter
specifies the
maximum age of the
CBPDU packet that is
recorded by the port.
l The greater the value,
the longer the
transmission distance
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater. When the
value of this parameter
is greater, it is less
possible that the bridge
detects the link fault in
a timely manner and
thus the network
adaptation ability is
reduced.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
497
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Forward Delay(s)
4 to 30
15
l This parameter
specifies the holdoff
time of a port in the
listening state and in
the learning state.
l The greater the value,
the longer the delay of
the network state
change. Hence, the
topology changes are
slower and the
recovery in the case of
faults is slower.
MST Domain Max Hop
Count
-
-
This parameter indicates
the maximum hop count
of the MSTP.
Topology Change Count
-
-
This parameter indicates
the identifier of the
topology change.
Last Topology Change
Time(s)
-
-
This parameter indicates
the duration of the last
topology change.
Topology Change Count
-
-
This parameter indicates
the count of the topology
changes.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates
the port in the port group.
Enable Protocol
Enabled
Disabled
This parameter indicates
whether the protocol of
the port group or a
member of the port group
is enabled.
Disabled
This parameter indicates
the role of a port.
Port Parameters
Disabled
Port Role
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
498
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Status
Discarding
Discarding
This parameter indicates
the state of a port.
Learning
l Discarding: receives
only BPDU packets
Forwarding
l Learning: only
receives or transmits
BPDU packets
l Forwarding: forwards
user traffic, and
transmits/receives
BPDU packets
Priority
0 to 240, in step of 16
128
l The most significant
eight bits of the port ID
indicate the port
priority.
l When the value is
smaller, the priority is
higher.
Path Cost
1 to 200000000
200000
l This parameter
indicates the status of
the network that the
port is connected to.
l In the case of the
bridges on both ends of
the path, set this
parameter to the same
value.
Bridge Priority
0 to 61440, in step of 4096
32768
l The most significant
16 bits of the bridge ID
indicate the priority of
the bridge.
l When the value is
smaller, the priority is
higher. As a result, the
bridge is more possible
to be selected as the
root bridge.
l If the priorities of all
the bridges in the STP
network use the same
value, the bridge
whose MAC address is
the smallest is selected
as the root bridge.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
499
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bridge MAC Address
-
-
This parameter indicates
the MAC address of the
bridge.
Designated Port Priority
0 to 240, in step of 16
0
l The most significant
eight bits of the port ID
indicate the port
priority.
l When the value is
smaller, the priority is
higher.
Design Port
-
0
This parameter indicates
the designated port.
Edge Port Attribute
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter
specifies the
management edge
attributes of the port.
Enabled
l This parameter
specifies whether to
set the port as an edge
port. The edge port
refers to the bridge
port that is connected
to the LAN. In normal
cases, this port does
not receive or transmit
BPDU messages.
l This parameter can be
set to Enabled only
when the port is
directly connected to
the data
communications
terminal equipment,
such as a computer. In
other cases, it is
recommended that you
use the default value.
Actual Edge Port
Attribute
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
Disabled
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
This parameter indicates
the actual management
edge attributes of the port.
500
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Point to Point
false
auto
l This parameter
specifies the point-topoint attribute of the
port.
true
auto
l false: forced nonpoint-to-point link
attribute
l true: forced point-topoint link attribute
l auto: automatically
detected point-topoint link attribute
l If this parameter is set
to auto, the bridge
determines Actual
Point to Point
Attribute of the port
according to the actual
working mode. If the
actual working mode
is full-duplex, the
actual point-to-point
attribute is true. If the
actual working mode
is half-duplex, Actual
Point to Point
Attribute is false.
l Only the designated
port whose Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute is "True"
can transmit the rapid
state migration request
and response.
l It is recommended that
you use the default
value.
Actual Point to Point
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
This parameter indicates
the actual point-to-point
attribute of the port.
501
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Max Count of
Transmitting Message
1 to 255
3
l This parameter
indicates the
maximum number of
packets to be
transmitted.
l The maximum number
of packets to be
transmitted by the port
refers to the maximum
number of MSTP
packets that the port
can transmit within 1s.
Protocol Running Mode
STP
-
MSTP
l This parameter
indicates the running
mode of the protocol.
l MSTP: stands for
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol. The
OptiX RTN 950
supports only the
CIST-based MSTP.
l STP: stands for
Spanning Tree
Protocol.
Hello Time(s)
1 to 10
2
l This parameter
indicates the interval
for transmitting the
CBPDU packets
through the bridge.
l The greater the value
of this parameter, the
less the network
resources that are
occupied by the
spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
502
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Max Age(s)
6 to 40
20
l This parameter
specifies the
maximum age of the
CBPDU packet that is
recorded by the port.
l The greater the value,
the longer the
transmission distance
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater. When the
value of this parameter
is greater, it is less
possible that the bridge
detects the link fault in
a timely manner and
thus the network
adaptation ability is
reduced.
4 to 30
Forward Delay(s)
15
l This parameter
specifies the holding
time of a port in the
listening state and in
the learning state.
l The greater the value,
the longer the delay of
the network state
change. Hence, the
topology changes are
slower and the
recovery in the case of
faults is slower.
-
Remain Hop
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
A.6.2.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG
Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).
Navigation Path
1.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
503
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
2.
Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.
3.
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAG No.
-
1
l This parameter
specifies the LAG
number to be set
manually.
l This parameter is valid
only when
Automatically
Assign is not selected.
Automatically Assign
Selected
Selected
Deselected
l This parameter
indicates whether
LAG No. is allocated
automatically.
l When Automatically
Assign is selected,
LAG No. cannot be
set.
LAG Name
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
This parameter specifies
the LAG name.
504
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAG Type
Static
Static
l Static: You can create
a LAG. When you add
or delete a member
port to or from the
LAG, the Link
Aggregation Control
Protocol (LACP)
protocol is required. In
a LAG, a port can be in
selected, standby, or
unselected state. The
aggregation
information is
exchanged among
different equipment
through the LACP
protocol to ensure that
the aggregation
information is the
same among all the
nodes.
Manual
l Manual: You can
create a LAG. When
you add or delete a
member port, the
LACP protocol is not
required. The port can
be in the up or down
state. The system
determines whether to
aggregate a port
according to its
physical state (UP or
DOWN), working
mode, and rate.
Switch Protocol
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Switch Mode
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Link Trace Protocol
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
505
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Revertive Mode
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive Mode
l Revertive Mode can
be set only when Load
Sharing is set to NonSharing.
Non-Revertive Mode
l When Revertive
Mode is set to
Revertive Mode, the
services are switched
back to the former
working channel after
this channel is restored
to normal.
l When Revertive
Mode is set to NonRevertive Mode, the
status of the LAG does
not change after the
former working
channel is restored to
normal. That is, the
services are still
transmitted on the
protection channel.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
506
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Load Sharing
Sharing
Non-Sharing
l Set Load Sharing to
the same value as the
peer equipment. It is
recommended that you
set Load Sharing to
Non-Sharing at both
ends if the LAGs are
used for protection and
set Load Sharing to
Sharing at both ends if
the LAGs are used for
increasing
bandwidths.
Non-Sharing
l Sharing: Each member
link of a LAG
processes traffic at the
same time and shares
the traffic load. The
sharing mode can
increase a bandwidth
utilization for the link.
When the LAG
members change, or
certain links fail, the
system automatically
re-allocates the traffic.
l Non-Sharing: Only
one member link of a
LAG carries traffic,
and the other link is in
the standby state. In
this case, a hot backup
mechanism is
provided. When the
active link of a LAG is
faulty, the system
activates the standby
link, thus preventing
link failure.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
507
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Load Sharing Hash
Algorithm
Source MAC
Source MAC
l This parameter is valid
only when Load
Sharing of a LAG is
set to Sharing.
Destination MAC
Source and Destination
MAC
Source IP
Destination IP
Source and Destination IP
MPLS Label
l The load sharing
computation methods
include computation
based on MAC
addresses (based on
the source MAC
address, based on the
destination MAC
address, and based on
the source MAC
address + sink MAC
address), computation
based on IP addresses
(based on the source IP
address, based on the
destination IP address,
and based on the
source IP address and
sink IP address), and
computation based on
MPLS labels.
l After the configuration
data is deployed, Load
Sharing Hash
Algorithm takes
effect for the entire
NE.
l For PW-carried UNINNI E-Line services,
Load Sharing Hash
Algorithm cannot be
set to MPLS Label.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
508
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
System Priority
0 to 65535
32768
l System Priority
indicates the priority
of a LAG. The smaller
the value of System
Priority, the higher
the priority.
l When a local LAG
negotiates with an
opposite LAG through
LACP packets, both
LAGs can obtain the
system priorities of
each other. Then, the
LAG of the higher
system priority is
considered as the
comparison result of
both LAGs so that the
aggregation
information is
consistent at both
LAGs. If the priorities
of both LAGs are the
same, the system MAC
addresses are
compared. Then, the
comparison result
based on the LAG with
smaller system MAC
address is considered
as the result of both
LAGs and is used to
ensure that the
aggregation
information is
consistent at both
LAGs.
WTR Time(min)
1 to 30
10
l Specifies the WTR
time for the LAG.
l WTR Time(min)
takes effect only when
Revertive Mode is
Revertive Mode.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
509
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Switch LAG upon Air
Interface SD
Disabled
Enabled
l This parameter
specifies whether to
enable the switching
triggered by bit errors.
Enabled
l If Switch LAG upon
Air Interface SD is set
to Enabled, the
MW_BER_SD alarm
will trigger the LAG
switching at the air
interface.
Port Settings Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Main Board
-
-
l This parameter
specifies the main
board in a LAG.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Main Port
-
-
l This parameter
specifies the main port
in a LAG.
l After a LAG is created,
you can add Ethernet
services to the main
port only. Services
cannot be added to a
slave port. When Load
Sharing is set to NonSharing, the link
connected to the main
port is used to transmit
the services, and the
link connected to the
slave port is used for
protection.
Board (Available Slave
Ports)
-
-
l This parameter
specifies the slave
board in a LAG.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
510
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port (Available Slave
Ports)
-
-
l This parameter
specifies the salve port
in a LAG.
l The slave ports in a
LAG are fixed. Unless
they are manually
modified, the system
does not automatically
add them to or delete
them from the LAG.
Selected Standby Ports
-
-
This parameter indicates
the selected slave ports.
A.6.2.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation
This section describes the parameters for port priorities and system priorities.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Port Priority tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates
the port whose priority can
be set.
Port Priority
0 to 65535
32768
l This parameter
indicates the priorities
of the ports in a LAG
as defined in the LACP
protocol. The smaller
the value, the higher
the priority.
l When ports are added
into a LAG, the port of
the highest priority is
preferred for service
transmission.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
511
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.6.2.10 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Point LPT
This topic describes the parameters that are related to point-to-point LPT.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT
Management > LPT from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Point-to-Point LPT tab.
Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Binding Status
-
-
This parameter displays
the binding status of pointto-point services.
Primary Function Point
-
-
This parameter displays
the port where the primary
point of point-to-point
LPT resides.
Secondary Function
Point Type
-
-
This parameter displays
the type of secondary
point for point-to-point
LPT.
Secondary Function
Point
-
-
This parameter displays
the port where the
secondary point of pointto-point LPT resides.
LPT Instance Status
-
-
This parameter displays
the status of point-to-point
LPT.
LPT Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
This parameter displays or
specifies the enabling
status of point-to-point
LPT.
Disabled
The LPT function can take
effect only when LPT
Enabled is set to
Enabled.
Recovery Times(s)
1-600
1
This parameter displays or
specifies the recovery time
of point-to-point LPT.
Hold-Off Times(ms)
0-10000
1000
This parameter displays or
specifies the hold-off time
of point-to-point LPT.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
512
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Switching Mode
-
-
This parameter displays
the switching mode of
point-to-point LPT. Pointto-point LPT is available
only in strict mode.
Fault Detection Mode
PW OAM
LPT OAM
This parameter displays
the fault detection mode of
point-to-multipoint LPT.
LPT OAM
l LPT-enabled NEs
periodically transmit
LPT OAM packets in
specific formats to
check the status of an
L2 service network or
QinQ service network.
If the LPT OAM
packets are absent for
3.5 fault detection
periods or the number
and contents of
received LPT OAM
packets are incorrect,
the NEs consider that a
network-side fault
occurred and the LPT
switching is triggered.
l To detect a networkside fault on a PSN,
LPT OAM or PW
OAM packets can be
used. Note that the PW
OAM function must be
enabled on NEs before
usage of PW OAM
packets.
Fault Detection Period
(100ms)
10-100
10
This parameter displays or
specifies the fault
detection period of pointto-point LPT.
User-Side Port Status
-
-
This parameter displays
the status of a user-side
port.
L2 net ID-L2 Peer net ID
-
-
This parameter displays
the NET IDs of LPT
packet out ports at both
ends.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
513
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.6.2.11 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Point LPT
This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating point-to-point LPT.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT
Management > LPT from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Point-to-Point LPT tab.
3.
Click Bind in the lower right corner of the pane based on the type of service network.
4.
Choose PW+QinQ or L2 net from the shortcut menu based on the type of service network.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
L2 net ID
1-4294967295
-
This parameter specifies
the NET ID of LPT packet
out port at the local end.
L2 Peer net ID
1-4294967295
-
This parameter specifies
the NET ID of LPT packet
out port at the opposite
end.
Primary Function Point
-
-
This parameter specifies
the port where the primary
point of point-to-point
LPT resides.
VLAN ID
1-4094
-
This parameter specifies
the VLAN ID that is
carried by a point-to-point
LPT packet to traverse an
L2 network.
LPT package out port
-
-
This parameter specifies
the out port of a point-topoint LPT packet.
A.6.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Multipoint LPT
This topic describes the parameters that are related to point-to-multipoint LPT.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT
Management > LPT from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Point-to-Multipoint LPT tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
514
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters of Primary Point
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Primary Function Point
Type
-
-
This parameter displays
the type of primary point
for point-to-multipoint
LPT.
Primary Function Point
-
-
This parameter displays
the port where the primary
point of point-tomultipoint LPT resides.
LPT Instance Status
-
-
This parameter displays
the status of point-tomultipoint LPT.
LPT Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
This parameter displays
the enabling status of
point-to-multipoint LPT.
Disabled
Recovery Times(s)
1-600
1
This parameter displays or
specifies the recovery time
of point-to-multipoint
LPT.
Hold-Off Times(ms)
0-10000
1000
This parameter displays or
specifies the hold-off time
of point-to-multipoint
LPT.
Switching Mode
Strict mode
Strict mode
This parameter displays
the switching mode of
point-to-multipoint LPT.
Point-to-point LPT is
available only in strict
mode.
Non-strict mode
l Strict mode
A primary point
triggers LPT switching
when all its secondary
points detect faults.
l Non-strict mode
A primary point
triggers LPT switching
when anyone of its
secondary points
detects a fault.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
515
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Fault Detection Mode
PW OAM
LPT OAM
This parameter displays
the fault detection mode of
point-to-multipoint LPT.
LPT OAM
l LPT-enabled NEs
periodically transmit
LPT OAM packets in
specific formats to
check the status of an
L2 service network or
QinQ service network.
If the LPT OAM
packets are absent for
3.5 fault detection
periods or the number
and contents of
received LPT OAM
packets are incorrect,
the NEs consider that a
network-side fault
occurred and the LPT
switching is triggered.
l To detect a networkside fault on a PSN,
LPT OAM or PW
OAM packets can be
used. Note that the PW
OAM function must be
enabled on NEs before
usage of PW OAM
packets.
Fault Detection Period
(100ms)
10-100
10
This parameter displays or
specifies the fault
detection period of pointto-multipoint LPT.
User-Side Port Status
-
-
This parameter displays
the status of a user-side
port.
L2 net ID-L2 Peer net ID
-
-
This parameter displays
the NET IDs of LPT
packet out ports at both
ends, when the service
network is an L2 network.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
516
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters of Secondary Point
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Access Point Type
-
-
This parameter displays
the type of second point
for point-to-multipoint
LPT.
Access Point
-
-
This parameter displays
the port or PW ID for the
secondary point of pointto-multipoint LPT.
User-Side Port Status
-
-
This parameter displays
the status of a user-side
port.
L2 net ID-L2 Peer net ID
-
-
This parameter displays
the NET IDs of LPT
packet out ports at both
ends, when the service
network is an L2 network.
A.6.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Multipoint
LPT
This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating point-to-multipoint LPT.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT
Management > LPT from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Point-to-Multipoint LPT tab.
3.
Click New in the lower right corner of the pane based on the type of service network.
4.
Choose PW, QinQ, or L2 net from the shortcut menu based on the type of service network.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
517
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters of primary point
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Point Type
UNI
-
This parameter specifies
the type of primary point
for point-to-multipoint
LPT. The value range of
this parameter pertains to
the type of service
network.
PW
QinQ
L2 net
If the primary point is on
the access side, select
UNI; if the primary point
is on the network side, set
the parameter as follows.
l If the service network
is a PSN, select PW.
l If the service network
is a QinQ network,
select QinQ.
l If the service network
is an L2 network,
select L2 net.
Board
-
-
This parameter specifies
the board where the
primary point of point-tomultipoint LPT resides.
This parameter is valid
only when Point Type is
set to UNI.
Port
-
-
This parameter specifies
the port where the primary
point of point-tomultipoint LPT resides.
This parameter is valid
only when Point Type is
set to UNI.
Point ID
-
-
This parameter specifies
the service ID for the
primary point of point-tomultipoint LPT.
This parameter is valid
only when Point Type is
set to PW or QinQ.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
518
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
L2 net ID
1-4294967295
-
This parameter specifies
the NET ID of a local NE.
This parameter is valid
only when Point Type of
the primary point is set to
UNI, and when Point
Type of the secondary
point is set to L2 net.
L2 Peer net ID
1-4294967295
-
This parameter specifies
the NET ID of an opposite
NE.
This parameter is valid
only when Point Type is
set to L2 net.
VLAN ID
1-4094
-
This parameter specifies
the VLAN ID that is
carried by an LPT packet
to traverse an L2 network.
This parameter is valid
only when Point Type is
set to L2 net.
LPT package out port
-
-
This parameter specifies
the out port of an LPT
packet.
This parameter is valid
only when Point Type is
set to L2 net.
Parameters of secondary point
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Point Type
UNI
-
This parameter displays or
specifies the type of
secondary point for pointto-multipoint LPT.
PW
QinQ
L2 net
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
519
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
This parameter specifies
the board where the
secondary point of pointto-multipoint LPT resides.
This parameter is valid
only when Point Type is
set to PW, QinQ, or L2
net.
Available Points
-
-
This parameter displays
the available ports where
the secondary point of
point-to-multipoint LPT
can reside.
This parameter is valid
only when Point Type is
set to PW, QinQ, or L2
net.
Selected Points
-
-
This parameter displays
the selected port where the
secondary point of pointto-multipoint LPT resides.
This parameter is valid
only when Point Type is
set to PW, QinQ, or L2
net.
L2 net ID
1-4294967295
-
This parameter specifies
the NET ID of a local NE.
This parameter is valid
only when Point Type is
set to UNI.
L2 Peer net ID
1-4294967295
-
This parameter specifies
the NET ID of an opposite
NE.
This parameter is valid
only when Point Type of
the primary point is set to
UNI, and when Point
Type of the secondary
point is set to L2 net.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
520
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
1-4094
-
This parameter specifies
the VLAN ID that is
carried by an LPT packet
to traverse an L2 network.
This parameter is valid
only when Point Type of
the primary point is set to
UNI, and when Point
Type of the secondary
point is set to L2 net.
LPT Package out port
-
-
This parameter specifies
the out port of an LPT
packet.
This parameter is valid
only when Point Type of
the primary point is set to
UNI, and when Point
Type of the secondary
point is set to L2 net.
A.6.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet operation, administration and
maintenance (OAM).
A.6.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance
Domain Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance domains.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3.
Choose New > New Maintenance Domain.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
521
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Domain Name
-
default
l This parameter specifies the name of the
maintenance domain.
l The maintenance domain refers to the
network for the Ethernet OAM.
l This parameter can contain a maximum
of eight bytes.
0
Maintenance
Domain Level
4
1
l Maintenance Domain Level specifies
the level of the maintenance domain.
l The values 0 to 7 indicates maintenance
domain levels in an ascending order.
2
3
l MEPs transparently transmit OAM
protocol packets if the packets have a
higher level than the parameter value.
4
5
6
l MEPs discard OAM protocol packets if
the packets have a lower level than the
parameter value.
7
l MEPs respond to or terminate OAM
protocol packets based on the packet type
if the packets have the same level as the
parameter value.
A.6.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance
Association Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance associations.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3.
Select the maintenance domain in which a maintenance association needs to be created.
Choose New > New Maintenance Association.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Domain Name
-
-
This parameter indicates the maintenance
domain of the created maintenance
association.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
522
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Association Name
-
-
l This parameter specifies the name of the
maintenance association, which is a
domain related to a service. Through
maintenance association division, the
connectivity check (CC) can be
performed on the network that transmits
a service instance.
l This parameter can contain a maximum
of eight bytes.
Relevant Service
-
-
This parameter specifies the service
instance that is related to the maintenance
association.
CC Test Transmit
Period
1s
1s
l This parameter specifies the interval for
transmitting packets in the CC.
10s
l The CC is performed to check the
availability of the service.
1m
10m
A.6.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association end
point (MEP).
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3.
Select the maintenance association in which an MEP needs to be created. Choose New >
New MEP Point.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Domain Name
-
-
This parameter indicates the maintenance
domain of the created MEP.
Maintenance
Association Name
-
-
This parameter indicates the maintenance
association of the created MEP.
Board
-
-
This parameter specifies the board where
the MEP is located.
Port
-
-
This parameter specifies the port where the
MEP is located.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
523
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN
-
-
This parameter indicates the VLAN ID of
the current service.
MP ID
1 to 2048
1
l This parameter specifies the MEP ID.
l Each MEP needs to be configured with
an MP ID, which is unique in the
maintenance association. The MP ID is
required in the OAM operation.
Direction
Ingress
Ingress
Egress
l Direction specifies the direction of the
MEP.
l Ingress indicates the direction in which
the packets are transmitted to the port,
and Egress indicates the direction in
which the packets are transmitted from
the port.
Active
CC Status
Active
Inactive
l This parameter specifies whether to
enable the CC function of the MEP.
l In the case of the tests based on the MP
IDs, CC Status must be set to Active.
AIS Active Status
Active
Active
Inactive
l This parameter specifies the AIS active
status.
l If several MDs exist on a link, to locate
a fault accurately, set AIS Active
Status to Active and Client Layer
Level that functions to suppress the AIS
information.
l After a fault is detected by an MP, if this
MP activates the AIS, it sends the AIS
packet to a higher level MP, informing
the higher level MP of the fault
information; if this MP does not activate
the AIS, it does not report the fault.
Client Layer Level
1 to 7
1
l Normally, if an MP is set to level n,
Client Layer Level that functions to
suppress the AIS information should be
set to n+1.
l Client Layer Level is valid only if AIS
Active Status is Active.
A.6.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP
Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a remote MEP.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
524
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3.
Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. The Manage Remote MEP Point dialog
box is displayed.
4.
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Domain Name
-
-
This parameter indicates the maintenance
domain of the MEP.
Maintenance
Association Name
-
-
This parameter indicates the maintenance
association of the created MEP.
Remote
Maintenance Point
ID(e.g:1,3-6)
1 to 2048
-
l This parameter specifies the ID of the
remote MEP.
l If other MEPs will initiate OAM
operations to an MEP in the same MA,
set these MEPs as remote MEPs.
A.6.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association
intermediate point (MIP).
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the MIP Point tab.
3.
Select the maintenance domain in which an MIP needs to be created, and then click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Domain Name
-
-
This parameter indicates the maintenance
domain of the MIP.
Board
-
-
This parameter specifies the board where
the MIP is located.
Port
-
-
This parameter specifies the port where the
MIP is located.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
525
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MP ID
1 to 2048
1
l This parameter specifies the MIP ID.
l Each MIP needs to be configured with an
MP ID, which is unique in the
maintenance domain. The MP ID is
required in the OAM operation.
NOTE
To create MEPs and MIPs in a service at a
port, ensure that only one MIP can be created
and the level of the MIP must be higher than
the level of the MEP.
A.6.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LB.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3.
Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LB test.
4.
Choose OAM > Start LB.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination
Maintenance Point
ID
Selected
Deselected
This parameter needs to be selected if the
LB test is performed on the basis of
Destination Maintenance Point IDs.
Destination
Maintenance Point
MAC Address
Selected
Selected
This parameter needs to be selected if the
LB test is performed on the basis of MAC
addresses.
Maintenance
Domain Name
-
-
This parameter indicates the name of the
maintenance domain for the LB test.
Maintenance
Association Name
-
-
This parameter indicates the name of the
maintenance association for the LB test.
Source
Maintenance Point
ID
-
-
l This parameter specifies the source
maintenance point in the LB test.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Deselected
Deselected
l Only the MEP can be set to the source
maintenance point.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
526
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination
Maintenance Point
ID
-
-
l This parameter specifies the destination
maintenance point in the LB test.
l Only the MEP ID can be set to the
Destination Maintenance Point ID.
l Destination Maintenance Point ID can
be set only when MP ID is selected.
Destination
Maintenance Point
MAC Address
-
00-00-00-00-00-00
l This parameter specifies the MAC
address of the port where the destination
maintenance point is located in the LB
test.
l Only the MAC address of the MEP can
be set to the MAC address of the
Destination Maintenance Point MAC
Address.
l Destination Maintenance Point MAC
Address can be set only when Sink
Maintenance Point MAC Address.
1 to 255
Transmitted
Packet Count
3
l This parameter specifies the number of
packets transmitted each time in the LB
test.
l When the value is greater, the required
duration is longer.
Transmitted
Packet Length
64 to 1400
64
l This parameter specifies the length of a
transmitted LBM packet.
l If the packet length is different, the test
result may be different. In normal cases,
it is recommended that you use the
default value.
0 to 7
Transmitted
Packet Priority
7
l This parameter specifies the priority of
transmitting packets.
l 0 indicates the lowest priority, and 7
indicates the highest priority. In normal
cases, this parameter is set to the highest
priority.
-
Detection Result
-
This parameter indicates the relevant
information and result of the LB test.
A.6.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LT.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
527
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3.
Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LT test.
4.
Choose OAM > Start LT.
Test Node Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination
Maintenance Point
ID
Selected
Deselected
This parameter needs to be selected if the LT
test is performed on the basis of MP IDs.
Destination
Maintenance Point
MAC Address
Selected
Selected
This parameter needs to be selected if the LT
test is performed on the basis of MAC
addresses.
Maintenance
Domain Name
-
-
This parameter indicates the name of the
maintenance domain for the LT test.
Maintenance
Association Name
-
-
This parameter indicates the name of the
maintenance association for the LT test.
Source
Maintenance Point
ID
-
-
l This parameter specifies the source
maintenance point in the LT test.
Destination
Maintenance Point
ID
-
Deselected
Deselected
l Only the MEP can be set to the source
maintenance point.
-
l This parameter specifies the destination
maintenance point in the LT test.
l Only the MEP ID can be set to the
Destination Maintenance Point ID.
l Destination Maintenance Point ID can
be set only when MP ID is selected.
Destination
Maintenance Point
MAC Address
-
00-00-00-00-00-00
l This parameter specifies the MAC
address of the port where the destination
maintenance point is located in the LT
test.
l Only the MAC address of the MEP can
be set to the MAC address of the
Destination Maintenance Point MAC
Address.
l Destination Maintenance Point MAC
Address can be set only when Sink
Maintenance Point MAC Address.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
528
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for the Detection Result
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source
Maintenance Point
ID
-
-
This parameter indicates the source
maintenance point in the LT test.
Destination
Maintenance Point
ID/MAC
-
-
This parameter indicates the MAC address
of the port where the destination
maintenance point is located in the LT test.
Response
Maintenance Point
ID/MAC
-
-
This parameter indicates the MAC address
of the port where the responding
maintenance point is located in the LT test.
Hop Count
1 to 64
-
l This parameter indicates the number of
hops from the source maintenance point
to the responding maintenance point or
to the destination maintenance point in
the LT test.
l The number of hops indicates the
adjacent relation between the responding
maintenance point to the source
maintenance point. The number of hops
increases by one when a responding
point occurs on the link from the source
maintenance point to the destination
maintenance point.
-
Test Result
-
This parameter indicates the result of the LT
test.
A.6.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling Service Loopback
Detection
This topic describes the parameters for enabling E-LAN service loopback detection.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service
Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
529
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Enabling Service Loopback Detection
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Vlans/CVLAN
1 to 4094
1 to 4094
Vlans/CVLAN displays
the VLAN ID of a
loopback service.
Loopback detection can be
performed for only one
service one time.
Packet Timeout Period
(s)
3 to 10
3
Loopback detection stops
if no loopback detection
packets are received until
Packet Timeout Period
(s) expires.
Packet Length
-
-
This parameter displays
the loopback detection
packet length.
VLAN Packet Sending
Interval(s)
-
-
This parameter displays
the intervals for
transmitting different
VLAN packets.
Disable Service When
Loopback is Detected
No
No
Disable Service When
Loopback is Detected
displays whether a
loopback service will be
deactivated.
Yes
A.6.3.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter
This topic describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the OAM Parameter tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding
port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
530
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable OAM
Protocol
Enabled
Disabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable the OAM protocol.
Disabled
l After the OAM protocol is enabled, the
current Ethernet port starts to use the
preset mode to create the OAM
connection with the opposite end.
OAM Working
Mode
Active
Active
Passive
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
working mode of the OAM.
l The port whose OAM working mode is
set to Active can initiate the OAM
connection.
l The port whose OAM working mode is
set to Passive can only wait for the
opposite end to send the OAM
connection request.
l The OAM working mode of the
equipment at only one end can be
Passive.
Link Event
Notification
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether the local link events can be
notified to the opposite end.
l If the alarms caused by link events can
be reported, that is, if the number of
performance events (for example, error
frame period, error frame, error frame
second, and error frame signal cycle) at
the local end exceeds the preset
threshold, these performance events are
notified to the port at the opposite end
through the link event notification
function.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
531
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Remote Side
Loopback
Response
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether the port responds to the remote
loopback.
Enabled
l Remote loopback indicates that the local
OAM entity transmits packets to the
remote OAM entity for loopback. The
local OAM entity can locate the fault and
test the link performance through
loopback data analysis.
l If a port does not support remote
loopback response, this port does not
respond to the loopback request from the
remote port regardless of the OAM port
status.
Non-Loopback
Loopback Status
-
Initiate Loopback at
Local
This parameter indicates the loopback status
at the local end.
NOTE
Loopback Status is valid only after you choose
OAM > Enable Remote Loopback.
Respond Loopback
of Remote
OAM Discovery
Status
-
-
This parameter indicates the OAM
discovery status at the local end.
Port Transmit
Status
-
-
This parameter indicates the status of
transmitting packets at the local end.
Port Receive Status
-
-
This parameter indicates the status of
receiving packets at the local end.
A.6.3.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error
Frame Monitoring
This topic describes the parameters that are used for monitoring the OAM error frames at the
Ethernet port.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates the corresponding
port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
532
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Error Frame
Monitor Window
(ms)
1000 to 60000, in
step of 100
1000
This parameter specifies the duration of
monitoring error frames.
Error Frame
Monitor Threshold
(frames)
1 to 4294967295, in
step of 1
1
l This parameter specifies the threshold of
monitoring error frames.
Error Frame
Period Window
(frame)
1488 to 892800000,
in step of 1
892800000
This parameter specifies the window of
monitoring the error frame period.
Error Frame
Period Threshold
(frames)
1 to 892800000, in
step of 1
1
l This parameter specifies the threshold of
monitoring the error frame period.
Error Frame
Second Window(s)
10 to 900, in step of
1
60
This parameter specifies the time window of
monitoring the error frame second.
Error Frame
Second Threshold
(s)
10 to 900, in step of
1
1
l This parameter specifies the threshold of
monitoring error frame seconds.
l Within the specified value of Error
Frame Monitor Window(ms), if the
number of error frames on the link
exceeds the preset value of Error
Frame Monitor Threshold(frame), an
alarm is reported.
l Within the specified value of Error
Frame Period Window(frame), if the
number of error frames on the link
exceeds the preset value of Error
Frame Period Threshold(frame), an
alarm is reported.
l If any error frame occurs in one second,
this second is called an errored frame
second. Within the specified value of
Error Frame Second Window(s), if the
number of error frames on the link
exceeds the preset value of Error
Frame Second Threshold(s), an alarm
is reported.
A.6.4 QoS Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to QoS.
A.6.4.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing DiffServ domains.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
533
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the
Function Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Mapping Relation ID
1 to 8
1
This parameter indicates
the ID of the mapping
relation between DiffServ
domains.
Mapping Relation Name
-
Default Map
This parameter indicates
the name of the mapping
relation between DiffServ
domains.
NOTE
If one default DiffServ domain exists on the OptiX RTN 950 equipment, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and
Mapping Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to this
domain.
Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CVLAN
0 to 7
-
l This parameter
indicates the priority
of the C-VLAN of the
ingress packets.
l C-VLAN indicates the
client-side VLAN, and
the value 7 indicates
the highest priority.
SVLAN
0 to 7
-
l This parameter
indicates the priority
of the S-VLAN of the
ingress packets.
l S-VLAN indicates the
server-side VLAN,
and the value 7
indicates the highest
priority.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
534
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IP DSCP
0 to 63
-
l This parameter
indicates the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the
ingress packets.
l The differentiated
services code point
(DSCP) refers to bits
0-5 of the
differentiated services
(DS) field in the packet
and indicates the
service class and
discarding priority of
the packet.
MPLS EXP
0 to 7
-
l Displays the MPLS
EXP value of ingress
packets.
l When a packet in an
egress queue leaves an
NNI port, the NNI port
obtains the packet
priority value
according to the
mappings between
PHB service classes of
egress queues and
egress packet
priorities (MPLS EXP
values), and writes the
obtained priority value
into the EXP field of
the egress MPLS
packet.
NOTE
The MPLS EXP value can
be modified in the default
Diffserv domain (Default
Map) only.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
535
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PHB
BE
-
l This parameter
indicates the per-hop
behavior (PHB)
service class of the
DiffServ domain.
AF1
AF2
AF3
AF4
l The PHB service class
refers to the
forwarding behavior
of the DiffServ node
on the behavior
aggregate (BA)
operation. The
forwarding behavior
can meet the specific
requirements.
EF
CS6
CS7
l The PHB service
classes are BE, AF1,
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, DSCP value,
and MPLS EXP value)
contained in the
packets of the DiffServ
domain and the eight
PHB service classes
meet the requirements
of the specified or
default mapping
relation.
NOTE
The AF1 is classified into
three sub service classes,
namely, AF11, AF12, and
AF13, only one of which is
valid. It is the same case
with the AF2, AF3, and
AF4.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
536
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PHB
BE
-
l This parameter
indicates the PHB
service class of the
DiffServ domain.
AF1
AF2
AF3
l The PHB service class
refers to the
forwarding behavior
of the DiffServ node
on the behavior
aggregate (BA)
operation. The
forwarding behavior
can meet the specific
requirements.
AF4
EF
CS6
CS7
l The PHB service
classes are BE, AF1,
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, DSCP value
and MPLS value)
contained in the
packets of the DiffServ
domain and the eight
PHB service classes
meet the requirements
of the specified or
default mapping
relation.
NOTE
The AF1 is classified into
three sub service classes,
namely, AF11, AF12, and
AF13, only one of which is
valid. It is the same case
with the AF2, AF3, and
AF4.
CVLAN
0 to 7
-
l This parameter
indicates the priority
of the C-VLAN of the
egress packets.
l C-VLAN indicates the
client-side VLAN, and
the value 7 indicates
the highest priority.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
537
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
SVLAN
0 to 7
-
l This parameter
indicates the priority
of the S-VLAN of the
egress packets.
l S-VLAN indicates the
server-side VLAN,
and the value 7
indicates the highest
priority.
IP DSCP
0 to 63
-
l This parameter
indicates the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the
ingress packets.
l The DSCP refers to
bits 0-5 of the DS field
in the packet and
indicates the service
class and discarding
priority of the packet.
MPLS EXP
0 to 7
-
l Displays the MPLS
EXP value of egress
packets.
l When a packet arrives
at an NNI port, the
NNI port obtains the
packet priority value
depending on its
trusted priority type
(MPLS EXP value)
and specifies the PHB
service class of the
packet according to the
mappings between
packet priorities and
PHB service classes.
NOTE
The MPLS EXP value can
be modified in the default
Diffserv domain (Default
Map) only.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
538
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Application Ports
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
This parameter indicates
the port that uses the
DiffServ domain.
Packet Type
CVLAN
CVLAN
The packets trusted by the
OptiX RTN 950 are the
C_VLAN, S_VLAN and
IP DSCP packets that
contain the C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, DSCP value or
MPLS value. By default,
the untrusted packets are
mapped to the BE service
class for best-effort
forwarding.
SVLAN
IP-DSCP
MPLS-EXP
NOTE
l The trusted packet
priorities of a UNI port
include DSCP value, CVLAN priority, and SVLAN priority. For the
E-Line services that are
transparently
transmitted end to end
(UNI-UNI), a UNI port
only trusts DSCP value.
l An NNI port carrying
MPLS/PWE3 services
trusts only packets with
MPLS EXP values.
l The trusted packet
priorities of a QinQ link
NNI port are configured
according to the
planning information.
A.6.4.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating DiffServ (DS) domains.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from
the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
539
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Mapping Relation ID
2 to 8
-
This parameter specifies
the ID of the mapping
relationship of a DS
domain.
Mapping Relation Name
-
-
This parameter specifies
the name of the mapping
relationship of a DS
domain.
Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CVLAN
0 to 7
-
l This parameter
specifies the C-VLAN
priority of the ingress
packets.
l C-VLAN indicates the
client-side VLAN, and
the value 7 indicates
the highest priority.
SVLAN
0 to 7
-
l This parameter
specifies the S-VLAN
priority of the ingress
packets.
l S-VLAN indicates the
server-side VLAN,
and the value 7
indicates the highest
priority.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
540
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IP DSCP
0 to 63
-
l This parameter
specifies the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the
ingress packets.
l The differentiated
services code point
(DSCP) refers to bits
0-5 of the
differentiated services
(DS) field in the packet
and indicates the
service class and
discarding priority of
the packet.
MPLS EXP
-
-
l Displays the MPLS
EXP value of ingress
packets.
l When a packet in an
egress queue leaves an
NNI port, the NNI port
obtains the packet
priority value
according to the
mappings between
PHB service classes of
egress queues and
egress packet
priorities (MPLS EXP
values), and writes the
obtained priority value
into the EXP field of
the egress MPLS
packet.
NOTE
The MPLS EXP value can
be modified in the default
Diffserv domain (Default
Map) only.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
541
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PHB
BE
-
l This parameter
indicates the PHB
service class of the DS
domain.
AF1
AF2
AF3
l The PHB service class
refers to the
forwarding behavior
of the DS node on the
behavior aggregate
(BA) operation. The
forwarding behavior
can meet the specific
requirements.
AF4
EF
CS6
CS7
l The PHB service
classes are BE, AF1,
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, DSCP value
and MPLS EXP value)
contained in the
packets of the DS
domain and the eight
PHB service classes
meet the requirements
of the specified or
default mapping
relationship.
NOTE
The AF1 is classified into
three sub service classes,
namely, AF11, AF12, and
AF13, only one of which is
valid. It is the same case
with the AF2, AF3, and
AF4.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
542
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PHB
BE
-
l This parameter
indicates the PHB
service class of the DS
domain.
AF1
AF2
AF3
l The PHB service class
refers to the
forwarding behavior
of the DS node on the
behavior aggregate
(BA) operation. The
forwarding behavior
can meet the specific
requirements.
AF4
EF
CS6
CS7
l The PHB service
classes are BE, AF1,
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, DSCP value
and MPLS EXP value)
contained in the
packets of the DS
domain and the eight
PHB service classes
meet the requirements
of the specified or
default mapping
relationship.
NOTE
The AF1 is classified into
three sub service classes,
namely, AF11, AF12, and
AF13, only one of which is
valid. It is the same case
with the AF2, AF3, and
AF4.
CVLAN
0 to 7
-
l This parameter
specifies the C-VLAN
priority of the egress
packets.
l C-VLAN indicates the
client-side VLAN
priority, and the value
7 indicates the highest
priority.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
543
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
SVLAN
0 to 7
-
l This parameter
specifies the S-VLAN
priority of the egress
packets.
l S-VLAN indicates the
server-side VLAN
priority, and the value
7 indicates the highest
priority.
IP DSCP
0 to 63
-
l This parameter
specifies the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the egress
packets.
l The differentiated
services code point
(DSCP) refers to bits
0-5 of the
differentiated services
(DS) field in the packet
and indicates the
service class and
discarding priority of
the packet.
MPLS EXP
-
-
l Displays the MPLS
EXP value of egress
packets.
l When a packet in an
egress queue leaves an
NNI port, the NNI port
obtains the packet
priority value
according to the
mappings between
PHB service classes of
egress queues and
egress packet
priorities (MPLS EXP
values), and writes the
obtained priority value
into the EXP field of
the egress MPLS
packet.
NOTE
The MPLS EXP value can
be modified in the default
Diffserv domain (Default
Map) only.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
544
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Application Ports
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
This parameter specifies
the board that uses the
mapping relationships
between DS domains.
Available Port
-
-
This parameter displays
the available port list from
which you can select the
port that uses the mapping
relationships between DS
domains.
Port
-
-
This parameter displays
the selected port list. The
ports in the list use the
mapping relationships
between DS domains.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
545
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Packet Type
cvlan
cvlan
l This parameter
specifies the type of
the packet.
svlan
ip-dscp
mpls-exp
l The packets trusted by
the OptiX RTN 950
are the C_VLAN,
S_VLAN, IP DSCP
and MPLS packets that
contain the C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, DSCP value
or MPLS EXP value.
By default, the
untrusted packets are
mapped to the BE
service class for besteffort forwarding.
NOTE
l The trusted packet
priorities of a UNI port
include DSCP value, CVLAN priority, and SVLAN priority. For the
E-Line services that are
transparently
transmitted end to end
(UNI-UNI), a UNI port
only trusts DSCP value.
l An NNI port carrying
MPLS/PWE3 services
trusts only packets with
MPLS EXP values.
l The trusted packet
priorities of a QinQ link
NNI port are configured
according to the
planning information.
A.6.4.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification
This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing DiffServ (DS) domain applied
ports.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from
the Function Tree.
2.
Select the DS domain to be changed in the main interface.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
546
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3.
Click the Apply Port tab.
4.
Click Modify.
A Parameters Description
Parameters for Configuring the Applied Ports
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Mapping Relation Name
-
-
This parameter indicates
the name of the mapping
relation of a DS domain.
Packet Type
CVLAN
CVLAN
The packets trusted by the
OptiX RTN 950 are the CVLAN, S-VLAN, IP
DSCP packets, and MPLS
packets that respectively
contain the C-VLAN
priority, S-VLAN
priority, IP DSCP value
and MPLS EXP value. By
default, the untrusted
packets are mapped to the
BE service class for besteffort forwarding.
SVLAN
IP-DSCP
MPLS-EXP
NOTE
l The trusted packet
priorities of a UNI port
include DSCP value, CVLAN priority, and SVLAN priority. For the
E-Line services that are
transparently
transmitted end to end
(UNI-UNI), a UNI port
only trusts DSCP value.
l An NNI port carrying
MPLS/PWE3 services
trusts only packets with
MPLS EXP values.
l The trusted packet
priorities of a QinQ link
NNI port are configured
according to the
planning information.
Board
-
-
This parameter specifies
the board where the port is
located.
Available Port
-
-
This parameter indicates
the available port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
547
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Selected Port
-
-
This parameter indicates
the selected port.
The selected port is
applied to the DS domain.
NOTE
If one default DS domain exists on the OptiX RTN 950, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and Mapping Relation
Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to this domain.
A.6.4.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to port policies.
Navigation Path (Port Policy)
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the CoS Configuration tab.
Parameters (Port Policy)
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Policy ID
-
-
This parameter indicates
the policy ID of the port.
Policy Name
-
-
This parameter indicates
or specifies the policy
name of the port.
WRR Scheduling Policy
-
-
This parameter indicates
the current WRR
scheduling policy.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
548
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS
CS7
-
l The BE, AF1, AF2,
AF3, AF4, EF, CS6,
and CS7 service
classes respectively
map eight queuing
entities. The OptiX
RTN 950 provides
different QoS policies
for the queues at
different service
classes.
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
l CS6-CS7: indicates
the highest service
grade, which is mainly
involved in signaling
transmission.
l EF: indicates fast
forwarding. This
service class is
applicable to the traffic
whose delay is small
and packet loss ratio is
low, for example,
voice and video
services.
l AF1-AF4: indicates
assured forwarding.
This service class is
applicable to the traffic
that requires rate
guarantee but does not
require delay or jitter
limit.
l BE: indicates that the
traffic is forwarded in
best-effort manner
without special
processing.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
549
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Grooming Police After
Reloading
SP
CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP
WRR
AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1:
WRR
l The strict priority (SP)
scheduling algorithm
is designed for the key
services. One
important
characteristic of the
key services is that
higher priorities are
required to minimize
the response delay in
the case of congestion
events.
l The weighted round
robin (WRR)
scheduling algorithm
divides each port into
multiple output subqueues. The polling
scheduling is
performed among the
output sub-queues to
ensure that each subqueue has a certain
period of service time.
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports the setting of
the SP+WRR
scheduling algorithm
of the CoS queue
according to the
requirement, and
provides one or more
queues that comply
with the SP algorithm.
Except for the default
value, however, the
value of the WRR
scheduling algorithm
and the value of the SP
scheduling algorithm
cannot be interleaved.
That is, except for the
default value,
Grooming Police
After Reloading can
be changed from SP to
WRR according to the
queue priorities in a
descending order
(CS7-BE).
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
550
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Parameter
Value Range
A Parameters Description
Default Value
Description
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
l This parameter
indicates or specifies
whether traffic
shaping is enabled for
an egress queue
corresponding to a
PHB service class.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
(kbit/s), CBS (byte),
and PBS (byte) can be
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
CIR(kbit/s)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Traffic shaping for an
egress queue uses the
single token bucket two
color marker algorithm.
The value of the CIR must
be equal to the value of the
PIR. In actual traffic
shaping processing, only
the PIR is valid.
551
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PIR(kbit/s)
-
-
l When the buffer queue
is empty, the packets
are processed as
follows: If the rate of a
packet is equal to or
lower than the PIR, it
is directly forwarded;
if the rate of a packet is
higher than the PIR, it
enters the buffer queue
and then is forwarded
at a rate equal to the
PIR.
l When the buffer queue
is not empty, the
packets whose rate
passes the restriction
of the PIR directly
enter the buffer queue
and then are forwarded
at a rate equal to the
PIR.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
CBS(byte)
-
-
l It is recommended that
you set the value of the
CBS equal to the value
of the PIR. In actual
traffic shaping
processing, only the
PBS is valid.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
552
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PBS(byte)
-
-
l When the buffer queue
is empty, certain burst
packets can be
forwarded if the rate of
the packets is equal to
or lower than the PIR
in a certain period. The
maximum traffic of the
burst packets is
determined by the
PBS.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Navigation Path (WRR Scheduling Policy)
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Policy Management > WRR Scheduling Policy from the Function Tree.
Parameters (WRR Scheduling Policy)
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Policy ID
-
-
This parameter indicates
the policy ID of the WRR
scheduling policy.
Policy Name
-
-
This parameter indicates
the policy name of the
WRR scheduling policy.
Scheduling Weight
1 to 100
-
l The eight classes of
service (CoSs),
namely, BE, AF1,
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7
correspond to eight
queues.
l The Scheduling
Weight parameter
indicates the
percentage of the
bandwidth resources
gained by the WRR
queue.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
553
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.6.4.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port policies.
Navigation Path (Creating a Port Policy)
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the CoS Configuration tab.
3.
Click New. The Create Port Policy dialog box is displayed.
Parameters (Creating a Port Policy)
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Policy ID
-
-
This parameter specifies
the policy ID of the port.
Automatically Assign
Selected
Deselected
This parameter specifies
whether to automatically
allocate the policy ID of
the port policy. After this
parameter is selected, the
system automatically
allocates the policy ID,
and then the policy ID
cannot be set manually.
-
This parameter specifies
the policy name of the
port.
Deselected
Policy Name
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
554
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WRR Scheduling Policy
-
-
l This parameter
specifies the desired
WRR scheduling
policy.
l The WRR weight set
in the WRR
scheduling policy only
applies to WRR
queues.
l When the total WRR
weight value of all
WRR queues equals to
100%, the WRR
weight set for each
queue in the WRR
scheduling policy is
the actual WRR
weight. For example,
when AF4, AF3, AF2,
and AF1 are all WRR
queues and their
weight values are
25%, 25%, 25%, and
25% respectively,
each queue is actually
allocated with 25%
total bandwidth.
l When the total WRR
weight value of all
WRR queues is less
than 100%, the actual
WRR weight is
recalculated based on
the proportion
between the WRR
weights of different
queues set in the WRR
scheduling policy. For
example, when AF4,
AF3, AF2, and AF1
are all WRR queues
and their weight values
are 20%, 20%, 20%,
and 20% respectively,
the actual bandwidth
allocation weight of
each queue will be
recalculated based on
the proportion
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
555
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Parameter
Value Range
A Parameters Description
Default Value
Description
between the set WRR
weight (1:1:1:1). That
is, each queue is
allocated with 25%
total bandwidth.
CoS
CS7
-
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
l The BE, AF1, AF2,
AF3, AF4, EF, CS6,
and CS7 service
classes respectively
map eight queuing
entities. The OptiX
RTN 950 provides
different QoS policies
for the queues at
different service class.
l CS6-CS7: indicates
the highest service
grade, which is mainly
involved in signaling
transmission.
l EF: indicates fast
forwarding. This
service class is
applicable to the traffic
whose delay is small
and packet loss ratio is
low, for example,
voice and video
services.
l AF1-AF4: indicates
assured forwarding.
This service class is
applicable to the traffic
that requires rate
guarantee but does not
require delay or jitter
limit.
l BE: indicates that the
traffic is forwarded in
best-effort manner
without special
processing.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
556
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Grooming Police After
Reloading
SP
CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP
WRR
AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1:
WRR
l The strict priority (SP)
scheduling algorithm
is designed for the key
services. One
important
characteristic of the
key services is that
higher priorities are
required to minimize
the response delay in
the case of congestion
events.
l The weighted round
robin (WRR)
scheduling algorithm
divides each port into
multiple output subqueues. The polling
scheduling is
performed among the
output sub-queues to
ensure that each subqueue has a certain
period of service time.
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports the setting of
the SP+WRR
scheduling algorithm
of the CoS queue
according to the
requirement, and
provides one or more
queues that comply
with the SP algorithm.
Except for the default
value, however, the
value of the WRR
scheduling algorithm
and the value of the SP
scheduling algorithm
cannot be interleaved.
That is, except for the
default value,
Grooming Police
After Reloading can
be changed from SP to
WRR according to the
queue priorities in a
descending order
(CS7-BE).
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
557
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Parameter
Value Range
A Parameters Description
Default Value
Description
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
l Bandwidth Limit
indicates or specifies
whether traffic
shaping is enabled for
an egress queue
corresponding to a
PHB service class.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
(kbit/s), CBS (byte),
and PBS (byte) can be
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
CIR(kbit/s)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Traffic shaping for an
egress queue uses the
single token bucket two
color marker algorithm.
The value of the CIR must
be equal to the value of the
PIR. In actual traffic
shaping processing, only
the PIR is valid.
558
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PIR(kbit/s)
-
-
l When the buffer queue
is empty, the packets
are processed as
follows: If the rate of a
packet is equal to or
lower than the PIR, it
is directly forwarded;
if the rate of a packet is
higher than the PIR, it
enters the buffer queue
and then is forwarded
at a rate equal to the
PIR.
l When the buffer queue
is not empty, the
packets whose rate
passes the restriction
of the PIR directly
enter the buffer queue
and then are forwarded
at a rate equal to the
PIR.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
CBS(byte)
-
-
l It is recommended that
you set the value of the
CBS equal to the value
of the PIR. In actual
traffic shaping
processing, only the
PBS is valid.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
559
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PBS(byte)
-
-
l When the buffer queue
is empty, certain burst
packets can be
forwarded if the rate of
the packets is equal to
or lower than the PIR
in a certain period. The
maximum traffic of the
burst packets is
determined by the
PBS.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Navigation Path (Creating a WRR Scheduling Policy)
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Policy Management > WRR Scheduling Policy from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New. The Create WRR Policy dialog box is displayed.
Parameters (Creating a WRR Scheduling Policy)
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Policy ID
-
-
This parameter specifies
the policy ID of the WRR
scheduling policy.
Assign automatically
Selected
Deselected
This parameter specifies
whether to automatically
assign the policy ID of the
WRR scheduling policy.
If this parameter is set to
Selected, the policy ID of
the WRR scheduling
policy can only be
assigned automatically.
Manual assignment is not
available.
-
This parameter specifies
the policy name of the
WRR scheduling policy.
Deselected
Policy Name
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
560
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Scheduling Weight
1 to 100
-
l The eight classes of
service (CoSs),
namely, BE, AF1,
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7
correspond to eight
queues.
l The Scheduling
Weight parameter
indicates the
percentage of the
bandwidth resources
gained by the WRR
queue.
l This parameter must
be set to 0% for SP
queues.
l The scheduling weight
sum of WRR queues
must be 100%.
A.6.4.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating traffic classification.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Traffic Classification Configuration tab.
3.
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Traffic Classification ID
1 to 512
-
l This parameter
specifies the ID of the
traffic classification.
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports a maximum
of 512 flow
classifications.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
561
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ACL Action
Permit
Permit
l The access control list
(ACL) determines
whether to forward or
discard the packets
that enter the port
according to the
specified matching
rules.
Deny
l When ACL Action is
set to Permit, the
ingress port accepts
and then performs QoS
processing for only the
packets that meet the
specified mapping
rules.
l When ACL Action is
set to Deny, the
ingress port discards
the packets that meet
the specified mapping
rules.
Ingress Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Logical Relation
Between Matched Rules
And
And
l This parameter
specifies the logical
relationship between
the traffic
classification
matching rules.
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports the setting of
the logical AND
between multiple
matching rules.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
562
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Match Type
DSCP Value
-
l After you click Add or
Delete, complex
traffic classification
can be performed on
the traffic that enters
the ingress port
according to the preset
matching rules.
CVlan ID
CVlan priority
SVlan ID
SVlan priority
l In the case a specific
service, complex
traffic classification
can be divided into
basic traffic types
according to the DSCP
value, C-VLAN ID, CVLAN priority, SVLAN ID, or SVLAN priority.
Traffic type is based
on the associated
Ethernet packets.
Therefore, this
parameter is set
according to the packet
type and the planning
information.
Match Value
DSCP Value: 0 to 63
-
CVlan ID: 1 to 4094
CVlan priority: 0 to 7
SVlan ID: 1 to 4094
SVlan priority: 0 to 7
l If the matching value
of the packets is the
same as the preset
Match Value, the
packets match the
rules of complex
traffic classification.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Wildcard
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
This parameter has a fixed
value of 0.
563
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS
-
-
l This parameter
specifies the PHB
service class queue
mapped by the traffic
classification packets.
CS7
CS6
EF
AF4
l If this parameter is set
to empty (-), the traffic
classification packets
map the PHB service
class queue according
the mapping relation
specified in the topic
about Diffserv domain
management.
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
l This parameter
indicates or specifies
whether the CAR
operation is performed
for the flow in the
ingress direction.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
(kbit/s), CBS (byte),
and PBS (byte) can be
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
564
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CIR(kbit/s)
-
-
l When the rate of the
packets is not more
than the CIR, the
packets are marked
blue and pass the CAR
policing. These
packets are first
forwarded in the case
of network congestion.
l When the rate of the
packets is more than
the CIR but not more
than the PIR, the
packets whose rate is
more than the CIR can
pass the restriction of
the CAR and are
marked yellow. The
processing method of
the packets marked
yellow can be set to
"Pass" or "Remark".
"Remark" indicates
that the packets are
mapped into another
specified queue of a
higher priority (this is
equal to changing the
priority of the packets)
and then forwarded to
the next port. If a
network congestion
event occurs again, the
packets marked
yellow can be
processed according to
the new priority.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
565
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PIR(kbit/s)
-
-
l When the rate of the
packets is more than
the PIR, the packets
that exceed the rate
restriction are marked
red and directly
discarded.
l When the rate of the
packets is more than
the CIR but not more
than the PIR, the
packets whose rate is
more than the CIR can
pass the restriction of
the CAR and are
marked yellow. The
processing method of
the packets marked
yellow can be set to
"Pass" or "Remark".
"Remark" indicates
that the packets are
mapped into another
specified queue of a
higher priority (this is
equal to changing the
priority of the packets)
and then forwarded to
the next port. If a
network congestion
event occurs again, the
packets marked
yellow can be
processed according to
the new priority.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
566
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CBS(byte)
-
-
l During a certain
period, if the rate of the
packets whose
processing method is
marked "Pass" is not
more than the CIR,
certain burst packets
are allowed and can be
first forwarded in the
case of network
congestion. The
maximum traffic of the
burst packets is
determined by the
CBS.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
PBS(byte)
-
-
l During a certain
period, if the rate of the
packets whose
processing method is
marked "Pass" is more
than the CIR but not
more than the PIR,
certain burst packets
are allowed and
marked yellow. The
maximum traffic of the
burst packets is
determined by the
PBS.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
567
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Coloration Mode
Color Blindness
Color Blindness
l This parameter
specifies the CAR
operation performed
by the equipment on
the packets. The
packets are dyed
according to the result
of the CAR operation.
The dying rule is
determined by the
comparison between
the rate of the packets
and the preset CAR
value.
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports Color
Blindness only.
Packet Color
Red
-
Packets can be dyed in
three colors: red, yellow,
and green. The packets in
red are first discarded.
-
l This parameter
specifies the method of
handling the packets.
Yellow
Green
Handling Mode
Discard
Pass
Remark
l Discard: The packets
are discarded.
l Pass: The packets are
forwarded.
l Remark: The packets
are remarked.
"Remark" indicates
that the packets are
mapped into another
specified queue of a
higher priority (this is
equal to changing the
priority of the packets)
and then forwarded to
the next port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
568
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Relabeled CoS
CS7
-
If the handling method is
set to "Remark", you can
reset the CoS of the
packets.
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
Egress Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled
Enable
l This parameter
indicates or specifies
whether the traffic
shaping is performed
in the egress function.
Enable
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
(kbit/s), CBS (byte),
and PBS (byte) can be
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
569
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CIR(kbit/s)
-
-
l In the case that no
packets exist in the
egress queue: When
the rate of the packets
is not more than the
CIR, these packets
directly enter the
egress queue.
l In the case that certain
packets exist in the
egress queue: The
packets whose rate
passes the restriction
of the PIR directly
enter the egress queue,
which forwards the
packets to the next port
at the CIR.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
570
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PIR(kbit/s)
-
-
l In the case that no
packets exist in the
egress queue: If the
rate of the packets is
more than the CIR but
is not more than the
PIR, the packets
whose rate is more
than the CIR enter the
egress queue, which
forwards the packets to
the next port at the
CIR. If the rate of the
packets is more than
the PIR, the packets
are directly discarded.
l In the case that certain
packets exist in the
egress queue: The
packets whose rate
passes the restriction
of the PIR directly
enter the egress queue,
which forwards the
packets to the next port
at the CIR.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
CBS(byte)
-
-
l If the rate of the
packets is not more
than the CIR during a
certain period, the
burst packets are
directly transmitted.
The maximum traffic
of the burst packets is
determined by the
CBS.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
571
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PBS(byte)
-
-
l If the rate of the
packets is more than
the CIR but is not more
than the PIR during a
certain period, the
burst packets enter the
egress queue. The
maximum traffic of the
burst packets is
determined by the
PBS.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
A.6.4.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port shaping management tasks.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Parameters for Port Shaping Management
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Slot No.
-
-
This parameter specifies
the slot ID.
Port
-
-
This parameter specifies
the port.
CIR (kbit/s)
-
-
CBS (byte)
-
-
PIR (kbit/s)
-
-
Traffic shaping for an
egress queue uses the
single token bucket two
color marker algorithm.
The value of the CIR must
be equal to the value of the
PIR. In actual traffic
shaping processing, only
the PIR is valid.
If the traffic shaping
function is enabled, OptiX
RTN 950 processes the
packets in the buffer
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
572
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PBS (byte)
-
-
queue through the
following methods when
no packets are available in
the queue.
l When the buffer queue
is empty, the packets
are processed as
follows: If the rate of a
packet is equal to or
lower than the PIR, it
is directly forwarded;
if the rate of a packet is
higher than the PIR, it
enters the buffer queue
and then is forwarded
at a rate equal to the
PIR.
l When the buffer queue
is empty, certain burst
packets can be
forwarded if the rate of
the packets is equal to
or lower than the PIR
in a certain period. The
maximum traffic of the
burst packets is
determined by the
PBS.
l When the buffer queue
is not empty, the
packets whose rate
passes the restriction
of the PIR directly
enter the buffer queue
and then are forwarded
at a rate equal to the
PIR.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
573
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.7 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features
on the EoS/EoPDH Plane
This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on the EoS/
EoPDH plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet
port parameters, and QoS parameters.
A.7.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services
This section describes the parameters for EoS/EoPDH-plane Ethernet services.
A.7.1.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creation
This section describes the parameters for creating an Ethernet line service.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Deselect Display QinQ Shared Service.
3.
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-11 Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
Displays the board name.
Service Type
EPL
EPL
Specify the Ethernet service type to EPL.
EVPL(QinQ)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
574
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
l If this parameter is set to
Unidirectional, you only need to create
a service from the service source to the
service sink. That is, there is traffic only
in the direction from the service source
to the sink port.
Unidirectional
l If this parameter is set to Bidirectional,
you need to create a service from the
service source to the service sink and a
service from the service sink to the
service source. That is, there is traffic in
the direction from the service source to
the sink port and in the direction from the
service sink to the source port at the same
time.
l In normal cases, it is recommended that
you set this parameter to Bidirectional.
Source Port
-
-
l Specifies the port of the service source.
l When you create bidirectional Ethernet
services from a PORT to a VCTRUNK,
it is recommended that you set the PORT
to the source port.
Source VLAN(e.g.
1,3-6)
1-4095
-
l This parameter can be set to null, a
number, or several numbers. When
setting this parameter to several
numbers, use the comma (,) to separate
the discrete numbers, or use the hyphen
(-) to represent consecutive numbers. For
example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l The number of VLANs must be the same
as the value of Sink VLAN(e.g. 1,3-6).
l If this parameter is set to null, all the
services at the source port are used as the
service source.
l If this parameter is not set to null, only
the service that carries a specified VLAN
ID at the source port can be used as the
service source.
Sink Port
-
-
l Specifies the port of the service sink.
l This parameter cannot take the same
value as Source Port.
l When you create bidirectional Ethernet
services from a PORT to a VCTRUNK,
it is recommended that you set the
VCTRUNK to the sink port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
575
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink VLAN(e.g.
1,3-6)
1-4095
-
l This parameter can be set to null, a
number, or several numbers. When
setting this parameter to several
numbers, use the comma (,) to separate
the discrete numbers, or use the hyphen
(-) to represent consecutive numbers. For
example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l The number of VLANs must be the same
as the value of Source VLAN(e.g.
1,3-6).
l If this parameter is set to null, all the
services at the sink port are used as the
service sink.
l If this parameter is not set to null, only
the service that carries a specified VLAN
ID at the sink port can be used as the
service sink.
Table A-12 Parameters for port attributes
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the ports involved in the Ethernet
service.
Port Type
-
-
Displays the network attribute of the
Ethernet port.
Port Enabled
Enabled
-
l When the source port or the sink port is
set to a PORT, set Port Enabled to
Enabled.
Disabled
l This parameter need not be set when the
source port or sink port is a VCTRUNK.
TAG
Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
-
l If all the accessed services are frames
with VLAN tags (tagged frames), set this
parameter to Tag Aware.
l If all the accessed services are frames
without VLAN tags (untagged frames),
set this parameter to Access.
l If the accessed services contain tagged
frames and untagged frames, set this
parameter to Hybrid.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
576
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Table A-13 Parameters for bound paths
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Configurable
Ports
EFP8:
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16
VCTRUNK1
Specifies the VCTRUNK to bind paths.
-
Displays the level of the bound VC path.
EMS6:
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK8
Level
-
In the case of the EFP8 board, this parameter
always takes the value of VC12-Xv.
Service Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Uplink
l Set this parameter to Bidirectional
unless otherwise specified.
Downlink
Available
Resources
-
l Specifies the direction of the bound path.
-
l Displays the available VC4 paths.
l In the case of the EFP8 board, this
parameter always takes the value of
VC4-1.
l For EMS6 boards, when a VCTRUNK
needs to bind VC-12 paths, select VC-12
paths only in VC-4-4s.
Available
Timeslots
-
-
Specifies the available timeslots.
Bound Path
-
-
You need to plan and set this parameter
according to the following principles:
l The capacity of the VCTRUNK is
determined by the actual bandwidth
required by the services.
l The EFP8 board supports 16
VCTRUNKs. Each VCTRUNK can
bind a maximum of 16 VC-12 paths and
the total number of bound VC-12 paths
cannot exceed 63.
l For EMS6 boards, their VCTRUNKs 1-7
each support a maximum bandwidth of
100 Mbit/s. If a bandwidth higher than
100 Mbit/s is required, VCTRUNK8 is
recommended.
Number of Bound
Paths
-
-
Displays the number of the bound VC path.
Activation Status
-
-
Displays the activation status of the bound
VC path.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
577
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.7.1.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creating QinQ-Based
Ethernet Line Services
This section describes the parameters associated with QinQ-based Ethernet line services, which
need to be set on the NMS.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board, and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Select Display QinQ Shared Service.
3.
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-14 Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
Displays the board name.
Service Type
EPL
EPL
Specifies the service type to EVPL(QinQ).
Bidirectional
l When this parameter is set to
Unidirectional, only the service from
the service source to the service sink is
created. That is, the service source is
forwarded only to the sink port.
EVPL(QinQ)
Direction
Bidirectional
Unidirectional
l When this parameter is set to
Bidirectional, both the service from the
service source to the service sink and the
service from the service sink to the
service source are created. That is, when
the service source is forwarded to the
sink port, the service sink is forwarded to
the source port.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Bidirectional.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
578
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Operation Type
l Add S-VLAN
Strip S-VLAN
l When used for private line services,
QinQ can process VLAN tags in
different manners as required.
l Transparently
transmit CVLAN
l When Service Direction is set to
Unidirectional, you can set Operation
Type to Strip S-VLAN.
l Transparently
transmit SVLAN
l Set this parameter according to actual
situations.
l Transparently
transmit SVLAN and CVLAN
l Translate SVLAN
l Translate SVLAN and
transparently
transmit CVLAN
l Strip S-VLAN
Source Port
-
-
l Specifies the port where the service
source resides.
l When creating a bidirectional Ethernet
service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it
is recommended that you use the PORT
as the source port.
Source C-VLAN
(e.g. 1, 3-6)
1-4095
-
l You can set this parameter to null, a
number, or several numbers. When you
set this parameter to several numbers,
use "," to separate these discrete values
and use "-" to indicate continuous
numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates
numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l The number of VLANs set in this
parameter should be the same as the
number of VLANs set in Sink C-VLAN
(e.g. 1, 3-6).
l When you set this parameter to null, all
the services of the source port work as
the service source.
l When you set this parameter to a nonnull value, only the services of the source
port whose VLAN IDs are included in
the value range of this parameter work as
the service source.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
579
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source S-VLAN
1-4095
-
l This parameter must be set to a
numerical value.
l Only the service of the source port whose
S-VLAN ID is equal to the value of this
parameter work as the service source.
Sink Port
-
-
l Specifies the port where the service sink
resides.
l This parameter must be set to be a value
different from Source Port.
l When creating a bidirectional Ethernet
service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it
is recommended that you use the
VCTRUNK as the sink port.
Sink C-VLAN(e.g.
1, 3-6)
1-4095
-
l You can set this parameter to null, a
number, or several numbers. When you
set this parameter to several numbers,
use "," to separate these discrete values
and use "-" to indicate continuous
numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates
numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l The number of VLANs set in this
parameter should be the same as the
number of VLANs set in Source CVLAN(e.g. 1, 3-6).
l When you set this parameter to null, all
the services of the sink port work as the
service sink.
l When you set this parameter to a nonnull value, only the services of the sink
port whose VLAN IDs are included in
the value range of this parameter work as
the service sink.
Sink S-VLAN
1-4095
-
l This parameter must be set to a
numerical value.
l Only the services of the sink port whose
S-VLAN IDs are equal to the value of
this parameter work as the service sink.
C-VLAN Priority
AUTO
AUTO
Displays the C-VLAN priority.
S-VLAN Priority
AUTO
AUTO
Specifies the S-VLAN priority. The bigger
the value, the higher the priority.
Priority 0 to Priority
7
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
580
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Table A-15 Parameters of port attributes
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the ports that are configured to
transmit the service.
Port Type
-
-
Displays the network attribute of the
Ethernet port.
Port Enabled
Enabled
-
l When the source port or the sink port is
set to a PORT, set Port Enabled to
Enabled.
Disabled
l This parameter need not be set when the
source port or sink port is a VCTRUNK.
TAG
-
-
This parameter is invalid for QinQ line
services.
Table A-16 Parameters for bound paths
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Configurable
Ports
EFP8:
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16
VCTRUNK1
Specifies the VCTRUNK to bind paths.
-
Displays the level of the bound VC path.
EMS6:
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK8
Level
-
In the case of the EFP8 board, this parameter
always takes the value of VC12-Xv.
Service Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Uplink
l Set this parameter to Bidirectional
unless otherwise specified.
Downlink
Available
Resources
-
l Specifies the direction of the bound path.
-
l Displays the available VC4 paths.
l In the case of the EFP8 board, this
parameter always takes the value of
VC4-1.
l For EMS6 boards, when a VCTRUNK
needs to bind VC-12 paths, select VC-12
paths only in VC-4-4s.
Available
Timeslots
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
Specifies the available timeslots.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
581
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bound Path
-
-
You need to plan and set this parameter
according to the following principles:
l The capacity of the VCTRUNK is
determined by the actual bandwidth
required by the services.
l The EFP8 board supports 16
VCTRUNKs. Each VCTRUNK can
bind a maximum of 16 VC-12 paths and
the total number of bound VC-12 paths
cannot exceed 63.
l For EMS6 boards, their VCTRUNKs 1-7
each support a maximum bandwidth of
100 Mbit/s. If a bandwidth higher than
100 Mbit/s is required, VCTRUNK8 is
recommended.
Number of Bound
Paths
-
-
Displays the number of the bound VC path.
Activation Status
-
-
Displays the activation status of the bound
VC path.
A.7.1.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service
This section describes the parameters for Ethernet line services.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-17 Parameters on the main interface (Display QinQ Shared Service is not selected)
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
Displays the board name.
Service Type
-
-
Displays the service type.
Service Direction
-
-
Displays the service direction.
Source Port
-
-
Displays the port of the service source.
Source VLAN
-
-
Displays the VLAN ID of the service source.
Sink Port
-
-
Displays the port of the service sink.
Sink VLAN
-
-
Displays the VLAN ID of the service sink.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
582
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Activation Status
-
-
Displays whether to activate the service.
Table A-18 Parameters on the main interface (Display QinQ Shared Service is selected)
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
Displays the board name.
Service Type
-
-
Displays the service type.
Service Direction
-
-
Displays the service direction.
Source Port
-
-
Displays the port of the service source.
Source C-VLAN
-
-
Displays the VLAN ID of the service source.
Source S-VLAN
-
-
l Displays the S-VLAN ID of the service
source.
l This parameter can be set only for the
QinQ-based EVPL service.
Sink Port
-
-
Displays the port of the service sink.
Sink C-VLAN
-
-
Displays the VLAN ID of the service sink.
Sink S-VLAN
-
-
l Displays the S-VLAN ID of the service
sink.
l This parameter can be set only for the
QinQ-based EVPL service.
C-VLAN Priority
-
-
l Displays the priority of the C-VLAN.
l This parameter can be set only for the
QinQ-based EVPL service.
S-VLAN Priority
-
-
l Displays the priority of the S-VLAN.
l This parameter can be set only for the
QinQ-based EVPL service.
Activation Status
-
-
Displays whether to activate the service.
Table A-19 Parameters for port attributes
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the port name.
Port Type
-
-
Displays the network attribute of the
Ethernet port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
583
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Enabled
-
-
When the source port or sink port is a PORT,
this parameter indicates whether the port is
enabled.
TAG
-
-
Displays the tag attribute of the Ethernet
port.
Table A-20 Parameters for bound paths
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCTRUNK Port
-
-
Displays the VCTRUNK that binds VC
paths.
Level
-
-
Displays the level of the bound VC paths.
Service Direction
-
-
Displays the direction of the bound VC
paths.
Bound Path
-
-
Displays the serial numbers of the bound VC
paths.
Number of Bound
Paths
-
-
Displays the number of the bound VC paths.
Activation Status
-
-
Displays whether the bound VC paths are
activated.
A.7.1.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creation of Ethernet LAN
Services Based on IEEE 802.1d/802.1q Bridge
This section describes the parameters for creating an Ethernet LAN service.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-21 Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
Displays the board that is configured with a
bridge.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
584
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB name
-
-
Describes the bridge. It is recommended that
you set this parameter to a character string
that indicates the function of the bridge.
Bridge Type
802.1q
802.1q
l If this parameter is set to 802.1q, an
IEEE 802.1q bridge is created.
802.1d
l If this parameter is set to 802.1d, an
IEEE 802.1d bridge is created.
802.1ad
Bridge Switch
Mode
l IVL/Ingress
Filter Enable
(supported by the
IEEE 802.1q
bridge and IEEE
802.1ad bridge,
unsupported by
the IEEE 802.1d
bridge)
l SVL/Ingress
Filter Disable
(supported by the
IEEE 802.1d
bridge and IEEE
802.1ad bridge,
unsupported by
the IEEE 802.1q
bridge)
l IVL/Ingress
Filter Enable
(IEEE 802.1q
bridge and the
IEEE 802.1ad
bridge)
l SVL/Ingress
Filter Disable
(IEEE 802.1d
bridge)
l When the bridge uses the SVL mode, all
the VLANs share one MAC address
table. When the bridge uses the IVL
mode, each VLAN has an MAC address
table.
l When the filtering function is enabled at
the ingress port, the ingress port checks
the VLAN tags of all incoming packets.
If the VLAN ID contained in the VLAN
tag of a packet is not included in the
VLAN filtering table, the packet is
discarded. When the filtering function is
disabled at the ingress port, the ingress
port does not check any VLAN tag of the
incoming packets.
Bridge Learning
Mode
-
-
Displays the learning mode of the bridge.
Ingress Filter
-
-
Displays whether the filtering function is
enabled at the ingress port.
MAC Address Selflearning
-
-
Displays whether the MAC address selflearning of the bridge is enabled.
Table A-22 Parameters for mounting services
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB Port
-
-
Displays the ID of the logical port on the
bridge.
Mount Port
-
-
Displays or specifies which physical port or
VCTRUNK on the Ethernet switch board is
mounted to the bridge.
Port Type
-
-
Displays the network attribute of the port
mounted to the bridge.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
585
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Enabled
Disabled
-
Displays or specifies whether the port
mounted to the bridge is enabled.
-
Displays or specifies the tag attribute of the
port mounted to the bridge.
-
Displays or specifies the default VLAN ID
of the port mounted to the bridge.
Enabled
TAG
Access
Tag Aware
Hybrid
Default VLAN ID
-
This parameter is valid only when you set
the tag attribute of the port to Access or
Hybrid.
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation
-
Displays or specifies the working mode of
the port mounted to the bridge.
10M Half-Duplex
10M Full-Duplex
100M Half-Duplex
100M Full-Duplex
GE port: 1000M
Full-Duplex
Active
-
-
Displays whether to activate the service.
Service Direction
-
-
Displays the direction of the service.
C-VLAN
-
-
The IEEE 802.1d/802.1q bridge does not
support this parameter.
S-VLAN
-
-
The IEEE 802.1d/802.1q bridge does not
support this parameter.
S-VLAN Priority
-
-
The IEEE 802.1d/802.1q bridge does not
support this parameter.
C-VLAN Priority
-
-
The IEEE 802.1d/802.1q bridge does not
support this parameter.
Table A-23 Parameters for mounting configuration
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Available Mounted
Ports
-
-
Displays which physical port or VCTRUNK
on the Ethernet switch board can be mounted
to the bridge.
Selected Mounted
Ports
-
-
Displays which physical port or VCTRUNK
on the Ethernet switch board is mounted to
the bridge.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
586
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Table A-24 Parameters for bound paths
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Configurable
Ports
EFP8:
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16
VCTRUNK1
Specifies the VCTRUNK to bind paths.
-
Displays the level of the bound VC path.
EMS6:
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK8
Level
-
In the case of the EFP8 board, this parameter
always takes the value of VC12-Xv.
Service Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Uplink
l Set this parameter to Bidirectional
unless otherwise specified.
Downlink
Available
Resources
-
l Specifies the direction of the bound path.
-
l Displays the available VC4 paths.
l In the case of the EFP8 board, this
parameter always takes the value of
VC4-1.
l For EMS6 boards, when a VCTRUNK
needs to bind VC-12 paths, select VC-12
paths only in VC-4-4s.
Available
Timeslots
-
-
Specifies the available timeslots.
Bound Path
-
-
You need to plan and set this parameter
according to the following principles:
l The capacity of the VCTRUNK is
determined by the actual bandwidth
required by the services.
l The EFP8 board supports 16
VCTRUNKs. Each VCTRUNK can
bind a maximum of 16 VC-12 paths and
the total number of bound VC-12 paths
cannot exceed 63.
l For EMS6 boards, their VCTRUNKs 1-7
each support a maximum bandwidth of
100 Mbit/s. If a bandwidth higher than
100 Mbit/s is required, VCTRUNK8 is
recommended.
Number of Bound
Paths
-
-
Displays the number of the bound VC path.
Activation Status
-
-
Displays the activation status of the bound
VC path.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
587
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.7.1.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creating IEEE 802.1ad
Bridge-Based Ethernet LAN Service
This section describes the parameters associated with IEEE 802.1ad bridge-based Ethernet LAN
services, which need to be set on the NMS.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board, and then choose Configuration >
Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-25 Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
Displays the board where the bridge is
configured.
VB Name
-
-
This parameter is a string that describes the
bridge. It is recommended that you set this
parameter to a character string that contains
the information about the detailed
application of the bridge.
Bridge Type
802.1q
802.1q
When this parameter is set to 802.1ad,
create the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
l IVL/Ingress
Filter Enable (the
802.1q bridge
and the 802.1ad
bridge)
l When the bridge uses the SVL mode, all
the VLANs share one MAC address
table. When the bridge uses the IVL
mode, all the VLANs correspond to their
respective MAC address tables.
l SVL/Ingress
Filter Disable
(the 802.1d
bridge)
l If the ingress filter is enabled, the VLAN
tag is checked at the ingress port. If the
VLAN ID does not equal the VLAN ID
of the port defined in the VLAN filtering
table, the packet is discarded. If the
ingress filter is disabled, the preceding
described check is not conducted.
-
Displays the bridge learning mode.
802.1d
802.1ad
Bridge Switch
Mode
l IVL/Ingress
Filter Enable
(supported by the
802.1q bridge
and 802.1ad
bridge,
unsupported by
the 802.1d
bridge)
l SVL/Ingress
Filter Disable
(supported by the
802.1d bridge
and 802.1ad
bridge,
unsupported by
the 802.1q
bridge)
Bridge Learning
Mode
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
588
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Ingress Filter
-
-
Displays whether the ingress filter function
is enabled.
MAC Address Selflearning
-
-
Displays whether the MAC address selflearning function of the bridge is enabled.
Table A-26 Parameters of service mounting
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB Port
-
-
Displays the ID of the logical port of the
bridge.
Mount Port
-
-
Displays or specifies the external port or
VCTRUNK on the Ethernet switching
board that is connected to the bridge.
Port Type
-
-
Displays the network attribute of the
external port/VCTRUNK connected to the
bridge.
Port Enabled
Disabled
-
Displays or specifies whether the external
port connected to the bridge is enabled.
Enabled
TAG
-
-
This parameter is invalid in the case of
Ethernet LAN services based on 802.1ad
bridge.
Default VLAN ID
-
-
Displays or specifies the default VLAN ID.
This parameter is valid only when TAG is
set to Access or Hybrid.
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation
Auto-Negotiation
Displays or specifies the working mode of
the external port.
10M Half-Duplex
10M Full-Duplex
100M Half-Duplex
100M Full-Duplex
GE port: 1000M
Full-Duplex
Activate
-
-
Displays whether the service is activated.
Service Direction
-
-
Displays the service direction.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
589
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
C-VLAN
-
-
Displays or specifies the C-VLAN ID that
the data frames carry.
Is valid only when the bridge is an IEEE
802.1ad bridge and Operation Type is set
to Add S-VLAN Base for Port and CVLAN.
Specifies the mapping relationship between
the C-VLAN ID carried by the data frames
and the S-VLAN ID to be added.
S-VLAN
-
-
Displays or specifies the S-VLAN ID that
the data frames carry.
l When Operation Type is set to Add SVLAN Base for Port, this parameter
specifies that the data frames that enter
the IEEE 802.1ad bridge need to be
added with the S-VLAN ID.
l When Operation Type is set to Add SVLAN Base for Port and C-VLAN,
this parameter and C-VLAN specify the
mapping relationship between the SVLAN ID to be added and the C-VLAN
ID carried by the data frames that enter
the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
l When Operation Type is set to Mount
Port, this parameter is invalid.
l When Operation Type is set to Mount
Port and Base for Port and S-VLAN,
this parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID
to be carried by the data frames that enter
the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
S-VLAN Priority
-
-
Displays or specifies the S-VLAN priority.
C-VLAN Priority
-
-
Displays or specifies the C-VLAN priority.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
590
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Table A-27 Parameters of service mounting
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Operation Type
Add S-VLAN base
for port
Add S-VLAN base
for port
For the meaning of each operation type, see
Application of the QinQ Technology in
802.1ad Bridge Services.
Add S-VLAN base
for Port and CVLAN
Mount Port
Mount Port and base
for Port and SVLAN
VB Port
-
-
Specifies the ID of the logical port of the
bridge.
Mount Port
-
-
Selects the external port or VCTRUNK on
the Ethernet switching board that is
connected to the bridge.
Port Type
-
-
Displays the port type.
C-VLAN
1-4095
-
Is valid only when Operation Type is set to
Add S-VLAN Base for Port and CVLAN.
Specifies the mapping relationship between
the C-VLAN ID carried by the data frames
and the S-VLAN ID to be added.
S-VLAN
1-4095
-
l When Operation Type is set to Add SVLAN Base for Port, this parameter
specifies that the data frames that enter
the IEEE 802.1ad bridge need to be
added with the S-VLAN ID.
l When Operation Type is set to Add SVLAN Base for Port and C-VLAN,
this parameter and C-VLAN specify the
mapping relationship between the SVLAN ID to be added and the C-VLAN
ID carried by the data frames that enter
the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
l When Operation Type is set to Mount
Port, this parameter is invalid.
l When Operation Type is set to Mount
Port and Base for Port and S-VLAN,
this parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID
to be carried by the data frames that enter
the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
591
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
S-VLAN Priority
AUTO
AUTO
Specifies the S-VLAN priority.
Priority 0 to Priority
7
C-VLAN Priority
AUTO
AUTO
Specifies the C-VLAN priority.
Port Enabled
-
-
Displays or specifies whether the external
port connected to the bridge is enabled.
Table A-28 Parameters for bound paths
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Configurable
Ports
EFP8:
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16
VCTRUNK1
Specifies the VCTRUNK to bind paths.
-
Displays the level of the bound VC path.
EMS6:
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK8
Level
-
In the case of the EFP8 board, this parameter
always takes the value of VC12-Xv.
Service Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Uplink
l Set this parameter to Bidirectional
unless otherwise specified.
Downlink
Available
Resources
-
l Specifies the direction of the bound path.
-
l Displays the available VC4 paths.
l In the case of the EFP8 board, this
parameter always takes the value of
VC4-1.
l For EMS6 boards, when a VCTRUNK
needs to bind VC-12 paths, select VC-12
paths only in VC-4-4s.
Available
Timeslots
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
Specifies the available timeslots.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
592
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bound Path
-
-
You need to plan and set this parameter
according to the following principles:
l The capacity of the VCTRUNK is
determined by the actual bandwidth
required by the services.
l The EFP8 board supports 16
VCTRUNKs. Each VCTRUNK can
bind a maximum of 16 VC-12 paths and
the total number of bound VC-12 paths
cannot exceed 63.
l For EMS6 boards, their VCTRUNKs 1-7
each support a maximum bandwidth of
100 Mbit/s. If a bandwidth higher than
100 Mbit/s is required, VCTRUNK8 is
recommended.
Number of Bound
Paths
-
-
Displays the number of the bound VC path.
Activation Status
-
-
Displays the activation status of the bound
VC path.
A.7.1.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service
This section describes the parameters for creating an Ethernet LAN service.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-29 Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
Displays the board that is configured with a
bridge.
VB ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the bridge.
VB Name
-
-
This parameter is a character string that
describes the bridge. It is recommended that
you set this character string to a value that
indicates the specific purpose of the bridge.
Bridge Type
-
-
Displays the type of the bridge.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
593
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bridge Switch
Mode
-
-
Displays the switching mode of the bridge.
Bridge Learning
Mode
-
-
Displays the learning mode of the bridge.
Ingress Filter
-
-
Displays whether the filtering function is
enabled at the ingress port.
MAC Address selfLearning
-
-
Displays whether the MAC address selflearning of the bridge is enabled.
Active
-
-
Displays whether to activate the service.
Table A-30 Parameters for mounting services
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB Port
-
-
Displays the ID of the logical port of the
bridge.
Mount Port
-
-
Displays or specifies which physical port or
VCTRUNK on the Ethernet switch board is
mounted to the bridge.
Port Type
-
-
Displays the network attribute of the port
mounted to the bridge.
Port Enabled
-
-
Displays or specifies whether the port
mounted to the bridge is enabled.
Hub/Spoke
Hub
Hub
Displays or specifies the Hub/Spoke
attribute of the port mounted to the bridge.
Spoke
l Hub ports can mutually access each
other.
l Hub ports and Spoke ports can mutually
access each other.
l Spoke ports cannot mutually access each
other.
TAG
-
-
Displays or specifies the TAG attribute of
the mounted port in the case of Ethernet
LAN services based on 802.1d bridge or
802.1q bridge.
This parameter is invalid in the case of
Ethernet LAN services based on 802.1ad
bridge.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
594
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Default VLAN ID
-
-
Displays or specifies the default VLAN ID
of the port mounted to the bridge.
This parameter is valid only when you set
the tag attribute of the port to Access or
Hybrid.
Working Mode
-
-
Displays or specifies the working mode of
the port mounted to the bridge.
Service Direction
-
-
Displays the direction of the service.
C-VLAN
-
-
Displays or specifies the C-VLAN ID
carried by the data frame.
This parameter is valid only when the bridge
is an IEEE 802.1ad bridge and Operation
Type is Add S-VLAN Base for Port and
C-VLAN.
This parameter specifies the mapping
relation between the C-VLAN tag carried by
the data frame and the S-VLAN tag to be
added.
S-VLAN
-
-
Displays or specifies the S-VLAN ID
carried by the data frame.
l When Operation Type is set to Add SVLAN Base for Port, this parameter
specifies the S-VLAN to be added to the
data frames that enter the IEEE 802.1ad
bridge.
l When Operation Type is set to Add SVLAN Base for Port and C-VLAN,
this parameter and C-VLAN specify the
mapping relation between the S-VLAN
tag to be added and the C-VLAN tag
carried by the data frame that enters the
IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
l When Operation Type is set to Mount
Port, this parameter is invalid.
l When Operation Type is set to Mount
Port and Base for Port and S-VLAN,
this parameter specifies the S-VLAN tag
to be carried by the data frames that enter
the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
S-VLAN Priority
-
-
Displays the priority of the S-VLAN.
C-VLAN Priority
-
-
Displays the priority of the C-VLAN.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
595
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Table A-31 Parameters for VLAN filtering table
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
-
-
Displays the VLAN ID that needs to be
filtered in forwarding.
VB Port
-
-
Displays the ID of the logical port of the
bridge.
Forwarding
Physical Port
-
-
Displays the actually specified forwarding
port.
l Selected forwarding ports can send
packets only among themselves.
l Selected forwarding ports can only
forward the packet that carries the
VLAN ID tag. These ports discard the
packet that carries other VLAN tags.
l The broadcast packets transmitted by
any of Selected forwarding ports can
be forwarded only among Selected
forwarding ports.
Activation Status
-
-
Displays whether the VLAN ID entry is
valid.
Table A-32 Parameters for VLAN unicast
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
-
-
l This parameter is invalid for the 802.1d
bridge and the 802.1ad bridge that adopt
the SVL learning mode. The entry
applies to all VLANs.
l In the case of the 802.1d bridge and the
802.1ad bridge that adopt the SVL
learning mode, the entry applies to only
the VLAN with the ID specified by this
parameter.
l Set this parameter according to the
planning information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
596
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MAC Address
-
-
l Displays or specifies the static MAC
address.
l A static MAC address is an address that
is set manually. It does not age
automatically and needs to be deleted
manually.
l Generally, a static MAC address is used
for the port that receives but does not
forward Ethernet service packets or the
port whose MAC address need not age
automatically.
VB Port
-
-
Displays the ID of the logical port of the
bridge.
Physical Port
-
-
l Specifies the Ethernet port that
corresponds to the MAC address.
l Set this parameter according to the
planning information.
Aging Status
-
-
Displays the aging status of the entries.
Table A-33 Parameters for disabling MAC addresses
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID(e.g.
1,3-6)
-
-
Displays or specifies the VLAN ID of the
service. A disabled MAC address is valid for
the VLAN with the ID as specified by this
parameter.
MAC Address
-
-
l Displays or specifies the disabled MAC
address. A disabled MAC address is also
called a blacklisted MAC address.
l The data frame that contains a disabled
destination MAC address is discarded. A
disabled MAC address needs to be set
manually and does not age.
Table A-34 Parameters for bound paths
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCTRUNK Port
-
-
Displays the VCTRUNK to bind VC paths.
Level
-
-
Displays the level of the bound VC paths.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
597
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Direction
-
-
Displays the direction of the bound VC
paths.
Bound Path
-
-
Displays the bound paths.
Number of Bound
Paths
-
-
Displays the number of bound paths.
Table A-35 Parameters for self-learned MAC addresses
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MAC Address
-
-
l Displays or specifies the self-learned
MAC address. A self-learned MAC
address is also called a dynamic MAC
address.
l The entries of self-learned MAC
addresses are obtained when the bridge
uses the SVL or IVL learning mode. A
self-learned MAC address ages.
VB Port
-
-
Displays the ID of the logical port of the
bridge.
VLAN ID
-
-
l If the bridge uses the SVL learning
mode, this parameter is invalid. That is,
the preset self-learned MAC address
entries are valid for all VLANs.
l If the bridge uses the IVL learning mode,
the preset self-learned MAC address
entries are valid only for the VLAN with
the ID specified by this parameter.
l Set this parameter according to the
planning information.
Table A-36 Parameters for VLAN MAC address table capacity
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
-
-
Displays the VLAN ID specified for
querying the self-learned MAC addresses.
Actual MAC
Address Table
Capacity
-
-
Displays how many MAC addresses are
actually self-learned in the query condition
of a specific VLAN ID.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
598
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Table A-37 Parameters for VB port MAC address table capacity
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB Port
-
-
Displays the ID of the logical port of the
bridge. The ID is specified for querying the
self-learned MAC addresses.
Actual MAC
Address Table
Capacity
-
-
Displays how many MAC addresses are
actually self-learned in the query condition
of a specific VB port.
A.7.1.7 Parameter Description: VLAN Filtering Table_Creation
This section describes the parameters for creating VLAN filtering tables.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Select an IEEE 802.1q or 802.1ad bridge and click the VLAN Filtering tab.
NOTE
In the case of IEEE 802.1ad bridge-based Ethernet LAN services, the learning mode of the VB must
be IVL.
3.
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-38 Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB
-
-
Displays the bridge whose VLAN filtering
table is to be created.
VLAN ID(e.g.
1,3-6)
1-4095
1
Specifies the VLAN IDs in the VLAN
filtering table.
l You can set this parameter to a number
or several numbers. When you set this
parameter to several numbers, use "," to
separate these discrete values and use "-"
to indicate continuous numbers. For
example, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1,
3, 4, 5, and 6.
l Set this parameter as required.
Available
forwarding ports
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
Displays the ports mounted to the bridge.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
599
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Selected
forwarding ports
-
-
Displays the selected forwarding ports.
l The selected forwarding ports can send
packets only among themselves.
l The selected forwarding ports can only
forward the packet that carries the
VLAN ID (e.g:1,3-6) tag. These ports
discard the packet that carries other
VLAN tags.
l The broadcast packet that carries the
VLAN ID(e.g.1,3-6) tag can be
forwarded only among the selected
forwarding ports.
A.7.1.8 Parameter Description: Aging Time of MAC Address Table Entries
This section describes the parameters associated with the aging time of MAC address table
entries, which need to be set on the NMS.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board, and choose Configuration > Layer-2
Switching Management > Aging Time from the Function Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-39 Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
Displays the Ethernet board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
600
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MAC Address
Aging Time
l 1 to 120 Min
5 Min
l If one entry is not updated in a certain
period, that is, if no new packet from this
MAC address is received to enable the
re-learning of this MAC address, this
entry is deleted automatically. This
mechanism is called aging, and this
period is called the aging time.
l 1 to 120 Hour
l 1 to 12 Day
l If you set this parameter to a very large
value, the bridge stores excessive MAC
address table entries that are outdated,
which exhausts the resources of the
MAC address forwarding table.
l If you set this parameter to a very small
value, the bridge may delete the MAC
address table entry that is required,
which reduces the forwarding
efficiency.
l It is recommended that this parameter
takes the default value.
NOTE
The maximum MAC Address Aging Time
supported by EFP8 and EMS6 boards is 12 days.
A.7.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols
This section describes the parameters for EoS/EoPDH-plane Ethernet protocols.
A.7.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protection > ERPS Management.
2.
Click New.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
601
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ERPS ID
1 to 7
-
l This parameter
specifies the ID of the
Ethernet ring
protection switching
(ERPS) instance.
l The IDs of ERPS
instances on an NE
must be different from
each other.
East Port
-
-
This parameter specifies
the east port of the ERPS
instance.
West Port
-
-
This parameter specifies
the west port of the ERPS
instance.
RPL Owner Ring Node
Flag
Yes
No
l This parameter
specifies whether the
node on the ring is the
ring protection link
(RPL) owner.
No
l Only one node on the
ring can be set as the
RPL owner for each
Ethernet ring.
l An RPL owner needs
to balance the traffic
on each link of an
Ethernet ring.
Therefore, it is not
recommended that you
select a convergence
node as an RPL owner.
Instead, select the NE
that is farthest away
from the convergence
node as an RPL owner.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
602
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
RPL Port
-
-
l This parameter
specifies the RPL port.
l There is only one RPL
port and this RPL port
must be the east or
west port on the RPL
owner node.
l It is recommended that
you set the east port on
an RPL owner as an
RPL Port.
Control VLAN
1 to 4094
-
l This parameter
specifies the VLAN ID
of Control VLAN.
l Each node on the
Ethernet ring transmits
the R-APS packets on
the dedicated ring APS
(R-APS) channel to
ensure consistency
between the nodes
when the ERPS
switching is
performed. Control
VLAN is used for
isolating the dedicated
R-APS channel.
Therefore, the VLAN
ID in Control VLAN
cannot be duplicate
with the VLAN IDs
that are contained in
the service packets.
l The ID of a Control
VLAN must not be the
same as any VLAN ID
used by Ethernet
services. All ring
nodes should use the
same Control VLAN
ID.
Destination Node
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
01-19-A7-00-00-01
01-19-A7-00-00-01
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
This parameter indicates
the MAC address of the
destination node. The
default destination MAC
address in the R-APS
packets is always 01-19A7-00-00-01.
603
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.7.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)
management.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection >
ERPS Management from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ERPS ID
1 to 8
-
This parameter indicates
the ID of the ERPS
instance.
East Port
-
-
This parameter indicates
the east port of the ERPS
instance.
West Port
-
-
This parameter indicates
the west port of the ERPS
instance.
RPL Owner Ring Node
Flag
Yes
-
This parameter indicates
whether a node on the ring
is the ring protection link
(RPL) owner.
RPL Port
-
-
This parameter indicates
the RPL port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
No
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
604
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control VLAN
1 to 4094
-
l This parameter
indicates or specifies
the VLAN ID of
Control VLAN.
l Each node on the
Ethernet ring transmits
the R-APS packets on
the dedicated ring APS
(R-APS) channel to
ensure consistency
between the nodes
when the ERPS
switching is
performed. Control
VLAN is used for
isolating the dedicated
R-APS channel.
Therefore, the VLAN
ID in Control VLAN
cannot be duplicate
with the VLAN IDs
that are contained in
the service packets or
inband DCN packets.
l The Control VLAN
must be set to the same
value for all the NEs
on an ERPS ring.
Destination Node
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
01-19-A7-00-00-01
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
This parameter indicates
the MAC address of the
destination node. The
default destination MAC
address in the R-APS
packets is always 01-19A7-00-00-01.
605
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Hold-Off Time(ms)
0 to 10000, in step of 100
0
l This parameter
indicates or specifies
the hold-off time of the
ERPS hold-off timer.
l The hold-off timer is
used for negotiating
the protection
switching sequence
when the ERPS
coexists with other
protection schemes so
that the fault can be
rectified in the case of
other protection
switching (such as
LAG protection)
before the ERPS
occurs. When a node
on the ring detects one
or more new faults, it
starts up the hold-off
timer if the preset
hold-off time is set to a
value that is not 0.
During the hold-off
time, the fault is not
reported to trigger an
ERPS. When the holdoff timer times out, the
node checks the link
status regardless
whether the fault that
triggers the startup of
the timer exists. If the
fault exists, the node
reports it to trigger an
ERPS. This fault can
be the same as or
different from the fault
that triggers the initial
startup of the hold-off
timer.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
606
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Guard Time(ms)
10 to 2000, in step of 10
500
l This parameter
indicates or specifies
the guard time of the
ERPS guard timer.
l The nodes on the ring
continuously forward
the R-APS packets to
the Ethernet ring. As a
result, the outdated RAPS packets may exist
on the ring network.
After a node on the
ring receives the
outdated R-APS
packets, an incorrect
ERPS may occur. The
ERPS guard timer is an
R-APS timer used for
preventing a node on
the ring from receiving
outdated R-APS
packets. When a faulty
node on the ring
detects that the
switching condition is
cleared, the node starts
up the guard timer and
starts to forward the RAPS (NR) packets.
During this period, the
R-APS packets
received by the node
are discarded. The
received R-APS
packets are forwarded
only after the time of
the guard timer
expires.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
607
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(mm:ss)
5 to 12, in step of 1
5
l This parameter
indicates or specifies
the WTR time of the
WRT timer in the case
of ERPS protection.
l The WTR time refers
to the duration from
the time when the
working channel is
restored to the time
when the switching is
released. When the
working channel is
restored, the WTR
timer of the RPL
owner starts up. In
addition, a signal that
indicates the operation
of the WTR timer is
continuously output in
the timing process.
When the WTR timer
times out and no
switching request of a
higher priority is
received, the signal
indicating the
operation of the WTR
timer is not
transmitted. In
addition, the WTR
release signal is
continuously output.
l The WTR timer is used
to prevent frequent
switching caused by
the unstable working
channel.
Packet Transmit
Interval(s)
1 to 10
5
This parameter displays or
specifies the interval for
sending R-APS packets
periodically.
Entity Level
0 to 7
4
This parameter indicates
or specifies the level of the
maintenance entity.
Last Switching Request
-
-
This parameter indicates
the last switching request.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
608
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
RB Status
-
-
This parameter indicates
the RB (RPL Blocked)
status of the packets
received by the working
node.
l noRB: The RPL is not
blocked.
l RB: The RPL is
blocked.
DNF Status
-
-
This parameter indicates
the DNF status of the
packets received by the
working node.
l noDNF: The R-APS
packets do not contain
the DNF flag. In this
case, the packets are
forwarded by the node
that detects the fault on
a non-RPL link, and
the node that receives
the packets is
requested to clear the
forwarding address
table.
l DNF: The R-APS
packets contain the
DNF flags. In this
case, the packets are
forwarded by the node
that detects the fault on
an RPL link, and the
node that receives the
packets is informed
not to clear the
forwarding address
table.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
609
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
State Machine Status
-
-
This parameter indicates
the status of the state
machine at the working
node.
l Idle: The Ethernet ring
is in normal state. For
example, no node on
the Ethernet ring
detects any faults or
receives the R_APS
(NR, RB) packets.
l Protection: The
Ethernet ring is in
protected state. For
example, a fault on the
node triggers the
ERPS, or a node on the
ring is in the WTR
period after the fault is
rectified.
Node Carried with
Current Packet
-
-
This parameter indicates
the MAC address carried
in the R-APS packets
received by the current
node. The MAC address
refers to the MAC address
of the source node that
initiates the switching
request.
East Port Status
-
-
Displays the status of the
east port.
West Port Status
-
-
Displays the status of the
west port.
A.7.2.3 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Protocol Enabling
This section describes the parameters for the types of spanning tree protocols and for enabling
the spanning tree protocols.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function
Tree.
2.
Click the Protocol Enabled tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
610
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-40 Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB
-
-
Displays the created bridge.
Protocol Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
l Indicates whether to enable the spanning
tree protocol.
Disabled
l Try to avoid Layer 2 service loopbacks
in the service networking. If no loop
occurs, you need not start the STP/
RSTP.
l If the loop is already formed in the
service networking, you must start the
STP or RSTP.
STP
Protocol Type
RSTP
RSTP
l This parameter is valid only when
Protocol Enabled is Enabled.
l The protocol type should be set
according to the requirement of the
interconnected Ethernet equipment. The
default value is recommended unless
otherwise specified.
A.7.2.4 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Parameters
This section describes the parameters for the spanning tree protocol.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function
Tree.
2.
Click the Bridge Parameters tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-41 Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB
-
-
Displays the created bridge.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
611
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Priority
0-61440
32768
l The most significant 16 bits of the bridge
ID indicate the priority of the bridge.
l When the value is smaller, the priority is
higher. As a result, the bridge is more
likely to be selected as the root bridge.
l If the priorities of all the bridges on the
STP network take the same value, the
bridge whose MAC address is the
smallest is selected as the root bridge.
MAC Address
-
-
Displays the MAC address of a bridge.
Max Age(s)
6-40
20
l Indicates the maximum age of the
CBPDU packet that is recorded by the
port.
l The greater the value, the longer the
transmission distance of the CBPDU
packet, and the greater the network
diameter. When the value of this
parameter is greater, however, the link
fault detection of the bridge is slower and
thus the network adaptability is reduced.
1-10
Hello Time(s)
2
l Indicates the interval for transmitting
CBPDU packets through the bridge.
l The greater the value of this parameter,
the less the network resources that are
occupied by the spanning tree. As the
value of this parameter increases,
however, the topology stability
decreases.
4-30
Forward Delay(s)
15
l Indicates the holding time of a port in the
listening state and in the learning state.
l The greater the value, the longer the
delay of the network state change.
Therefore, the topology changes are
slower and recovery in the case of faults
is slower.
1-10
TxHoldCout(per
second)
6
Indicates how many times the port transmits
CBPDU packets in every second.
A.7.2.5 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Parameters
This section describes the parameters associated with the spanning tree protocol, which need to
be set on the NMS.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
612
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board, and choose Configuration > Layer-2
Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Port Parameters tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-42 Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the created bridge.
Priority
0-240
128
l The most significant eight bits of the port
ID indicate the port priority.
l The smaller the value of this parameter,
the higher the priority.
Port Path Cost
1-200000000
-
l Indicates the status of the network to
which the port is connected.
l In the case of the bridges on both ends of
the path, set this parameter to the same
value.
Status
-
-
Displays the state of a port.
Admin Edge
Attribute
Enabled
Disabled
l Is valid only when the RSTP is used.
Disabled
l Specifies whether to set the port to an
edge port. The edge port refers to the
bridge port that is connected only to the
LAN. The edge port receives the BPDU
and does not transmit the BPDU.
l Set this parameter to Enabled only when
the Ethernet port on the Ethernet board
is directly connected to the data
communication terminal equipment,
such as a computer. In other cases, it is
recommended that this parameter takes
the default value.
Protocol Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
l Specifies whether the STP or RSTP is
enabled for the port.
l When this parameter is set to Disabled,
the port does not process or transmit the
BPDU.
l It is recommended that this parameter
takes the default value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
613
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Auto Edge
Detection
Enabled
Disabled
l Is valid only when Admin Edge
Attribute is set to Enabled.
Disabled
l When this parameter is set to Enabled,
if the bridge detects that this port is
connected to the port of another bridge,
the RSTP considers this port as a nonedge port.
l When Admin Edge Attribute is set to
Enabled, set this parameter to
Enabled. In other cases, it is
recommended that this parameter takes
the default value.
A.7.2.6 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Running Information
This section describes the parameters associated with the type and enabled status of the spanning
tree protocol, which need to be set on the NMS.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board, and choose Configuration > Layer-2
Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Bridge Running Information tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-43 Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB
-
-
Displays the created bridge.
Priority
-
-
Displays the priority of the bridge. The most
significant 16 bits of the bridge ID indicate
the priority of the bridge.
MAC Address
-
-
Displays the MAC address of the bridge.
Designed Root
Bridge Priority
-
-
Displays the priority of the specified bridge.
Designed Root
Bridge MAC
Address
-
-
Displays the MAC address of the specified
bridge.
Root Path Cost
-
-
Displays the root path cost. The root path
cost is the path cost of the root port and is
used for calculating the network topology.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
614
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Root Port
-
-
Displays the root port of the spanning tree
protocol.
Max Age(s)
-
-
Displays the maximum age of the CBPDU
packet that is recorded by the port.
Hello Time(s)
-
-
Displays the interval for transmitting the
CBPDU packets through the bridge.
Forward Delay(s)
-
-
Displays the holding time of a port in
listening state and in learning state.
HoldCout
-
-
Displays the number of times that each port
transmits CBPDU packets per second.
A.7.2.7 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Running Information
This section describes the parameters associated with the type and enabled status of the spanning
tree protocol, which need to be set on the NMS.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board, and choose Configuration > Layer-2
Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Port Running Information tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-44 Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the logical port of the bridge.
Port ID
-
-
Displays the port ID.
Port Status
-
-
Displays the port status.
Port Path Cost
-
-
Displays the port path cost.
Designated Port D
-
-
Displays the ID of the specified port.
Designated Root
Bridge Priority
-
-
Displays the priority of the specified root
bridge.
Designated Root
Bridge MAC
Address
-
-
Displays the MAC address of the specified
root bridge.
Designated Path
Cost
-
-
Displays the specified path cost.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
615
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Designated Bridge
Priority
-
-
Displays the priority of the specified bridge.
Designated Bridge
MAC Address
-
-
Displays the MAC address of the specified
bridge.
Topology
Detection
-
-
Displays the enabled status of topology
detection.
Edge Port Status
-
-
Displays the enabled status of the edge port.
Running Time(s)
-
-
Displays the duration when the topology
remains unchanged.
A.7.2.8 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Point-to-Point Attribute
This section describes the parameters associated with the point-to-point attribute of the spanning
tree protocol, which need to be set on the NMS.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board, and choose Configuration > Layer-2
Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Point to Point Attribute tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-45 Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the internal and external ports on
the Ethernet board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
616
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Point-to-point
Attribute
Adaptive
connection
Adaptive connection
l This parameter is valid only when the
RSTP is used.
Link connection
l If this parameter is set to Adaptive
connection, the bridge determines the
actual point-to-point attribute of the port
according to the actual working mode of
the port. If the port works in full-duplex
mode, the actual point-to-point attribute
of the port is True. If the port works in
half-duplex mode, the actual point-topoint attribute of the port is False.
Shared media
l If you set this parameter to Link
connection, the actual point-to-point
attribute of the port is True.
l If you set this parameter to Shared
media, the actual point-to-point attribute
of the port is False.
l Only the port whose actual point to point
attribute is True can transmit the fast
transition request and response
messages.
l It is recommended that this parameter
takes the default value.
A.7.2.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Enabling
This section describes the parameters for enabling the IGMP snooping protocol.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > IGMP Snooping Protocol from the
Function Tree.
2.
Click the Enable IGMP Snooping Protocol tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
Displays the board name.
VB
-
-
Displays the ID of the bridge.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
617
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protocol Enable
Enabled
Disabled
l Specifies whether to enable the IGMP
snooping protocol.
Disabled
l If the IGMP multicast router exists on
the interconnected Ethernet network,
enable the IGMP snooping protocol
according to the requirements of the
router.
The Discarded Tag
of the Packet
Excluded in the
Multicast Group
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter specifies the method of
the port to process unknown multicast
packets. When the IEEE 802.1q or
802.1ad bridge receives the multicast
packets whose multicast addresses are
not included in the multicast table, these
packets are considered as unknown
packets.
l This parameter is valid only when
Protocol Enable is Enabled.
l If this parameter is set to Disabled,
unknown multicast packets are
broadcast in the VLAN.
l Set this parameter as required by the
IGMP multicast server.
1 to 4
Max.NonResponse Times
3
If the bridge transmits an IGMP group query
packet to the multicast member ports, the
router port starts the timer for the query of
the maximum response time. If the bridge
does not receive the IGMP report packet
within the maximum response time, the
bridge adds one to the no-response times of
the multicast member port. When the noresponse times of the port exceed the preset
threshold, the bridge deletes the multicast
member from the multicast group.
A.7.2.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Creation of Static
Multicast Table Entries
This section describes the parameters for creating static multicast table entries.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > IGMP Snooping Protocol from the
Function Tree.
2.
Click the Static Multicast Table tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
618
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3.
A Parameters Description
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the created bridge.
VLAN ID
-
-
Specifies the VLAN ID of the static
multicast table entry.
MAC Address
-
-
l Specifies the MAC address in the static
multicast table.
l Set this parameter as required.
Multicast Port
-
-
l Specifies the port as an entry in the static
multicast table.
l An entry in the static multicast table does
not age.
A.7.2.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Aging Time of Multicast
Table Entries
This section describes the parameters for the aging time of multicast table entries.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > IGMP Snooping Protocol from the
Function Tree.
2.
Click the Multicast Aging Time tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
Displays the board name.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
619
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Multicast Aging
Time(Min)
1-120
8
l Specifies the aging time for multicast
table entries. When a dynamic multicast
table entry is not updated in a certain
period (that is, no IGMP request from
this multicast address is received), this
entry is automatically deleted. This
mechanism is called aging, and this
period is called aging time.
l If this parameter is set to a very great
value, the bridge stores excessive
multicast table entries that are no longer
needed, which exhausts the resources of
the multicast table.
l If this parameter is set to a very small
value, the bridge may delete the
multicast table entry that is needed,
which reduces the forwarding
efficiency.
l The default value is recommended.
A.7.2.12 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Creation of LAGs
This topic describes the parameters for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation
Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.
3.
Click New.
Attribute Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAG No
EFP8: 1-12
1
Specifies the LAG number.
-
Specifies the LAG name.
EMS6: 1-8
LAG Name
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
620
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAG Type
Static
Static
l Static: A static LAG is created by the
user. To add or delete a member port, you
need to run the Link Aggregation
Control Protocol (LACP) protocol. In a
static LAG, a port can be in selected,
standby, or unselected state. By running
the LACP protocol, devices exchange
aggregation information so that they
share the same aggregation information.
Manual
l Manual: A manual LAG is created by the
user. When you add or delete a member
port, you need not run the LACP
protocol. In a manual LAG, a port can be
in the UP or DOWN state. The system
determines whether to aggregate a port
according to its physical state (UP or
DOWN), working mode, and rate.
Load Sharing
Sharing
Sharing
Non-Sharing
l Sharing: In a sharing LAG, all member
ports always share the traffic load. The
sharing mode can improve bandwidth
utilization on a link. When the member
ports are changed or some member ports
fail, the traffic load of each member port
is automatically re-allocated.
l Non-Sharing: In a non-sharing LAG,
only one member port carries the traffic
load and the other member ports are in
Standby state. Actually, a non-sharing
LAG works in hot-standby mode. When
the active port fails, the system selects a
standby port to substitute for the failed
port, thus preventing a link failure.
Sharing Mode
IP Sharing Mode
IP Sharing Mode
You can set this parameter only when Load
Sharing is Sharing.
Revertive
l You can set this parameter only when
Load Sharing is Non-Sharing.
MAC Sharing Mode
Revertive Mode
Revertive
Non-Revertive
l If this parameter is set to Revertive,
services are automatically switched back
to the working path after the working
path recovers.
l If this parameter is set to NonRevertive, services are still transmitted
in the protection path after the working
path recovers and the LAG remains the
same.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
621
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Port Setting Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Main Port
-
-
l Specifies the main port in a LAG.
l After a LAG is created, you can add
Ethernet services to the main port only.
That is, services cannot be added to a
slave port.
l When Load Sharing is set to NonSharing, the link connected to the main
port is the working path and the links
connected to the slave ports are
protection paths.
Available Standby
Ports
-
Selected Standby
Ports
-
-
l Specifies the salve port in a LAG.
l After a LAG is created, you need to
perform manual operations to add or
delete a slave port.
-
Displays the selected slave ports.
A.7.2.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation
This section describes the parameters for port priorities and system priorities.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation
Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Link Aggregation Parameters tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the port name.
Port Priority
0-65535
32768
l This parameter is valid only when LAG
Type of a LAG is set to Static.
l This parameter indicates the priorities of
the ports in a LAG as defined in the
LACP protocol. The smaller the value,
the higher the priority.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
622
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters for the system settings
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
System Priority
0-65535
32768
l This parameter is valid only when LAG
Type of a LAG is set to Static.
l This parameter indicates the priority of a
LAG. The smaller the value, the higher
the priority.
l When the local LAG and the opposite
LAG negotiate through LACP packets,
one can obtain the system priority of the
other. The LAG with the higher system
priority is considered as the comparison
result. Then, the aggregation
information is consistent at both ends. If
the local LAG and the opposite LAG
have the same system priority, the MAC
addresses are compared. The LAG with
a lower MAC address is considered as
the comparison result. Then, the
aggregation information is consistent at
both ends.
-
System MAC
Address
-
Displays the MAC address of the system.
A.7.2.14 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Point
Service LPT
This section describes the parameters for creating point-to-point service LPT.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > LPT Management from the
Function Tree.
2.
Click Query.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the port name.
VCTRUNK Port
-
-
Displays the VCTRUNK used by the
Ethernet service.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
623
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Direction
-
-
l Displays the direction of the Ethernet
service at the port.
l The service direction is set to positive
when the source port is a PORT and the
sink port is a VCTRUNK; the service
direction is set to reverse when the
source port is a VCTRUNK and the sink
port is a PORT.
Yes
LPT
No
Specifies whether to enable the LPT.
GFP(HUAWEI)
Ethernet
l Specifies the bearer mode of the LPT
packets.
GFP-CSF
l The default value is recommended.
No
Bearer Mode
GFP(HUAWEI)
PORT-Type Port
Hold-Off Time(ms)
0-10000
100
l When the link on which Ethernet
services are transmitted is configured
with other protection schemes, you need
to set the hold-off time of LPT. This
enables the NE to notify the equipment
at both ends of a transmission network of
the fault on the transmission link only
when the other protection schemes fail.
l This parameter is valid only in the
positive direction of LPT.
VCTRUNK Port
Hold-Off Time(ms)
0-10000
100
l When the link on which Ethernet
services are transmitted is configured
with other protection schemes, you need
to set the hold-off time of LPT. This
enables the NE to notify the equipment
at both ends of a transmission network of
the fault on the transmission link only
when the other protection schemes fail.
l This parameter is valid only in the
reverse direction of LPT.
A.7.2.15 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Multipoint
Service LPT
This section describes the parameters for creating point-to-multipoint service LPT.
Navigation Path
1.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > LPT Management from the
Function Tree.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
624
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
2.
Click PtoMP LPT. Then, the LPT Management dialog box appears.
3.
Click New.
Parameters for Convergence Points
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Specifies the port of the convergence point.
Bearer Mode
GFP(HUAWEI)
GFP(HUAWEI)
Ethernet
l This parameter can be set only when the
selected port is a VCTRUNK.
GFP-CSF
l The default value is recommended.
Port Hold-Off
Time(ms)
0-10000
0
When the link on which Ethernet services
are transmitted is configured with other
protection schemes, you need to set the
hold-off time of LPT. This enables the NE
to notify the equipment at both ends of a
transmission network of the fault on the
transmission link only when the other
protection schemes fail.
Parameters for Access Points
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Specifies the port at the access node.
Bearer Mode
GFP(HUAWEI)
GFP(HUAWEI)
Ethernet
l This parameter can be set only when the
selected port is a VCTRUNK.
GFP-CSF
l The default value is recommended.
A.7.2.16 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation
This section describes the parameters for creating port mirroring tasks.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Port Mirroring from the Function
Tree.
2.
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
Displays the board name.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
625
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Mirror Listener
Port
-
-
l After the mirroring function of the port
is configured, you can monitor all the
mirrored ports by analyzing the packets
at the mirroring port only. As a result,
you can easily manage the ports.
l Mirror Listener Port indicates the port
that sends the packets copied from
Uplink Listened Port and Downlink
Listened Port.
l Mirror Listener Port cannot be set to a
port that carries any service.
Mirrored
Upstream Port
-
-
Mirrored
Downstream Port
-
-
l Mirrored Upstream Port and
Mirrored Downstream Port indicate
the ports that copy packets for Mirror
Listener Port.
l Mirrored Upstream Port can be a
PORT or a VCTRUNK. As a PORT, the
port copies the packets that it receives;
as a VCTRUNK, the port copies the
packets that it transmits. Mirror
Listener Port sends the packets copied
from Mirrored Upstream Port.
l Mirrored Downstream Port can be a
PORT or a VCTRUNK. As a PORT, the
port copies the packets that it transmits;
as a VCTRUNK, the port copies the
packets that it receives. Mirror Listener
Port sends the packets copied from
Mirrored Downstream Port.
NOTE
The transmit direction and receive direction
mentioned in this section are related to the local
NE.
A.7.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM
This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet OAM on the EoS/EoPDH plane.
A.7.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MDs
This topic describes the parameters for creating maintenance domains (MDs).
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
626
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function
Tree.
2.
In the right pane, click OAM Configuration.
3.
Click New and choose Create MD from the drop-down list.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-46 Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance Domain
Name
For example: MD1
-
Specifies the name of the
MD.
Maintenance Domain
Level
Consumer High(7)
Operator Low(0)
Specifies the level of the
MD. The greater the value,
the higher the level.
Consumer Middle(6)
Consumer Low(5)
Provider High(4)
Provider Low(3)
Operator High(2)
Operator Middle(1)
Operator Low(0)
A.7.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MAs
This section describes the parameters for creating maintenance associations (MAs).
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function
Tree.
2.
In the right pane, click OAM Configuration.
3.
Click New and choose Create MA from the drop-down list.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-47 Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance Domain
Name
For example: MD1
-
Displays the MD in which
an MA is to be created.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
627
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Association Name
For example: MA1
-
This parameter specifies
the name of the MA,
which is a service-related
domain. By creating MAs,
the connectivity check
(CC) can be performed on
the network that transmits
a particular service
instance.
A.7.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MPs
This section describes the parameters for creating a maintenance point (MP).
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function
Tree.
2.
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-48 Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Domain Name
-
NULL
Specifies the maintenance domain (MD) of
the MP.
NOTE
An MD is not required for a common MP. For
the creation of a common MP, select NULL.
Maintenance
Association Name
-
NULL
Specifies the maintenance association (MA)
of the MP.
NOTE
An MA is not required for a common MP. For
the creation of a common MP, select NULL.
Node
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
Specifies the port where you want to create
an MP.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
628
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
-
-
l Configures the ID of the VLAN to which
the service of the MP belongs. The
information is contained in the OAM
data packet. The MPs with the same
VLAN ID in an MD can communicate
with each other.
l This parameter can be null in the case of
PORT services, but need to be set in the
case of PORT+VLAN services.
MP ID
Standard MP:
00-00-0000 to FFFF-1FFF
00-00-0000
Uniquely identifies an MP. From the highest
to the lowest, the first byte indicates the
network number, the second byte indicates
the number of the node in the local network,
and the third and forth bytes indicate the ID
of the MP on the network node. The MP ID
must be unique in the entire network.
MEP
Specifies the MP type defined in IEEE
802.1ag. An MP can be a maintenance
association end point (MEP) or a
maintenance association intermediate point
(MIP).
SDH
l Specifies the MEP direction.
Common MP:
00-00-0000 to FFFF-FF00
Type
MEP
MIP
Direction
SDH
IP
l Set this parameter to SDH if the OAM
data initiated by the MEP travels through
the Ethernet switching unit on the local
NE. Otherwise, set this parameter to IP.
Parameters for Advanced Attributes
Table A-49 Parameters for advanced attributes
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Level
Consumer High(7)
Provider High(4)
Specifies the level of a common MP. The
greater the value, the higher the level.
Consumer Middle
(6)
Consumer Low(5)
NOTE
This parameter is valid only for a common MP
(NULL).
Provider High(4)
Provider Low(3)
Operator High(2)
Operator Middle(1)
Operator Low(0)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
629
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CC Status
Active
Inactive
Specifies whether to enable the connectivity
check (CC) function at an MP.
5000
l Specifies the timeout duration of an LB
test.
Inactive
LB Timeout(ms)
3000 to 60000, in
step of 100
l This parameter can be set only for an
MEP.
LT Timeout(ms)
3000 to 60000, in
step of 100
l Specifies the timeout duration of an LT
test.
5000
l This parameter can be set only for an
MEP.
CCM Sending
Period(ms)
Standard MP:
Standard MP
1000
1000
10000
Common MP:
6000
5000
600000
Common MP:
Specifies the interval for sending the CCM
packet at the MP where the CC test is
performed.
l If this parameter takes a very small
value, service bandwidth decreases
significantly.
l If this parameter takes a very large value,
the CC test will become less capable in
detecting service interruptions. The
default value is recommended.
1000 to 60000, in
step of 100
l This parameter can be set only for an
MEP.
A.7.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LB
This section describes the parameters for enabling the LB.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function
Tree.
2.
Select the node that requires an LB test, click OAM Operation, and select Start LB.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-50 Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LB Source MP ID
-
-
Specifies the ID of the
source maintenance point
in the LB test.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
630
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LB Sink MP ID
-
-
Specifies the ID of the sink
maintenance point in the
LB test.
Test Result
-
-
Indicates the result of one
LB test.
Test based on the MAC
Address
Selected
Not selected
Select this parameter for
an LB test based on MAC
addresses.
Not selected
NOTE
This parameter is valid only
for a standard MP.
LB Sink MP MAC
Address
-
-
Specifies the MAC
address of the sink
maintenance point in the
LB test. This parameter is
valid only in the case of
Test based on the MAC
Address.
A.7.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LT
This topic describes the parameters for enabling the LT.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function
Tree.
2.
Select the node that requires an LT test, click OAM Operation, and select Start LT.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-51 Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LT Source MP ID
-
-
Specifies the source MP in
the LT test.
LT Sink MP ID
-
-
Specifies the sink MP in
the LT test.
Responding MP ID
-
-
Displays the MP that
responds to the test.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
631
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Responding MP Type
-
-
Displays the type of the
MP that responds to the
test.
Hop Count
-
-
Displays the count of hops
between the source MP
and the responding MP.
That is, the number of
responding MPs from the
source MP to a certain
responding MP in an LT
test.
Test Result
-
-
Indicates the result of one
LT test.
A.7.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Parameter
This section describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Port OAM from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the OAM Parameter tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-52 Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PORT
-
-
Displays the name of the
external Ethernet port.
Enable OAM Protocol
Enabled
Disabled
Specifies whether the
point-to-point OAM
protocol is enabled.
Disabled
After the OAM protocol is
enabled, the current
Ethernet port starts to use
the preset mode to set up
an OAM connection with
the opposite end.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
632
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
OAM Working Mode
Active
Active
The negotiation mode of
Ethernet port OAM
includes active and
passive modes.
Passive
If this parameter is set to
Active, the port can
initiate an OAM
connection. If this
parameter is set to
Passive, the port can only
respond to the OAM
connection requests from
the opposite end.
Remote Alarm Support
for Link Event
Enabled
Max OAM Packet
Length(byte)
-
Enabled
Specifies whether the
detected link event is
notified to the opposite
end (for example, error
frame periods, error
frames, and error frame
seconds).
-
Displays the maximum
length of the OAM
packets.
Disabled
This parameter takes the
same value as the
Maximum Frame
Length of the external
port.
-
Loopback Status
-
Displays the loopback
status.
A.7.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Error Frame Monitoring
This section describes the parameters for monitoring the OAM error frames at the Ethernet port.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Port OAM from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
633
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-53 Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PORT
For example:
PORT1
-
Displays the name of the external Ethernet
port.
Error Frame
Monitor Window
(ms)
1000 to 60000, in
step of 100
1000
In the specified Error Frame Monitor
Window (ms), if the number of error frames
exceeds the specified Error Frame
Monitor Threshold (Entries) due to the
link degradation, the link event alarm is
reported.
Error Frame
Monitor Threshold
(frames)
1 to 4294967295, in
step of 1
2
Specifies the threshold of monitoring error
frames.
Error Frame
Period Window
(frames)
1488 to 89280000,
in step of 1
GE port: 1488000
Within the specified value of Error Frame
Period Window (frames), if the number of
error frames on the link exceeds the preset
value of Error Frame Period Threshold
(frames), an alarm is reported.
Error Frame
Period Threshold
(frames)
1 to 89280000, in
step of 1
2
Specifies the threshold of monitoring the
error frame period.
Error Frame
Second Window(s)
10 to 900, in step of
1
60
If any error frame occurs in one second, this
second is called an error frame second.
FE port: 148800
Within the specified value of Error Frame
Second Window(s), if the number of error
frames on the link exceeds the preset value
of Error Frame Second Threshold (s), an
alarm is reported.
Error Frame
Second Threshold
(s)
1 to 900, in step of 1
2
Specifies the threshold of monitoring error
frame seconds.
A.7.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_Remote OAM Parameter
This section describes the parameters for monitoring the OAM errored frames at the Ethernet
port.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Maintenance > Ethernet Port OAM from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Remote OAM parameter tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
634
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-54 Parameters on the main interface
Field
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the name of the
remote Ethernet port.
Remote OAM Working
Mode
-
-
Displays the working
mode of the remote
Ethernet port.
Remote Alarm Support
for Link Event
-
-
Displays whether the
remote Ethernet port can
notify link events to the
local port.
Remote Side Loopback
Response
-
-
Displays how the remote
Ethernet port responds to a
loopback.
Unidirectional
Operation
-
-
Displays whether the
remote Ethernet port
supports unidirectional
operations.
Max.OAM Packet
Length (byte)
-
-
Displays the maximum
OAM packet size
supported by the remote
Ethernet port.
A.7.4 QoS Parameters
This section describes the parameters for the QoS on the EoS/EoPDH plane.
A.7.4.1 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of Flows
This parameter describes the parameters for creating flows.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Flow Configuration tab.
3.
Click New.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
635
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-55 Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Flow Type
Port Flow
Port Flow
l Port flow: The packets from a certain
port are classified as a type of flow. The
Ethernet service associated with this
flow type is the line service or Layer 2
switching service that uses this port as
the service source.
Port+VLAN Flow
Port+SVLAN Flow
Port+CVLAN
+SVLAN Flow
Port+VLAN
+Priority Flow
l Port+VLAN flow: The packets that are
from a certain port and have a specified
VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow.
The associated Ethernet service of this
flow type is the EVPL service (based on
VLAN) or EVPLAN service (based on
the 802.1q bridge) that uses this PORT
+VLAN as the service source.
l Port+SVLAN flow: The packets that are
from a certain port and have a specified
SVLAN ID are classified as a type of
flow. The associated Ethernet service of
this flow type is the EVPL service (based
on QinQ) or EVPLAN service (based on
the 802.1ad bridge) that uses this PORT
+SVLAN as the service source.
l Port+CVLAN+SVLAN flow: The
packets that are received from or
transmitted to a certain port and have a
specified CVLAN+SVLAN are
classified as a type of flow. The
associated Ethernet service of this flow
type is the EVPL service (based on
QinQ) or EVPLAN service (based on the
802.1ad bridge) that uses this PORT
+CVLAN+SVLAN as the service
source.
l Port+VLAN+Priority flow: The packets
that are from a certain port and have a
specified VLAN ID and a specified
VLAN priority are classified as a type of
flow. The associated Ethernet service of
this flow type is the line service that uses
this Port+VLAN+Priority as the service
source.
NOTE
An EMS6 board does not support Port+VLAN
+Priority Flow.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
636
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
EFP8: PORT1 to
PORT9,
VCTRUNK1 to
VCTRUNK16
PORT1
l When the associated service is the line
service, set this parameter to the source
port or sink port of the associated
Ethernet service.
EMS6: PORT1 to
PORT7,
VCTRUNK1 to
VCTRUNK8
1 to 4095
VLAN ID
l When the associated service is the Layer
2 switching service, set this parameter to
a mounted port of the bridge.
1
l This parameter is valid only when Flow
Type is set to Port+VLAN Flow or Port
+VLAN+Priority Flow.
l Set this parameter to the source VLAN
of the associated Ethernet service.
C-VLAN
1 to 4095
1
l This parameter is valid only when Flow
Type is set to Port+CVLAN+SVLAN
Flow.
l Set this parameter to the source CVLAN of the associated Ethernet
service.
1 to 4095
S-VLAN
1
l This parameter is valid only when Flow
Type is set to Port+SVLAN Flow or
Port+SVLAN+CVLAN Flow.
l Set this parameter to the source S-VLAN
of the associated Ethernet service.
Priority
-
-
l This parameter is valid only when Flow
Type is PORT+VLAN+Priority Flow.
l This parameter indicates the VLAN
priority of the flow-associated Ethernet
services.
NOTE
An EMS6 board does not support Priority.
A.7.4.2 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR
This section describes the parameters for creating CAR.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board, and then choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the CAR Configuration.
3.
Click New.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
637
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-56 Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CAR ID
EFP8: 1 to 512
1
This parameter identifies a CAR operation,
and is used to bind a flow to an associated
CAR operation.
Disabled
Indicates whether to enable the CAR
operation performed on the flow bound to
the CAR.
0
l Indicates the CIR. When the rate of a
packet is not more than the CIR, this
packet passes the restriction of the CAR
and is forwarded first even in the case of
network congestion.
EMS6: 1 to 1024
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Committed
information Rate
(kbit/s)
EFP8: 0 to 100032,
in steps of 64
EMS6 (FE ports): 0
to 102400, in steps
of 64
l The value of this parameter should not
be more than the PIR.
EMS6 (GE ports): 0
to 1024000, in steps
of 64
Committed Burst
Size (kbyte)
EFP8: 0 to 1024
Peak information
Rate (kbit/s)
EFP8: 0 to 100032,
in steps of 64
0
Indicates the CBS. When the rate of a packet
that passes the restriction of the CAR is not
more than the CIR in a certain period, some
packets can burst. These packets can be
forwarded first even in the case of network
congestion. The maximum traffic of the
burst packets is determined by the CBS.
Note that the CBS has an inherent size, and
this parameter indicates the increment value
only. The inherent size of the CBS is
determined by the CIR. The greater the CIR,
the greater the CBS.
0
l Indicates the PIR. When the rate of a
packet is more than the PIR, the packet
that exceeds the rate restriction is
directly discarded. When the rate of
packets is more than the CIR but is lower
than or equal to the PIR, these packets
whose rate exceeds the CIR can pass the
restriction of the CAR and are marked
yellow.
EMS6: 0 to 16384
EMS6 (FE ports): 0
to 102400, in steps
of 64
EMS6 (GE ports): 0
to 1024000, in steps
of 64
l The value of this parameter should not
be more than the port bandwidth.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
638
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maximum Burst
Size (kbyte)
EFP8: 0 to 1024
0
Indicates the MBS. When the rate of the
packet that passes the restriction of the CAR
is more than the CIR but is not more than
the PIR, some packets can burst and are
marked yellow. The maximum traffic of the
burst packets is determined by the MBS.
Note that the MBS has an inherent size, and
this parameter indicates the increment value
only. The inherent size of the MBS is
determined by the PIR. The greater the PIR,
the greater the MBS.
EMS6: 0 to 16384
A.7.4.3 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CoS
This section describes the parameters for creating CoS.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the CoS Configuration tab.
3.
Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-57 Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS ID
EFP8: 1-64
1
This parameter identifies a CoS operation,
and is used to bind a flow to an associated
CoS operation.
EMS6: 1-65535
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
639
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS Type
simple
simple
l If the CoS type of a flow is set to simple,
all the packets in this flow are directly
scheduled to a specified egress queue.
VLAN Priority
IPTOS
l If the CoS type of a flow is set to VLAN
priority, the packets in this flow are
scheduled to specified egress queues
according to the user priorities specified
in the VLAN tags of these packets.
DSCP
l If the CoS type of a flow is set to DSCP,
the packets in this flow are scheduled to
specified egress queues according to
differentiated services code point
(DSCP) in the IPv6 tags of these packets.
l If the CoS type of a flow is set to IP TOS,
the packets in this flow are scheduled to
specified egress queues according to the
TOS values carried in the IPv4 packets.
This CoS type is applicable to IPv4
packets.
CoS parameter
-
-
Displays the CoS parameters corresponding
to different CoS types.
CoS Priority
0-7
-
This parameter determines to which egress
queue a packet is schedule.
l Each Ethernet port on the EFP8/EMS6
board supports eight egress port queues.
Queues 1-8 respectively correspond to
the CoS priorities from 0 to 7.
l Queue 8, with the CoS priority of 7, is as
SP queue. Queues 1-7, with the CoS
priorities from 0 to 6, are WRR queues.
The weighted proportion of these WRR
queues is 1:2:4:8:16:32:64 (from
priority 0 to priority 6). On the EFP8
board, the weighted proportion of these
WRR queues cannot be changed. On the
EMS6 board, the weighted proportion of
these WRR queues can be changed.
l If the traffic shaping feature of some
queues is enabled, bandwidth is
allocated first to the queues whose traffic
shaping feature is enabled based on the
CIR. The remaining bandwidth is
allocated to the eight queues by using the
SP+WRR algorithm.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
640
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.7.4.4 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR/CoS
This section describes the parameters for creating CAR/CoS.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board, and then choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Flow Configuration tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-58 Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Flow Type
-
-
Displays the type of a flow.
VB ID
-
-
Displays the ID of the bridge.
Port
-
-
Displays the port where a flow is to be
created.
C-VLAN
-
-
l Displays the C-VLAN.
l This parameter is valid is Flow Type is
Port+VLAN Flow, Port+CVLAN
+SVLAN Flow, or Port+VLAN
+Priority Flow.
S-VLAN
-
-
l Displays the S-VLAN.
l This parameter is valid when Flow
Type is Port+SVLAN Flow or Port
+CVLAN+SVLAN Flow.
Priority
-
-
l Displays the priority of the flow.
l This parameter is valid when Flow
Type is Port+VLAN+Priority Flow.
Bound CAR
-
None
This parameter indicates the CAR ID
corresponding to a CAR operation.
Different CAR IDs should be bound to
different flows, even though the parameters
of the CAR operations are the same.
Bound CoS
-
None
Indicates the CoS ID that corresponds to a
CoS operation.
A.7.4.5 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Shaping Management of Egress
Queues
This section describes the parameters for shaping management of egress queues.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
641
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the required Ethernet switching board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > QoS Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree.
Click the Port Queue Information tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-59 Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the port name.
Port Queue
-
-
Displays the queue name.
Status
Enabled
Disabled
Indicates whether to enable the traffic
shaping feature of an egress queue.
0
l When the rate of a packet is not more
than the CIR, this packet directly enters
the egress queue.
Disabled
CIR (kbit/s)
EFP8: 0 to 100032,
in steps of 64
EMS6 (FE ports): 0
to 102400, in steps
of 64
l The value of this parameter should not
be more than the PIR.
EMS6 (GE ports): 0
to 1024000, in steps
of 64
DCBS (kbyte)
-
0
Displays the excess burst size.
PIR (kbit/s)
EFP8: 0 to 100032,
in steps of 64
0
l When the rate of a packet is more than
the PIR, the packet that exceeds the rate
restriction is directly discarded. When
the rate of packets is more than the CIR
but not more than the PIR, the packets
that exceed the restriction of the CIR
enter the buffer of the CIR. When the
buffer overflows, the packets are marked
yellow and enter the egress queue, which
enables the packets to be discarded first
in the case of queue congestion.
EMS6 (FE ports): 0
to 102400, in steps
of 64
EMS6 (GE ports): 0
to 1024000, in steps
of 64
l The value of this parameter should not
be more than the port bandwidth.
DMBS (kbyte)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
0
Displays the maximum excess burst size.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
642
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Scheduling Mode
SP
Queue 1: WRR
WRR
Queue 2: WRR
By default, queue 8 (with the CoS priority
of 7) of the EMS6 board is the SP queue, and
queues 1-7 (with the respective CoS priority
of 0-6) are the WRR queues and their
weights are in the proportion of
1:2:8:16:32:64.
Queue 3: WRR
Queue 4: WRR
Queue 5: WRR
Queue 6: WRR
Queue 7: WRR
Queue 8: SP
The scheduling principles of the SP+WRR
are as follows:
l A port immediately transmits the packets
in the SP queue and can transmit the
packets in the WRR queue only when no
packets exist in the SP queue.
l If multiple SP queues exist on a port, the
port compares the SP queues according
to their priorities (queue 8 has the highest
priority and queue 1 has the lowest
priority).
l According to the fixed weight value, you
can allocate the time slice to each WRR
queue. Then, the port transmits the
packets in the corresponding WRR
queue in each time slice. If a WRR queue
in a time slice does not contain any
packets, the WRR queue removes this
time slice and then transmits the packets
in the corresponding WRR queue in the
next time slice.
Weight
An integer ranging
from 1 to 64
Queue 1: 1
Queue 2: 2
Queue 3: 4
Queue 4: 8
By default, queue 8 (with the CoS priority
of 7) of the EMS6 board is the SP queue, and
queues 1-7 (with the respective CoS priority
of 0-6) are the WRR queues and their
weights are 1:2:4:8:16:32:64.
Queue 5: 16
Queue 6: 32
Queue 7: 64
Queue 8: -
A.7.4.6 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Port Shaping
This section describes the parameters associated with egress port shaping management.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
QoS Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree.
Click the Port Shaping tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
643
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-60 Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the port name.
Status
Enabled
Disabled
This parameter specifies whether to enable
the traffic shaping at a port.
0
In the case of an EMS6 board, the PIR of a
port meets the following constraints:
Disabled
PIR (kbit/s)
EMS6 (FE ports): 0
to 102400, in steps
of 64
l The PIR of the port is equal to or more
than the PIR of any queue at this port.
EMS6 (GE ports): 0
to 1024000, in steps
of 64
l The PIR of the port is equal to or more
than the sum of the CIRs of all the queues
at this port.
A.7.5 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards
This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet ports on the EoS/EoPDH plane.
A.7.5.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_External Port
This section describes the parameters for Ethernet external ports.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board and then choose Configuration >
Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Select External Port.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-61 Parameters for the basic attributes
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the name of the external port.
Name
-
-
Displays or specifies the name of the
external port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
644
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
l If the port gains access to services, set
this parameter to Enabled. Otherwise,
set this parameter to Disabled.
Disabled
l If this parameter is set to Enabled for the
port that does not access services, an
ETH_LOS alarm may be generated.
This parameter is invalid for PORT9 on an
EFP8 board.
This parameter is invalid for PORT7 on an
EMS6 board.
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation
EFP8:
l AutoNegotiation
l Different types of Ethernet ports support
different working modes.
l If the opposite port works in autonegotiation mode, set this parameter to
Auto-Negotiation.
l 10M HalfDuplex
l If the opposite port works in full-duplex
mode, set this parameter to 10M FullDuplex or 100M Full-Duplex,
depending on the rate of the opposite
port.
l 10M FullDuplex
l 100M HalfDuplex
l 100M FullDuplex
l If the opposite port works in half-duplex
mode, set this parameter to 10M HalfDuplex or 100M Half-Duplex,
depending on the rate of the opposite
port, or set this parameter to AutoNegotiation.
EMS6:
l AutoNegotiation
l 10M HalfDuplex
l GE optical ports on an EMS6 board
support only Auto-Negotiation and
1000M Full-Duplex modes.
l 10M FullDuplex
l 100M HalfDuplex
NOTE
This parameter is invalid for PORT9 on an EFP8
board.
l 100M FullDuplex
This parameter is invalid for PORT7 on an EMS6
board.
l 1000M FullDuplex
Maximum Frame
Length
EFP8: 1518 to 2000
EMS6: 1518 to 9600
1522
l Set this parameter to a value greater than
the maximum length of all the data
frames to be transmitted.
l The default value is recommended if the
jumbo frame is not considered and the
data frames contain only one layer of
VLAN tags or even no tags. The value of
1526 or greater is recommended if the
data frames contain two layers of tags,
such as QinQ.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
645
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Physical
Parameters
-
-
Displays the actual working status of a
PORT.
This parameter is invalid for PORT9 on an
EFP8 board.
This parameter is invalid for PORT7 on an
EMS6 board.
MAC Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
Loopback
l A MAC loopback is to loop back the
Ethernet frames transmitted to the
opposite port.
l Use the default value unless otherwise
specified.
PHY Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
Loopback
l A PHY loopback is to loop back the
Ethernet physical signals transmitted to
the opposite port.
l Use the default value unless otherwise
specified.
This parameter is invalid for PORT9 on an
EFP8 board.
This parameter is invalid for PORT7 on an
EMS6 board.
Table A-62 Parameters for flow control
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the name of the external port.
NonAutonegotiation
Flow Control
Mode
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter is valid only when
Working Mode is not set to AutoNegotiation.
Enable Symmetric
Flow Control Mode
Send Only
Receive Only
l If this parameter is set to Enable
Symmetric Flow Control Mode, the
port can send PAUSE frames and
process the received PAUSE frames.
l If this parameter is set to Send Only, the
port can send PAUSE frames in the case
of congestion but cannot process the
received PAUSE frames.
l If this parameter is set to Receive Only,
the port can process the received PAUSE
frames but cannot send PAUSE frames
in the case of congestion.
l Set this parameter to the same as the nonautonegotiation flow control mode of the
opposite port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
646
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Autonegotiation
Flow Control
Mode
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter is valid only when
Working Mode is Auto-Negotiation.
Enable
Dissymmetric Flow
Control
l If this parameter is set to Enable
Symmetric Control, the port can send
PAUSE frames and process the received
PAUSE frames.
Enable Symmetric
Control
l If this parameter is set to Enable
Dissymmetric Flow Control, the port
can send PAUSE frames in the case of
congestion but cannot process the
received PAUSE frames.
Enable Symmetric/
Dissymmetric Flow
Control
l If this parameter is set to Enable
Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow
Control, the port can function as
follows:
– Sends and processes PAUSE frames.
– Sends but does not process PAUSE
frames.
– Processes but does not send PAUSE
frames.
l Set this parameter according to the
autonegotiation flow control mode of the
opposite port.
This parameter is invalid for PORT9 on an
EFP8 board.
This parameter is invalid for PORT7 on an
EMS6 board.
Table A-63 Parameters for the tag attributes
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the name of the external port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
647
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
TAG
Tag Aware
Tag Aware
l With different tag attributes, the port
processes frames in different modes. For
details, see Table A-66.
Access
Hybrid
l Set this parameter to Tag Aware if the
port processes the frames with VLAN
tags (or tagged frames).
l Set this parameter to Access if the port
processes the frames without VLAN tags
(or untagged frames).
l Set this parameter to Hybrid if the port
processes the tagged frames and
untagged frames.
Default VLAN ID
1-4095
1
l This parameter is valid only when
TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.
l For the usage of this parameter, see
Table A-66.
l Set this parameter as required.
VLAN Priority
0-7
0
l This parameter is valid only when
TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.
l For the usage of this parameter, see
Table A-66.
l When the VLAN priority is required for
traffic classification or other purposes,
set this parameter as required. Use the
default value unless otherwise specified.
Entry Detection
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
l Indicates whether to check the incoming
packets according to the tag attribute.
l Set this parameter as required.
Table A-64 Parameters for the network attributes
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the name of the external port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
648
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Attributes
UNI
UNI
l If this parameter is set to UNI, the port
processes data frames according to the
tag attribute.
C-Aware
S-Aware
l If this parameter is set to C-Aware or SAware, the port processes the data
frames by using the processing method
of QinQ services.
l Set this parameter to C-Aware or SAware when the port processes QinQ
services. Otherwise, this parameter takes
the default value.
Table A-65 Parameters for the advanced attributes
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the name of the external port.
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Disabled
Disabled
This parameter specifies whether to restrict
the traffic of broadcast packets according to
the proportion of the broadcast packets to
the total packets. Set this parameter to
Enabled when a broadcast storm may occur
at the opposite port.
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Threshold
10%-100%
30%
When the proportion of the received
broadcast packets to the total packets
crosses the threshold, the port discards the
received broadcast packets. Set this
parameter to a value greater than the
proportion when no broadcast storm occurs.
The value of 30% or greater is
recommended.
Traffic Threshold
(Mbit/s)
EFP8:
-
Specifies the traffic threshold of the port.
You can specify the traffic monitoring
period by setting Port Traffic Threshold
Time Window(Min).
Enabled
l 0 to 100 (PORT1
to PORT8)
l 0 to 1000
(PORT9)
EMS6:
l 0 to 1000
(PORT1 and
PORT2)
l 0 to 100 (PORT3
to PORT6)
l 0 to 1000
(PORT7)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
649
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Traffic
Threshold Time
Window(Min)
0-30
0
Specifies the traffic monitoring period.
l If Port Traffic Threshold Time
Window(Min) is set to 0, an associated
alarm is reported at the moment when the
traffic received at the port crosses the
value of Traffic Threshold(Mbit/s).
l If the Port Traffic Threshold Time
Window(Min) is set to a value other
than 0, an associated alarm is reported
only when the traffic received at the port
always crosses the value of Traffic
Threshold(Mbit/s) in the monitoring
period.
Loop Detection
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
This parameter specifies whether to enable
loop detection, which is used to check
whether a loop exists on the port.
Table A-66 Methods used by ports to process data frames
Direction
Ingress port
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
Receives the frame.
Discards the frame.
Receives the frame.
Untagged frame
Discards the frame.
The port receives the
frame after adding to
the frame the VLAN
tag that contains
Default VLAN ID
and VLAN
Priority.
The port receives the
frame after adding to
the frame the VLAN
tag that contains
Default VLAN ID
and VLAN
Priority.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
650
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Direction
Egress port
A Parameters Description
Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
Transmits the frame.
The port strips the
VLAN tag from the
frame and then
transmits the frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
Default VLAN
ID, the port
strips the VLAN
tag from the
frame and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
not Default
VLAN ID, the
port directly
transmits the
frame.
A.7.5.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Internal Port
This section describes the parameters for Ethernet internal ports.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board and then choose Configuration >
Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Select Internal Port.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-67 Parameters for the tag attributes
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the name of the internal port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
651
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
TAG
Tag Aware
Tag Aware
l With different tag attributes, the port
processes frames in different modes. For
details, see Table A-72.
Access
Hybrid
l Set this parameter to Tag Aware if the
port processes the frames with VLAN
tags (or tagged frames).
l Set this parameter to Access if the port
processes the frames without VLAN tags
(or untagged frames).
l Set this parameter to Hybrid if the port
processes the tagged frames and
untagged frames.
Default VLAN ID
1-4095
1
l This parameter is valid only when
TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.
l For the usage of this parameter, see
Table A-72.
l Set this parameter as required.
VLAN Priority
0-7
0
l This parameter is valid only when
TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.
l For the usage of this parameter, refer to
Table A-72.
l When the VLAN priority is required for
traffic classification or other purposes,
set this parameter as required. The
default value is recommended unless
otherwise specified.
Entry Detection
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
l Indicates whether to check the incoming
packets according to the tag attribute.
l Set this parameter as required.
Table A-68 Parameters for encapsulation or mapping
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the name of the internal port.
Mapping Protocol
GFP
GFP
The default value is recommended.
HDLC
The EFP8 board supports GFP only.
LAPS
Scramble
Scrambling Mode
[X43+1]
Unscrambled
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Scrambling Mode
[X43+1]
l Indicates the scrambling polynomial
used by the mapping protocol.
l The default value is recommended.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
652
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Set Inverse Value
for CRC
-
-
l This parameter indicates whether the
value of the CRC field defined in the
LAPS or HDLC encapsulation frame
format will be reversed. This means that
this parameter takes effect only if
Mapping Protocol is set to LAPS or
HDLC.
l Set Set Inverse Value for CRC to the
same value for the VCTRUNKs at both
ends.
Check Field
Length
FCS32
FCS32
No
l When the Ethernet board uses the GFP
mapping protocol, set this parameter to
FCS32 or No.
l When you set this parameter to FCS32,
a 32-bit FCS is used.
l The default value is recommended.
FCS Calculated Bit
Sequence
Big endian
Big endian
Little endian
l When you set this parameter to Big
endian, the least significant byte of the
FCS is placed first and the most
significant byte is placed last.
l When you set this parameter to Little
endian, the most significant byte of the
FCS is placed first and the least
significant byte is placed last.
l The default value is recommended.
Table A-69 Parameters for the network attributes
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the name of the internal port.
Port Attributes
UNI
UNI
l If this parameter is set to UNI, the port
processes data frames according to the
tag attribute.
C-Aware
S-Aware
l If this parameter is set to C-Aware or SAware, the port processes the data
frames by using the processing method
of QinQ services.
l Set this parameter to C-Aware or SAware when the port processes QinQ
services. Otherwise, this parameter takes
the default value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
653
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Table A-70 Parameters for the LCAS
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
-
-
Displays the name of the internal port.
Enabling LCAS
Disabled
Disabled
l Indicates whether to enable the LCAS
function.
Enabled
l The LCAS can dynamically adjust the
number of virtual containers for
mapping required services to meet the
bandwidth needs of the applications. As
a result, the bandwidth utilization is
improved.
LCAS Mode
Huawei Mode
Huawei Mode
Standard Mode
l Indicates the sequence in which the
LCAS sink sends the MST control
packet and Rs-Ack control packet.
l When you set this parameter to Huawei
Mode, the LCAS sink first sends the RsAck and then sends the MST.
l When you set this parameter to
Standard Mode, the LCAS sink first
sends the MST and then sends the RsAck.
l If the equipment at the opposite end is
the third-party equipment and does not
support the Huawei mode, set this
parameter to Standard Mode.
Otherwise, set this parameter to Huawei
Mode.
Hold Off Time(ms)
An integer ranging
from 0, 2000 to
10000, in the
increments of 100
2000
l When a member link is faulty, the LCAS
performs switching after a delay of time
to prevent the situation where an NE
simultaneously performs a protection
switching such as SNCP and performs an
LCAS switching. This parameter
specifies the duration of the delay.
l The default value is recommended.
WTR Time(s)
0-720
300
l When the time after a member link is
restored to normal reaches the specified
value of this parameter, the VCG uses
the restored member link.
l The default value is recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
654
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
TSD
Disabled
Disabled
l Indicates whether the TSD is used as a
condition for determining whether a
member link is faulty. In the case of the
VC-12, the TSD refers to the BIP_SD.
In the case of the VC-3, the TSD refers
to the B3_SD_VC3.
Enabled
l The default value is recommended.
Min. MembersTransmit Direction
2-256
16
l Specifies the minimum number of
members in the transmit direction. After
the LCAS is enabled, the LCAS_PLCT
alarm is reported when the number of
effective members in the transmit
direction becomes lower than the
minimum number specified by this
parameter.
l The default value is recommended.
Mini. MembersReceive Direction
2-256
16
l Specifies the minimum number of
members in the receive direction. After
the LCAS is enabled, the LCAS_PLCT
alarm is reported when the number of
effective members in the receive
direction becomes lower than the
minimum number specified by this
parameter.
l The default value is recommended.
Table A-71 Parameters for bound paths
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Configurable
Ports
EFP8:
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16
VCTRUNK1
Specifies the VCTRUNK to bind paths.
-
Displays the level of the bound VC path.
EMS6:
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK8
Level
-
In the case of the EFP8 board, this parameter
always takes the value of VC12-Xv.
Service Direction
Bidirectional
Uplink
Downlink
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Bidirectional
l Specifies the direction of the bound path.
l Set this parameter to Bidirectional
unless otherwise specified.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
655
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Available
Resources
-
-
l Displays the available VC4 paths.
l In the case of the EFP8 board, this
parameter always takes the value of
VC4-1.
l For EMS6 boards, when a VCTRUNK
needs to bind VC-12 paths, select VC-12
paths only in VC-4-4s.
Available
Timeslots
-
-
Specifies the available timeslots.
Bound Path
-
-
You need to plan and set this parameter
according to the following principles:
l The capacity of the VCTRUNK is
determined by the actual bandwidth
required by the services.
l The EFP8 board supports 16
VCTRUNKs. Each VCTRUNK can
bind a maximum of 16 VC-12 paths and
the total number of bound VC-12 paths
cannot exceed 63.
l For EMS6 boards, their VCTRUNKs 1-7
each support a maximum bandwidth of
100 Mbit/s. If a bandwidth higher than
100 Mbit/s is required, VCTRUNK8 is
recommended.
Number of Bound
Paths
-
-
Displays the number of the bound VC path.
Activation Status
-
-
Displays the activation status of the bound
VC path.
Table A-72 Methods used by ports to process data frames
Direction
Ingress port
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
Receives the frame.
Discards the frame.
Receives the frame.
Untagged frame
Discards the frame.
The port receives the
frame after adding to
the frame the VLAN
tag that contains
Default VLAN ID
and VLAN
Priority.
The port receives the
frame after adding to
the frame the VLAN
tag that contains
Default VLAN ID
and VLAN
Priority.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
656
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
Direction
Egress port
A Parameters Description
Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
Transmits the frame.
The port strips the
VLAN tag from the
frame and then
transmits the frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
Default VLAN
ID, the port
strips the VLAN
tag from the
frame and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
not Default
VLAN ID, the
port directly
transmits the
frame.
A.7.5.3 Parameter Description: Type Field of QinQ Frames
This section describes the parameters for setting the type field of QinQ frames.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Advance Attribute > QinQ Type Area Settings from the Function Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-73 Parameters on the main interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
-
-
Displays the Ethernet board on which the
type field of QinQ frames needs to be set.
If the Ethernet board is the EFP8 board, this
parameter always takes the value of EFP8.
If the Ethernet board is the EMS6 board, this
parameter always takes the value of EMS6.
QinQ Type Area
(Hexadecimal)
81 00
8100
88 A8
91 00
Specifies the type field of QinQ frames. Set
this parameter according to the type field of
the accessed QinQ frames.
0600 to FFFF
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
657
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.8 RMON Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances.
A.8.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON statistics groups.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Statistics Group tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
-
-
This parameter specifies the object to be
monitored.
Sampling Period
5 to 150
5
This parameter specifies the duration of the
monitoring period.
Display
Accumulated
Value
Selected
Deselected
l This parameter specifies the method of
displaying the performance events.
Deselected
l If this parameter is not selected, the
displayed value is an increment
compared to the value that is collected in
last sampling period and stored in the
register.
l If this parameter is selected, the
displayed value is an absolute value that
is currently stored in the register.
Display Mode
Graphics
List
List
l This parameter specifies the method of
displaying the performance events.
l If this parameter is set to Graphics, the
number of performance events to be
monitored at each time cannot be more
than 10, and the unit should be the same.
Legend
Color
Description
-
l This parameter indicates the description
of different colors.
l This parameter is valid only when
Display Mode is set to Graphics.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
658
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Event
-
-
l This parameter indicates the queried
performance events.
l This parameter is valid only when
Display Mode is set to List.
A.8.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history groups.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the History Group tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
-
-
The parameter indicates the object to be
monitored.
Ended from/to
-
-
This parameter specifies the start time and
end time of the monitoring period.
History Table
Type
30-Second
30-Second
This parameter specifies the monitoring
period.
List
l This parameter specifies the method of
displaying the performance events.
30-Minute
Custom Period 1
Custom Period 2
Display Mode
Graphics
List
l If this parameter is set to Graphics, the
number of performance events to be
monitored at each time cannot be more
than 10, and the unit should be the same.
Legend
Color
-
Description
l This parameter indicates the description
of different colors.
l This parameter is valid only when
Display Mode is set to Graphics.
Event
-
-
l This parameter indicates the queried
performance events.
l This parameter is valid only when
Display Mode is set to List.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
659
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Statistical Item
-
-
This parameter indicates the performance
items to be monitored.
Statistical Value
-
-
This parameter indicates the statistical value
of the monitored performance items.
Time Flag
-
-
This parameter indicates the time point of
each performance event.
A.8.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control
Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history control groups.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON History
Control Group.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
30-Second
Enabled
Disabled
This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable the 30-Second
monitoring function.
Enabled
This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable the 30-Minute
monitoring function.
Disabled
This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable Custom Period 1.
Disabled
This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable Custom Period 2.
300 to 43200
(Custom Period 1)
900(Custom Period
1)
300 to 86400
(Custom Period 2)
86400(Custom
Period 2)
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
monitoring period in Custom Period 1
and Custom Period 2.
History Register
Count
1 to 50
16
RMON Monitor
Start Time
-
Disabled
30-Minute
Enabled
Disabled
Custom Period 1
Enabled
Disabled
Custom Period 2
Enabled
Disabled
Period Length(s)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
6(Custom Period 2)
-
l The value must be an integer multiple of
30.
This parameter indicates or specifies the
quantity of the history registers.
This parameter specifies the RMON start
time.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
660
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
A.8.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON setting.
Navigation Path
l
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
l
Click the RMON Setting tab.
Object Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
-
-
This parameter indicates the object to be
collected.
30-Second
Enabled
-
This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable the 30-Second
monitoring function.
Disabled
NOTE
In the case of Object, 30-Second cannot be set.
30-Minute
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable the 30-Minute
monitoring function.
l In RMON History Control Group of
the NE, if 30-Minute is set to Disabled,
Not Supported is displayed for this
parameter.
Custom Period 1
Enabled
-
Disabled
l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable the monitoring
function based on Custom Period 1.
l In RMON History Control Group of
the NE, if Custom Period 1 is set to
Disabled, Not Supported is displayed
for this parameter.
Custom Period 2
Enabled
Disabled
-
l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable the monitoring
function based on Custom Period 2.
l In RMON History Control Group of
the NE, if Custom Period 2 is set to
Disabled, Not Supported is displayed
for this parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
661
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Event Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Event
-
-
This parameter indicates the performance
event to be monitored.
30-Second
Enabled
Disabled
This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable the monitoring function
based on 30-Second.
-
This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable the 30-Minute
monitoring function.
Disabled
This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable the monitoring function
based on Custom Period 1Custom Period
1 Monitor.
Disabled
This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable the monitoring function
based on Custom Period 2Custom Period
2 Monitor.
Report All
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
threshold detection method.
Disabled
30-Minute
Enabled
Disabled
Custom Period 1
Enabled
Disabled
Custom Period 2
Enabled
Disabled
Threshold Detect
Report All
Do Not Detect
l If the number of detected events reaches
the preset threshold, the events are
reported to the NMS. Otherwise, the
events are not reported to the NMS.
Report Only the
Upper Threshold
Report Only the
Lower Threshold
l If an event does not support this
parameter, Not Supported is displayed.
Upper Threshold
-
-
This parameter indicates or specifies the
upper threshold. If the number of
performance events exceeds the preset
upper threshold, the corresponding
performance events are reported.
Lower Threshold
-
-
This parameter indicates or specifies the
lower threshold. If the number of
performance events is less than the preset
lower threshold, the corresponding
performance events are reported.
Threshold Unit
-
-
This parameter indicates the unit of each
threshold of the performance events.
A.9 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services
This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS/PWE3 services.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
662
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
NOTE
For parameters for PW-carried E-Line services, see A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet
Features on the Packet Plane.
A.9.1 MPLS Tunnel Parameters
This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS tunnels.
A.9.1.1 Parameter Description: Basic Configurations of MPLS Tunnels
This topic describes parameters that are related to the basic configurations of MPLS tunnels.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
MPLS Management > Basic Configuration from the Function Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LSR ID
-
0.0.0.0
l Specifies or displays
the LSR ID of an NE.
On a PSN, each NE is
assigned a unique LSR
ID.
l This parameter must
be set in IPv4 address
format.
Start of Global Label
Space
0-1015808
0
l Specifies the start
value of a global label
space. The OptiX RTN
950 supports a step of
2048.
l The start value of a
global label space is
the smallest unicast
tunnel label. When
Start of Global Label
Space is 0, the smallest
unicast tunnel label is
16, with values 0 to 15
reserved.
l On an MPLS-enabled
network, global label
spaces of NEs are
recommended to
overlap each other if
possible.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
663
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Global Label Space Size
-
-
Displays the size of a
global label space.
Start of Multicast Label
Space
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this parameter.
A.9.1.2 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Static Tunnel
This topic describes parameters that are related to static tunnels.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function
Tree.
2.
Click the Static Tunnel tab.
3.
Click Query.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ID
-
-
Displays the tunnel ID.
Name
-
-
Specifies or displays the
customized tunnel name.
Enable State
Enabled
Enabled
l Specifies or displays
whether a tunnel is
enabled.
Disabled
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports only the value
Enabled.
Node Type
-
-
l Displays the node type.
l For bidirectional
tunnels, this parameter
displays the node types
of forward tunnels.
Direction
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Displays the direction of a
tunnel.
664
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CIR(kbit/s)
No Limit
-
l Specifies or displays
the committed
information rate (CIR)
of a tunnel.
1024-1024000
l Generally, it is
recommended that you
set this parameter to No
Limit. If you need to
enable the CES CAC
function or limit the
PW bandwidth, set this
parameter to be the
same as the planned
tunnel bandwidth.
PIR(kbit/s)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this parameter.
CBS(byte)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this parameter.
PBS(byte)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this parameter.
Bandwidth Remaining
(kbit/s)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this parameter.
In Port
-
-
Displays the ingress port
of a forward tunnel, which
is also the egress port of
the mapping reverse
tunnel.
Forward In Label
-
-
Displays the MPLS label
that a forward tunnel
carries when entering a
node.
Reverse Out Label
-
-
Specifies the MPLS label
that a reverse tunnel
carries when entering a
tunnel.
Out Port
-
-
Displays the egress port of
a forward tunnel, which is
also the ingress port of the
mapping reverse tunnel.
Forward Out Label
-
-
Displays the MPLS label
that a forward tunnel
carries when leaving a
node.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
665
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Reverse In Label
-
-
Displays the MPLS label
that a reverse tunnel
carries when leaving a
node.
Forward Next Hop
Address
-
-
Displays the IP address of
the next-hop port of a
forward tunnel.
Reverse Next Hop
Address
-
-
Displays the IP address of
the next-hop port of a
reverse tunnel.
Source Node
-
-
Displays the LSR ID of the
ingress node.
Sink Node
-
-
Displays the LSR ID of the
egress node.
Tunnel Type
-
-
Displays the tunnel type.
EXP
0-7
-
l Specifies or displays
the value of the EXP
field in the packets
transmitted through
MPLS tunnels.
None
l For unidirectional
tunnels, this parameter
is available only if
Node Type is Ingress.
l For bidirectional
tunnels, this parameter
cannot be set if Node
Type is Transit.
l If this parameter is set
to a value from 0 to 7,
the EXP field takes its
fixed value.
l If this parameter takes
its default value None,
the EXP field varies
based on the DiffServ
mappings.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
666
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LSP Mode
Pipe
-
l Displays or specifies
the LSP mode.
l Pipe: When stripping
MPLS tunnel labels
from packets, an egress
node does not update
the scheduling priority
for the packets.
l For bidirectional
tunnels, this parameter
is available only if
Node Type is Egress.
l For bidirectional
tunnels, this parameter
cannot be set if Node
Type is Transit.
NOTE
On the OptiX RTN 950, this
parameter can be set to
Pipe only.
MTU(byte)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this parameter.
Protection Group
-
-
Displays the MPLS APS
protection group to which
a tunnel belongs.
VLAN ID
-
-
l Specifies or displays
the VLAN ID that
Ethernet packets carry
when transmitted over
MPLS tunnels.
l If packets need to
traverse a Layer 2
network, set the VLAN
ID for the tunnel
carried by the NNI port
according to the
VLAN planning
requirements on the
Layer 2 network.
l Set this parameter to
the same value for both
ends of a tunnel.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
667
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS
CS7
-
l This parameter
specifies the PHB
service class of an LLSP, if the type of an
MPLS tunnel is L-LSP.
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
l CS6-CS7: indicates the
highest service grade,
which is mainly
involved in signaling
transmission.
AF2
AF1
BE
l EF: indicates fast
forwarding. This
service class is
applicable to the traffic
whose delay is small
and packet loss ratio is
low, for example,
voice and video
services.
l AF1-AF4: indicates
assured forwarding.
This service class is
applicable to the traffic
that requires rate
guarantee but does not
require delay or jitter
limit.
l BE: indicates that the
traffic is forwarded in
best-effort manner
without special
processing.
Deployment
-
-
Displays the deployment
status of the tunnel.
A.9.1.3 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of
Unidirectional Tunnels
This topic describes parameters that are used for creating unidirectional tunnels.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function
Tree.
2.
Click the Static Tunnel tab.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
668
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
3.
A Parameters Description
Click New and choose Unidirectional Tunnel from the drop-down list.
The New Unicast Unidirectional Tunnel dialog box is displayed.
4.
Select New Reverse Tunnel.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel ID
1-65535
-
l Specifies the tunnel ID.
l The total number of tunnels and PWs
must be equal to or less than 1024. The
number of tunnels that carry PWs is not
included in the total.
NOTE
If you select New Reverse Tunnel, set forward
tunnel IDs and reverse tunnel IDs respectively.
Tunnel Name
-
-
Specifies the tunnel name.
Node Type
Ingress
Ingress
Specifies the node type of a forward tunnel.
Egress
Transit
Direction
-
-
Indicates the direction of a tunnel.
CIR(kbit/s)
No Limit
No Limit
l Specifies the committed information rate
(CIR) of a tunnel.
1024-1024000
l Generally, it is recommended that you set
this parameter to No Limit. If you need
to enable the CES CAC function or limit
the tunnel bandwidth, set this parameter
to be the same as the planned tunnel
bandwidth.
CBS(kbit/s)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
PIR(Byte)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
PBS(Byte)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
In Board/Logic
Interface Type
-
-
Specifies the MPLS port at the ingress
direction of a forward tunnel on a transit or
egress node.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
669
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
In Port
-
-
NOTE
l If the MPLS port is an FE/GE port, ensure
that:
l The Port Mode parameter of the MPLS
port is set to Layer 3 according to Setting
the General Attributes of Ethernet Ports.
l The Enable Tunnel, Specify IP
Address, andIP Address parameters of
the MPLS port are set to the values
specified in the network plan according to
Setting Layer 3 Attributes of Ethernet
Ports.
l If the MPLS port is an IF_ETH port, ensure
that:
l The Port Mode parameter of the MPLS
port is set to Layer 3 according to Setting
the General Attributes of IF_ETH Ports.
l The Enable Tunnel, Specify IP
Address, and IP Address parameters of
the MPLS port are set to the values
specified in the network plan according to
Setting Layer 3 Attributes of IF_ETH
Ports.
In Label
16-1048575
-
Specifies the MPLS label at the ingress
direction of a forward tunnel on a transit or
egress node.
Out Board/Logic
Interface Type
-
-
Out Port
-
-
Specifies the MPLS port at the egress
direction of a forward tunnel on an ingress or
transit node.
Out Label
16-1048575
-
Specifies the MPLS label at the egress
direction of a forward tunnel on an ingress or
transit node.
Next Hop Address
-
-
l The Next Hop Address parameter needs
to be set only for the egress port on an
ingress or transit node.
NOTE
The method and prerequisites for setting
parameters of the MPLS port at the egress
direction of a forward tunnel are the same as those
on the ingress direction.
l Set the IP address of the MPLS ingress
port on the next hop LSR node to Next
Hop Address according to the network
plan.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
670
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Node
-
-
l The Source Node parameter needs to be
set only on an egress or transit node.
l Set the LSR ID for the last hop MPLS
node to Source Node according to the
network plan.
Sink Node
-
-
l The Sink Node parameter needs to be set
only on an ingress or transit node.
l Set the LSR ID for the next hop MPLS
node to Sink Node according to the
network plan.
Tunnel Type
E-LSP
E-LSP
L-LSP
l Specifies the tunnel type.
l The value E-LSP indicates that the EXP
field is used to identify packet scheduling
priorities of PWs. An E-LSP tunnel can
contain PWs of eight packet scheduling
priorities.
l The value L-LSP indicates that the
MPLS label value is used to identify
packet scheduling priorities of PWs. An
L-LSP tunnel can contain PWs of the
same packet scheduling priority.
EXP
0-7
None
None
l Specifies the value of the EXP field in the
packets transmitted through MPLS
tunnels.
l This parameter is available only if Node
Type is Ingress.
l If this parameter is set to a value from 0
to 7, the EXP field takes its fixed value.
l If this parameter takes its default value
None, the EXP field is set based on the
DiffServ mappings.
LSP Mode
Pipe
Pipe
l Pipe: When stripping MPLS tunnel
labels from packets, an egress node does
not update the scheduling priority for the
packets.
l This parameter is available only if Node
Type is Egress.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 supports only the value
Pipe.
MTU
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
671
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS
CS7
BE
l This parameter specifies the PHB service
class of an L-LSP, if the type of an MPLS
tunnel is L-LSP.
CS6
EF
l CS6-CS7: indicates the highest service
grade, which is mainly involved in
signaling transmission.
AF4
AF3
AF2
l EF: indicates fast forwarding. This
service class is applicable to the traffic
whose delay is small and packet loss ratio
is low, for example, voice and video
services.
AF1
BE
l AF1-AF4: indicates assured forwarding.
This service class is applicable to the
traffic that requires rate guarantee but
does not require delay or jitter limit.
l BE: indicates that the traffic is forwarded
in best-effort manner without special
processing.
A.9.1.4 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of
Bidirectional Tunnels
This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating bidirectional tunnels.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function
Tree.
2.
Click the Static Tunnel tab.
3.
Click New and choose Bidirectional Tunnel from the drop-down list.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel ID
1 to 65535
-
l Specifies the tunnel ID.
l The total number of tunnels and PWs
must be equal to or less than 1024.
The number of tunnels that carry
PWs is not included in the total.
Tunnel Name
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
-
-
Specifies the tunnel name.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
672
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Node Type
Ingress
Ingress
Specifies the node type of a forward
tunnel.
Egress
Transit
Direction
-
-
Indicates the direction of a tunnel.
CIR(kbit/s)
No Limit
No Limit
l Specifies the committed information
rate (CIR) of a tunnel.
1024-1024000
l Generally, it is recommended that
you set this parameter to No Limit.
If you need to enable the CES CAC
function or limit the PW bandwidth,
set this parameter to be the same as
the planned tunnel bandwidth.
CBS(kbit/s)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support
this parameter.
PIR(Byte)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support
this parameter.
PBS(Byte)
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support
this parameter.
In Board/Logic
Interface Type
-
-
In Port
-
-
Specifies the MPLS port at the ingress
direction of a forward tunnel on a transit
or egress node.
NOTE
l If the MPLS port is an FE/GE port,
ensure that:
l The Port Mode parameter of the
MPLS port is set to Layer 3
according to Setting the General
Attributes of Ethernet Ports.
l The Enable Tunnel, Specify IP
Address, and IP Address
parameters of the MPLS port are set
to the values specified in the
network plan according to Setting
Layer 3 Attributes of Ethernet Ports.
l If the MPLS port is an IF_ETH port,
ensure that:
l The Port Mode parameter of the
MPLS port is set to Layer 3
according to Setting the General
Attributes of IF_ETH Ports.
l The Enable Tunnel, Specify IP
Address, and IP Address
parameters of the MPLS port are set
to the values specified in the
network plan according to Setting
Layer 3 Attributes of IF_ETH Ports.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
673
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Forward In Label
16 to 1048575
-
Specifies the MPLS label at the ingress
direction of a forward tunnel on a transit
or egress node.
Reverse Out Label
16 to 1048575
-
l Specifies the MPLS label at the
egress direction of a reverse tunnel
on a transit or egress node.
l Reverse Out Label and Forward
In Label can be set to either the same
value or different values.
Out Board/Logic
Interface Type
-
-
Specifies the MPLS port at the egress
direction of a forward tunnel on an
ingress or transit node.
Out Port
-
-
Forward Out Label
16 to 1048575
-
Specifies the MPLS label at the egress
direction of a forward tunnel on an
ingress or transit node.
Reverse In Label
16 to 1048575
-
l Specifies the MPLS label at the
ingress direction of a reverse tunnel
on an ingress or transit node.
NOTE
The method and prerequisites for setting
parameters of the MPLS port at the egress
direction of a forward tunnel are the same as
those on the ingress direction.
l The Reverse In Label and Forward
Out Label parameters can be set to
either the same value or different
values.
Forward Next Hop
Address
-
-
l The Forward Next Hop Address
parameter needs to be set only for the
egress port on an ingress or transit
node.
l Set the IP address of the MPLS
ingress port on the next hop LSR
node to Forward Next Hop
Address according to the network
plan.
Reverse Next Hop
Address
-
-
l The Reverse Next Hop Address
parameter needs to be set only for the
ingress port on a transit or egress
node.
l Set the IP address of the MPLS
ingress port on the next hop LSR
node to Reverse Next Hop
Address according to the network
plan.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
674
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Node
-
-
l The Source Node parameter needs
to be set only on an egress or transit
node.
l Set the LSR ID for the last hop
MPLS node to Source Node
according to the network plan.
Sink Node
-
-
l The Sink Node parameter needs to
be set only on an ingress or transit
node.
l Set the LSR ID for the next hop
MPLS node to Sink Node according
to the network plan.
Tunnel Type
E-LSP
E-LSP
L-LSP
l Specifies the tunnel type.
l The value E-LSP indicates that the
EXP field is used to identify packet
scheduling priorities of PWs. An ELSP tunnel can contain PWs of eight
packet scheduling priorities.
l The value L-LSP indicates that the
MPLS label value is used to identify
packet scheduling priorities of PWs.
An L-LSP tunnel can contain PWs of
the same packet scheduling priority.
EXP
0 to 7
None
None
l Specifies the value of the EXP field
in the packets transmitted through
MPLS tunnels.
l This parameter cannot be set if Node
Type is Transit.
l If this parameter is set to a value
from 0 to 7, the EXP field takes its
fixed value.
l If this parameter takes its default
value None, the EXP field is set
based on the DiffServ mappings.
LSP Mode
Pipe
Pipe
l Pipe: When stripping MPLS tunnel
labels from packets, an egress node
does not update the scheduling
priority for the packets.
l This parameter cannot be set if Node
Type is Transit.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 supports only the value
Pipe.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
675
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MTU
-
-
The OptiX RTN 950 does not support
this parameter.
CoS
CS7
BE
l This parameter specifies the PHB
service class of an L-LSP, if the type
of an MPLS tunnel is L-LSP.
CS6
EF
l CS6-CS7: indicates the highest
service grade, which is mainly
involved in signaling transmission.
AF4
AF3
AF2
l EF: indicates fast forwarding. This
service class is applicable to the
traffic whose delay is small and
packet loss ratio is low, for example,
voice and video services.
AF1
BE
l AF1-AF4: indicates assured
forwarding. This service class is
applicable to the traffic that requires
rate guarantee but does not require
delay or jitter limit.
l BE: indicates that the traffic is
forwarded in best-effort manner
without special processing.
A.9.1.5 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_OAM Parameters
This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS OAM.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function
Tree.
2.
Click the OAM Parameter tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel ID
-
-
Displays the tunnel ID.
Tunnel Name
-
-
Displays the tunnel name.
Node Type
-
-
l Displays the node type.
l For bidirectional
tunnels, this parameter
displays the node types
of forward tunnels.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
676
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel Direction
-
-
Displays the direction of a
tunnel.
OAM Status
Enabled
Disabled
l Specifies or displays
whether the local node
can perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
Disabled
l If OAM Status is
Enabled, the local NE
can perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
l If OAM Status is
Disabled, the local NE
cannot perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
l If MPLS APS
protection needs to be
configured or a CC test
needs to be performed
for the tunnel, OAM
Status needs to be set
to Enabled.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
677
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Detection Mode
Auto-Sensing
Auto-Sensing
l Specifies or displays
the MPLS OAM
detection mode.
Manual
l Manual: During a CC
test, MPLS OAM
packets are sent at the
interval specified by
the user.
l Auto-Sensing: During
a CC test, MPLS OAM
packets are sent at the
interval for receiving
MPLS OAM packets.
l For a unidirectional
tunnel, this parameter
can be set for its egress
node only.
l For a bidirectional
tunnel, if Detection
Mode is set to
Manual, you need to
set the MPLS OAM
detection packets to be
received and
transmitted.
l Generally, the value
Auto-Sensing is
recommended.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
678
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Detection Packet Type
CV
CV
l CV: The detection
packets are sent at a
fixed interval.
FFD
l FFD: The detection
packets are sent at the
interval specified by
the user.
l For the egress node of
a unidirectional tunnel,
if Detection Mode is
set to Manual, this
parameter specifies the
type of MPLS OAM
detection packets to be
received.
l For a bidirectional
tunnel, if Detection
Mode is set to AutoSensing, this
parameter specifies the
type of MPLS OAM
detection packets to be
transmitted.
l For a bidirectional
tunnel, if Detection
Mode is set to
Manual, this
parameter specifies the
types of MPLS OAM
detection packets to be
received and
transmitted.
l The value FFD is
assumed for MPLS
APS and the value
CV is assumed for
continuous
connectivity check on
MPLS tunnels.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
679
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Detection Packet Period
(ms)
3.3
50
l Displays or specifies
the OAM detection
period.
10
20
l This parameter is
available only when
Detection Packet
Type is FFD. It takes
its fixed value of 1000
ms when Detection
Packet Type is CV.
50
100
200
500
l Set this parameter to
3.3 for MPLS APS
usually. If the packet
transmission delay
time of an MPLS
tunnel exceeds 3.3 ms,
the transmission
interval of FFD
packets needs to be a
value greater than the
delay time.
Reverse Tunnel
-
-
l Specifies the mapping
reverse tunnel of a
forward tunnel.
l For a bidirectional
tunnel, this parameter
cannot be set.
CV/FFD Status
-
-
Displays whether CV/
FFD is enabled.
LSP Status
-
-
Displays whether an LSP
is available.
LSP Defect Type
-
-
Displays the LSP defect
type.
Disable LSP Duration
(ms)
-
-
Displays the duration
when an LSP is
unavailable.
LSP Defect Location
-
-
Displays the LSR ID of a
node where LSP defects
are detected.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
680
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
IDU Hardware Description
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
SD Threshold
0-100
0
l Specifies or displays
the SD threshold.
When the OAM packet
loss ratio is higher than
the parameter value,
the corresponding
alarm is reported.
l For a unidirectional
tunnel, this parame